JP7737726B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In conventional gaming machines, players are awarded gaming value based on the results of their play, and can use the gaming value to fire gaming media and play games.

Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a control means that stores the game value owned by the player in a storage means and updates the game value as the game progresses (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-104306

However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was room for improvement in the control processing related to the gaming value owned by the player.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can optimally perform control processing related to the gaming value owned by the player.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, a gaming machine capable of communicating with a gaming device and enabling a player to play a game by using game value owned by the player to fire game media comprises: a firing means for firing the game media into a game area; a circulation means for circulating the game media fired by the firing means within the gaming machine; a first control means for storing the game value in a storage means and controlling the update of the game value; and a second control means for controlling presentations related to the game, wherein the first control means updates specific information according to the value amount of the game value given to the player and can stop control of the progress of the game when the specific information reaches a specific value, and the first control means performs a media discharge process for shifting to a media discharge mode for discharging the game media circulated by the circulation means outside the gaming machine, and a calculation means for transferring at least a portion of the quantity of the game value to the outside of the gaming machine. The second control means is capable of transmitting numerical information to the gaming device and executing a counting trigger reduction process that reduces the gaming value, and a launch stop control process that allows the launch of the gaming medium by the launch means and prohibits the launch of the gaming medium by the launch means, and the launch stop control process is capable of prohibiting the launch of the gaming medium when the medium discharge process is executed, and allowing the launch of the gaming medium when the counting trigger reduction process is executed , and the second control means is capable of adjusting the volume of the game presentation sound in response to an adjustment operation being performed, customizing the game presentation in response to a customization operation being performed, executing a specific notification corresponding to the stop of the game progress control, and executing a counting notification in response to the execution of the counting trigger reduction process, and the counting notification is characterized in that the customization of the counting notification is restricted .

This invention makes it possible to optimally carry out control processing related to the gaming value owned by the player.

FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. This is an oblique view of the gaming machine without the glass frame. FIG. 1 is a rear view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing memory maps of a main control unit and a frame control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game area and the information area. FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram of a gaming machine and peripheral devices. FIG. 1 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for special symbols. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table. A figure showing a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a pre-determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine. A diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the main control board and the frame control board. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. A diagram showing details of the hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a list of functions and implementation areas of a gaming machine. A diagram showing the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables play after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board, which are not playable after the gaming machine is started. A diagram showing the communication procedure between the main control board and frame control board that enter a setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication procedure in which the main control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a communication procedure in which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for checking settings of a main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an input control process of the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the first start port detection switch input processing of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the special diagram special voltage control processing of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol memory determination process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the acquisition upper limit management process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an increment counter update process for a main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of determining whether the acquisition upper limit device is activated on the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the main control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine information notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing fraud detection states 2 and 3 of hole control and fraud monitoring information. A diagram showing game information such as hall control and fraud monitoring information. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a counting notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. A diagram showing a lending notification sent from a dedicated unit to a frame control board. A figure showing a loan receipt result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 for the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 1 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing counting notification sequence 2 of the frame control board and dedicated unit. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 1. A diagram showing the frame control board and dedicated unit lending notification sequence 2. 10 is a diagram showing a recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects a frame control board and a dedicated unit is disconnected. FIG. A diagram showing the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information for the frame control board and dedicated unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the ball removal operation process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information receiving process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information receiving process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the game ball number update process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an error control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a severe error notification control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a hardware error notification control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a minor error notification control process of the frame control board. A diagram showing the display content and display priority of the frame control display when various alarm events occur. 10 is a flowchart showing a display performance information calculation process for a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification processing of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board. This figure shows the processing sequence when launch is permitted after a setting change or RWM clear is performed on the main control board. This figure shows the processing sequence when launch is permitted or not permitted after power is restored on the main control board. This figure shows the processing sequence when launch is permitted or not permitted after the settings are confirmed on the main control board. This figure shows the processing sequence when an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board and game progress control is not possible. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board controls the progress of a game or when the control of the progress of a game is restricted. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared or is cleared after the frame control board receives game machine installation information. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine information is received by the frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board. This figure shows the processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the frame control board, resulting in launch being denied or permitted. 10 is a diagram showing a processing sequence when display performance information is calculated and displayed on a frame control board. FIG. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine performance information is calculated on a frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board. A diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board counts the number of game balls owned by a player or when counting is completed. A diagram showing the processing sequence when a lending process is performed upon receiving a lending notification on the frame control board, or when a lending process is not performed. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the input control processing of the performance control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an overview of custom effect settings. 10 is a flowchart showing a predictive performance process of the performance control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process performed by the effect control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C. A figure showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview effect determination process of the effect control unit. 10 is a diagram showing types of notifiable events, priorities of notifiable events, and notification modes of notifiable events. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of notifiable events, priorities of notifiable events, and notification modes of notifiable events. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing types of notifiable events, priorities of notifiable events, and notification modes of notifiable events. FIG. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event when the power is turned on. 10 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable effect device when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality). A diagram showing the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) opening error and the ball removal operation. A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). A diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification mode for each event (abnormality, etc.). 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating information output and notification modes of various events. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating information output and notification modes of various events. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur. A diagram showing the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the pre-reading effects. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a manner in which the value of an increment counter is notified. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the effects that are produced when various events occur. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the customer waiting effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram (1/3) showing advance notification. FIG. 2 is a diagram (2/3) showing advance notification. FIG. 3 is a diagram (3/3) showing advance notification. A figure showing an example of when the winning limit device is activated during the customer waiting performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of operation notification modes of the acquisition upper limit device for each situation. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of operation notification modes of the acquisition upper limit device for each situation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example in which power is restored during information output. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of information output timing for each situation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an occurrence of an abnormality after the acquisition upper limit device is activated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an occurrence of an abnormality after the acquisition upper limit device is activated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while the player is waiting for customers. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated. 10 is a game flow showing the game characteristics of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing various determination tables relating to special symbols. A diagram showing various judgment tables related to normal patterns. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing (pre-loop processing) of a frame control board according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing (loop processing) of a frame control board according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the launch stop control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the main control board communication processing of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information management process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing game information data processing of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a dedicated unit communication process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a dedicated unit communication process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a counting notification transmission process of a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a count subtraction value setting process of a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for responding to a loan acceptance result of a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the game ball number display control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an error removal process within the area of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing an out-of-area error detection process of a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a fraud detection process for a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a fraud detection process for a frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a switch detection process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a switch detection process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a subtraction mechanism control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing a subtraction mechanism control process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the fraud monitoring process of the frame control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of counting the number of shot balls of the frame control board. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing specific examples of counting situations according to the state recognition of the counting button. A diagram showing the processing sequence when updating the number of game balls owned by a player. A diagram showing the processing sequence when updating the number of game balls owned by a player. A diagram showing the processing sequence when updating the number of game balls owned by a player. A diagram showing the processing sequence when updating the number of game balls owned by a player. 10 is a timing chart relating to the update control of the number of game balls during operation of the counting button. 10 is a timing chart relating to the update control of the number of game balls in response to the counting operation and the lending operation. A figure showing an example of a presentation when controlled to the normal game state.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 without the glass frame 4, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 rotatably supported on the front side of the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 3, and a gaming board 5 on which a gaming area 5a is formed, through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening facing forward and backward, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front of the base frame. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the arcade's island equipment via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The inner frame 3 has a recessed game board mounting section 25 with an open front for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end (left side in Figure 3), and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the inner frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the inner frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices mounted on the back side of the inner frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front of the inner frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end (left side in Figure 3) so as to cover the front of the game board mounting portion 25 of the inner frame 3, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the inner frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the inner frame 3 can be opened or closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-back direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the playing board attachment portion 25 of the inner frame 3 through this opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 in the glass frame 4, there are an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an operation unit 11 equipped with various operation devices (such as the performance button device 16 and selection button device 18 described below), a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch game balls, and a third image display device 72 (left sub-display device) and a fourth image display device 73 (right sub-display device) consisting of LCD displays.

The audio output devices 9 are installed at two locations above and two locations below the glass frame 4, spaced apart, to output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc., to create sound (music, audio) effects. Multiple frame lighting devices 10 are installed around the periphery of the opening 8, and create lighting effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). Each frame lighting device 10 also includes an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up when the inner frame 3 or glass frame 4 is opened, and a top lamp 10b that is controlled to light up when a specific effect is to be performed.

The operation unit 11 has a shape that bulges forward, and is provided with an effect button device 16 in the center of the top surface that can be operated by the player, a selection button device 18 in the left side of the top surface that can also be operated by the player, a counting button 20 that can be operated by the player located between the effect button device 16 and the selection button device 18 and further back than the selection button device 18, and a game ball count display 135 for displaying the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player is located behind the counting button 20.

In addition, an item storage area (receiving area) for players to place items (such as mobile phones, drinks, cigarettes, etc.) used to secure (play) the gaming machine 1 may be provided in a position on the operation unit 11 that does not overlap the game ball count display 135 (for example, a position toward the right of the top surface of the operation unit).

The effect button device 16 is equipped with an effect button 17 that can be pressed by the player, an effect button detection switch 17a (see Figure 5) that detects pressing of the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see Figure 5) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 is capable of producing light-emitting effects by lighting up the effect button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5), in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (e.g., white, red, rainbow colors). It is also capable of moving vertically between a standby position (origin position) located below and an effect position located above, driven by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, and is detected to be in the origin position by a button position detection sensor (not shown). It is also capable of producing effect actions by vibrating in a predetermined vibration pattern driven by the driving force of a button vibration motor, which is also part of the button drive device 17b.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a joystick 19 that the player can operate in the up, down, left, and right directions, and a joystick detection switch 19a (see Figure 5) that detects operations on the joystick 19, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

The counting button 20 is provided with a counting button switch 20a for detecting pressing of the counting button 20, and when operated by the player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the game ball count display 135, can be counted (linked to identification information stored on a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170 described below, and stored and settled on the card itself or in the hall computer described below).

The firing operation device 13 is equipped with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably attached to the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see Figure 5) that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, and a firing volume 15b (see Figure 5) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15.A lighting effect can be created by lighting the firing handle in a predetermined lighting mode using a firing handle light-emitting device (not shown) that is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, when a launch permission signal is input from both the main control device 110A and the frame control device 120A (described later), when the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and when the launch volume 15b detects that the launch handle 15 is being rotated, the ball feed unit 91 (described later) is driven to send game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launch device 92 (described later), which then launches the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Note that in this embodiment, the sending of the game balls to the launch pad and the subsequent launch of the game balls operate as a set, so that the game balls will be launched from the launch pad even if the player releases the launch handle 15 at the time the game balls are sent to the launch pad (before the game balls are launched).

The third image display device 72 and fourth image display device 73 display various effects and various game-related information according to the progress of the game. Specifically, they display a volume adjustment image for adjusting the volume of the game sounds output from the audio output device 9, a light intensity adjustment image for adjusting the light intensity of various lighting devices and various image displays, and customization images for customizing game effects.

The inner frame 3 is provided with a recessed game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5 through the front opening, a ball circulation mechanism 90 that collects game balls launched from the launcher 92 into the game area 5a and supplies them back to the launcher 92 for circulating game balls within the gaming machine 1, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed position, a glass frame open detection switch 31a (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b (see Figure 5) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3, and a radio wave detection sensor 54a (see Figure 5) for detecting abnormal radio waves.

The ball circulation mechanism 90 is equipped with a launching device 92 for launching game balls toward the play area 5a, a ball feeding unit 91 for sending game balls one by one to the launch pad of the launching device 92, a lifting and polishing device 95 for lifting the supplied game balls while polishing them, a ball passage unit 94 for allowing game balls that have flown down the play area 5a to flow down to the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95 and for allowing game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to flow down to the entrance of the ball feeding unit 91, and a foul ball passage unit 93 for allowing game balls (foul balls) that were launched by the launching device 92 but returned without flying into the play area 5a to join the ball passage unit 94.

The ball feeding unit 91 is equipped with a subtraction inlet switch 91b (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls flowing down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a (see Figure 5) for sending game balls detected by the subtraction inlet switch 91b to the launching device 92, and a subtraction outlet switch 91c (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls sent to the launching device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a.

The launching device 92 is provided with a launch pad (not shown) where game balls sent out from the ball feeding unit 91 are parked, a launch pad switch 92a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls parked on the launch pad, and a launch solenoid 92b (see Figure 5) for operating a launch hammer (not shown) for launching game balls parked on the launch pad.

The foul ball passage unit 93 is provided with a foul ball passage (not shown) for allowing game balls (foul balls) that return without flying into the game area 5a to merge with the ball passage unit 94, and a foul ball switch 93a (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage.

The rear portion of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a winning passage (not shown) that collects and allows game balls that have entered the various winning ports provided in the game area 5a to flow down; a winning passage count switch 94a (see Figure 5) that detects game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning passage; a non-winning passage (not shown) that collects and allows game balls that have not entered the various winning ports to flow down the outlet; a non-winning passage count switch 94b (see Figure 5) that detects game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning passage; a merging passage (not shown) that merges game balls that have flowed down the winning passage, game balls that have flowed down the non-winning passage, and game balls that have flowed down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lifting and polishing device 95; and a lift-down switch 94d (see Figure 5) that detects game balls supplied to the lifting and polishing device 95 at the downstream end of the merging passage.

In addition, the front part of the ball passage unit 94 is provided with a lifted ball passage (not shown) for supplying game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 to the ball feeding unit 91, a lift up switch 94c (see Figure 5) for detecting game balls lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage, an excess sensor 94e (see Figure 5) provided in the midstream part of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the lift up switch 94c) for detecting an excess (surplus) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifted ball passage, a deficiency sensor 94f (see Figure 5) provided in the downstream part of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting a deficiency (shortage) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lifted ball passage, and a ball removal lever (not shown) for removing game balls from the gaming machine through a ball removal port (not shown) provided at the downstream end of the lifted ball passage (downstream of the deficiency sensor 94f).

In addition, an excess ball removal lever can be provided to remove game balls (excess balls) detected by the excess sensor 94e from the excess ball removal port (not shown), which is located at the appropriate ball number position upstream of the deficiency sensor 94f in the lifted ball passage and immediately downstream of the excess sensor 94e.If an excess ball error occurs in which game balls are detected by the excess sensor 94e, the excess ball removal lever can be operated to remove the excess balls from the game machine, thereby restoring the appropriate number of circulating game balls and resetting (eliminating) the excess ball error.

The lifting and polishing device 95 is equipped with a lift unit (not shown) for lifting game balls using the driving force of a motor, a lift origin switch 95b (not shown) for checking the origin position of the lift unit, an abrasive (not shown) for polishing the game balls lifted by the lift unit, and an abrasive confirmation switch 95a (not shown) for detecting whether the abrasive is attached.

The locking mechanism 27 is located on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, with the front end of the cylinder, where the keyhole is formed, exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the inner frame 3 is unlocked, allowing it to be opened and closed; when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked, allowing it to be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35, 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by these inner and outer rails 35, 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35, 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 92 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (ball passage unit 94).

A decorative frame 40, a frame-like structure known as a center case, is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a to restrict game balls from entering the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left-hand play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right-hand play area where game balls launched with a second launch force, which is stronger than the first launch force, flow down; the left-hand and right-hand play areas are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40, which guides game balls flowing down the left-side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40. A stage section 42 is provided below the decorative frame 40, which rolls game balls introduced into the interior of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and causes them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general prize openings 43 are provided at a distance below the left side of the decorative frame 40, through which game balls can always enter (win), and one general prize opening 43 is provided below the right side of the decorative frame 40, through which game balls can always enter (win). When a game ball that has entered (wins) this general prize opening 43 is detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a (see Figure 6), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five) are added as prize balls (awarded a game bonus) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125, described below, is updated.

One of the three general winning slots 43 located at the bottom left of the decorative frame 40 (the one on the far left) also serves as the starting area for the normal symbol. When a game ball that enters this general winning slot 43 is detected by the general winning slot detection switch 43a, the player is granted the right to make a win determination to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game described below (opening the second starting slot 47 described below) (normal symbol determination information described below is stored).

Below the stage section 42 is a first start hole 45 (first special symbol start winning area) where game balls can always enter (win). When a game ball that has entered (wins) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see Figure 6), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125, which will be described later, is updated. In addition, the player is granted the right to make a jackpot determination to determine whether or not a special game (jackpot game) will be played (special symbol determination information, which will be described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40, diagonally below and to the right of the first starting hole 45, is a variable starting section 46 that can be converted from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, to an open state, in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a winning result in the winning determination described below).

The variable starter section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for game balls, and is equipped with a second starter opening/closing member 48 that can move forward and backward, a second starter opening 47 (starting winning area for the second special symbol) that opens upward directly below the second starter opening/closing member 48, a second starter opening detection switch 47a (see Figure 6) that detects game balls that have entered (entered) the second starter opening 47, and a second starter opening/closing solenoid 48b (see Figure 6) that converts the second starter opening 47 to a closed state by moving the second starter opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starter opening 47 to an open state by moving the second starter opening/closing member 48 backward (winning permissible position).

When a game ball enters the second start port 47, which has been opened during the auxiliary game described below, and is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a (see Figure 6), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are added as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded) to the number of game balls owned by the player, and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 described below is updated. In addition, the player is granted the right to make a jackpot determination to determine whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played (special game determination information described below is stored).

In the right-side gaming area to the right of the decorative frame 40, there is a normal gate 44 (normal symbol starting area) through which gaming balls can always pass. When a gaming ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see Figure 6), no prize balls (gaming bonus) are awarded, but the player is granted the right to make a win determination to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game (opening of the second starting hole 47, described below) (normal symbol determination information, described below, is stored). It should be noted that the normal gate 44 is easier for gaming balls to enter (pass through) than the general winning hole 43, which also serves as the starting area for the normal symbols described above.

Below the normal gate 44 is a variable winning section 49 (variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state, in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the prize), to an open state, in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to win, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a jackpot determination being made).

The variable prize winning section 49 (variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in Figure 1) to form a flow path for game balls, and is equipped with a large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move forward and backward, a large prize winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51, a large prize winning opening detection switch 50a (see Figure 6) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the large prize winning opening 50, and a large prize winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b (see Figure 6) that moves the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) to close the large prize winning opening 50 and moves the large prize winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position) to open the large prize winning opening 50.

Then, during a jackpot game described below, when the large prize opening/closing member 51 moves rearward and the large prize opening 50 changes from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have been flowing down the top surface of the large prize opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the large prize opening 50 enter the large prize opening 50 and are detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are added to the number of game balls owned by the player as prize balls (a game bonus is awarded), and the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 described below is updated.

In addition, game balls launched into the left-hand game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and will either win in one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the outlet 39. Therefore, they will not win in (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, or variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) located in the right-hand game area.

Furthermore, game balls launched into the right-hand game area flow down the flow path on the right side of the decorative frame 40, and after almost all of them pass through the normal gate 44, they either win in one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), or the variable winning section 49 (large winning opening 50) located in the right-hand game area, or flow into the outlet 39. Therefore, they will not win in the general winning opening 43 or first starting opening 45 located in the left-hand game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is a safe ball flow path that accepts safe balls (winning balls) that have entered the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50, allowing them to flow down and then into the winning passage of the ball passage unit 94, and an out ball flow path that accepts out balls (non-winning balls) that have entered the out opening 39, allowing them to flow down and then into the non-winning passage of the ball passage unit 94. An out ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 6) is provided at the most downstream part of the out ball flow path to detect out balls.

A main information display device 59 is provided outside the play area 5a and consists of a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reserved display device 63, a second special symbol reserved display device 64, a normal symbol reserved display device 65, a round count display device 66, a right-hit display device 67, a status confirmation display device 68, and a game status display device (not shown). This main information display device 59 is composed of multiple LEDs.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the first starting gate 45. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the second starting gate 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the normal symbol, which is made based on the entry (passage, entry) of a gaming ball into the general winning gate 43 or the normal symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol.

Jackpot determination refers to the process of obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) when a gaming ball enters (wins) the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a gaming ball entering the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol display 60 displays a varying first special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed as a stationary symbol to announce the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a gaming ball entering the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol display 61 displays a varying second special symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed as a stationary symbol to announce the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61 each consist of eight LEDs, and the lighting mode of the LEDs changes (moving lights) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) when each special symbol changes display. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a mode that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state advantageous to a player in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals in between, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the jackpot opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are predetermined, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the jackpot opening (balls enter) even before the maximum number of openings or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of jackpot games (special games) that vary in the degree of advantage to the player.

A hit determination involves obtaining normal symbol determination information (random number values for hit determination, random number values for normal symbol determination, random number values for normal symbol variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the game ball's entry (passage or entry) into the normal winning opening 43 or normal symbol gate 44, which also serve as the starting area for the normal symbol, and determining whether or not to execute the supplementary game based on the obtained normal symbol determination information. When a hit determination is made, the normal symbol display 62 displays a variation in the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary normal symbol display is displayed to notify the determination result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, which flash at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined sequence when displaying a variable normal symbol. When a normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the supplementary game determination (win or loss).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game determination that an auxiliary game (winning game) will be played. "Auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the maximum number of times and maximum opening time of the second start hole 47 in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter (enter) the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times and maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a gaming state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) are provided, each with different degrees of advantage to the player.

The first special symbol reserve indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs and is used to display the first special symbol reserve number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserves) stored when a gaming ball enters (wins) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserves. Note that up to four first reserves can be stored, but this number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserve indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs and is used to display the second special symbol reserve number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserves) stored when a gaming ball wins (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserves. Note that up to four second reserves can be stored, but this number may be more or less than four, or no second reserves may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs and is used to display the number of normal symbols reserved, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (normal symbol reserves) stored when a gaming ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of normal symbols reserved. Note that up to four normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four, or no normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a 7-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot determination determines that a jackpot has been won, a static display of numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed, and if a loss has been determined, a static display of "-" can be displayed, and during the variable display, the display can alternate between being turned off and displaying "-".

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is used to display the number of rounds when a jackpot (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs begin lighting up in a predetermined pattern indicating the number of rounds, remain lit during the jackpot game, and turn off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED will light up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs will light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of a single LED and is used to issue a right-hit notification that prompts the player to fire the game ball toward the right-side game area (a so-called right hit). The LED generally does not light up during normal game play, but lights up during jackpot play (special play), during the probability game play state described below, and during specific time-saving game play states.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of a single LED and is used to issue a time-saving notification to indicate that the time-saving game mode is in progress. The LED lights up when the time-saving game mode begins and turns off when the time-saving game mode ends.

The game status indicator (not shown) is composed of a single LED and is used to notify players that they are in a special probability game state or a time-limited game state. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the LED lights up if the special probability game state or time-limited game state is in effect, and then turns off when the special probability game state or time-limited game state ends (the game status changes).

A sub-information display device 80 is provided inside the gaming area 5a, and consists of a sub-1st change indicator, a sub-2nd change indicator, a sub-1st hold indicator, a sub-2nd hold indicator, a sub-regular change indicator, a sub-regular hold indicator, and a sub-right-hit indicator. This sub-information display device 80 is basically composed of LEDs.

The sub-first variable indicator is used to display (notify) whether the first special symbol is currently being displayed, and the sub-second variable indicator is used to display (notify) whether the second special symbol is currently being displayed, and each is made up of one LED. When the corresponding special symbol begins to display, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (on for 0.5 seconds, then off for 0.5 seconds), thereby displaying the first lamp symbol LZ1 or second lamp symbol LZ2, and turns off when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary.

The sub-first variable indicator or the sub-second variable indicator may be configured to announce the results of the special symbol jackpot determination. In this case, the LED may light up in the event of a jackpot, and turn off in the event of a miss.

The sub-first hold indicator is for displaying the number of first hold information items (first special chart hold number) described below, and the sub-second hold indicator is for displaying the number of second hold information items (second special chart hold number) described below, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is on and the right LED is off, when the hold number is "2", the left and right LEDs are on, when the hold number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is on, and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-regular symbol variation indicator is used to display (announce) the results of the winning lottery, and is composed of a single LED. When the normal symbol variation display begins, the LED flashes (varies) at a predetermined interval. When the normal symbol is displayed in a static state, the LED displays a static display indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up if there is a win, and goes out if there is a loss).

In addition, the sub-regular symbol variation indicator may be configured to flash while displaying a regular symbol variation, and to light up or turn off when the regular symbol is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to determine whether or not a regular symbol variation is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reserve indicator is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reserve number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reserve number is "0", the left and right LEDs are off, when the regular map reserve number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is off, when the regular map reserve number is "2", the left and right LEDs are lit, when the regular map reserve number is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the regular map reserve number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

The sub-right-hit indicator is designed to encourage players to fire the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (a so-called right hit), and is composed of a single LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play) and during time-saving play, and is off in all other play states.

A first image display device 70 (main display device) consisting of an LCD display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and a second image display device 71 (central sub-display device) consisting of an LCD display with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, and a movable performance device 77 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. These effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, a variable display involving the variable display of multiple effect symbols 70a that is performed when the special symbol variable display is being executed, a variable display (update variable) of the special symbol TZ (the so-called fourth symbol) that is performed when the special symbol variable display is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is performed when a jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal moving device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. The movement direction of the second image display device 71 may also be left-right or forward-backward, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 includes a variable display area for displaying three effect patterns 70a (left pattern, center pattern, right pattern), as well as a display area for executing display effects (such as displaying a background image) according to the effect mode related to the execution of the variable effect.

The performance symbols 70a are composed of symbols showing the numbers "1" to "9," for example, and start to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61, and stop display in response to the stop of the changing display of the special symbols. The performance symbols 70a may also be symbols showing the letters of the alphabet, such as "A" to "F."

The effect symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a mode (miss mode, jackpot mode) that notifies the result of the jackpot determination. A jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a, such as "777" or "555," while a miss mode is any other mode.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction, but it may also scroll in the horizontal direction, or may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing effect) of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, as well as movies, are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby heightening the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is formed with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the number of first special symbol holds (U1) in normal game mode, etc., a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the number of second special symbol holds (U2) in time-saving game mode, etc., an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable effect is being executed, a first special symbol hold number display area 70E for displaying the number of first special symbol holds (U1) numerically, and a second special symbol hold number display area 70F for displaying the number of second special symbol holds (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first to fourth display sections display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the number of first special chart holds (U1).

Specifically, in the first hold icon display area, the first display section of 70B displays a first hold icon indicating first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display will be executed first, the second display section displays a first hold icon indicating first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display will be executed second, the third display section displays a first hold icon indicating first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display will be executed third, and the fourth display section displays a first hold icon indicating first hold information in which the first special symbol variable display will be executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section (first area), a second display section (second area), a third display section (third area), and a fourth display section (fourth area) from the left, and the first to fourth display sections display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the number of second special charts held (U2).

Specifically, in the second hold icon display area 70D, the first display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the second special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the second special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the second special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the second special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a base image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting on or floating on this base image.

Specifically, as the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section of the first hold icon display area 70B moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and when the variable display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). In other words, a disappearance effect (erasure effect) of the icon is performed.

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second hold icons displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second hold icon displayed in the first display section of the second hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C, becoming the icon, and the icon disappears (erases) when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. Note that the icon may also disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) changing.

The movable effect device 77 has an operable first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b, and is capable of performing predetermined movements of the first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b during the variable effect or jackpot game effect executed by the first image display device 70 to perform the action effect. The first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b are also equipped with a board lighting device 76 equipped with multiple decorative LEDs, which can emit light in a predetermined manner while the action effect is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 77a moves (raises and lowers) between a standby position located near the edge (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position located near the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 77b moves between a standby position where it covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 77a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 77a.

On the back side of the game board 5 are a main control device 110A containing a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game, a presentation control device 130A containing a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation of the game, and an upper cover member 23 made of transparent resin that covers the back of the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A, with the main control device 110A and the presentation control device 130A arranged side by side one above the other.

A selector switch 22 is provided at the rear of the performance control device 130A for switching between multiple adjustment modes that set the volume of the performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 and the reference values for the light intensity of various light sources (various lighting devices, various display devices). In the normal state, the rear is covered by an upper cover member 23.

On the back side of the inner frame 3 are a frame control device 120A (value control device) incorporating a frame control board 120 that controls the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player and controls information communication with the dedicated unit 170; a power supply unit 160A incorporating a power supply board 160; a lending device connection terminal board 100 equipped with a lending device connection terminal 101 for connecting dedicated wiring for communication with the dedicated unit 170 installed alongside the gaming machine 1; and a lower cover member 120B made of transparent resin that covers the upper rear of the frame control device 120A.

The power supply unit 160A is located near one of the left and right ends of the lower part of the inner frame 3 (right side in Figure 4). On one of the left and right sides (the part near the rotation axis of the inner frame 3, which is the right side in Figure 4), there is a power cord outlet with a power plug 161 at the end, as well as a power switch 164 that can be turned ON and OFF.

The frame control device 120A is positioned so that it overlaps the rear of the power supply device 160A, near the other left or right side of the inner frame 3 (near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, which is the left side in Figure 4), so that the power cord outlet and power switch of the power supply device 160A are exposed at the rear.

A rental device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 3 above the power switch 164. The rental device connection terminal board 100 is equipped with a rental device connection terminal 101 into which a connector at the end of a dedicated cable for communicating with the dedicated unit 170 is inserted.

The frame control board 120 built into the frame control device 120A is provided with a frame control display 125 that displays the number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, similar to the game ball count display 135 provided in the glass frame 4, but the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 are offset in the vertical and horizontal directions of the gaming machine 1. Specifically, the game ball count display 135 is disposed closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, and the frame control display 125 is disposed below the game ball count display 135 and closer to the free rotation end of the inner frame 3.

In this way, by arranging the game ball count display 135 on the front side of the gaming machine closer to the rotation axis of the glass frame 4, even when an amusement store employee opens the inner frame 3 or glass frame 4, the movement range of the game ball count display 135 is small, preventing the visibility of the game ball count display 135 from being significantly reduced, thereby improving convenience for amusement store employees and players when checking the display contents of the game ball count display 135.

In addition, because the frame control indicator 125 on the back side of the gaming machine is located near the free rotation end of the inner frame 3, when a gaming store clerk opens the inner frame 3 to check the frame control indicator 125, it is easier to see the frame control indicator 125 than if the frame control indicator 125 were located closer to the rotation axis of the inner frame 3, making it possible to improve the convenience of gaming store clerks when checking the display content of the frame control indicator 125.

In addition, the lower cover member 120B only covers the upper side of the frame control device 120A (such as the various female connectors 127a-127f exposed from the frame control board case 300, described below), and does not cover the various buttons located on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b associated with the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal button 122b associated with the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b associated with the error reset switch 123, described below). This makes it easier to operate the various buttons located on the lower side of the frame control device 120A (the game ball count clear button 121b associated with the game ball count clear switch 121, the ball removal button 122b associated with the ball removal switch 122, and the error reset button 123b associated with the error reset switch 123, described below), improving convenience for gaming parlor staff.

In addition, the lower cover member 120B is designed not to cover the various stickers (the frame control number sticker 308 and the operation guide sticker 309, described below) affixed to the frame control device 120A or the frame control indicator 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. As a result, the lower cover member 120B does not obstruct the visibility of the various stickers or the frame control indicator 125, improving convenience for gaming facility staff.

In addition, a win limit device operation indicator may be provided on the front side of the glass frame 4 to display the operating status of the win limit device, which will be described later. The win limit device operation indicator may be configured with an LED or 7-segment display that lights up when the win limit device is operating, or the win limit device operation indicator may be configured with a sliding panel that can be operated by amusement facility staff (it cannot be operated when the glass frame 4 is closed, but can be operated when the glass frame 4 is open), and the panel may slide to display an inactive state when the win limit device is not operating, and to display an active state when it is operating.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, block diagrams of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, gaming machine 1 uses gaming balls (gaming media) similar to those used in conventional pachinko gaming machines. However, the gaming balls are not ejected outside gaming machine 1 (to the player's hand) but circulate within the machine, meaning that the player cannot touch them. Therefore, the total number of gaming balls displayed on the "gaming ball count display 135" and "frame control display 125" is information recorded by electromagnetic means (for example, addition by ball lending or prize balls, or subtraction by ball release). For convenience, this embodiment uses the term "payout" of gaming balls, but this does not mean the payout of gaming balls outside the gaming machine as in conventional pachinko gaming machines, but rather refers to the addition described above.

This prevents people from bringing game balls into game parlors and playing games with them. It also prevents people from tampering with game balls (for example, tying string to game balls, applying oil to game balls, or using game balls of a different size than specified) to obtain game balls illegally.

The gaming balls used in gaming machine 1 may be the same as those used in conventional pachinko gaming machines (gaming balls that react to magnets), or they may be non-magnetic balls (for example, stainless steel balls). The former reduces the cost of manufacturing new gaming balls, while the latter makes it possible to create a gaming machine that is more resistant to cheating. Furthermore, when using gaming balls that do not react to magnets, a magnet detector may be placed on the ball path to monitor magnetically responsive gaming balls in order to prevent them from being mixed in with magnetically responsive balls.

The main control board 110 provides overall control over the progress of the game (basic operations). It includes a main control unit 110m, a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and displays) and sending specified commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the presentation control board 130, etc. It also sends specified information (described below) to the frame control board 120.

Note that in this embodiment, the term "RAM" and "RWM" are sometimes used, but they are synonymous.

Here, communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is configured to allow information to be communicated in both directions, while communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow information to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

Various switches, sensors, and the frame control board 120 are connected to the input ports of the main control board 110. When detection signals from the various switches and sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input ports, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The various switches are a general prize entry port detection switch 43a for detecting game balls that have entered the general prize entry port 43, a gate detection switch 44a for detecting game balls that have passed through the general gate 44, a first start port detection switch 45a for detecting game balls that have entered the first start port 45, a second start port detection switch 47a for detecting game balls that have entered the second start port 47, a special prize entry port detection switch 50a for detecting game balls that have entered the special prize entry port 50, and a switch 45a for detecting game balls that have flowed down the most downstream part of the out ball flow path. The sensors are a first magnetic detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b for detecting the out ball, an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal to clear the contents stored in the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update the setting value, which is the stage of the game's advantage (changing the game's advantage), and a setting key switch 112a that inputs a signal to transition to a state where the setting value can be changed or checked by operating the setting key. The various sensors are a first magnetic detection sensor 53a and a second magnetic detection sensor 53b for detecting magnets.

In this embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the player is counted using the out ball detection switch 39a, but the number of launched balls can also be counted by installing a detection switch at the position where the game ball enters the game area 5a (a position where the launched ball will not be a foul ball after detection), or by installing a detection switch on the launched ball guide path 38 (a position where the launched ball may be a foul ball after detection). Note that in cases where a detection switch is installed on the launched ball guide path 38, if a foul ball is detected after the detection of a launched ball, the number of launched balls can be counted by adding 1 and then subtracting 1.

The output ports of the main control board 110 are connected to the main information display device 59, various solenoids, information display 115, frame control board 120, and performance control board 130, and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and specified information are sent to the frame control board 120 via the output ports.

The various solenoids are the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b and the large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b; the main information display device 59 is the special symbol display 60, special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, special symbol reserved display 63, special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right-hit display 67, and status confirmation display 68; and the information display 115 is a display (a four-digit seven-segment display) for displaying setting values, etc.

The frame control board 120 is equipped with a frame control CPU 120a that performs calculation processing, a frame control ROM 120b that stores the operating program of the frame control CPU 120a, a frame control unit 120m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a frame control RAM 120c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input and output ports for frame control. The frame control CPU 120a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator and reads the program stored in the frame control ROM 120b, and performs calculation processing related to gameplay while utilizing the frame control RAM 120c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays), communicating with the main control board 110 via telegrams (described below), and transmitting specified information (described below) to the dedicated unit 170.

The input port of the frame control board 120 is equipped with a touch sensor 15a that detects when the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, a ball ejection switch 122 that detects when the ball ejection button 122b has been operated, an error reset button 123b that detects when the error reset button 123b has been operated, a lending device connection terminal board 100 for communicating with a dedicated unit 170 installed alongside the gaming machine 1, a launch pad switch 92a for detecting game balls parked on the launch pad, a subtraction entrance switch 91b for detecting game balls that have flowed down the ball passage unit 94, a subtraction solenoid 91a for detecting game balls sent to the launch device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a, A subtraction port switch 91c for detecting the number of balls being counted, a count button switch 20a for detecting when the count button 20 is operated, a glass frame open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4, an inner frame open detection switch 31b for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the inner frame 3 (shown as various open detection switches 31a and 31b in the drawings), a radio wave detection sensor 54a for detecting abnormal radio waves, a lifting/polishing device 95 for lifting the game balls while polishing them, a game ball count clear switch 121 for detecting when the game ball count clear button 121b is operated, and various passage units 93, 94 are connected, and when detection signals from the various detection switches and sensors are input to the frame control board 120 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The glass frame open detection switch 31a, which detects whether the glass frame 4 is open (opened or closed), may be ON when the glass frame 4 is open (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is an ON input), or it may be ON when the glass frame 4 is closed (in this case, it is determined to be open when there is no ON input). The same applies to the inner frame open detection switch 31b.

The various passage units 93, 94 are equipped with a foul ball switch 93a for detecting game balls flowing down the foul ball passage, which allows game balls (foul balls) that return without entering the play area 5a to merge with the ball passage unit 94; a winning passage count switch 94a for detecting game balls (winning balls) flowing down the winning passage (not shown), which collects and allows game balls that have entered the various winning ports provided in the play area 5a to flow down; a non-winning passage count switch 94b for detecting game balls (out balls) flowing down the non-winning passage (not shown), which collects and allows game balls that have flown into the outlet 39 without entering the various winning ports to flow down; and a non-winning passage count switch 94c for detecting game balls that have been lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95 at the upstream end of the lifting ball passage. a lift-up switch 94c; a lift-down switch 94d for detecting game balls supplied to the lift-up polishing device 95 at the downstream end of a junction passage (not shown) that merges game balls that have flowed down the winning passage, game balls that have flowed down the non-winning passage, and game balls that have flowed down the foul ball passage and supplies them to the lift-up polishing device 95; an excess sensor 94e located in the midstream part of the lift-up ball passage (downstream of the lift-up switch 94c) for detecting an excess (excess) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lift-up ball passage; and a deficiency sensor 94f located in the downstream part of the lift-up ball passage (downstream of the excess sensor 94e) for detecting a deficiency (shortage) of game balls (circulating game balls) waiting in the lift-up ball passage.

The output port of the frame control board 120 is connected to the performance control board 130, the dispensing device connection terminal board 100, the launch solenoid 92b for operating the launch hammer (not shown) that launches game balls parked on the launch pad, the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending game balls to the launch device 92, the lifting and polishing device 95, the game ball count display 135, the frame control display 125, etc., and drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids and display control signals for controlling the various displays are output via the output port.

Communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is configured so that information can be communicated in only one direction, from the frame control board 120 to the performance control board 130. This allows, for example, if an error is detected on the frame control board 120, the performance control board 130 can issue a notification regarding the error. Note that communication between the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 may also be performed via the main control board 110. In other words, the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130 do not need to be directly connected.

The "game ball count display 135" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls that the player can fire (hereinafter simply referred to as "total number of game balls"), and is configured, for example, as a six-digit seven-segment display. It may also be used as a display for displaying error codes indicating the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. In this case, when no error has occurred, only the total number of game balls is displayed, and when an error has occurred, the total number of game balls and the error code are displayed alternately. The display of error codes will be described in more detail later.

The "frame control display 125" is a display for displaying the total number of game balls, and is composed of, for example, a six-digit, seven-segment display. For example, if the "game ball count display 135" displays "100" as the total number of game balls, the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" will also be "100". If the "game ball count display 135" malfunctions and the total number of game balls cannot be displayed, the player can determine the total number of game balls they own by checking the total number of game balls displayed on the "frame control display 125" (this display serves as an insurance measure in case of a malfunction).

It may also be used as a display that displays an error code indicating the type of error that has occurred on the gaming machine 1, or as a display that displays the "display performance information (normal base value)" described below (see "Frame control board display performance information calculation process" described below). In this case, when no error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls and the "display performance information (normal base value)" are displayed alternately, and when an error has occurred, the total number of gaming balls, the "display performance information (normal base value)", and the error code are displayed alternately.

The "counting button 20" is a button used to send data on the total number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. The frame control CPU 120a determines whether the "counting button 20" is pressed for a "short press" or a "long press" depending on the length of time it is pressed. Specifically, if the button is pressed for less than 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "short press," and if it is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, it is determined to be a "long press."

If the frame control CPU 120a determines that a "short press" has occurred, it counts one game ball. If it determines that a "long press" has occurred, it counts 250 game balls at a time at the count notification timing every 0.3 seconds. If the total number of game balls is less than 250 (for example, 200), it will determine that a "long press" has occurred and count all 200 balls. A count possible lamp may be provided that lights up when counting is possible and goes out when counting is not possible.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button for clearing the number of game balls recorded electromagnetically. For example, it is conceivable that game balls may be recorded on the gaming machine 1 when it is shipped from the manufacturing factory to the gaming parlor, or that after it is installed in the gaming parlor, a player may stop playing with only a few game balls (for example, one ball) recorded. In such cases, a problem arises in which it is difficult for a new player to start playing (the player may mistakenly believe that the previous player is still playing). To solve this problem, the above-mentioned recorded game balls can be cleared by pressing the game ball count clear button 121b while turning on the power switch 164.

The game ball count clearing process may be performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), or the game ball count clearing process may not be performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls) (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed). Furthermore, if the game ball count clearing process is performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), the gaming machine 1 may ultimately transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared to the gaming machine information center. If the game ball count clearing process is not performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls) (even if the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed), the gaming machine 1 may not transmit "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the game balls have been cleared. If the game ball count clearing process is performed when no game balls are recorded (0 balls), uniform control of the game ball count clearing process can be performed regardless of the game ball recording status, thereby reducing the control load. On the other hand, if the game ball count clear process is not performed when no game balls have been recorded (0 balls), (even if the game ball count clear button 121b has been pressed), it is possible to prevent the game ball count clear process (meaningless process) from being performed even when there are no game balls to clear.

When the recorded game balls are cleared, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is issued by audio output under the control of the audio control unit 148, display control under the control of the image control unit 145, and light emission control under the control of the lamp control unit 150. This notification will be described in more detail later.

In addition, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that the gaming balls have been cleared is ultimately transmitted from gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to also know that the number of gaming balls has been cleared on gaming machine 1.

Note that the number of game balls is only cleared when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear button 121b is pressed. In other words, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, the number of game balls will not be cleared. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no notification is made through audio, display, or light. For example, even if the "game ball count clear button 121b" is pressed while a variable display is being executed, the variable display continues, and sound output, display control, and light control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents the player from suffering any disadvantages, for example, even if an amusement facility employee accidentally presses the "game ball count clear button 121b" while a variable display is being executed.

The "game ball count clear button 121b" is a button used to clear the game ball count and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot eject game balls from the gaming machine 1 (remove balls), and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c.

The "ball removal button 122b" is a button used to eject game balls from the gaming machine 1. Game balls are not touched by the player's hands, but regular inspection, cleaning, or replacement is recommended. In such cases, if the power switch 164 is turned ON while pressing the ball removal button 122b, the machine will enter ball removal mode, allowing the ball circulation mechanism 90 to eject game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1.

When the game balls circulated by the ball circulation mechanism 90 are being discharged outside the gaming machine 1 by switching to ball removal mode, the game machine 1 notifies the player that it is in ball removal mode by an audio notification controlled by the audio control unit 148 and a visual notification controlled by the image control unit 145. These notifications will be described in more detail later.

Note that game balls are only ejected from the gaming machine 1 when the power switch 164 is turned ON while the ball ejection button 122b is being pressed. In other words, even if the ball ejection button 122b is pressed while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, game balls will not be ejected from the gaming machine 1. In this case, the state of the gaming machine 1 does not change, and no audio or visual notification is given. For example, even if the ball ejection button 122b is pressed while a variable display is being displayed, the variable display continues, and audio output, display control, and light emission control corresponding to the variable display continue. This prevents players from suffering any disadvantages, even if, for example, an amusement facility employee accidentally presses the ball ejection button 122b while a variable display is being displayed.

The "ball ejection button 122b" is a button used to eject game balls from the gaming machine 1 and has no other functions. For example, operating this button cannot clear an error, cannot clear the number of game balls, and cannot initialize the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c.

When the glass frame open detection switch 31a detects that the glass frame 4 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. Similarly, when the inner frame open detection switch 31b detects that the inner frame 3 is open, it becomes impossible to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15. This prevents game balls circulating within the gaming machine from flying out of the machine, preventing players from securing the (circulating) game balls needed for play and resulting in disadvantages. The gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, 45 game balls.

In addition, to make it easier to win a prize in each prize slot, a small ball detection switch (or sensor) may be provided to prevent cheating by using game balls smaller than the specified size.

The dedicated unit 170 includes a U (unit) board 171, a U (unit) control unit 172, a hall controller output unit 173, and a display unit (touch panel) 174.

The U-board 171 and the lending device connection terminal board 100 of the frame control board 120 are electrically connected by dedicated PIF wiring, allowing the U-board 171 and the frame control board 120 to communicate "predetermined information" (described below). The lending device connection terminal board 100 can be used in common for pachinko gaming machines that use gaming balls (gaming machine 1 of this embodiment) and medal-less reel-type gaming machines. For example, when used with a pachinko gaming machine, the switch SW is operated to select the pachinko gaming machine, and when used with a medal-less reel-type gaming machine, the switch SW is operated to select the medal-less reel-type gaming machine.

The U board 171 has a function (security function) of encrypting and transmitting predetermined information received from the frame control board 120 before ultimately transmitting it to the gaming machine information center (described below). It also has a function (security function) of decrypting and transmitting predetermined information received from the gaming machine information center before ultimately transmitting it to the frame control board 120.

The U control unit 172 has a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown) that stores programs and control data for the CPU to operate, and a RAM (not shown) that functions as a work area.

The U control unit 172 has the function of reading and storing the card ID of the inserted membership card or visitor card, and the function of transmitting the stored card ID to the management computer. Upon receiving the card ID, the management computer transmits the card ID to the card company data center (described below) and the gaming machine information center.

The U control unit 172 has the function of storing the game balls (balls in hand) held by the player while the player is playing, displaying the balls in hand on the display unit (touch panel) 174, and if a bill is inserted, displaying the remaining balance on the display unit (touch panel) 174.

In addition to displaying the number of balls held and the remaining balance, the display unit (touch panel) 174 can also display a ball lending button image for lending game balls and a return button image for returning membership cards and visitor cards. The U control unit 172 can input an operation signal when the ball lending button image is operated by the player, and can input an operation signal when the return button image is operated by the player. When these operation signals are input, the U control unit 172 performs the process (ball lending, return) corresponding to the operation signal. The display unit (touch panel) 174 can also display error codes, which will be described later. This will be explained later.

Note that the display unit (touch panel) 174 displays images of a ball lending button and a return button, allowing the player to operate them, but this is not limiting. For example, the ball lending button and return button may be provided on the dedicated unit 170, or the ball lending button and return button may be provided on the gaming machine 1.

The U control unit 172 is capable of counting and storing the gaming time and number of times played (for example, the number of visits to the gaming facility) while the membership card is inserted, and is also capable of storing the number of gaming media stored on the membership card, the amount used for gaming, and the number of gaming media used for gaming. This stored information is then ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center and stored in the gaming machine information center's addiction prevention server (to be used to prevent players from becoming addicted to gaming).

The U control unit 172 is equipped with a hall computer output unit 173, which outputs hall computer information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game is in progress, information indicating that a high probability game state is in progress, information indicating that the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning slot, etc.) to the hall computer. The hall computer output unit 173 is equipped with a first external terminal board pulse output signal terminal, a second external terminal board pulse output signal terminal, a third external terminal board pulse output signal terminal, and a fourth external terminal board pulse output signal terminal.

A hall computer is a dedicated computer installed in an amusement parlor, is communicatively connected to gaming machine 1 via a relay device, etc., and is a device capable of collecting hall computer information.

The presentation control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls game-related presentations (performed on the gaming machine 1) based on presentation commands received from the main control board 110. The presentation control board 130 is equipped with a presentation control unit 130m that includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the presentation control program, and a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing; an image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), fourth image display device 73 (right image display device), and audio output device 9 (speaker); a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, board drive device 75, board lighting device 76, and other devices; and input and output ports for presentation control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculations related to the effects while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. In response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a, the sub-CPU 130a controls the various control units (image control unit 145, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects (outputs data and commands).

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, joystick detection switch 19a, and button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the joystick detection switch 19a inputs a joystick detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the joystick 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance corresponding to the detection signal.

The image control unit 145 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), and fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display a specified image.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9 and controls the output of audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), and fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m.

In addition, between the performance control unit 130m, the image control unit 145, and the audio control unit 148, there is provided a general control unit (not shown) that controls image display and audio output in a general manner based on the reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m. Based on the reception of display control commands (display lists) from the general control unit, the image control unit 145 reads a CGROM (not shown) in which image data, etc. is stored, and controls the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72 (left-hand image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right-hand image display device). Based on the reception of audio control commands from the general control unit, the audio control unit 148 reads an audio ROM in which audio data, etc. is stored, and controls the audio output device 9.

The VRAM (not shown) provided in the image control unit 145 includes a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit (overall CPU), and frame buffer areas corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and second frame buffer area alternate between being the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the overall control unit, the image control unit 145 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), and fourth image display device 73 (right image display device) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator and divides the operating clock to generate synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), and fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). These signals are output to the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72 (left image display device), and fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). In this embodiment, the VDP frame rate is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 images are drawn (images are displayed) per second; however, it may be set to 60 fps (1/60 seconds = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 images are drawn (images are displayed) per second.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU (not shown) that performs calculations, a lamp ROM (not shown) that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM (not shown) that serves as a work area during calculations, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM, and performs calculations related to the performance while using the lamp RAM as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform specified performances in accordance with performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, board drive device 75, board lighting device 76, and sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of the various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, board drive device 75, board lighting device 76, and sub-information display device 80, and controls the operation of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids in the button drive device 17b and board drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power source supplied from outside the gaming machine 1 and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch 164 that can be operated by a store employee to switch between an ON state, which supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components), and an OFF state, which stops power supply. When the power switch 164 is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 begins operating. Note that even when the power switch 164 is turned OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a enters a stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is powered on, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the frame control RAM 120c of the frame control board 120. This means that the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from a power outage (blackout), the game control status and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player can be restored to the state they were in before the power outage (blackout). Backup power may also be supplied to the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability game state" and a "high probability game state" as states related to the special game determination (jackpot determination), and there are a "non-time-reduction game state" and a "time-reduction game state" as states related to the second start opening opening/closing member 48 provided in the second start opening 47. Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) A "low probability non-time-saving game state" which is a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state;
(2) A "low probability time-saving game state" which is a low probability game state and a time-saving game state;
(3) A "high probability time-saving game state" is provided, which is a high probability game state and a time-saving game state.

The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state," which will be referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. The gaming state during a jackpot game will also be set to a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state," but this is a different gaming state from the normal gaming state.

Here, "low probability game state" refers to a game state in which, for example, when the set value (for the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which indicates the degree of game advantage, is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 in the special game determination (jackpot determination) that is made on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47.

In contrast, a "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than a low-probability gaming state, in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60 when the setting value is "1." The transition from a low-probability gaming state to a high-probability gaming state occurs after the jackpot game has ended.

In addition, "non-time-reduced game state" refers to a game state in which, in the supplementary game judgment (winning judgment) that is made on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the probability of winning is set low at 1/16, the average time for the normal symbol variable display is set to approximately 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting gate 47 in the event of a winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" (variable time-saving function activated state) is a game state that is advantageous to the player, as it reduces the consumption of game balls compared to the non-time-saving game state, by setting the probability of winning at a high 15/16, the average time for the variable display of normal symbols to be set at approximately 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start port 47 in the event of a win to 5 seconds. The transition from the non-time-saving game state to the time-saving game state takes place after the jackpot game has ended.

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery, but it may also be set to be more advantageous in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery.

Furthermore, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the non-time-shortened game state remains the same regardless of the setting value, but the larger the setting value, the more advantageous the winning probability may be varied depending on the setting value.Furthermore, the probability of winning in the auxiliary game judgment in the time-shortened game state remains the same regardless of the setting value, but the larger the setting value, the more advantageous the winning probability may be varied depending on the setting value.

(Memory map of main control unit and frame control unit)
FIG. 7 shows a memory map of the memory area consisting of the main ROM 110b and main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m, and a memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The main ROM 110b memory area is arranged in the following order: a game ROM area (8000H-9FFFH) where programs and data related to game progress are stored; an information ROM area (A000H-A52EH) where programs and data related to the gaming machine's win limit device (described below) are stored; an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH-A6FFH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored; a ROM comment area (A700H-A77FH) where data such as program title and version is stored; a vector table area (A780H-A7A7H) where the start address of the timer interrupt processing (described below) is set; and a HW parameter area (A7A8H-A7FFFH) where parameters such as the start address and end address of the access-prohibited area are set.

The game ROM area is arranged in the following order: a game program area (8000H-8BDCH) where programs related to game progress are stored; a first unused area (8BDDH-8FFFH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored; a game data area (9000H-9976H) where data related to game progress is stored; and a second unused area (9977H-9FFFH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored.

The information ROM area is arranged in the following order: an information program area (A000H-A437H) where programs related to the gaming machine's win limit device are stored; an unused area (A438H-A47FH) where access is prohibited and where "0" is stored; and an information data area (A480H-A52EH) where data related to the gaming machine's win limit device is stored.

The memory area of main RAM 110c is arranged in the following order: a game RWM area (0000H-018FH) used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area (0190H-01FFH) used as a work area when executing information programs.

The gaming RWM area consists of a gaming work area (0000H-0128H) used by the gaming program as work, a first unused area (0129H-0171H) that is prohibited from access and stores "0", a gaming stack area (0172H-017FH) where the gaming program temporarily saves data being processed, and a second unused area (0180H-018FH) that is prohibited from access and stores "0", in that order.

The game work area contains, in order, a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for determining abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area (0190H-01E8H) used by information programs as work, an unused area (01E9H-01EAH) that is prohibited from access and stores "0", and an information stack area (01EBH-01FFH) where information programs temporarily save data being processed.

The information work area contains, in order, a gaming media acquisition information area for storing information related to the gaming machine 1's gaming media acquisition limit, and an error information area for storing information related to various error detections.

The memory map of the memory area consisting of the frame control ROM 120b and frame control RAM 120c of the frame control unit 120m is configured in a similar manner, so a description will be omitted. Simply replace the main control unit 110m, main ROM 110b, and main RAM 110c with frame control unit 120m, frame control ROM 120b, and frame control RAM 120c, respectively.

(Relationship between the gaming area and the information area)
8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program. Note that FIG. 8 is common to the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m.

As shown in Figure 8 (a), when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 110a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the game program, the information data area cannot be referenced. In processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the game data area cannot be referenced.

As shown in Figure 8 (b), when processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the gaming RWM area during processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the gaming RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the gaming program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program, and no problems will occur when returning from the information program to the game program.

(system configuration diagram)
FIG. 9 is a system configuration diagram (overall schematic diagram) of the gaming machine 1 and peripheral devices.

A combination of gaming machine 1 and dedicated unit 170 installed next to gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming parlor, and gaming becomes possible by connecting gaming machine 1 and dedicated unit 170. In addition, a hall computer and a management computer are installed in the gaming parlor's office.

If the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are not connected, or if the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 are connected but the dedicated unit 170 is powered off, it will be impossible to count game balls by operating the counting button 20 or to launch game balls by operating the launch handle 15.

The management computer is communicatively connected to the card company data center, which is communicatively connected to the gaming machine information center.

The gaming machine information center is equipped with a machine history server, a fraud monitoring server, a performance information server, and an addiction prevention server. It is also communicatively connected to the association (Nikkoso), which represents multiple gaming machine manufacturers related to pachinko machines, an addiction prevention organization, and a credit card company association. The gaming machine information center is also capable of collecting (centrally managing) the information described below from all gaming parlors where gaming machines 1 are installed.

Next, the details and flow of information (the above-mentioned "predetermined information") and the flow of goods will be explained.
Of the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, frame control board 120), the information to be sent to the gaming machine information center is encrypted by the U board 171. The encrypted and transmitted information can only be decrypted by the gaming machine information center. This makes the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" included in the information transmitted from the gaming machine 1 inaccessible to third parties. For example, it makes it difficult to obtain the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" information during the process of transmission to the gaming machine information center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" information from being illegally obtained and then installed in an unauthorized main control board 110 or frame control board 120 at an amusement parlor.

When the gaming medium lending button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated, a "ball lending signal" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → frame control board 120 ((1) in the diagram). When the frame control board 120 inputs the "ball lending signal," it updates the number of gaming balls (amount of gaming value) owned by the player, which is displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125.

When the count button 20 is operated by a player, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count display 135, is sent as "counting information" from the frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 ((2) in the figure) in order to store the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card inserted into the dedicated unit 170. When the dedicated unit 170 inputs the "counting information," it stores the number of game balls (game value) in a storage medium such as a membership card or visitor card (prepaid card). The number of game balls (game value) may also be stored in the hall computer in association with the identification information of the membership card or visitor card.

When power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, "gaming machine installation information" is sent in the following order: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → rental device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the diagram).

"Gaming machine installation information" refers to six pieces of information: the "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," and "main control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the main control unit 110m, and the "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number) attached to the frame control unit 120m. "Gaming machine installation information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, and it is ready for play (all interrupts are allowed in step S33 of the main processing described below), "HC/fraud monitoring information" is periodically sent in the following order: main control board 110 → frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the diagram).

"HC/fraud monitoring information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)" is information that primarily indicates the status of the gaming machine 1, such as information indicating a jackpot game, information indicating a high probability game state, information indicating an error occurring on the gaming machine 1, information indicating fraud occurring on the gaming machine 1, and information indicating that a gaming ball has entered one of the various winning slots (first starting slot 45, second starting slot 47, general winning slot 43, large winning slot 50). "HC/fraud monitoring information" will be explained in more detail later.

After power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, once it is ready for play (all interrupts are permitted in step S33 of the main processing described below), "gaming machine performance information" is periodically sent in the following order: frame control board 120 → lending device connection terminal board 100 → dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center ((2) (4) (7) in the diagram).

"Gaming machine performance information" refers mainly to information related to the ball output of gaming machine 1, and includes, for example, information indicating the total number of gaming balls fired, information indicating the total number of gaming balls acquired, information indicating the ratio of special features, information indicating the ratio of consecutive special features, and information indicating the maximum number of balls output. "Gaming machine performance information" will be explained in more detail later.

When a player's membership card is inserted, "player information related to addiction countermeasures" is sent in the following order: dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center → gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) ((4) and (7) in the diagram).

"Player information related to addiction countermeasures" includes player information stored on membership cards, gaming medium information stored on membership cards, information indicating game time, information indicating the number of times a player has played (for example, the number of visits to a gaming facility), information indicating the amount of money spent on gaming, and information on the gaming medium used for gaming. When the gaming machine information center (addiction countermeasure server) receives this information, it updates the player information corresponding to that information. In this way, acquiring and managing "player information related to addiction countermeasures" can help prevent players from becoming too addicted to gaming.

The dedicated unit 170 is equipped with an output terminal (not shown) for outputting to the hall computer, and outputs "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information" from this output terminal ((3) in the figure). "Hall computer information" includes information indicating a jackpot game, information indicating a high probability game state, information indicating the variable time reduction function is in operation, information indicating the number of winning balls in each winning slot, etc.

When a visitor card (prepaid card) is inserted into the dedicated unit 170, "prepaid card information" is sent from the dedicated unit 170 → management computer → card company data center ((4) (6) in the diagram). The card company data center collects the received "prepaid card information" and can check, for example, whether unregistered visitor cards (prepaid cards) are in circulation.

The gaming machine information center stores the received "gaming machine installation information," "HC/fraud monitoring information," and "gaming machine performance information" on its server, determines whether there are any abnormalities, and sends the "verification/security results" in the following order: gaming machine information center → management computer → dedicated unit 170 ((8) (5) in the diagram).

The gaming machine information center has a "machine history server," a "fraud monitoring server," a "performance information server," and an "addiction prevention server." When a gaming machine management control chip supplier provides a "main control chip" and a "frame control chip" to each gaming machine manufacturer ((12) in the diagram), and the gaming machine is manufactured by each gaming machine manufacturer (and becomes ready for shipment), the installation information, such as the above-mentioned "main control chip manufacturer code," "main control chip product code," "main control chip ID number" (serial number), "frame control chip manufacturer code," "frame control chip product code," and "frame control chip ID number" (serial number), as well as shipping information such as the shipping date and time, are registered in the "machine history server" ((11) in the diagram). Once this registration is complete, the gaming machine is shipped by each gaming machine manufacturer to the gaming parlor.

Similarly, when a U-board is manufactured by a U-board manufacturer (and becomes ready for shipment), the gaming machine information center registers the U-board's manufacturing information (e.g., serial number registration) and installation information with the "fraud monitoring server" ((10) in the diagram), and once this registration is complete, the U-board is shipped by the U-board manufacturer to the dedicated unit manufacturer ((9) in the diagram).

As a result, after a gaming machine is installed at an amusement facility, when "gaming machine installation information" is received, it can be compared with the shipping information registered in the "machine history server" to determine whether the "main control chip" and "frame control chip" of the gaming machine installed at the amusement facility are genuine (and determine whether there are any abnormalities).

If the "verification and security results" are normal, the U board 171 puts the gaming machine 1 into a playable state, but if the "verification and security results" are abnormal, it can put the gaming machine 1 into an unplayable state. This makes it possible to prevent attempts to illegally obtain winning balls by replacing the main control board 110 or frame control board 120 with illegal ones.

In addition to registering the installation and shipping information mentioned above, the "machine history server" also stores information on the movement of used machines between gaming parlors, and disposal information when gaming machines are discarded, allowing for detailed tracking of gaming machines from the time they are installed at a gaming parlor until they are discarded. This can help prevent illegal dumping of gaming machines.

In addition to registering the U-board manufacturing information and installation information described above, the "fraud monitoring server" also generates "security result information" indicating the above-mentioned "verification and security results," and generates "encryption keys and communication keys" to prevent tampering with the "security result information." This prevents tampering with the "security result information" during process (8) in the diagram.

The "fraud monitoring server" also stores information about fraud and errors that occur on gaming machine 1. For example, if a magnet detection error occurs on gaming machine 1, it receives an error code corresponding to the magnet detection error and "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating a fraud detection signal, thereby storing the fact that a magnet error has been detected on gaming machine 1.

The "performance information server" stores "display performance information (normal base value)" calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 and displayed on the frame control display 125, as well as gaming machine performance information calculated by the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 but not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In addition, the information stored in the "machine history server," "fraud monitoring server," and "performance information server" is sent to the association (Nikkoso) to which multiple gaming machine manufacturers belong. As a result, gaming machine 1 is placed under the management of the gaming machine information center and Nikkoso, and for this reason it is also called a "managed gaming machine."

The "addiction prevention server" stores the membership number, playing time, amount spent, and number of times played for each registered player, linking this information, and sends the stored information to the "addiction prevention agency." It may also be configured so that if the playing time, amount spent, or number of times played exceeds a specified value, the player will be unable to play.

Furthermore, when sending and receiving the above-mentioned information, it is preferable that the sending side record the date and time of transmission, and the receiving side record the date and time of reception. With this configuration, for example, when a gaming machine information center receives a "settings change signal" or "RWM clear signal" (HC/fraud monitoring information), it can check whether the reception time occurred during or outside the gaming facility's business hours, and monitor whether "settings changes" or "RWM clears" are being performed during business hours.

(Information transmission flow)
FIG. 10 is a diagram specifically explaining the flow of information transmission and reception described in FIG.

First, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 from the power supply board 160, the "verification phase" begins. In the "verification phase," the "main control chip ID number" is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120, and the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" are sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and the U board 171 encrypts the information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number."

Then, information related to the encrypted "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number" is sent to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, management computer, and card company data center.

When the gaming machine information center receives the encrypted information related to the "main control chip ID number" and "frame control chip ID number," it decrypts it and compares it with the installation information stored in the machine history server to determine whether or not the above-mentioned abnormalities exist.

Then, "security result information" indicating the "matching and security results" is generated, encrypted, and sent to the U board 171 via the card company data center, management computer, and U control unit 172.

When the U board 171 receives the "security result information," it decrypts it and checks for the presence of the above-mentioned abnormalities. If no abnormalities are found, it ends the "verification phase" and moves to the "status communication phase." If an abnormality is found, it does not move to the "status communication phase" and puts the gaming machine 1 in an unplayable state.

In the "status communication phase," first, a player sits down to play gaming machine 1, inserts valuables (banknotes or a membership card with gaming media stored on it), and operates the loan button. The number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one press of the loan button is transmitted from U control unit 172 to U board 171, and the number of loaned balls (e.g., 125 balls) is then transmitted from U board 171 to frame control board 120.

When the frame control board 120 receives the number of balls to be lent (e.g., 125 balls), it displays the number of balls to be lent (e.g., 125 balls) on the game ball count display 135. This allows game balls to be launched into the game area 5a when the launch handle 15 is rotated.

When the count button 20 is operated while the number of game balls is displayed on the game ball count display 135 as a result of playing a game, the counted number of balls is transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171. For example, if the count button 20 is operated when the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is 1000, the counted number of balls is transmitted as "1000."

Similarly, the number of counted balls is transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. Upon receiving the number of counted balls, the U control unit 172 stores the number of counted balls on the member card or visitor card.

The U control unit 172 allows the member card or visitor card to be returned to the player once the number of counted balls has been stored on the member card or visitor card. In other words, when the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated after the number of counted balls has been stored, the member card or visitor card can be returned to the player. On the other hand, even if the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated when the number of counted balls has not been stored (when the number is in the middle of being stored, or when the number has not been stored at all), the member card or visitor card will not be returned to the player. This prevents the player from leaving their seat (or leaving the facility) with game balls remaining in the gaming machine 1.

When the return button image on the display unit 174 is operated before the counted ball count has been stored, the U control unit 172 displays a notification on the display unit 174 urging the player to count, such as a message saying "Press the count button 20 to count." This makes it easier for players who are unfamiliar with the game to understand the operation method.

Note that the notification prompting the player to count is not limited to a display, but may also be audio, a lamp, or a combination of these. Notifications may also be made by the gaming machine 1. This makes the operation method easier to understand.

The number of game balls (game value amount) owned by the player, displayed on the game ball count display 135, is transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" every 300 ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and is then transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also know the number of game balls owned by the player.

The number of game balls fired in the gaming machine 1 (for example, game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a) is transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" every 300 ms from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171, and then from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also know the number of game balls fired by the player.

The number of prize balls earned by having game balls enter each prize slot (general prize slot 43, start slots 45 and 47, and large prize slot 50) in the gaming machine 1 is transmitted as "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms, and is then transmitted as "HC/fraud monitoring information" from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 every 300 ms, and is then transmitted from the U board 171 to the U control unit 172. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to also keep track of the number of prize balls earned in the gaming machine 1.

The dedicated unit 170 obtains the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls fired on the game machine 1, and the number of prize balls obtained by having game balls enter each winning slot on the game machine 1. Therefore, even if there is fraudulent manipulation of the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135, it can determine that the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 is not legitimate based on the separately obtained information on the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls.

The frame control board 120 periodically transmits "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)," and the dedicated unit 170 transmits "hall computer information" based on the "HC/fraud monitoring information." This allows the hall computer to grasp the status of the gaming machine 1 (during jackpot play, in high probability play, while the variable time reduction function is activated, and the number of winning balls in each winning slot).

The frame control board 120 transmits "gaming machine performance information" to the U board 171, and upon receiving the "gaming machine performance information," the U board 171 encrypts it and transmits it to the gaming machine information center via the U control unit 172, management computer, and card company data center. This allows the gaming machine information center to obtain information such as the total number of gaming balls fired, the total number of gaming balls acquired, the ratio of special features, the ratio of consecutive special features, and the maximum number of balls paid out.

When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 sends "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120 (installation information notification), and the frame control board 120 sends "gaming machine installation information" to the U board 171 every 300 ms (installation information). The U board 171 then encrypts the "gaming machine installation information" and finally transmits it to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive "gaming machine installation information" and constantly monitor whether the legitimate main control board 110 and frame control board 120 are installed.

The main control board 110 transmits "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. As described below, "HC/fraud monitoring information" includes "main control status 1," "main control status 2," "gaming machine error status," "fraud detection status 1," etc. Therefore, for example, information related to errors detected by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is also periodically transmitted in the "gaming machine error status" (error notification). The U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (error notification) received from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and ultimately transmits it to the gaming machine information center. It also transmits error-related information to the gaming facility's management computer. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive information related to errors occurring in gaming machines and constantly monitor errors occurring in the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. Additionally, the management computer can also receive information about errors that occur on gaming machines, allowing the gaming establishment to quickly grasp the information about the error and resolve the error promptly. The same process applies to "fraud information" sent in "Fraud Detection Status 1."

In addition, in "Main Control State 1" and "Main Control State 2," for example, the status of the gaming machine (during a jackpot, in a high probability gaming state) is periodically transmitted. Then, the U board 171 encrypts the "HC/fraud monitoring information" and ultimately transmits it to the gaming machine information center. This allows the gaming machine information center to periodically receive the status of the gaming machine, and, for example, to recognize the possibility of fraud if it frequently receives information indicating a jackpot.

Next, we will explain in detail the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 11 to 14.

(Jackpot determination table)
Figure 11(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 11(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information obtained based on the entry (entry) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 11(a) and 11(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a references the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 11(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in Figure 11(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, probability state, and random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 11(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 jackpot determination random number values from "100" to "299" are determined to be "jackpots." Any other jackpot determination random number values other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "misses."

In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table uses four setting values, but this is not limited to this; six setting values, two setting values, or one setting value may also be used, or the setting function may not be included.

In addition, the special symbol determination information obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 is stored in the first special symbol determination information holding memory area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol determination information obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 47 is stored in the second special symbol determination information holding memory area of the main RAM 110c. When a jackpot determination is made, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information holding memory area or the second special symbol determination information holding memory area is shifted to the corresponding special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the shifted special symbol determination information is used to make a jackpot determination.

The first special symbol determination information reserve memory area is divided into a first memory section through a fourth memory section, and reserve icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in these first memory section through fourth memory section are displayed in the first display section 70B1 through the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reserve icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is divided into a first memory section through a fourth memory section, and reserve icons corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in these first memory section through fourth memory section are displayed in the first display section 70D1 through the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserve icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 12(a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 12(b) is a special symbol determination table for a loss for determining the type of special symbol when a loss is determined.

As shown in Figures 12(a) and 12(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, the random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol stop data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are special losing symbols that will not result in a jackpot. The special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that will result in the first jackpot game, the special symbols "02" and "05" are special jackpot symbols that will result in the second jackpot game, and the special symbols "03" and "06" are special jackpot symbols that will result in the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game," the large prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for two seconds. This round of play is executed up to six times. Note that in the round of play, if a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize opening 50, even before the opening time has elapsed, one round of play ends. After the first jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a low-probability, non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game," the large prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for two seconds. This round game is played up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) until the special symbol variable display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, given the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game," the large prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then closed for two seconds. This round game is played up to four times. After the third jackpot game ends, the machine is set to a high-probability time-saving game state (probability variable game state) until the special symbol variation display is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, given the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in either Figure 12(a) or (b), and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and the special symbol stop data and special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 12 is that the types of special symbols for big wins and big loses remain the same regardless of the setting value. This allows players to play with peace of mind without complicating the gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figure 12 is that the selection rates for various special jackpot symbols and various losing symbols remain constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Special chart variation pattern determination table)
Figure 13(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-shortened state for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time-shortened state, and Figure 13(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-shortened state for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the time-shortened state.

As shown in Figure 13, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that will display the fluctuation, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) or the number of second special symbols reserved (U2), a random number value for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as the determination result, the special symbol fluctuation time, and a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates the special symbol fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the time during which the special symbol varies.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) or the number of reserved second special symbols (U2), and the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as will be described later, the presentation control board 130 determines the content (presentation mode) of the variable presentation involving the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a in accordance with the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.). Therefore, for reference, the rightmost column of the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 lists the presentation content that can be executed in the variable presentation.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table in Figure 13, "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," "ultra-shortened fluctuation," and "long fluctuation," mean that the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

Furthermore, "reach" refers to a variation pattern that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of effect symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect symbols 70a change. For example, if the combination of three effect symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of effect symbols 70a that indicates a jackpot, this refers to a situation in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the effect symbol 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the effect symbol 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

In addition, "normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central area. This is the reach effect with the lowest chance of a jackpot.

In addition, "SP Reach" and "Special SP Reach" are super reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after an extended effect is executed from a normal reach effect. For example, the two effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special reach effect is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Furthermore, a "Special SP Reach" executes an effect that is more special than an "SP Reach".

In addition, "SPSP Reach" and "SPSP '7' Reach" are special reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than Super Reach, and are executed after a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from a normal reach effect, after which the three effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, creating a reach effect that is more special than an "SP Reach" using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In an "SPSP Reach", a reach effect is executed with effect symbols 70a other than "7", and in an "SPSP '7' Reach", a reach effect is executed with the "7" symbol.

In addition, a "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then all three identical effect symbols 70a fluctuate slowly, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70, creating a more special reach effect (a reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than an "SPSP reach" or "SPSP "7" reach."

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that the type of special chart variation pattern determined remains the same regardless of the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

A second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that the selection ratio for each special chart variation pattern remains the same regardless of the setting value. This makes it difficult to discern the setting value from the special chart variation pattern, making it possible to provide fair play.

A third feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode, shortened variation is more likely to be determined as the variation pattern for the first special symbol, whereas when the number of reserved second special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during non-time-saving mode, shortened variation is not determined as the variation pattern for the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol variation display when hitting left compared to hitting right during non-time-saving mode, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, a (super) shortened variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, whereas if the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time-saving state, a (long) shortened variation is more likely to be determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the special symbol variation display when hitting right compared to hitting left during the time-saving state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Pre-determination table)
Figure 14(a) is a pre-determination table for the non-time-shortened state for pre-determining (pre-reading) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45 during the non-time-shortened state, and Figure 14(b) is a pre-determination table for the time-shortened state for pre-determining (pre-reading) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47 during the time-shortened state.

As shown in Figure 14, the advance determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting gate), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned variation pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol variation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in Figure 14, determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and sends a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

Next, modified examples of the specifications of the gaming machine 1 will be described using Figures 15 and 16. In this embodiment, as described in Figures 11 and 12 and in the description of the gaming states, a so-called "probability loop type" is used. A "probability loop type" is a type in which, for example, if a "jackpot" is determined in a "normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state)" and a special symbol "02" or "03" is determined, the game enters a "high-probability gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state)" after the jackpot game ends, but thereafter, if the special symbol "04" (or "01") is not determined in the "high-probability gaming state" and a special symbol "05" or special symbol "06" is determined, the "high-probability gaming state" continues.

Figure 15 shows the so-called "Type 1/Type 2" type. The "Type 1/Type 2" type has two game states: a "normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is 1/199), as shown in (1), the game transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (8 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "Jackpot Game 1 (4 Rounds)" ends, the game transitions to "Time-Shortened Game State 1." The maximum number of times this "Time-Shortened Game State 1" can be played is "1." However, during "Time-Shortened Game State 1," it is possible to have a game ball enter the second starting hole 47 and store special symbol determination information in the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information holding memory area, and a maximum of "5" "jackpot determinations" and "small jackpot determinations" can be made using the special symbol determination information obtained by having a game ball enter the second starting hole 47.

On the other hand, when "Jackpot Game 2 (8 rounds)" ends, the game transitions to "Time-saving Game State 2." The maximum number of times this "Time-saving Game State 2" can be played is "7." However, during "Time-saving Game State 2," it is possible to have a game ball enter the second start port 47 and store special symbol determination information in the first to fourth memory units of the second special symbol determination information holding memory area, and a maximum of "jackpot determination" and "small symbol determination" can be performed "11" times using the special symbol determination information obtained by having a game ball enter the second start port 47.

The detailed control flow is omitted, but if the result of executing the "big hit test" is a "big hit," then the "small hit test" is not executed; if the result of executing the "big hit test" is not a "big hit," then the "small hit test" is executed; and if the "small hit test" does not determine a "small hit," then the result is a "miss."

The special symbol determination information obtained by having a gaming ball enter the second starting hole 47 is determined to be a "big win" with a probability of, for example, 1/199, and if it is not determined to be a "big win", it is determined to be a "small win" with a probability of, for example, 1/8. Note that the special symbol determination information obtained by having a gaming ball enter the first starting hole 45 may be such that a "small win" cannot be won, or may be so difficult to win.

Between "Time-Shortened Play State 1" and "Time-Shortened Play State 2," "Time-Shortened Play State 2" has a higher upper limit on the number of times the time-shortened play state can be played, making it more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the image display device 70, etc., displays "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" when in "Time-Shortened Play State 1," and "RUSH Mode" when in "Time-Shortened Play State 2," allowing the player to identify the advantages and disadvantages from the display format.

The game state during "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 1" until the first variable display ends, and "Normal Game State" from the start of the second variable display. The game state during "RUSH Mode" is "Time-saving Game State 2" until the seventh variable display ends, and "Normal Game State" from the start of the eighth variable display.

If a "small win" is determined during the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," as shown in (2), the game will transition to "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)." However, the first round of "Big Win Game 3 (4 rounds)" is a small win game, and if the game ball can be placed in a "special area" located inside the big win opening during the small win game, the big win game (rounds 2 to 4) will be executed. On the other hand, if the game ball cannot be placed in the "special area" during the small win game, the big win game (rounds 2 to 4) will not be executed.

Furthermore, if a "jackpot" is determined during "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," the game will transition to "Jackpot Game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). Then, when "Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)" and "Jackpot Game 4 (8 rounds)" are completed, the game will transition to "RUSH Mode."

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode," "RUSH Acquisition Challenge Mode" ends and the game transitions to "Normal Mode."

If a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode," the game will transition to "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" as shown in (2), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game will transition to "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" as shown in (1). Then, when "jackpot game 3 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 4 (8 rounds)" ends, the game will transition to "RUSH mode."

On the other hand, if neither a "big win" nor a "small win" is determined during "RUSH mode," "RUSH mode" ends and the game transitions to "normal mode."

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probable loop type" described above, but may also be a "type 1/type 2" like this.

Figure 16 shows the so-called "small win rush type." The "small win rush type" has three game states: "normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state)," "time-saving game state (low probability time-saving game state)," and "high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state)." When a "jackpot" is determined in the "normal game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), the game transitions to "jackpot game 1 (4 rounds)" or "jackpot game 2 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

When "Jackpot Game 1 (4 rounds)" ends, the game will transition to a "time-saving game state." The maximum number of times this "time-saving game state" can be played is, for example, 50 times. When "Jackpot Game 2 (16 rounds)" ends, the game will transition to a "high probability game state."

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "time-saving game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/319"), as shown in (1), the game will transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate. When "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" ends, the game will transition to the "time-saving game state," and when "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" ends, the game will transition to the "high probability game state." Furthermore, if the variable display is executed "50" times without a "jackpot" being determined, the "time-saving game state" will end and the game will transition to the "normal game state."

When a "jackpot" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the jackpot probability is "1/77"), as shown in (2), the game will transition to "jackpot game 4 (2 rounds)" or "jackpot game 3 (16 rounds)" at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, if a "small win" is determined in the "high probability game state" (for example, the small win probability is "1/2.5"), the game transitions to the "small win game" as shown in (3). In this "small win game," the small win large prize opening is open for a predetermined period of time, and for example, in "one" "small win game," approximately three game balls can be placed in the small win large prize opening. Then, after the "small win game" ends, the game transitions to the "high probability game state."

For example, the probability of a small win is 1/2.5, making it very easy to win. After the "small win game" ends, the "high probability game state" resumes, so in the "high probability game state," it is advantageous for the player to continue winning the small win probability of 1/2.5 without winning the big win probability of 1/77, for example, because this allows the player to increase the number of game balls they own through the "small win game."

The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to the "probable loop type" described above, but may also be this "small win rush type."

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is not limited to being a "probability loop type," "type 1/2 type," or "small prize rush type," but may also be a so-called "ST probability type" in which the upper limit number of times in the "high probability game state (high probability time-shortened game state)" is set to, for example, "100," or a so-called "probability drop type" in which the "high probability game state (high probability time-shortened game state)" drops to the "normal game state (low probability non-time-shortened game state)" or the "time-shortened game state (low probability time-shortened game state)" with a predetermined probability.

Next, we will explain the details of the "Gaming Machine Installation Information" and "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" using Figures 17 to 22.

Figure 17 shows a list of messages related to communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the message name "Gaming machine installation information notification," the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120," the command "0x01," and the message summary "Notify gaming machine installation information." No. 2 has the message name "Gaming machine installation information response," the transmission direction "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110," the command "0x11," and the message summary "Reply with gaming machine installation information receipt results." No. 3 has the message name "Gaming machine information notification," the transmission direction "Main control board 110 → Frame control board 120," the command "0x02," and the message summary "Notify gaming machine information." Note that "gaming machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information." No. Message 4 has the message name "Gaming machine information response", transmission direction "Frame control board 120 → Main control board 110", command "0x12", and message summary "Reply with gaming machine information reception results and frame control status."

The "Gaming Machine Installation Information" is structured as shown in Figure 18. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x19". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x01". No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and the content "Fixed 0". No. 4 has the data name "Gaming Machine Type" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 5 has the data name "Main Control Chip ID Number" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 6 has the data name "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Main Control Chip Product Code" related to the gaming machine installation information, the content of which will be described later. 8 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

As shown in Figure 18, data name No. 4, "Machine Type," consists of one byte, with Bits 3 to 0 indicating the type of machine. If Bits 3 to 0 are "0001," it indicates a "pachinko machine." If Bits 3 to 0 are "0010," it indicates a "slot machine." If Bits 3 to 0 are "0011," it indicates an "arrange ball machine." If Bits 3 to 0 are "0100," it indicates a "jankyu machine." The rest of the bits are unused.

Bits 6 to 4 indicate the union's organizational classification; if Bits 6 to 4 are "000," it indicates the "Nikkoso" (an organization mainly related to pachinko machines); if Bits 6 to 4 are "001," it indicates the "Nichidenkyo" (an organization mainly related to slot machines); any other bits are unused.

Bit 7 indicates the management medium; if Bit 7 is "0", it indicates a gaming ball, and if Bit 7 is "1", it indicates a gaming medal. For example, if gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine, Bit 7 will be "0", Bit 6 to Bit 4 will be "000", and Bit 3 to Bit 0 will be "0001", which will be 1-byte data.

The "main control chip ID number" is omitted from the diagram, but the ID for each main control chip manufacturer is transmitted via telegram. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, and if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The "Gaming Machine Installation Information Response" is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 sends the "Gaming Machine Installation Information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x11". No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and the content "Fixed at 0". No. 4 has the data name "Gaming Machine Installation Information Receipt Result", and if the content is "0x00", it means "Receipt OK", and if the content is "0x01", it means "Ball Removal State", indicating that the frame control board 120 is in a ball removal state. No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from the message length to the data section". Note that the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives the content "0x00" (reception OK) as the "gaming machine installation information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

The "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" is structured as shown in Figure 19. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x0B-0x15." No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x02." No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and the content "Sequence Number (0-255)." No. 4 has the data name "Main Control Status 1" and the content is Bit 0 "Jackpot 1," Bit 1 "Jackpot 2," Bit 2 "Jackpot 3," Bit 3 "Machine Status Signal 1," Bit 4 "Machine Status Signal 2," Bit 5 "Machine Status Signal 3," Bit 6 "Machine Status Signal 4," and Bit 7 "Unused." For example, during the execution of a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot 1," Bit 0 and Bit 1 are ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 and Bit 1 of main control state 1 are ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 5 has the data name "Main Control State 2" and its contents are Bit 0 "During jackpot + time-saving or advantageous state", Bit 1 "During high probability", Bit 2 "During time-saving or advantageous state", and Bits 3 to 7 "Unused". For example, during a high probability game state, Bit 1 is ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 1 of Main Control State 2 is ON ("1") is ultimately transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

No. 6 has the data name "Gaming Machine Error Status", and the contents are as follows: Bits 0 to 5 are "Error Code", Bit 6 is "0 = Frame Control, 1 = Main Control" (0 means an error detected by the frame control board 120, 1 means an error detected by the main control board 110), and Bit 7 is "0 = Alert Only, 1 = Alert + Output to Hall Controller" (0 means only an error alert is issued, 1 means an error alert is issued and also an output to the hall controller). For example, if an error corresponding to Bit 0 has occurred, Bit 0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 indicating the gaming machine error status is ON ("1") will ultimately be sent to the gaming machine information center.

No. 7 has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 1" and its contents are Bit 0 "Settings Change Signal", Bit 1 "Settings Check Signal", Bit 2 "RWM Clear Signal", Bit 3 "Fraud Detection Signal 1", Bit 4 "Fraud Detection Signal 2", Bit 5 "Fraud Detection Signal 3", Bit 6 "Winning Limit Device Activated Signal", and Bit 7 "Unused". For example, if the settings are being changed (as described below), Bit 0 will be ON ("1"), and the fact that Bit 0 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is ON ("1") will ultimately be sent to the gaming machine information center.

No. 8 has the data name "Number of prize balls resulting from device activation" and the content "Number of prize balls resulting from device activation" (for example, the number of prize balls resulting from a game ball entering the second starting slot 47). No. 9 has the data name "Number of prize balls resulting from continuous device activation" and the content "Number of prize balls resulting from the activation of the continuous device activation device" (for example, the number of prize balls resulting from a game ball entering the large prize slot 50).

No. 10 has the gaming information data name "Number of gaming information items" and the content "Number of type information and count information items (n) (n) = 0 to 5 (variable length)." No. 11 has the gaming information data name "Type information 1" and the content "Type information 1." No. 12 has the gaming information data name "Count information 1" and the content "Count information 1."

In the first example, if one game ball enters the first starting gate 45, the count information is "data indicating the first starting gate 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." In the second example, if one game ball enters the major prize gate 50, the count information is "data indicating the major prize gate 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." In the third example, if one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, the count information is "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." These data are then ultimately transmitted via telegram to the gaming machine information center.

No. 13 has the data name "Type Information n" and the content "Type Information n" related to the game information. No. 14 has the data name "Count Information n" and the content "Count Information n" related to the game information. No. 15 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from the message length to the data section."

Figure 20 is a diagram explaining the details of the above-mentioned "Main Control State 1," "Main Control State 2," and "Fraud Detection State 1."

"Main Control State 1" is Bit 0, named "Jackpot 1", with details "Jackpot 1 Information: Set to 1 during the jackpot being reported", Bit 1, named "Jackpot 2", with details "Jackpot 2 Information: Set to 1 during all jackpots", Bit 2, named "Jackpot 3", with details "Jackpot 3 Information: Set to 1 during states such as small jackpot rush and special time-saving", Bit 3, named "Gaming Machine Status Signal 1", with details "Gaming Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 while Gaming Machine Status Signal 1 is ON", Bit 4, named "Gaming Machine Status Signal 2", with details "Gaming Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 while Gaming Machine Status Signal 2 is ON", Bit 5, named "Gaming Machine Status Signal 3", with details "Gaming Machine Status Signal: Set to 1 while Gaming Machine Status Signal 3 is ON", and Bit 6, named "Gaming Machine Status Signal 4", with details "Gaming Machine Status Signal "Set to 1 while gaming machine status signal 4 is ON", Bit 7's name is "Unused" and its details are "Fixed to 0".

"Gaming machine status signal 1" corresponds to the first external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the hall controller output unit 173, "gaming machine status signal 2" corresponds to the second external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the hall controller output unit 173, "gaming machine status signal 3" corresponds to the third external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the hall controller output unit 173, and "gaming machine status signal 4" corresponds to the fourth external terminal board pulse output signal terminal of the hall controller output unit 173.

The small win rush is as described in Figure 16. Special time-saving modes include, for example, a time-saving game mode (so-called ceiling time-saving mode) that activates as a rescue when a low-probability game mode has been played a specified number of times (for example, 1000 variable displays) since the end of a big win game, and a time-saving game mode (so-called symbol time-saving mode) that activates with a predetermined probability when the big win determination is determined to be a miss.

In "Main Control State 2," Bit 0 is named "Jackpot + Time-saving or Advantageous State" with the details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during jackpot, time-saving, or advantageous state," Bit 1 is named "High Probability" with the details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during high probability," Bit 2 is named "Time-saving or Advantageous State" with the details "Game Status Information: Set to 1 during time-saving or advantageous state," and Bits 3 to 7 are named "Unused" with the details "Fixed to 0."

For "Fraud Detection Status 1," Bit 0 is named "Settings Changing Signal," with details "0 = Normal, 1 = Settings Changing," Bit 1 is named "Settings Checking Signal," with details "0 = Normal, 1 = Settings Checking," Bit 2 is named "RWM Clear Signal," with details "0 = Normal, 1 = RWM Clear (RWM Initialization) Occurred," Bit 3 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 1," with details "Urgency: Weak, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormality Occurred," Bit 4 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 2," with details "Urgency: Medium, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormality Occurred," Bit 5 is named "Fraud Detection Signal 3," with details "Urgency: High, 0 = Normal, 1 = Abnormality Occurred," Bit 6 is named "Earning Limit Device Activated Signal," with details "0 = Inactive, 1 = Active," and Bit 7 is named "Unused," with details "Fixed to 0."

Figure 21 is a diagram explaining the details of the "game information" mentioned above.

"Game Information" consists of two bytes: "Type Information (1 byte)" and "Count Information (1 byte)." Furthermore, "Type Information (1 byte)" consists of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)."

For example, "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" means that Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000" have the type name "Unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001" have the type name "Starting gate prize" and the content "Notification that a prize has been won at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010" have the type name "Large prize gate prize due to activation of special electric device" and the content "Notification that a prize has been won at the large prize gate", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011" have the type name "Prize gate prize" and the content "Prize Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0100" are type names "winning at all start gates" and content "notifying passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0101", "0110", "0111", and "1000" are type names "unused" and content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1001" are type names "number of times the pattern has been determined" and content "notifying the number of times the pattern related to the game has changed", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1010" are type names " Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1011” are type names “unused” and content “-”, Bit 4 to Bit 7 “1100” are type names “number of times of special feature (number of times of opening of large prize opening)” and content “notify of opening of large prize opening when special feature continuous operating device is not in operation, when you want to use the number of times of opening of large prize opening at the time of small win as the start number” (see small win game for the first round of “Small win game 3 (4 rounds)” in Figure 15). Bits 4 to 7 "1101" have the type name "Passing through a specific area" and the content "Notification of passing through a specific area" (see "Specific area" in Figure 15), Bits 4 to 7 "1110" have the type name "External terminal board pulse output" and the content "Instruction to output a pulse from the dedicated unit (hall capacitor output section 173)", and Bits 4 to 7 "1111" have the type name "Performance information status notification" and the content "Notification of the status required to calculate performance information".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Start Gate Winning," the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" transmits one of the following (start gate number) bits from Bit 0 to Bit 3: "0001" (win at start gate 1), "0010" (win at start gate 2), or "0011" (win at start gate 3) (bits other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at the large prize slot due to the activation of a special electric device," then the content (large prize slot number) sent will be either "0001" (win at large prize slot 1) or "0010" (win at large prize slot 2) for Bits 0 to 3 (unused). For example, if a game ball wins at large prize slot 50, type information (1 byte) will be sent with the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0010" and the "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001."

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning at a Prize Slot," the content (winning slot number) is transmitted as one of the following bits (Bits 0 to 3): "0001" (winning at prize slot 1), "0010" (winning at prize slot 2), ... "1111" (winning at prize slot 15) ("0000" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the general winning slot 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, type information (1 byte) is transmitted with the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0011" and the "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001."

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates," the contents transmitted are Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (winning or passing) (others are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted, and if a game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "0100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Symbols Confirmed," then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the number of times the game-related symbols (special symbols, normal symbols)) are transmitted as content (others are unused). For example, if the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "1001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted, and similar type information is transmitted when the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. Similarly, similar type information is transmitted when a normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Jackpots," then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (the continuous operation device for the bonus item is activated) is transmitted as the content (the others are unused). For example, if the first jackpot (see Figure 12) is achieved, type information (1 byte) consisting of "1010" for the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "0001" for the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Bonus Features (Number of Big Win Gate Openings)," then Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (Bonus Feature 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if "Big Win Game 3" described in Figure 15 is executed, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "1100" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing Through a Specific Area," Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001" (Specific Area 1) is transmitted as the content (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Jackpot Game 3" described in Figure 15 is executed and the gaming ball passes through a specific area, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "1101" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" is transmitted.

Note that in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in Figure 22, if Bits 4 to 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bits 0 to 3 are "0001," it transmits the message that the "number of times the specific area has been passed" is "1" (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1 of Figure 22, when a gaming ball passes through specific area 1 once, gaming information "0xD101" is transmitted, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) with "Data type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "1101" and "Data number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001," and count information (1 byte) with "Unused (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0000" and "Number of passes (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001" (1 time).

If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "external terminal board pulse output", the content indicates that a pulse is output from the dedicated unit (hall capacitor output section 173).
If the "data type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "performance information status notification," the status (fixed to 1) required to calculate the performance information is transmitted as the content (others unused).

In addition, regarding the count information for the "Performance Information Status Notification," as shown in Figure 22, Bits 4 to 7 are "fixed to 0," Bit 0 indicates "base," with "0" indicating "low base" (e.g., low-probability non-time-saving game state), and "1" indicating "high base" (e.g., low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state). Bit 1 indicates "jackpot," with "0" indicating "normal" (e.g., low-probability non-time-saving game state), and "1" indicating "jackpot." Bit 2 indicates "high probability," with "0" indicating "low probability" (e.g., low-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), and "1" indicating "high probability" (e.g., high-probability time-saving game state). Bit 3 is unused.

As shown in Example 2 in Figure 22, when the status changes to high base, game information "0xF101" is sent, which consists of type information (1 byte) with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "1111" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001", and count information (1 byte) with "Unused (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0000" and "Status Flag" Bit 0 set to "1" (Bits 1 to 3 set to "0").

The "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information Response" in Figure 22 is a response from the frame control board 120 to the main control board 110 after the main control board 110 sends "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" to the frame control board 120. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x12". No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and the content "Communication Sequence Number (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information Receipt Result" and the content "0x00", which indicates "Receipt OK". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "Addition result from message length to data section". Note that the main control board 110 will not enter a playable state unless it receives "0x00" (received OK) as the "HC/fraud monitoring information receipt result" from the frame control board 120. This will be explained in more detail later using a flowchart.

Next, a list of functions and implementation areas of the gaming machine will be explained using Figures 23 and 24. The "usage area" corresponds to the "game area" described in Figures 7 and 8, and the "outside the use area" corresponds to the "information area" described in Figures 7 and 8.
In the figure, "◎" indicates a mounting area, "◯" indicates a mountable area, and "×" indicates an area where mounting is not possible.

For No. 1 "Function for controlling game execution," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of use area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and the "Function for controlling game execution" corresponds to, for example, the processing executed in the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 2 "Control the gaming state," the "Usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside the usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "Outside the usage area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," and "control the gaming state" corresponds to the function of controlling the above-mentioned "normal gaming state," "time-limited gaming state," and "high-probability gaming state."

For No. 3 "Control related to launch," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Outside of the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of the use area" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to launch" corresponds to the control for launching the game ball into the game area 5a.

For No. 4 "Generation of random numbers for internal lottery drawing," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of use area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Generation of random numbers for internal lottery drawing" corresponds to the generation of random numbers used in each process executed in the "Main control board timer interrupt process" described below.

For No. 5 "Winning game ball detection and prize ball payout," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of usage area" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Winning game ball detection and prize ball payout" corresponds to steps S200 and S500 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 6 "Control related to special symbol display device," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area," and "Outside of use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to special symbol display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 7 "Control related to special electric props," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of the usage area" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to special electric props" corresponds to step S340 of the "Special chart special electric control processing" described below.

For No. 8 "Control related to normal symbol display device," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of use area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to normal symbol display device" corresponds to steps S700 and S750 of the "Main control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 9 "Control related to normal electric props," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Outside of the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of the use area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Control related to normal electric props" corresponds to step S250 of the "Input control processing" described below.

For No. 10 "Other control related to game execution," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Outside of use area" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m."

For No. 11 "Function to control the game ball count display device," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside of the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Function to control the game ball count display device" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 12 "Electromagnetically record the number of game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Usage area," "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside of the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Electromagnetically record the number of game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball number update process" described below.

For No. 13 "Display the number of game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Display the number of game balls" corresponds to steps W650 and W700 of the "Frame control board timer interrupt processing" described below.

For No. 14 "Increment the number of loaned game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside of the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Increment the number of loaned game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 15 "Subtract the number of counted game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Subtract the number of counted game balls" corresponds to the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 16 "Subtract the number of launched game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Subtract the number of launched game balls" corresponds to steps W301 and W302 of the "Frame control board game ball count update process" described below.

For No. 17 "Incrementing the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not fired onto the game board and returned," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage Area," "Outside of Use Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Incrementing the number of game balls (foul balls) that were not fired onto the game board and returned" corresponds to steps W303 and W304 of the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Count Update Processing" described below.

For No. 18 "Increment the number of paid-out game balls," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of use area" and "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are "×." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Increment the number of paid-out game balls" corresponds to steps W305 to W311 of the "Frame control board game ball count update process" described below.

For No. 19 "Initializing the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of use area" and "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Initializing the number of game balls with the game ball count clear button" corresponds to the process in which the frame control unit 120m clears the number of game balls when an input is made from the game ball count clear switch 121 while power is being supplied.

For No. 20, "Function to control communication with game ball and other lending devices," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of use area" and "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and the "Function to control communication with game ball and other lending devices" corresponds to control related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 21 "VL power supply monitoring," the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked "○," while the "usage area," "outside of use area" and "outside of use area" of the "main control unit 110m" are marked "×." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and "VL power supply monitoring" corresponds to the power supply for connection confirmation input from the dedicated unit 170.

For No. 22 "Communication control, communication timer management," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Usage area," "Outside of use area" and "Outside of use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Communication control, communication timer management" corresponds to time management related to communication with the dedicated unit 170.

No. 23: Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Performance Information)" message, the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎", and the "Usage Area", "Outside of Use Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X". In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Performance Information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W507 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

No. 24: Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Installation Information)" message, the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎", and the "Usage Area", "Outside of Use Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X". Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (Gaming Machine Installation Information)" message corresponds to the processing of steps W505 and W509 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

No. 25: Regarding the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message, the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎", and the "Usage Area", "Outside of Use Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X". In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m", and the generation and transmission of the "Gaming Machine Information Notification (HC/Fraud Monitoring Information)" message corresponds to the processing of step W513 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Information Notification Processing" described below.

For No. 26 "Counting notification message generation and transmission," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of usage area" and "Outside of usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Counting notification message generation and transmission" corresponds to step W567 of the "Frame control board game ball counting process" described below.

For No. 27 "Receive Loan Notification," the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage Area," "Outside of Use Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and "Receive Loan Notification" corresponds to step W601 of the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Loan Processing" described below.

For No. 28 "Generate and send a loan receipt result response message," the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Usage area," "Outside of usage area" and "Outside of usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and "Generate and send a loan receipt result response message" corresponds to steps W609 and W610 of the "Frame control board game ball loan processing" described below.

For No. 29 "Communication control between main control unit and frame control unit," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with a "◎," while the "Outside of the use area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Outside of the use area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m," and corresponds to all processing related to communications between the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m (for example, "Gaming machine installation information notification" and "Gaming machine installation information response" in "Main control board main processing").

For No. 30 "Compilation of gaming machine performance information," the "outside of the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside of the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "x." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside of the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and "compilation of gaming machine performance information" corresponds to the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

Note that No. 30 to No. 38 are data for one day from when the gaming machine 1 is powered on to when it is powered off, and the data starts to be tallied when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and is cleared when it is powered off. In other words, these are different from the values calculated in the "frame control board display performance information calculation process" described below.
Furthermore, the aggregated data is not displayed on a display (for example, the frame control display 125) or the like, but is sent to the gaming machine information center and shared and managed with the Nikkoso.

For No. 31 "Total Number of Balls Fired," the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Outside the Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Total Number of Balls Fired" corresponds to step W451 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described below.

For No. 32 "Total Number of Gained Game Balls," the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Outside of Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside of the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Total Number of Gained Game Balls" corresponds to step W452 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described below.

For No. 33 "Ball payout rate," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "x." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "ball payout rate" corresponds to step W453 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 34 "Number of Game Balls Acquired Per Minute (Low Base)," the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Outside of Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside of the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Number of Game Balls Acquired Per Minute (Low Base)" corresponds to step W454 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described below.

For No. 35 "Gem Ratio," the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Outside of Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed outside of the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Gem Ratio" corresponds to step W455 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described below.

For No. 36 "Continuous Gadget Ratio," the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," while the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Outside the Use Area," and "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the "Continuous Gadget Ratio" corresponds to step W456 of the "Frame Control Board Gaming Machine Performance Information Calculation Process" described below.

For No. 37 "Number of times the continuous operation device for the special feature has been activated," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "x." Note that in this embodiment, the function is executed outside the "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m," and the "number of times the continuous operation device for the special feature has been activated" corresponds to step W457 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 38 "Maximum ball payout," the "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is marked with a "◎," and the "use area" of the "main control unit 110m," "outside the use area," and "use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are marked with an "x." Note that in this embodiment, this function is executed outside the use area of the "frame control unit 120m," and "maximum ball payout" corresponds to step W458 of the "frame control board gaming machine performance information calculation process" described below.

For No. 39 "Generation of Gaming Machine Installation Information," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." Specifically, the following information No. 40 to No. 42 is generated in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," and the following information No. 43 to No. 45 is generated in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Unit 120m" transmits a total of six pieces of information, including information No. 40 to No. 42 received from the "Main Control Unit 110m" and information No. 43 to No. 45 generated by itself, to the U board 171 (and ultimately to the gaming machine information center). In other words, "generating gaming machine installation information" corresponds to step S5 of the "main control board main processing" described below, and steps W505 and W509 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification processing" described below.

For No. 40 "Main Control Chip ID Number," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with a circle, while the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an X (excluded). In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip ID Number" will be described later in Figure 18.

For No. 41 "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with a circle, while the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an X (Excluded). In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code" will be described later in Figure 18.

For No. 42 "Main Control Chip Product Code," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" for the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with a circle, while the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" for the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an X (Excluded). In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Main Control Chip Product Code" will be described later in Figure 18.

For No. 43 "Frame Control Chip ID Number," the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip ID Number" will be described later in Figure 50.

For No. 44 "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with a circle, while the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an X (Excluded). In this embodiment, this function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip Manufacturer Code" will be described later in Figure 50.

For No. 45 "Frame Control Chip Product Code," the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with "× (Excluded)." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." The "Frame Control Chip Product Code" will be described later in Figure 50.

For No. 46 "Generation of HC/Fraud Monitoring Information," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" for the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" for the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "Use Area" for the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" for the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are used. This is explained in more detail below.

For No. 47 "Number of Game Balls," the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "X." The "Number of Game Balls" refers to the "balls in possession" of the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." For example, this corresponds to the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Number Update Process" described below.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the implementable "main control unit 110m." Of course, the function may be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," but since this is achieved by transmitting information related to the "number of game balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m," it can be said that, in consideration of the control load, it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

For No. 48 "Number of Balls Fired," the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "X." The "Number of Balls Fired" refers to the number of game balls fired by the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." For example, this corresponds to the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Number Update Process" described below.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the implementable "main control unit 110m." Of course, the function may be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m," but since this is achieved by transmitting information related to the "number of shot balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m," it can be said that, in consideration of the control load, it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

Regarding No. 49 "Total Number of Prize Balls," the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "X." The "Total Number of Prize Balls" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and in this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." For example, this corresponds to the "Frame Control Board Game Ball Number Update Process" described below.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the function is not executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m" that can be implemented. Of course, the function may be executed in the "usage area" of the "main control unit 110m", but since this is achieved by sending information related to the "total number of winning balls" from the "frame control unit 120m" to the "main control unit 110m", in consideration of the control load, it can be said that it is more efficient to execute the function in the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m".

For No. 50 "Main Control State 1" (see Figure 19), the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is marked with a circle, while the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m", "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an X. In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit in Main Control State 1 ON/OFF, and the process related to the message generation and transmission in Main Control State 1) is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m".

For No. 51 "Main Control State 2," the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is marked with a circle, while the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Usage Area," and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an x. In this embodiment, the relevant function (the process of turning each bit in Main Control State 2 ON/OFF, and the process related to the message generation and transmission in Main Control State 2) is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m."

For No. 52 "Gaming Machine Error State," the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" and "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked "○." A "gaming machine error state" corresponds to, for example, a communication abnormality between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, or a communication abnormality between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. In this embodiment, the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are monitored for the above-mentioned communication abnormality. The "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are not monitored for the above-mentioned communication abnormality. However, the "Outside Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" may also be monitored for the above-mentioned communication abnormality.

For No. 53 "Fraud Detection State 1," the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "O," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 1" (Figure 19), the "Setting Change," "Setting Confirmation," and "RWM Clear" processes of Bits 0 to 2 are executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." The "Fraud Detection" processes of Bits 3 to 5 and the "Winning Limit Device" process of Bit 6 (such as counting game balls) are executed in the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." Furthermore, the generation of the 8-bit telegram for "Fraud Detection State 1" is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." This allows for efficient use of the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," preventing processing from concentrating on any one area.

Note that the use of "use area" and "outside use area" for "Fraud Detection State 1" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, processing currently being executed in the "use area" may be executed "outside use area," or processing currently being executed "outside use area" may be executed in the "use area." Furthermore, all processing may be executed in the "use area," or all processing may be executed "outside use area." Furthermore, processing may be executed in the "use area" or "outside use area" of the "frame control unit 120m." For example, processing by the "acquisition limit device" (such as counting game balls) may be executed in the "use area" or "outside use area" of the "frame control unit 120m."

For No. 54 "Fraud Detection State 2 (Frame Control)," the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "○," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 2" (see FIG. 51), the processing of "Glass Frame Open," "Inner Frame Open," and "Fraudulent Radio Wave Detection" of Bits 0 to 2, and the processing of "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Notification" and "Abnormal Number of Fired Balls Notification" of Bits 4 to 5, are executed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." For the processing of "Number of Game Balls Cleared Detection" of Bit 3, the function is executed in the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." Furthermore, the generation of the 8-bit telegram for "Fraud Detection State 2" is executed outside the "Usage Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." Note that message generation outside the "usage area" of the "frame control unit 120m" is achieved, for example, by a program in the "outside the use area" referencing the RWM of the "usage area" and generating the message outside the use area. This allows the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" to be used efficiently, preventing processing from concentrating on one area.

Note that the use of "usage area" and "outside of use area" for "Fraud Detection Status 2" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, processing currently being executed in the "usage area" may be executed "outside of use area," or processing currently being executed "outside of use area" may be executed in the "usage area." Furthermore, all processing may be executed in the "usage area," or all processing may be executed "outside of use area."

For No. 55 "Fraud Detection State 3 (Frame Control)," the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "O," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, for example, in "Fraud Detection State 3" (see FIG. 51), the "Small Ball Detection" and "Iron Ball Detection" functions of Bit 0 to Bit 1 are executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," and the generation of the 8-bit telegram for "Fraud Detection State 3" is executed outside the use area of the "Frame Control Unit 120m." This allows for efficient use of the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m," preventing processing from concentrating on any one area.

Note that the use of "usage area" and "outside of use area" for "Fraud Detection Status 3" is merely an example and may be changed as appropriate. For example, processing currently being executed in the "usage area" may be executed "outside of use area," or processing currently being executed "outside of use area" may be executed in the "usage area." Furthermore, all processing may be executed in the "usage area," or all processing may be executed "outside of use area."

For No. 56, "Function to control the setting change device," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" is marked "○," while the "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," "Usage area," and "Outside of the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked "X." In this embodiment, the function is executed in the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and the "Function to control the setting change device" corresponds to the "Setting change process" and "Setting confirmation process" described below.

Regarding No. 57, "Function of transmitting information related to effects to peripheral boards," the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "○," while the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with "×." In this embodiment, the "Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" executes the function of transmitting information to the effect control board 130, and the "Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" executes the function of transmitting information to the effect control board 130. For example, a "special chart variation pattern designation command" is sent from the "Main Control Unit 110m" to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 determines the variation effect pattern (game effect) based on the received "special chart variation pattern designation command." Furthermore, information regarding the "error" detected by the "main control unit 110m" is sent from the "main control unit 110m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error." Similarly, information regarding the "error" detected by the "frame control unit 120m" is sent from the "frame control unit 120m" to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a notification corresponding to the received information regarding the "error."

For No. 58, "Function of transmitting gaming machine information to peripheral boards," the "Usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Outside of the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Outside of the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked "×." Note that No. 58 is similar to No. 57 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

For No. 59 "Fraud Monitoring (excluding No. 60 and 61)," the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" are marked with an "O," while the "Usage Area" and "Outside the Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." "Fraud Monitoring (excluding No. 60 and 61)" corresponds to monitoring so-called "hanging" fraud, such as installing counterfeit wiring or illegal components to fraudulently obtain jackpot random numbers, etc. In this embodiment, this monitoring is performed outside the use area of the "Main Control Unit 110m." However, this monitoring may also be performed in the use area of the "Main Control Unit 110m."

For No. 60, "Monitoring for fraudulent payouts of gaming balls," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, this monitoring is performed in the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m." Note that instead of the two-chip configuration of the "main control unit 110m" and "frame control unit 120m" as in this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the gaming machine 1 with a single-chip configuration, for example, consisting of only the "main control unit 110m." In this single-chip configuration, monitoring can be performed in the "usage area" and "outside the use area" of the "main control unit 110m."

For No. 61, "Monitoring fraudulent use of gaming balls," the "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Main control unit 110m" and the "Use area" and "Outside use area" for the "Frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." Note that No. 61 is similar to No. 60 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

For No. 62 "Error Processing (Game Stop)," the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m" is marked with an "O," and the "Outside of Use Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m," "Usage Area," and "Outside of Use Area" of the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are marked with an "X." In this embodiment, this processing is performed in the "Usage Area" of the "Main Control Unit 110m." For example, "Error Processing (Game Stop)" occurs after the processing of step S9 in FIG. 30 is completed, after the processing of step S10 in FIG. 30 is completed, after the processing of unrecoverable errors in step S17 in FIG. 31 is completed, after the processing of step S27 in FIG. 31 is completed, or after the processing of step S600-6 in FIG. 46 is completed.

For No. 63 "Error Handling (Notification Only)," the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" for the "Main Control Unit 110m" and the "Usage Area" and "Outside of Use Area" for the "Frame Control Unit 120m" are all marked "○." Details of "Error Handling (Notification Only)" will be explained in detail below in "Error Code Display Priority" (Figure 78).

For No. 64, "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor," the "Usage area," "Outside the usage area" of the "Main control unit 110m," and "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" are marked "○," while the "Usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m" is marked "X." The "Function to control the display of the performance display monitor" corresponds to the "Frame control board display performance information calculation process" (Figure 79), which will be described later, and in this embodiment, both the process itself and the process for displaying on the frame control display 125 are executed "Outside the usage area" of the "Frame control unit 120m."

For No. 65, "Function for generating signals necessary for gaming machine testing," the "usage area" and "outside the use area" for the "main control unit 110m" and the "usage area" and "outside the use area" for the "frame control unit 120m" are all marked "○." In this embodiment, the "main control unit 110m" executes the function in the "outside the use area," and the "frame control unit 120m" executes the function using both the "usage area" and "outside the use area."

Note that for No. 1 to No. 65 above, the areas marked with an "x" are deemed unimplementable, but the areas marked with an "x" may be made implementable (with various processes being executed in the areas marked with an "x"). Furthermore, processes executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m may be executed by the "frame control unit 120m," and processes executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the "frame control unit 120m" may be executed in the "usage area" or "outside the use area" of the main control unit 110m.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board that enables play after the gaming machine is started)
25, the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 that becomes playable after the gaming machine is started (when the frame control board 120 is not in a ball-removing state) will be described. Note that the "gaming machine information" in FIG. 25 corresponds to the "HC/fraud monitoring information" described in FIGS. 19 to 22.

First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 begin to start up, with the frame control board 120 completing its startup before the main control board 110. After that, once the main control board 110 has completed its startup within a maximum of three minutes, the main control board 110 sends the frame control board 120 the first telegram, a gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0). Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the main control board 110 the second telegram, a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK), and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information receipt result. In this case, since the receipt result = receipt OK, the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls, making the game available for play.

Then, 108 ms after the transmission of the first gaming machine installation information notification, the main control board 110 sends the third telegram, a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1), to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the fourth telegram, a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 1, receipt result = receipt OK), to the main control board 110, and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information receipt result. Thereafter, the communication sequence of sending and receiving telegrams in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated at 108 ms intervals.

If the frame control board 120 is unable to receive gaming machine installation information within three minutes of startup, it will issue an error notification by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 to indicate a communication line abnormality or by sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130. If the gaming machine installation information notification is successfully received after the communication line abnormality occurs, the error notification will end.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and the frame control board when the gaming machine is not playable after startup)
Using Figure 26, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 when the gaming machine is not ready for play after it is started (when the frame control board 120 is in a ball-emptying state).

First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 begin startup. The frame control board 120 completes startup before the main control board 110, and begins the ball removal operation, entering the ball removal state. After that, when the main control board 110 completes startup within a maximum of three minutes, the main control board 110 sends the frame control board 120 the first telegram, a gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0). Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the main control board 110 the second telegram, a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, reception result = ball removal state), and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information reception result. In this case, since the reception result is ball removal state, the main control board 110 allows the release of gaming balls, but performs an infinite loop process without entering a playable state.

In addition, after the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 send and receive the gaming machine installation information response indicating the reception result = ball removal state, they do not communicate, and the frame control board 120 continues the ball removal operation until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

(Communication procedure between the main control board and frame control board when the setting is changed/checked after the gaming machine is started)
Using Figure 27, we will explain the communication procedure between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, which enters the setting change/setting confirmation state after the gaming machine is started (when the frame control board 120 is not in the ball removal state).

First, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 begin startup, with the frame control board 120 completing startup before the main control board 110. After that, when the main control board 110 completes startup within a maximum of three minutes, the main control board 110 sends the frame control board 120 the first telegram, a gaming machine installation information notification (communication serial number = 0). Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the main control board 110 the second telegram, a gaming machine installation information response (communication serial number = 0, receipt result = receipt OK), and the main control board 110 confirms the gaming machine installation information receipt result.

Here, when the main control board 110 detects that both the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a have been operated, or that only the setting key switch 112a has been operated, it transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and the setting value is displayed on the information display 115 implemented on the main control board 110.

Then, after the setting change state or setting confirmation state is entered and 108 ms has elapsed since the first gaming machine installation information notification was sent, the main control board 110 sends a gaming machine information notification (communication serial number = 1) as the third telegram to the frame control board 120. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information response (communication serial number = 1) as the fourth telegram to the main control board 110, and the main control board 110 confirms the receipt of the gaming machine installation information. After that, regardless of whether the setting change state or setting confirmation state is entered, the communication sequence of sending and receiving telegrams in the order gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated every 108 ms.

Then, when the setting key switch 112a is operated to end the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information response that has already been received is OK, so the main control board 110 allows the launch of gaming balls and the game becomes playable. After that, the communication sequence of sending and receiving messages in the order of gaming machine information notification and gaming machine information response is repeated every 108 ms.

(Communication procedure by which the main control board determines that the communication line is down)
The communication procedure by which the main control board 110 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, the frame control board 120 should send a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response) within 10 ms, but a situation occurs in which the main control board 110 is unable to receive the response message.

This is the first time a notification message is sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108m intervals. However, if the main control board 110 is unable to receive a response message from the frame control board 120 10 times in a row, it will assume that a communication line disconnection has occurred and will issue an error notification by sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130. After that, the gaming machine 1 will be powered off/on to recover from the communication line disconnection.

(Communication procedure by which the frame control board determines that the communication line is disconnected)
The communication procedure in which the frame control board 120 determines that the communication line has been disconnected will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the main control board 110 sends a notification message (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification) to the frame control board 120, and then within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends a response message (gaming machine installation information response, gaming machine information response). After that, when the timing for sending the notification message arrives, which arrives every 108 ms, the main control board 110 sends the notification message to the frame control board 120, but a state occurs in which the frame control board 120 is unable to receive the notification message.

After that, notification messages are sent from the main control board 110 to the frame control board 120 at 108 ms intervals, but if the frame control board 120 is unable to receive notification messages for 1000 ms from the time it received the last notification message, the frame control board 120 will notify the error by displaying an error code on the frame control display 125 or sending an error specification command to the performance control board 130, assuming that a communication line disconnection has occurred. After that, if the notification message from the main control board 110 is successfully received, the error notification will end.

In addition, when the gaming machine 1 is in a ball-removed state, information indicating that it is in a ball-removed state may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described using Figure 30. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs CPU initialization such as setting internal registers in step S2, and waits for other boards to start up in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the frame control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed. Then, in step S4, it allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a notifies the frame control board 120 of gaming machine installation information. Specifically, it transmits "gaming machine installation information" (see Figure 18) to the frame control board 120. In other words, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, the main control board 110 transmits "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S7, it determines whether or not it has responded with the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification. If it has responded with the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification, it proceeds to step S10. If it has not responded with the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information notification, it proceeds to step S8. In other words, it determines whether or not it has responded (received) the result of receiving the gaming machine installation information from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending the "gaming machine installation information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," it proceeds to step S9. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), it proceeds to step S5.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Specifically, it determines that there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, sends a "gaming machine communication abnormality start command" to the presentation control board 130, and controls the presentation control board 130 to notify an "gaming machine communication abnormality error" (see Figure 112). It then waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "gaming machine installation information" 10 times but does not respond with a receipt result for the gaming machine installation information notification, it issues an error notification, as it is possible that there is a broken wire or other abnormality (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and does not enter a playable state. This prevents gameplay from occurring despite a broken wire or other abnormality (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

Incidentally, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (such as a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (main control program) that determines that a response has not been received from the frame control board 120 can also be said to be a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (such as a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the machine is in a ball-removed state. Specifically, it references the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification, and if the result is "0x00", it determines that the reception is OK, and if the result is "0x01", it determines that the machine is in a ball-removed state (see Figure 18). If the machine is in a ball-removed state, it waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

If the ball is being removed, after completing the processing of step S10, the system will wait until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off, and therefore processing from step S11 onwards will not be executed (processing related to power restoration will not be executed, and the control state before power loss will not be restored). In other words, the "power restoration designation command" will not be sent to the performance control board 130 in step S24, so the audio, visual and electric light notifications for "power restoration" (described below) will not be executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications for "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) will be executed. This prevents the "power restoration" notifications from being executed during the ball removal state, or the initial operations described below from being executed, which could distract the player from the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (the system is not in the ball removal state), the system will proceed to step S24 and the "power restoration designation command" will be sent to the performance control board 130, and the audio, visual and electric light notifications for "power restoration" (described below) will be executed.

Similarly, when in the ball removal state, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON, the system does not proceed to the "RWM clear process" of step S19, so the "RWM clear process" is not executed and the "RWM clear designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual and electric notification of "Power on (RWM clear)" (described below) is not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notification of "Ball removal operation in progress" (described below) is executed. This prevents the "Power on (RWM clear)" notifications from being executed during the ball removal state, which could distract the player from the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the result of step S10 is negative (the ball is not removed), the process moves to step S19, where the "RWM clear process" is executed and an "RWM clear command" is sent to the performance control board 130, resulting in the audio, visual, and illumination notifications of "power on (RWM clear)" (described below).

Similarly, when the ball is being removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting change operation described below, the system does not proceed to the "setting change process" of step S14, so the "setting change process" is not executed and the "setting change designation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting change" (described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications for "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the "setting change" notifications from being executed while the ball is being removed, which could distract the player from the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (the game is not in the ball removal state), the system proceeds to the "setting change process" of step S14, the "setting change process" is executed, and the "setting change designation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting change" (described below) are executed.

Similarly, when the ball is being removed, even if the power switch 164 is turned on with the setting confirmation operation described below, the system does not proceed to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, so the "setting confirmation process" is not executed and the "setting confirmation command" is not sent to the performance control board 130. As a result, the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting confirmation" (described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual notifications for "ball removal operation in progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the "setting confirmation" notifications from being executed while the ball is being removed, which can distract the player from the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (the game is not in the ball removal state), the system proceeds to the "setting confirmation process" of step S22, the "setting confirmation process" is executed, and the "setting confirmation command" is sent to the performance control board 130, so the audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "setting confirmation" (described below) are executed.

Similarly, if the machine is in the ball removal state, it does not transition to "all interrupts allowed" in step S33, and the machine is not ready to play. This prevents the machine from becoming ready to play despite being in the ball removal state, which could delay the ball removal process. For example, if the machine becomes ready to play while a game ball is being discharged from the machine during the ball removal state, the game ball may be launched into the play area 5a, and the ball removal process may not be completed until the game ball returns to a position where it can be discharged again (a position where ball removal is possible). This can be prevented. On the other hand, if the processing of step S10 is denied (the machine is not in the ball removal state), "all interrupts allowed" is executed in step S33, and the machine is ready to play.

Similarly, if the ball is being removed, the process does not proceed to "All Interrupts Allowed" in step S33, and does not proceed to "Error Control Processing" in the main interrupt process. Therefore, "Error Control Processing" is not executed, and for example, "Magnet Detection" or "Abnormal Win Detection" are not executed. As a result, the audio, visual, and electric alerts for "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" and "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Win Error)" (both described below) are not executed. In this case, the audio and visual alerts for "Ball Removal Operation in Progress" (described below) are executed. This prevents the alerts for "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" and "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Win Error)" from being executed during the ball removal state, which could distract the player from the ball removal process. On the other hand, if the process of step S10 is denied (the ball is not being removed), "All Interrupts Allowed" is executed in step S33, allowing the "Error Control Processing" in the main interrupt process to be executed, and therefore "Magnet Detection" and "Abnormal Win Detection" can also be executed.

Note that even in the ball-removed state, the process may proceed to step S11 and subsequent steps. In other words, "power restoration,""power on (RWM clear),""settingchange,""settingcheck," and "all interrupts allowed" are processes executed by the main control board 110, and control related to the "ball-removed state" is processes executed by the frame control board 120, so "power restoration,""power on (RWM clear),""settingchange,""settingcheck," and "all interrupts allowed" may be performed during the ball-removed state.
Furthermore, when these are performed simultaneously, the performance control board 130 may notify the event with the higher priority according to the priorities described in Figures 110 and 111, may notify both events regardless of priority, or may always give priority to the ball removal state.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating power restoration has been saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that power restoration has occurred and processing proceeds to step S12. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that power has been turned on for the first time and processing proceeds to step S13.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14, assuming that the system will transition to setting change mode. If a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S15.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S14. Specifically, it performs a process to change (update) the setting value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which indicates the degree of advantage in the game, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. Details of the setting change process will be described later using Figure 33. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S19.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S12. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S16. If the checksum is abnormal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S17. Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, i.e., if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range, processing proceeds to step S18; if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is not within the appropriate range, processing proceeds to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a processes the irrecoverable error as an RWM abnormality. Specifically, it sets Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" in which Bit 5 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120. It also displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to issue an irrecoverable error notification.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (the game control is not transferred), and it cannot be cleared unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error cannot be cleared even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without any setting change operation; the power switch must be turned ON with a setting change operation. Note that, during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.
In addition, the "irrecoverable error" is not cleared unless a setting change process is executed, but it may also be cleared when an RWM clear is executed without a setting change process.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, it proceeds to step S19, assuming that an RWM clear will be performed. If an RWM clear operation has not been performed, it proceeds to step S21.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing. Specifically, it performs processing to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area). Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later using Figure 35. When this processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S20.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the effect control board 130, indicating that the RWM clear process has been executed (power-on, which initializes the game control state). This causes the effect control board 130 to perform processing to issue a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when the power is turned on on the first image display device 70, lighting up all of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g., red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S22 to transition to setting confirmation mode. If a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S23 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process. Specifically, it performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area on the information display 115. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later using Figure 36.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area and sets the gaming RWM area for when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume gameplay from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage (RWM clear processing has not been executed). This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to terminate the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has returned to the state it was in before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when power is restored on the first image display device 70, lighting up all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g., blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, when notifying that power has been restored, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70, a display notifying that power has been restored may be displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to determine the number of special symbols on hold, and performs processing to display the first hold icon and second hold icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130. This allows the effect control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be sent not only at the timing of step S26, but also every time the variable display of the special pattern begins, or every time a jackpot game begins.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON. Specifically, it references the main RAM 110c to determine whether the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 0 = OFF, 1 = ON). If the acquisition limit device activation flag is OFF (e.g., 0), processing proceeds to step S28; if the acquisition limit device activation flag is ON (e.g., 1), processing proceeds to step S29.

The "Earning Limit Device Activation Flag" is a flag that is set ON when the maximum increase (also referred to as "Max MY") reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) in the "Earning Limit Activation Determination Process" described below. In other words, the "Earning Limit Device" is a device that activates when the maximum increase is determined to have reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) (or after the jackpot ends during a jackpot). When activated, this device disables play on the gaming machine (stops play), initializes the main RAM 110c of the gaming machine after the gaming center closes, and effectively disables play on the gaming machine until the next day's opening time. Note that "the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000)" refers to, for example, 95,000 or more. Depending on the situation, it may be determined that the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) has been reached at exactly "95,000," or it may be determined that the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) has been reached at "95,005."

In step S28, the main CPU 110a causes the main control board 110 to turn ON (output) a launch permission signal that allows the launching device to launch game balls. This allows the launching device to launch game balls when the launch permission signal from the frame control board 120 is ON (output). Note that the frame control board 120 may not output a launch permission signal, but the main control board 110 may output a launch permission signal, allowing the launching device to launch game balls when the launch permission signal is output from the main control board 110.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a sends an acquisition limit device activation command to the performance control board 130, indicating that the "acquisition limit device" has been activated. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to notify the user that the acquisition limit device has been activated. Once the acquisition limit device activation command has been sent to the performance control board 130, processing proceeds to step S30.

"Notification that the earning limit device has been activated" is a notification to make the player aware that it is no longer possible to continue playing, and is displayed on the first image display device 70, for example, in white text on a black background, such as "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today."

As an example of the operation of the "winning limit device," as described above, if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls (also called "Max MY") generated by game balls entering the major prize slot 50 or general prize slot 43 during a jackpot reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the winning limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends. For example, in a jackpot that awards 10 rounds, if the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) in the fifth round, the jackpot can be played up to the tenth round, but the winning limit device will be activated after the tenth round and the jackpot ending has been completed. This prevents the jackpot from ending prematurely, causing discomfort to the player, while still providing a healthy gaming experience.

Another example of the operation of the "winning limit device" is that regardless of the game state, if the maximum increase in the number of winning balls generated by placing a game ball in the first start slot 45, second start slot 47, or general winning slot 43 during the variable display or customer waiting state (or during the customer waiting demo performance) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the winning limit device will immediately activate.

Another example of the operation of the "winning limit device" is in the case of the above-mentioned "small prize rush type," if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by placing a game ball in the small prize large prize slot during a "small prize game" (see Figure 16) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the winning limit device will activate after the "small prize game" ends. This prevents the small prize game from ending midway, which could cause discomfort to the player, while still providing a healthy game experience.

Another example of the operation of the "winning limit device" is in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1/Type 2" machine. For example, if, during the first round of the small prize game of "Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)," the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by a game ball entering the "specific area" located inside the large prize opening reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the winning limit device will be activated after the end of the jackpot game (rounds 2 to 4) that was activated by the entry into the "specific area." On the other hand, during the first round of the small prize game of "Jackpot Game 3 (4 rounds)," if the game ball fails to enter the "specific area" located inside the large prize opening and the game ball enters the "non-specific area," and if the maximum increase in the number of prize balls generated by the game ball entering the "non-specific area" reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the winning limit device will be activated after the end of the first round of the small prize game (it will not be activated during the jackpot games of rounds 2 to 4). As a result, if a prize is won in a "specific area," the win limit device will activate after the big win game has ended, and if a prize is won in a "non-specific area," the win limit device will activate after the small win game has ended, preventing players from feeling left unsatisfied in either case.

Furthermore, if a player who is not familiar with gaming machines plays without knowing about the existence of the "winning limit device," and the "winning limit device" were to be activated, this could cause confusion and frustration for the player. For this reason, it is preferable to actively notify the player that the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a "winning limit device." For example, on the customer waiting demo screen during the customer waiting demo performance, "Equipped with winning limit device" may be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or may be constantly displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) or the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device). It may also be displayed at the end of a jackpot game.

Furthermore, if the win limit device is activated when judgment information is reserved and stored in the first special symbol judgment information reserve memory area or the second special symbol judgment information reserve memory area, it is preferable that the activation of the win limit device not erase the reserved and stored judgment information. Similarly, if the win limit device is activated when judgment information for a normal symbol is reserved and stored, it is preferable that the activation of the win limit device not erase the reserved and stored judgment information. In such cases, it is preferable to erase the information by turning on the power switch 164, which involves operating the RWM clear switch 111a. This simplifies the control process by not executing a process to erase the reserved memory areas for special symbols and normal symbols when the win limit device is activated.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a clears (initializes) the increment counter (also referred to as the "MY counter"); the increment counter will be described later. After clearing the increment counter, processing proceeds to step S31. Note that although the increment counter is cleared when power is supplied (restored) to the gaming machine 1, this is not limited to this. For example, the increment counter may not be cleared when a setting change operation is performed, or when an RWM clear operation is performed, but rather when power is supplied (restored). Alternatively, a dedicated button for clearing the increment counter value may be provided, and the increment counter may be cleared when power is supplied while the dedicated button is pressed. On the other hand, a dedicated button for not clearing the increment counter value may be provided, and the increment counter may not be cleared when power is supplied while the dedicated button is pressed (in this case, the increment counter is cleared when power is supplied (restored)).

In step S31, the main CPU 110a activates the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S32, it enables all interrupts and proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the random number values for reach determination and special pattern determination, which are used to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special pattern, and in step S35, performs initial value random number update processing to update the initial value random number values for jackpot determination, special pattern determination, win determination, and normal pattern determination.

In step S36, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit on the power supply board 160. If a power interruption detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S34. If a power interruption detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S37.

In step S37, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S38 it clears the output port, in step S39 it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the gaming RWM area, in step S40 it saves a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S41 it prohibits RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S14-1, the main CPU 110a issues a HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 0 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to transmit the "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 0 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" stored in the main RAM 110c by "+1." Then, in step S14-3, it determines whether or not the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received, processing proceeds to step S14-6. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been received, processing proceeds to step S14-4. In other words, it determines whether or not the frame control board 120 has responded (received) a receipt result as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S14-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," it proceeds to step S14-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), it proceeds to step S14-1.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Note that the processing to issue the error notification is the same as in step S9, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The main CPU then waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a receipt result for the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued, as there is a possibility of a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the game is not made playable. This prevents gameplay from occurring despite a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) occurring between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S14-6, the main CPU 110a sends a setting change command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to issue a setting change notification to notify the player that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change in progress screen on the first image display device 70 indicating that the setting value is being changed, or lighting up all of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g., white) while the setting is being changed. Additionally, a setting change notification sound ("Setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows gaming facility staff to understand that a setting change is being made by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S14-7, the main CPU 110a decrements the setting value in the setting value (during play) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (being changed) area, and in step S14-8, it initializes (clears to 0) the setting value (during play) area in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S14-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is within the appropriate range, processing proceeds to step S14-11. If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (changing) area is not within the appropriate range, processing proceeds to step S14-10.

In step S14-10, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (changing) area to the initial value "0." Then, in step S14-11, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (changing) area and displays the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows the gaming facility staff to understand the setting value before the change by checking the information display 115.

In step S14-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, processing proceeds to step S14-13; if a setting value update operation has not been performed, processing proceeds to step S14-16.

In step S14-13, the main CPU 110a updates the setting value in the setting value (changing) area by +1, and in step S14-14 performs setting value correction processing. Specifically, if the updated setting value is "4," which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the main CPU 110a performs processing to correct the setting value to "0."

In step S14-15, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (changing) area, and displays the value +1 added (here, 1 to 4) on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows the gaming facility staff to check the information display 115 and ascertain the setting value before it is confirmed.

In step S14-16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is considered to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated), and processing proceeds to step S14-17. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value may be updated, and processing proceeds to step S14-12.

In step S14-17, the main CPU 110a increments the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area by 1 and saves it in the setting value (currently being played) area, and in step S14-18, it initializes (clears to 0) the setting value in the setting value (currently being changed) area.

In step S14-18, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting change process begins, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting change process ends. This allows the gaming facility staff member to know that a setting change is in progress by checking the status confirmation display 68.

(Modification of the main control board setting change process)
A modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of the main control board 110. Note that only the differences from Fig. 33 will be described in Fig. 34.

In step S14-5, the main CPU 110a sets an error notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. Once the error notification flag is set, processing proceeds to step S14-6. In other words, in Figure 33, error notification processing is performed and game play is stopped in step S14-5, but in Figure 34, only the error notification flag is set, and the error notification processing is not performed, and game play is not stopped, and processing proceeds to step S14-6.

Then, in step S14-20, the main CPU 110a references a predetermined area in the main RAM 110c to determine whether the error notification flag is set. For example, if the bit indicating the error notification flag is ON, it is determined that the error notification flag is set; if the bit indicating the error notification flag is OFF, it is determined that the error notification flag is not set. If it is determined that the error notification flag is set, processing proceeds to step S14-21. If it is determined that the error notification flag is not set, the current setting change processing is terminated. In other words, while in Figure 33, the current setting change processing is terminated in step S14-19, in Figure 34, processing is not terminated in step S14-19. Instead, it is determined in step S14-20 whether the error notification flag is set, and if it is set, an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command" is set and sent to the performance control board 130, thereby notifying an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error." This is different.

In other words, in the modified example of Figure 34, if HC/fraud monitoring information (here, Fraud Detection Status 1 Bit 0 is "1") is sent to the frame control board 120 a predetermined number of times but a receipt result is not received from the frame control board 120 (for example, if there is a high probability that a disconnection has occurred between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120), an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" is notified in steps S14-20 and S14-21 after the main processing of the setting change process is completed. This prevents the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" from being confusingly generated by multiple notifications being sent at the same time. Furthermore, since the "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" can be handled after the entire setting change process is completed, employee work efficiency can be improved.

Note that the setting change process is performed after the main control board main process in Figure 30 is completed, so in step S7, the reception result of the gaming machine installation information notification was received normally. In other words, at this point, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could communicate normally (a state where no disconnections or the like had occurred). On the other hand, in Figures 33 and 34, the reception result of the HC/fraud monitoring information was not received normally. This means that after the processing of step S7 was confirmed, and before the setting change process was performed, the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 were in a state where they could not communicate normally (a state where a disconnection or the like had occurred). In this way, by periodically monitoring whether the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are in a state where they can communicate normally even after the completion of step S7, it is possible to prevent a situation where the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are unable to communicate with each other, which could be disadvantageous to the player.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a sends HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" stored in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S19-3, it determines whether or not the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received, processing proceeds to step S19-6. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been received, processing proceeds to step S19-4. In other words, it determines whether or not the frame control board 120 has responded (received) a receipt result as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," it proceeds to step S19-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), it proceeds to step S19-1.

In step S19-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Note that the processing to issue the error notification is the same as in step S9, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The main CPU then waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a receipt result for the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued, as there is a possibility of a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the game is not made playable. This prevents gameplay from occurring despite a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) occurring between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S19-7. If the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S19-9.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) everything in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to its initial state (the state at the time of shipping the gaming machine 1), and data (other than setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON. Specifically, it references the main RAM 110c and determines whether the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON (e.g., 1). If the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is ON, processing proceeds to step S19-9; if the acquisition upper limit activation device flag is not ON, processing proceeds to step S19-10.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a turns the win limit activation device flag OFF. Specifically, in the main RAM 110c, the win limit activation device flag is turned OFF (for example, set to 0). In this way, if the win limit device is activated, performing the RWM clear process on the main control board will deactivate the win limit device and enable play. Therefore, if the win limit device is activated, the player cannot deactivate it; it must be deactivated by the gaming facility manager by performing the RWM clear process on the main control board. This prevents behavior such as continuing play even when the maximum increase number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), ensuring healthy play.

In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear command to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130, and ends this RWM clear process.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 110 performs an RWM clear process (initialization of the main RAM 110c), the gaming machine 1 sends an RWM clear command to the frame control board 120, which also initializes the frame control RAM 120c on the frame control board 120. As a result, if the power switch 164 is pressed while the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed (performing the RWM clear operation), both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c are initialized, eliminating the need to perform the RWM clear operation on both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, improving work efficiency.

The areas (information) initialized by the RWM clear operation in the frame control RAM 120c are the "data type" (see Figure 21) information in the HC/fraud monitoring information received from the main control board 110. If the received information is temporarily stored in a buffer before being processed, the information stored in the buffer is cleared. The "data type" (see Figure 21) information is "starting gate winning," "large winning gate winning when special electric device is activated," "winning gate winning," "all starting gate winning," "number of symbol confirmations," "number of jackpots," "number of device openings (number of large winning gate openings)," "passing through specific area," "external terminal board pulse output," and "performance information status notification."

On the other hand, areas (information) in the frame control RAM 120c that are not initialized by the RWM clear operation are the game ball count storage area, the storage area related to "display performance information (normal base value)," and the buffer in which information sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 is temporarily stored. This prevents necessary information from being initialized.

Furthermore, by sending an RWM clear command to the performance control board 130, the performance control board 130 controls the device to notify the user that the RWM has been cleared (a "Power On (RWM Clear)" error notification, described below). This notification is generated by repeatedly outputting the audio message "RWM has been cleared" and the "Power-On BGM" background music. In other words, the RWM clear operation initializes both the main RAM 110c and the frame control RAM 120c, but the notification from the performance control board 130 simply outputs the audio message "RWM has been cleared," and does not include notifications such as "Main RWM has been cleared" or "Frame control RWM has been cleared." This allows for a single piece of audio data, and eliminates the need to create new audio data for the frame control RAM 120c, allowing for efficient notification that the RWM has been cleared.

In addition, audio messages such as "The main RWM has been cleared" and "The frame control RWM has been cleared" may also be output. This configuration makes it easier for employees to understand that both RWMs have been initialized, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for employees to understand.

In step S19-11, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S22-1, the main CPU 110a sends HC/fraud monitoring information notification. Specifically, it sets Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and performs processing to send "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-2, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" stored in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S22-3, it determines whether or not the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has been received, processing proceeds to step S22-6. If the HC/fraud monitoring information notification has not been received, processing proceeds to step S22-4. In other words, it determines whether or not the frame control board 120 has responded (received) a receipt result as a result of sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120.

In step S22-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the "notification counter" is "10." If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is "10," it proceeds to step S22-5. If it determines that the value of the "notification counter" is not "10" (is less than 10), it proceeds to step S22-1.

In step S22-5, the main CPU 110a performs processing to issue an error notification. Note that the processing to issue the error notification is the same as in step S9, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. The main CPU then waits until the supply of power voltage is completely cut off. In other words, if the frame control board 120 is notified of "HC/fraud monitoring information" 10 times but is unable to respond with a receipt result for the HC/fraud monitoring information notification, an error notification is issued, as there is a possibility of a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the game is not made playable. This prevents gameplay from occurring despite a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) occurring between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In step S22-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value saved in the setting value (during play) area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the setting value is within the appropriate range (setting change processing has been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-7. If the setting value is not within the appropriate range (setting change processing has not been performed in the past), processing proceeds to step S22-11.

In step S22-7, the main CPU 110a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to perform processing to issue a setting confirmation notification to notify the player that a setting confirmation is being performed.

A "setting confirmation notification" is when a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70, or when the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 are all lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) while the settings are being confirmed. Additionally, a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming setting values") indicating that the settings are being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game center staff to understand that the settings are being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, and audio output device 9.

In step S22-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display 115. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (during play) area and displays a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 115. This allows gaming facility staff to understand the current setting value by checking the information display 115.

In step S22-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S27-7; if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S22-9 is repeated.

In step S22-10, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display 115 and ends the current setting change process. Note that the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on when the setting confirmation process begins, and the LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned off when the setting confirmation process ends. This allows the gaming facility staff member to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S22-11, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays the setting value error information "E" on the information display 115, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and then prohibits timer interrupts and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when a "setting change operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 0 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S14-1; when an "RWM clear operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 2 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S19-1; and when a "setting check operation" is performed, "HC/fraud monitoring information" indicating that Bit 1 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is "1" is transmitted in step S22-1. This allows the gaming machine information center to know when operations that affect gameplay have been performed, and to monitor, for example, whether operations are being performed more than necessary, whether operations are being performed during the gaming facility's business hours, and whether the RWM clear operation was performed outside of business hours after the win limit device was activated.

Furthermore, even when the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the game ball count clear button 121b (when the process of clearing the game ball count is performed), information indicating that Bit 3 of the fraud detection status 2 of the frame control board 120 is "1" is sent to the gaming machine information center.
On the other hand, when the power switch 164 is turned on while the ball removal button 122b is pressed (when the ball removal operation process is performed), no information is sent to the gaming machine information center from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120.
In other words, the ball removal operation, which ejects game balls from the game machine 1, is primarily intended for game ball maintenance and is unlikely to be a fraudulent act, so it can be said to have a lower impact on gameplay and a lower level of security than the above-mentioned "setting change operation," etc. Therefore, there are no problems even if the ball removal operation is excluded from the management of the game machine information center, and it is possible to draw a line between information necessary for the proper management of the game machine 1 and unnecessary information, and it is possible to prevent the game machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything) and having to manage too much information, which could lead to neglected management.

In summary, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, if a first operation (for example, a "setting change operation,""RWM clear operation,""setting confirmation operation," or "game ball count clear operation") is performed, information indicating that each operation has been performed is sent to the gaming machine information center, but when the power switch 164 is turned ON, if a second operation (for example, a "ball removal operation") is performed, information indicating that the operation has been performed is not sent to the gaming machine information center.
In addition, if a second operation (e.g., a "ball removal operation") is performed when the power switch 164 is turned ON, it is acceptable to have information indicating that the operation has been performed sent to the gaming machine information center.

Although a modified example of the setting confirmation process is omitted, the setting confirmation process may also be configured as in the modified example of the setting change process (Figure 34). Specifically, in step S22-5, only the error notification flag is set, and processing proceeds to step S22-6. After completing processing in step S22-10, it is determined in step S22-11 whether the error notification flag is set. If the error notification flag is set, a "gaming machine communication abnormality start command" is set in step S22-12 and sent to the performance control board 130, thereby notifying of an "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error." This may achieve the same effect as described in the description of the modified example of the setting change process (Figure 34).

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed when a clock pulse is input at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110 after all interrupts are enabled in step S33 of Figure 31.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and then in step S105, performs time control processing. Specifically, it updates various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric devices.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a refers to the main RAM 110c and determines whether the win limit device activation flag is OFF. If the win limit device activation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S120, assuming that game progress control (specific control processing) will be performed. If the win limit device activation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S500, assuming that game progress control (specific control processing) will not be performed. The win limit device and win limit device activation flag will be described later.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process. Specifically, it updates the random number values for determining a jackpot, the random number values for determining special symbols, the random number values for determining special symbol variation patterns, the random number values for determining a win, the random number values for determining normal symbols, and the random number values for determining normal symbol variation patterns. Specifically, it performs a process of adding +1 to each random number value and random number counter to update them. If the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the cycle, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the cycle and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S35 in FIG. 32, the main CPU 110a performs a process to update the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a hit, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches, such as the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the special prize opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the gate detection switch 44a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set specified data. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as determining the special symbol determination information obtained based on the winning of the gaming ball into the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize opening 50, and setting the game state. Details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuations, and opening and closing the second starting port 47 (auxiliary game).

In step S450, the main CPU 110a performs the win limit management process. Specifically, when there is an input to the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the special prize opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, or the out ball detection switch 39a, the counter corresponding to each switch is updated. Details of the win limit management process will be described later.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing. Specifically, it references the various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning slots (general winning slot 43, first starting slot 45, second starting slot 47, and large winning slot 50) to the frame control board 120. This causes the frame control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls (processing to add up the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player).

The main CPU 110a performs error control processing in step S550. For example, if a magnet is detected, it performs processing to set Bit 3 of fraud detection state 1 (Figure 19) to "1" and processing to send a command indicating magnet detection to the performance control board 130 to notify that a magnet has been detected. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify that a magnet has been detected. Details of the error control processing will be described later.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs HC/fraud monitoring information management processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 every 108 ms. For example, if Bit 3 of Fraud Detection State 1 (Figure 19) is set to "1" in step S550, HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that Bit 3 of Fraud Detection State 1 (Figure 19) has been set to "1" is transmitted to the frame control board 120, and ultimately to the gaming machine information center. Details of the HC/fraud monitoring information management processing will be described later.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs data creation processing. Specifically, it performs processing to create data such as start port opening/closing data to be output to the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize port opening/closing data to be output to the large prize port opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data to be output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as port output processing, which outputs signals such as the start gate opening/closing data and the large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S600 above; display output processing, which outputs signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data to various displays; payout command transmission processing, which transmits commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120; and performance command transmission processing, which transmits commands set in the performance transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 110c to the frame control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general prize opening detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general prize opening 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs special prize opening detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the special prize opening 50, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs first start hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls and processing to acquire and store special symbol determination information. Details of the first start hole detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls and to acquire and store special symbol determination information.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and then performs processing to acquire and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs out detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the out ball detection switch 39a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the out hole 39, and then ends the current input control processing.

(First start port detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Figure 39. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input processing of the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, processing proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, this first start hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a updates the three prize ball counter used for three prize balls by adding data indicating three prize balls, and in step S230-3, it obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining a special symbol, random number value for determining a reach, and random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the first image display device 70 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special design determination information storage area, starting with the first storage unit, and stores the special design determination information acquired in step S230-3 in an available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently in a non-time-reduced game state. If the game is currently in a non-time-reduced game state, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If the game is not currently in a non-time-reduced game state, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first pre-determination process. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referenced, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information is pre-determined before the first special symbol variation display is performed, and a first start gate winning designation command is generated to notify the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (planned special symbol variation pattern).

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start gate winning designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

This allows the first start port winning information to be sent to the presentation control board 130 as a first start port winning designation command, and the sub-CPU 130a of the presentation control board 130, which receives the first start port winning designation command, can execute a pre-reading announcement (for example, a continuous announcement presentation, an icon change presentation) that creates anticipation of a jackpot game being played over one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special pattern corresponding to the first start port winning designation command begins.

In addition, the second start hole detection switch input processing is also processed in the same way as the first start hole detection switch input processing, so the first start hole detection switch 45a, 3 prize ball counter, first special symbol reserved number (U1), first special symbol determination information reserved memory area, non-time-saving game state, first advance determination processing, and first start hole winning designation command can be read as second start hole detection switch 47a, 2 prize ball counter, second special symbol reserved number (U2), second special symbol determination information reserved memory area, time-saving game state, second advance determination processing, and second start hole winning designation command.

In this embodiment, the upper limit for the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) is set to "4," but it may be set to more or less than this. The upper limit for the number of reserved second special symbols may also be set lower than the upper limit for the number of reserved first special symbols. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing special symbol determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special symbol determination information storage area.

(Main control board special diagram special electric control processing)
The special power control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 40. Fig. 40 is a flowchart showing the special power control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special pattern special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special pattern special power processing data, executes the processing corresponding to the branch destination address, and terminates the current special pattern special power control processing.

Specifically, if the special symbol special power processing data = 0, a special symbol memory determination process (step S310) is executed to start the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved memory; if the special symbol special power processing data = 1, a special symbol variable process (step S320) is executed to stop the display of the special symbol as the variable time passes; if the special symbol special power processing data = 2, a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to transition to the jackpot game depending on the pass time and the type of special symbol that has stopped; if the special symbol special power processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to execute the jackpot game; and if the special symbol special power processing data = 4, a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to end the jackpot game. Details of the special symbol memory determination process will be described later.

This "special symbol special power processing data" is set as needed within each subroutine of the special symbol special power control processing, as described below, so that the subroutines required for that game are processed appropriately.

(Main control board special pattern memory determination process)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol memory determination process is terminated. If a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) is 1 or greater, processing proceeds to step S310-3. If the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) is not 1 or greater, processing proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of that icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special symbol determination information storage area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first through fourth storage units to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special symbol determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special symbol determination information holding memory area. Furthermore, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special symbol determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is 1 or greater, processing proceeds to step S310-5; if the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not 1 or greater, processing proceeds to step S319-1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of that icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first through fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. Furthermore, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area (the second special symbol reserve number is subtracted with priority over the first special symbol reserve number), but the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area or the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the gaming balls enter the starting hole (the first special symbol reserve number and the second special symbol reserve number are subtracted in order of winning), or the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area may be shifted with priority over the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area (the first special symbol reserve number is subtracted with priority over the second special symbol reserve number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether a jackpot has occurred and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol, based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the effect control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the effect symbol 70a that will be displayed as a result of the variable effect.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. Details of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol variation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the variation performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variation performance performed while the special symbol variation is displayed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 begins displaying the special symbol fluctuation. As a result, LED lighting data for displaying the special symbol fluctuation is created in the data creation process of step S700 above, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S750 above, thereby displaying the special symbol fluctuation on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit management process)
The earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the earned upper limit management process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1, the main CPU 110a performs an increment counter update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the increment counter according to the number of payouts (number of acquired balls) to be paid out as a result of game balls entering the various winning slots, the number of outs (number of shot balls) discharged from the game area 5a (shot into the game area), etc. Details of the increment counter update process will be described later using Figure 43.

In step S450-2, the main CPU 110a performs a maximum increase update process. Specifically, it references an increase counter (also called the "MY counter") stored in the main RAM 110c, and updates the maximum increase (information related to the maximum increase stored in the main RAM 110c) if the value of the increase counter is greater than the (current) maximum increase (also called "Max MY").

In step S450-3, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, in order to send information related to the maximum increase number to the performance control board 130, a maximum increase number command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

The maximum increase command may be sent periodically to the performance control board 130, or it may not be sent before the maximum increase reaches a specified value (e.g., 90,000), but may be sent periodically after the specified value is reached.

In step S450-4, the main CPU 110a performs a process to determine whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and if so, performs a process to activate the maximum increase. Details of the process to determine whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) will be described later using Figure 44. The process to determine whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) then ends.

(Main control board increase counter update process)
The increment counter update process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Fig. 43 is a flowchart showing the increment counter update process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S450-1-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is general prize opening winning information indicating that a game ball has won the general prize opening 43. Specifically, it determines whether the 5-prize ball counter, which is updated in the general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no general prize opening winning information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-3. If there is general prize opening winning information, in step S450-1-2, the increase number counter (MY counter) is incremented by "5," which is the number of prize balls in the general prize opening 43.

In step S450-1-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is special prize entry information indicating that a game ball has entered the special prize entry port 50. Specifically, it determines whether the 15-ball counter, which is updated in the special prize entry port detection switch input process in step S220 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no special prize entry information, the process proceeds to step S450-1-5. If there is special prize entry information, in step S450-1-4, the increase number counter (MY counter) is incremented by "15," which is the number of prize balls in the special prize entry port 50.

In step S450-1-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is first start port winning information indicating that a game ball has entered the first start port 45. Specifically, it determines whether the three prize ball counter, which is updated in the first start port detection switch input process in step S230 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no first start port winning information, processing proceeds to step S450-1-7. If there is first start port winning information, in step S450-1-6, the increment number counter (MY counter) is incremented by "3," which is the number of prize balls in the first start port 45.

In step S450-1-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is second start port winning information indicating that a game ball has won in the second start port 47. Specifically, it determines whether the 2 prize ball counter, which is updated in the second start port detection switch input process in step S240 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no second start port winning information, processing proceeds to step S450-1-9. If there is second start port winning information, in step S450-1-8, the increment number counter (MY counter) is incremented by "2," which is the number of prize balls in the second start port 47.

In step S450-1-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether there is out ball detection information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the outlet 39. Specifically, it determines whether the out ball detection counter, which is updated in the out detection switch input process in step S260 described above, is greater than 0. If there is no out ball detection information, the current increment counter update process is terminated. If there is out ball detection information, the main CPU 110a determines in step S450-1-10 whether the increment counter (MY counter) is greater than "0." If the increment counter is not greater than "0," that is, if it is "0," the current increment counter update process is terminated. If the increment counter is greater than "0," the increment counter is decremented by "1" in step S450-1-11, and the current increment counter update process is terminated.

The "increment counter" is a counter used to calculate the maximum increment (also referred to as "Max MY"). When the gaming parlor opens (when the gaming machine 1 is powered on), the value of the increment counter is "0," and the value of the maximum increment is also "0." For example, when a game begins after the gaming parlor opens and a gaming ball launched into the gaming area 5a enters one of the various winning slots (general winning slot 43, first starting slot 45, second starting slot 47, or jackpot winning slot 50), the increment counter is incremented by the number of winning balls. On the other hand, when a gaming ball launched into the gaming area 5a flows into the outlet 39, if the increment counter is greater than "0," the increment counter is decremented by 1. If the increment counter is "0," the increment counter remains at "0" without being decremented. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed in which a gaming ball can enter the jackpot winning slot 50, the value of the increment counter changes significantly. For example, if a jackpot game starts with the increment counter at "0," and 100 game balls are fired during the game, resulting in 1,500 prize balls being awarded, the net result is 1,400 game balls, so the increment counter value becomes "1,400." In the maximum increment update process (step S450-2) executed at this time, if the stored maximum increment is less than "1,400," the maximum increment is updated to "1,400." Subsequently, if multiple jackpot games are executed before the increment counter value is decremented to "0," the increment counter value gradually increases until it reaches "95,000" or greater, and the maximum increment also reaches "95,000" or greater, activating the maximum increment limit device. Note that the increment counter value becoming "0" when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, or the increment counter value becoming "0" as a result of being decremented, corresponds to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (MY=0).

The increment counter is set in the information RWM area, and the upper limit of the count that can be stored is "95013." For example, if one game ball is launched when the increment counter value is "94999," the increment counter value is updated to "94998." If one game ball enters the large prize slot 50 (10 prize balls) at this time, the increment counter value becomes "95008." Thus, according to this embodiment of the gaming machine, the condition for the winning limit device to be activated is for the increment counter value to reach "95000." However, due to differences in the number of prize balls per prize slot and the winning situation, it is rare for the increment counter to actually finish counting at exactly "95000." In fact, the increment counter may exceed "95000." Therefore, for example, counts up to "95013" can be stored (allowing for a certain range), and counts exceeding "95013" are not stored. The reason for the "95013" is that the system is designed to accommodate gaming machines equipped with specifications that allow the maximum number of prize balls for one win, stipulated by gaming machine rules, to be awarded after one game ball is released when the increment counter value is "94999," updating the increment counter value to "94998." Because the maximum number of prize balls for the gaming machine in this embodiment is "10" (the prize balls for large prize slot 50), the upper limit that can be counted and stored by the increment counter should be "95008." However, as mentioned above, if a gaming machine equipped with a specification that can award the maximum number of prize balls, 15, is to be developed or designed in the future, setting the upper limit that can be counted and stored by the increment counter to "95013" from the beginning can reduce the effort required for design changes. However, the upper limit that can be counted and stored by the increment counter may also be set for each gaming machine, taking into account the maximum number of prize balls for that gaming machine.

Although it has been stated that counts exceeding "95013" will not be stored (although an upper limit has been set for the number of counts that can be stored), it is not necessary to set an upper limit. For example, if a jackpot game starts when the increment counter is at "94990," the "1400" in the example above may be added, bringing the increment counter to "96390." In other words, even after the increment counter reaches "95000" during a jackpot game, the increment counter may continue to be updated until the jackpot game ends (until the win limit device is activated).

When the increment counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 90,000), the value of the increment counter is displayed (e.g., 90,000/95,000) on the third image display device 72 (advance notification is provided), as shown in FIG. 132. As an example, the display of this increment counter value is linked to the value of the increment counter in real time.

The display of the value of the increment counter (advance notification) is not limited to the third image display device 72, but may also be displayed on any of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), first image display device 70 (main LCD), or fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). Furthermore, when the display begins, a sound (such as "5000 remaining") may also be output.

In addition, once the advance notification is displayed when the increment counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 90,000), it may continue to be displayed until the power switch is turned off, regardless of how the value changes. For example, if an unfavorable situation continues for the player after the increment counter value is displayed, the advance notification may continue to be displayed even if the increment counter reaches 80,000. This allows the player to recognize that they have reached the point where the winning limit device will be activated.

On the other hand, if the player is put in a disadvantageous situation after the value of the increment counter is displayed, the display of the increment counter value may be erased. For example, if the player is put in a disadvantageous situation after the value of the increment counter is displayed, for example, if the increment counter reaches 89,000, the display of the increment counter value may be erased. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the winning limit device will soon be activated (compared to when the value is displayed once and continues to be displayed until the power is turned off).

The advance notification may also be set to continue displaying even when a notification event type (for example, an error), as described below, is being notified. It may also be set to continue displaying during variable display, jackpot play, or demo performance. This increases the player's chances of seeing the advance notification, making it easier to predict when the win limit device will be activated. This prevents the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device.

On the other hand, it is preferable to suspend the display during an SP Reach or SPSP Reach. This allows the player to focus on the SP Reach or SPSP Reach. Furthermore, depending on the type of notification event (e.g., an error), which will be described later, the display may be continued or suspended. For example, if a magnet detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, or RWM abnormality error occurs, the display may be suspended, and if a glass frame opening error or inner frame opening error occurs, the display may continue. This allows for appropriate advance notification.

In addition, the display of the value of the increment counter (advance notification) does not change depending on the presentation mode, and the sound, design, or display position of the advance notification when it is displayed does not change, but it is possible to make these different depending on the presentation mode.

To go into more detail about the display of the increment counter value, while the increment counter value is displayed as "90000/95000," this is not limited to this. For example, when the increment counter value is "85000/95000," the increment counter may be displayed as "10000 remaining." A range may also be provided, such as "5001 to 10000 remaining." Instead of displaying a numerical value, a meter image may be displayed, and the increment counter value may be represented by the remaining amount on the meter image. The increment counter value may also be represented by a combination of a meter image and a numerical display. The increment counter value may also be represented by the type of character, character color, or the like. For example, the character type may change from A to B to C as the increment counter value approaches "95000," or the character color may change from blue to yellow to red as the increment counter value approaches "95000."

The display of the increment counter value may also be linked to the increment counter value in real time (updated one at a time). This allows the player to be notified of a more accurate value until the winning limit device is activated.

On the other hand, the display of the increment counter value does not have to be linked to the increment counter value in real time. For example, it may be updated and displayed when the currently displayed value increases or decreases by 100. Also, instead of in units of 100, it may be in units of 500 or 1000. This makes it possible to suppress rapid display changes compared to when the increment counter value is linked in real time (updated in units of 1), and makes the display of the increment counter value easier to read.

Also, if the value of the increment counter is not linked in real time (updated in increments of 1), but is updated in increments of 100, 500, or 1000, it is preferable to display it with the word "approximately" added, such as "approximately 10,000 more" or "approximately 5,001 to 10,000 more." This prevents players from feeling distrustful due to a discrepancy between the displayed content and the timing of the win limit device activation.

Also, a sound effect may be output in one shot when the value of the increment counter is displayed, or the background music (BGM output during the changing display) may be changed after the value of the increment counter is displayed (using dedicated background music). Also, the tempo of the background music (BGM output during the changing display) may be increased as the value of the increment counter approaches "95000". This makes it easier to recognize from the sound change that the win limit device is about to be activated, preventing the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device.

On the other hand, sound effects may not be output when the value of the increment counter is displayed. Also, background music changes and the background music tempo may be maintained as they are. In other words, no sound notification may be made when the value of the increment counter is displayed. This prevents players from being disappointed when they mistake the notification that the value of the increment counter has started to be displayed for a jackpot preview and end up not winning the jackpot.

In addition, when displaying the value of the increment counter, the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 76 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (flashing in a predetermined color) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds). This makes it easier to recognize from the change in illumination that the win limit device is about to be activated, preventing the player from being surprised by the sudden activation of the win limit device.

On the other hand, when the value of the increment counter is displayed, the light emission mode of the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 76 may be maintained as is. In other words, no lamp lighting notification may be made when the value of the increment counter is displayed. This prevents players from mistaking the notification that the value of the increment counter has started to be displayed for a jackpot preview, resulting in no jackpot and disappointment.

In addition, gaming machine information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) based on the start of displaying the value of the increment counter is not output. This prevents the control processing load of the frame control board 120 from increasing.

In addition, the value of the increase number counter may be displayed within the operating range of the movable performance device 77 (a position that becomes temporarily difficult to see due to the operation of the movable performance device 77). This allows the operating range of the movable performance device 77 to be determined taking into account the display position of the value of the increase number counter, preventing restrictions such as a narrowing of the operating range of the movable performance device 77.

It may also be made temporarily difficult to see during scenes where a normal reach develops into an SP reach, when an SP reach develops into an SPSP reach, or when an SP reach or SPSP reach ends and the normal background returns (eye-catch). It may also be displayed during scenes of normal fluctuations and normal reach fluctuations, but not displayed during scenes of SP reach or SPSP reach. This allows attention to be drawn to the SP reach or SPSP reach without being distracted.

On the other hand, it may be possible to make it visible at all times. This will increase convenience by allowing users to know at any time the approximate time until the acquisition limit device is activated.

The display position and size may also be changed depending on the situation of the variation presentation. For example, the SP reach and SPSP reach scenes may be displayed smaller than the normal variation scenes and normal reach variation scenes, or the display position of the normal variation scenes and normal reach variation scenes may be made different (moved) from the display position of the SP reach and SPSP reach scenes. This allows the player to recognize the approximate time until the win limit device is activated, while also drawing attention to the SP reach and SPSP reach.

(Main control board acquisition upper limit device operation determination process)
44, the process of determining whether the earned upper limit device is activated by the main control board 110 will be described.

First, in step S450-4-1, the main CPU 110a references the value of the maximum increase number stored in the main RAM 110c. Once the value of the maximum increase number is referenced, the process proceeds to step S450-4-2.

In step S450-4-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). If it determines that the maximum increase has reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-3. If it determines that the maximum increase has not reached the predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), it proceeds to step S450-4-9.

In addition, as in this process, the control program (main control program) in which the main CPU 110a determines whether the maximum increase has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) can also be considered a detection means for detecting specific information that is counted when the counting condition is met.

In step S450-4-3, the main CPU 110a references the value of the special symbol special power processing data and determines whether the value of the special symbol special power processing data is "3" (during jackpot play). If the value of the special symbol special power processing data is "3" (during jackpot play), processing proceeds to step S450-4-4. If the value of the special symbol special power processing data is not "3" (during jackpot play), processing proceeds to step S450-4-5. Note that in the case of the above-mentioned Type 1/Type 2 type or small jackpot rush type, this processing may determine whether small jackpot play or jackpot play is in progress.

In step S450-4-4, the main CPU 110a turns ON the activation recognition flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. It is expected that this process will be performed multiple times during a jackpot game, but once the activation recognition flag has been turned ON, it does not need to be turned ON again each time this process is performed (nothing needs to be done during this process). Once the activation recognition flag is turned ON, the current win limit device activation determination process ends.

In step S450-4-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the activation recognition flag is ON. If the activation recognition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S450-4-3. If the activation recognition flag is not ON, the current acquisition limit device activation determination process ends.

The "activation recognition flag" is a flag that is turned ON when the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000) but the win limit device cannot be activated immediately (e.g., during a jackpot game). By setting this flag, it is possible to prevent a situation where the win limit device does not activate because the increase counter value at the end of a jackpot game is 94,900 by adjusting the increase counter value (e.g., setting the increase counter value to less than 95,000) when the jackpot game ends. In other words, once the maximum increase reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the win limit device will activate even if the increase counter value at the end of a subsequent jackpot game is less than 95,000. This leads to healthy gameplay.

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns ON the acquisition limit device activation flag in the main RAM 110c. As mentioned above, this flag will not be turned OFF unless the main RAM 110c is initialized (RWM clear processing), so the flag will remain in effect even if the control state before the power outage is restored (power is restored).

In step S450-4-5, the main CPU 110a turns OFF (outputs) the launch permission signal that the main control board 110 sends to the launching device to allow the launching device to launch game balls. This prevents the launching device from launching game balls.

In step S450-4-7, the main CPU 110a sets an acquisition limit device activation command. Specifically, in order to send information that the acquisition limit device has been activated to the performance control board 130, the acquisition limit device activation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 will display, for example, on the first image display device 70, in white text on a black background, something like "Acquisition limit device activated. Play ends for today." This allows the player to recognize that they are no longer able to continue playing.

In step S450-4-8, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that the win limit device has been activated. Specifically, it sets Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to send "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 6 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This ultimately enables the gaming machine information center to also know that the win limit device has been activated.

After step S450-4-6 is completed, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed until the power supply is completely cut off, making it impossible to launch game balls. However, processing to detect errors in the main control board 110, processing to detect errors in the frame control board 120, and processing to notify errors in the performance control board 130 can still be executed. For example, if the main control board 110 detects a magnet after step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" (described below) by audio, visual, or electric alert. Furthermore, if the frame control board 120 detects unauthorized radio waves after step S450-4-6 is completed, it is possible to notify "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error" (described below) by audio, visual, or electric alert. This allows the security level to be maintained even after the "Winning Limit Device" is activated.

Furthermore, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, processing related to errors may also be stopped. In other words, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, for example, since no prize balls are generated even if game balls enter each winning slot, there is little (or nothing) to be gained even if cheating is attempted using a magnet or the like. Therefore, the processing for detecting errors on the main control board 110 and frame control board 120, and the processing for receiving and reporting commands related to errors on the performance control board 130 may be stopped. This reduces the control load on each control board.

Furthermore, after the processing of step S450-4-6 is completed, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed and it becomes impossible to launch game balls, but the volume and light intensity adjustment functions on the performance control board 130 (volume and light intensity adjustment by the player) can still be executed. This allows for greater freedom in volume and light intensity adjustment.

If the power switch 164 is turned OFF after the acquisition limit device is activated and then only the power switch 164 is turned ON without pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, a notification will be issued stating "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM." However, if, for example, the checksum is determined to be invalid in step S15 of the main processing executed by turning ON the power switch 164, an unrecoverable error will occur in step S17, and step S29, which sends an acquisition limit device activation command (a command to execute the above notification), will not be executed. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c, even if the power is turned ON after the acquisition limit device has been activated, the notification (acquisition limit device activation notification) will not be executed, and an RWM abnormality error will be issued. In this case, step S29 will not be executed, and no audio, visual, or electric notification will be issued as an acquisition limit device activation notification. This allows priority notification of RWM abnormal errors, even in situations where the RWM needs to be cleared after the earning limit device has been activated, allowing employees to respond quickly.

(Main control board error control processing)
The error control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the error control processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S550-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the magnet detection flag is not set and whether the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b has detected abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. If it determines that abnormal magnetism has been detected for a predetermined period of time, it proceeds to step S550-2. If it determines that abnormal magnetism has not been detected for a predetermined period of time, it proceeds to step S550-4.

In step S550-2, the main CPU 110a sets a magnet detection flag in the main RAM 110c and sets a magnet detection designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to send information about the magnet detection to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 reports a magnet detection error. Details of the magnet detection error will be provided later.

In step S550-3, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to send "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This ultimately enables the gaming machine information center to also know that magnet detection has occurred.

In step S550-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a discrepancy has occurred between the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged. Specifically, it determines whether a discrepancy has occurred between the number of game balls that have entered the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port 45, second starting port 47, and large winning port 50) and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow (game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a). If a discrepancy has occurred, the process proceeds to step S550-5; if no discrepancy has occurred, the current error control process is terminated.

In step S550-5, the main CPU 110a sets an abnormal winning detection flag in the main RAM 110c and sets an abnormal winning designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in order to send information about the abnormal winning detection to the performance control board 130. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 notifies the abnormal winning error. Details of the abnormal winning error will be provided later.

In step S550-6, the main CPU 110a generates HC/fraud monitoring information indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. Specifically, it sets Bit 4 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" (see Figure 19) to "1" and prepares to send "HC/fraud monitoring information" in which Bit 4 of "Fraud Detection Status 1" is set to "1" to the frame control board 120. The HC/fraud monitoring information generated here will be sent to the frame control board 120 in the HC/fraud monitoring information management process described above. This ultimately enables the gaming machine information center to know that magnet detection has been performed. The error control process then ends.

(Main control board HC/false monitoring information management processing)
The HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the HC/fraud monitoring information management process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S600-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether 108 ms have elapsed. For example, the counter is updated during the time control process of step S110 of the main control board timer interrupt process (every 4 milliseconds), and is determined to have elapsed when it counts to 27 (4 milliseconds x 27 = 108 milliseconds). Note that the counter starts updating during the first time control process after an interrupt is permitted, and is cleared (set to 0) after counting to 27, and then counts again. If it is determined that 108 ms have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S650-2. If it is determined that 108 ms have not elapsed, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated.

In step S600-2, the main CPU 110a notifies gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). In other words, every 108 ms, the "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" is sent to the frame control board 120. Note that while the HC/fraud monitoring information management process is executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, it may also be executed within the main control board main process.

In step S600-3, the main CPU 110a increments the "notification counter" provided in the main RAM 110c by "+1". Then, in step S600-4, it determines whether or not the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to. If the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has been responded to, the current HC/fraud monitoring information management process is terminated. If the reception result of the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) has not been responded to, the process proceeds to step S600-5. In other words, it determines whether or not the reception result has been responded (received) from the frame control board 120 as a result of sending "gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information)" to the frame control board 120.

In step S600-6, the main CPU 110a sets a communication line disconnection error command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the communication line with the frame control board 120, and ends this HC/fraud monitoring information management process. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it notifies the user of a communication line disconnection error.

In addition, if there is a possibility of a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, game progress control (specific control processing) may not be executed, or the launch permission signal may be turned OFF to prevent the launch of game balls. In this way, it is possible to prevent games from being played despite a disconnection or other problem (communication abnormality) occurring between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Message related to communication between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
47, a description will be given of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a list of messages related to communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As shown in Figure 47, No. 1 has the message name "Gaming Machine Information Notification," the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170," the command "0x01," and the message summary "Notify Gaming Machine Information." No. 2 has the message name "Counting Notification," the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170," the command "0x02," and the message summary "Notify Counting Information." No. 3 has the message name "Lending Notification," the transmission direction "Dedicated Unit 170 → Frame Control Board 120," the command "0x13," and the message summary "Notify Lending Information." No. 4 has the message name "Lending Receipt Result Response," the transmission direction "Frame Control Board 120 → Dedicated Unit 170," the command "0x03," and the message summary "Reply with Lending Information Receipt Results." Note that "gaming machine information" here refers to "HC/fraud monitoring information" and "gaming machine performance information."

(Gaming machine information notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
48, a gaming machine information notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the gaming machine information notification.

The "Gaming Machine Information Notification" is structured as shown in Figure 48. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content is "0x12-0x39." No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content is "0x01." No. 3 has the data name "Communication Serial Number" and the content is "Sequence Number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)." No. 4 has the data name "Gaming Machine Type" related to gaming machine information and the content is "Gaming Machine Type." The gaming machine type is the same as that explained in the gaming machine installation information above. No. 5 has the data name "Gaming Machine Information Type" and the content is "0x00: Gaming Machine Performance Information, 0x01: Gaming Machine Installation Information, 0x02: Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information." No. 6. The data names related to gaming machine installation information are "Gaming Machine Performance Information," "Gaming Machine Installation Information," and "Hall Control/Fraud Monitoring Information." The contents of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information will be described later. No. 7 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Gaming machine performance information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
49, the gaming machine information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing gaming machine performance information.

The gaming machine performance information consists of 10 pieces of data. The first is named "Total number of game balls fired" and has the value "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)." The second is named "Total number of game balls acquired (total number of prize balls)" and has the value "0x000000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)." The third is named "Ball payout rate" and has the value "0x0000-0xFFFF (0%-65535%)." The fourth is named "Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base: non-time-saving mode)" and has the value "0x00-0xFFFF (0-65535 balls)." The fifth is named "Ratio of game devices" and has the value "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)." The sixth data item has the data name "Continuous feature ratio" and the content "0x00-0x64 (0%-100%)". The seventh data item has the data name "Number of jackpots" and the content "0x0000-0xFFFF (0-65535 times)". The eighth data item has the data name "Maximum payout" and the content "0x00000-0xFFFFFF (0-16777215 balls)". The ninth data item has the data name "Reserve" and the content "Reserve (fixed at 0x00)". The tenth data item has the data name "Reserved" and the content "Used on SC board (fixed at 0x00)".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by dividing the total number of game balls won by the total number of game balls fired x 100, the "number of game balls won per minute" is the number of game balls won in any one minute in a low base (non-time-saving) state, the "game ball ratio" is a value calculated by dividing the number of game balls won that are not the result of winning at a general winning slot (the number of game balls won in supplementary games, small win games, and jackpot games) by the total number of game balls won x 100, the "consecutive game ball ratio" is a value calculated by dividing the number of game balls won in jackpot games by the total number of game balls won x 100, and the "maximum ball payout" is the largest positive value (difference in number of balls) while the counter, which adds the number of prize balls (number of game balls won) each time a prize ball is awarded based on winning at a winning slot and subtracts one each time a game ball is fired into the game area, with "0" as the lower limit, is a positive value ("1" or more) (until it reaches "0"). In other words, if we consider a slump graph that rises to the right as prize balls are awarded and falls to the right as game balls are released, it is the value of the number of game balls won (number of balls difference) when the slump graph reaches its peak, starting from the point when the right-sloping trend begins as prize balls are awarded until the slump graph returns to the starting point again.

(Gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
50, the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine installation information consists of six pieces of data. The first is named "Main control chip ID number" and has the content "Main control chip ID number of gaming machine." The second is named "Main control chip manufacturer code" and has the content "Manufacturer code listed in the management area of the main control chip." The third is named "Main control chip product code" and has the content "Product code listed in the management area of the main control chip." The main control chip ID number is omitted from the diagram, but it is the ID number for each main control chip manufacturer. For example, if the main control chip is from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "23456789" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, while if the main control chip is from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "45678912" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

The fourth data item has the data name "Frame control chip ID number" and the content "Frame control chip ID number of gaming machine." The fifth data item has the data name "Frame control chip manufacturer code" and the content "Manufacturer code listed in the management area of the frame control chip." The sixth data item has the data name "Frame control chip product code" and the content "Product code listed in the management area of the frame control chip." Although the frame control chip ID number is omitted from the diagram, it is the ID number for each frame control chip manufacturer. For example, for a frame control chip from manufacturer A, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "34567891" + identification code is transmitted via telegram, while for a frame control chip from manufacturer B, a total of 9 bytes of data consisting of the chip individual number "56789123" + identification code is transmitted via telegram.

(Hole control and fraud monitoring information sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
The hole control and fraud monitoring information transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing the hole control and fraud monitoring information.

The hall control and fraud monitoring information consists of 10 pieces of data. The first is named "Number of game balls" and has the content "Current number of game balls (owned by the player): 0x000000-0x301B0F (0-990000 balls)." The second is named "Number of fired balls" and has the content "Number of balls fired: 0x80-0x7F (-128-127 balls)." The third is named "Total number of prize balls" and has the content "Total number of prize balls in count information 1-n x number of winning balls: 0x00-0xFF (0-255 balls)."

The fourth has the data name "Main Control Status 1" and the contents are "Bit 0: Jackpot 1, Bit 1: Jackpot 2, Bit 2: Jackpot 3, Bit 3: Gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: Gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: Gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: Gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: Unused. Specifically, the ON "1" and OFF "0" of Bits 0 to 2 are used to indicate whether a jackpot game is not being played or which of the seven types of jackpot games is being played, and the ON and OFF of Bits 3 to 6 are used to indicate which of the 16 types of game status is being played. Details of Main Control Status 1 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The fifth has the data name "Main Control State 2" and the contents are "Bit 0: During jackpot play + time-saving or advantageous state, Bit 1: High probability, Bit 2: Time-saving or advantageous state, Bits 3-7: Unused." For example, during jackpot play, Bit 0 is ON ("1") and Bit 1 and Bit 2 are OFF ("0"); during time-saving play, Bit 0 and Bit 2 are ON ("1") and Bit 1 is OFF ("0"). Details of Main Control State 2 have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The sixth item has the data name "Game machine error status" and the contents are "Bits 0 to 5: Error code, Bit 6: Frame control/Main control, Bit 7: Alert only/Alarm + Hall control output." For example, if an error is detected by the frame control board 120, Bit 6 will be OFF (0), and if the error is an alert + Hall control output, Bit 7 will be ON (1).

The seventh item has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 1 (Main Control)" and the contents are "Bit 0: Settings change signal, Bit 2: Settings confirmation signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 5: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: Earning limit device activated signal, Bit 7: Unused." Specifically, this indicates whether an event controlled or detected by the main control board 110 has occurred; for example, if settings are being changed, Bit 0 will be ON "1," and if an error corresponding to Fraud Detection Signal 1 has occurred, Bit 3 will be ON "1." Details of Fraud Detection Status 1 have been provided above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The eighth item has the data name "Fraud Detection Status 2 (Frame Control)" and the contents are "Bit 0: Glass Frame Open, Bit 1: Inner Frame Open, Bit 2: Unauthorized Radio Waves Detected, Bit 3: Number of Game Balls Cleared Detected, Bit 4: Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Detected, Bit 5: Abnormal Number of Balls Firing Detected, Bits 6-7: Unused." Specifically, these indicate whether an event detected by the frame control board 120 has occurred; for example, if the glass frame 4 is open, Bit 0 is ON ("1"), and if the number of game balls has been cleared, Bit 3 is ON ("1"). Details of Fraud Detection Status 2 will be provided later.

The ninth item has the data name "Fraud Detection State 3 (Frame Control)" and the contents "Bit 0: Small Ball Detected, Bit 1: Iron Ball Detected, Bit 2 to Bit 7: Unused." For example, if a small ball, which is a gaming ball smaller than a normal-sized gaming ball, is detected, Bit 0 will be set to ON "1." Details of Fraud Detection State 2 will be provided later.

The tenth item has the data name "Game Information." Specifically, the data name is "Number of Game Information," the content is "Number of Type Information/Count Information (n): n = 0x00-0x0F (0-15)," the data name is "Type Information 1," the content is "Type Information 1," the data name is "Count Information 1," the content is "Count Information 1," the data name is "Type Information n," the content is "Type Information n," the data name is "Count Information n," the content is "Count Information n."

Specifically, in the first example, when one game ball enters the first starting gate 45, "count information" refers to "data indicating the first starting gate 45," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (3)." Also, in the second example, when one game ball enters the major prize gate 50, "count information" refers to "data indicating the major prize gate 50," "data indicating the number of winning balls (1)," and "data indicating the number of prize balls (15)." Also, in the third example, when one game ball passes through the out ball detection switch 39a, "count information" refers to "data indicating the out ball detection switch 39a" and "data indicating the number of passing balls (1)." Details of the game information have been explained above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Hall control and fraud monitoring information fraud detection status)
The fraud detection state of the hole control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52(a) is a diagram showing fraud detection state 2, and Fig. 52(b) is a diagram showing fraud detection state 3.

"Fraud detection status 2" is Bit 0 named "Glass frame open", details "0 = normal, 1 = glass frame open detected", Bit 1 named "Inner frame open", details "0 = normal, 1 = inner frame open detected", Bit 2 named "Illegal radio wave detected", details "0 = normal, 1 = illegal radio wave detected", Bit 3 named "Number of game balls cleared detected", details "0 = normal, 1 = number of game balls cleared detected", Bit 4 named "Abnormal number of winning balls detected", details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of winning balls detected", Bit 5 named "Abnormal number of fired balls detected", details "0 = normal, 1 = abnormal number of fired balls detected", and Bits 6 to 7 named "Unused", details "Fixed at 0".

"Fraud detection status 3" has the name of Bit 0 "Small ball detected" and details "0 = normal, 1 = small ball detected", the name of Bit 1 "Iron ball detected" and details "0 = normal, 1 = iron ball detected", and the names of Bits 2 to 7 are "Unused" and details "Fixed to 0".

(Hall control and fraud monitoring information)
The gaming information of the hall control and fraud monitoring information will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing gaming information.

"Game Information" consists of two bytes: "Type Information (1 byte)" and "Count Information (1 byte)." Furthermore, "Type Information (1 byte)" consists of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)."

For example, "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0000 (= 0)" with the type name "Unused" and the content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0001 (= 1)" with the type name "Winning at the starting gate" and the content "Notification that a prize has been won at the starting gate", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0010 (= 2)" with the type name "Winning at the large prize gate" and the content "Notification that a prize has been won at the large prize gate", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0011 (= 3)" with the type name "Winning at the prize gate" and the content "Notification that a prize has been won at the prize gate". Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0100 (= 4)" are type names "winning at all start gates" and content "notifying passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0101 (= 5)", "0110 (= 6)", "0111 (= 7)", and "1000 (= 8)" are type names "unused" and content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1001 (= 9)" are type names "number of times the pattern has been determined" and content "notifying the number of times the pattern related to the game has changed", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0100 (= 4)" are type names "winning at all start gates" and content "notifying passing through the start gate or normal gate related to the game", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "0101 (= 5)", "0110 (= 6)", "0111 (= 7)", and "1000 (= 8)" are type names "unused" and content "-", Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1001 (= 9)" are type names "number of times the pattern has been determined" and content "notifying the number of times the pattern has changed related to the game", Bit7 "1010 (=10)" is the type name "number of jackpots" and the content "notification that the accessory continuous operation device has been activated", Bit4 to Bit7 "1011 (=11)" is the type name "unused" and the content "-", and Bit4 to Bit7 "1100 (=12)" is the type name "number of accessory events (number of large prize openings)" and the content "notification of the opening of the large prize opening when the accessory continuous operation device has not been activated, if you want to use the number of large prize openings at the time of a small win as the start number" ("jackpot game 3 (4 laurels)" in Figure 15). The first round of the "Bonus" is a small win game (see small win game), Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1101 (= 13)" are type name "Passing through a specific area" and content "Notification of passing through a specific area" (see "Specific Area" in Figure 15), Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1110 (= 14)" are type name "Reserve" and content "Used to notify data other than data types 1 to 4, 9, 10, 12, and 13", and Bit 4 to Bit 7 "1111 (= 15)" are type name "Unused" and content "-".

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Start Gate Winning," the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" will notify the content (start gate number) as either "0001 (= 1)" (win at start gate 1), "0010 (= 2)" (win at start gate 2), or "0011 (= 3)" (win at start gate 3) for Bit 0 to Bit 3 (values other than the above are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "0001" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001" will be notified.

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Large Prize Gate Win," then the content (large prize gate number) is reported as either "0001 (=1)" (large prize gate 1 win) or "0010 (=1)" (large prize gate 2 win) for Bits 0 to 3 (unused). For example, if a game ball wins large prize gate 50, type information (1 byte) is reported, with "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" set to "0010 (=2)" and "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" set to "0001 (=1)."

If the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "Winning Slot," the content (winning slot number) is reported as one of the following bits (Bits 0 to 3): "0001 (= 1)" (winning slot 1), "0010 (= 2)" (winning slot 2), ... "1111 (= 15)" (winning slot 15) ("0000 (= 0)" is unused). For example, if a game ball wins the general winning slot 43 located at the bottom right of the decorative frame 40, type information (1 byte) is reported, with the "Data Type (Bits 4 to 7)" being "0011 (= 3)" and the "Data Number (Bits 0 to 3)" being "0001 (= 1)."

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Winning at all start gates," the content notified is Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (winning or passing) (others are unused). For example, if a game ball wins at the first start gate 45, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified. If a game ball passes through the normal gate 44, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "0100 (=4)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)" is notified.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Confirmed Symbols," the content notifies Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (the number of confirmed symbols related to the game (special symbols, normal symbols)) (the others are unused). For example, if the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, type information (1 byte) consisting of "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" as "1001 (=9)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" as "0001 (=1)" is notified, and similar type information is notified when the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state. Similarly, similar type information is notified when a normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Jackpots," the content notified is Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (the continuous operation device for the bonus item is activated) (the others are unused). For example, if the first jackpot (see Figure 12) is executed, the type information (1 byte) notified is "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "1010 (=10)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" is "0001 (=1)."

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Number of Bonus Features (Number of Big Win Gate Openings)," the content notified is Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (Bonus Feature 1) (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Big Win Game 3" described in Figure 15 is executed, the type information (1 byte) notified will be "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" = "1100 (=12)" and "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" = "0001 (=1)."

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Passing Through a Specific Area," the content notified is Bit 0 to Bit 3 "0001 (=1)" (Specific Area 1) (the rest are unused). For example, if the "Jackpot Game 3" described in Figure 15 is executed and the gaming ball passes through a specific area, type information (1 byte) is notified, with the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" being "1101 (=13)" and the "Data Number (Bit 0 to Bit 3)" being "0001 (=1)."

Note that in the case of "passing through a specific area," as shown in Figure 22, if Bits 4 to 7 are "unused" and "fixed to 0," and Bits 0 to 3 are "0001 (=1)," this indicates that the "number of times the specific area has been passed" has been reached (the others are unused). In other words, as shown in Example 1 of Figure 22, when a gaming ball passes through specific area 1 once, gaming information "0xD101" is reported, which is broken down into type information (1 byte) where "data type (Bits 4 to 7)" is "1101 (=13)" and "data number (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001 (=1)," and count information (1 byte) where "unused (Bits 4 to 7)" is "0000 (=0)" and "number of passes (Bits 0 to 3)" is "0001 (=1)" (1 time).

If the "Data Type (Bit 4 to Bit 7)" is "Reserve", the contents will be notified as one of the following (reserve numbers) for Bit 0 to Bit 3: "0001 (= 1)", "0010 (= 2)", "0011 (= 3)", or "0100 (= 4)" (others are unused).

(Counting notification sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
54, the counting notification transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the counting notification.

The "Counting Notification" is configured as shown in Figure 54. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x07". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x02". No. 3 has the data name "Counting Serial Number" and the content "Sequence Number: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 4 has the data name "Counted Ball Count" and the content "Counted Ball Count: 0x00-0xFF (0-255)". No. 5 has the data name "Cumulative Counted Ball Count" and the content "Cumulative Counted Ball Count: 0x00-0xFFFF (0-65,535)". No. 6 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending notification sent from the dedicated unit to the frame control board)
55, a description will be given of the lending notification transmitted from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the lending notification.

The "loan notification" is structured as shown in Figure 55. No. 1 has the data name "Message length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x13". No. 3 has the data name "Loan serial number" and the content "Sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the data name "Number of loaned balls" and the content "Number of loaned balls: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255 balls)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Lending receipt result response sent from the frame control board to the dedicated unit)
56, the loan receipt result response transmitted from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the loan receipt result response.

The "Loan Receipt Result Response" is structured as shown in Figure 56. No. 1 has the data name "Message Length" and the content "0x05". No. 2 has the data name "Command" and the content "0x03". No. 3 has the "Loan Serial Number" and the content "Sequence Number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)". No. 4 has the "Loaned Ball Count Receipt Result" and the content "Loaned Ball Count Receipt Result: 0x00 = Normal, 0x01 = Abnormal (When ball removal is in progress and the number of game balls owned by the player is 100,000 or more)". No. 5 has the data name "Checksum" and the content "-".

(Basic communication sequence between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
The basic communication sequence between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, when the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n) to the dedicated unit 170 as the first telegram. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 the counting notification (counting serial number = m) as the second telegram. Then, within 170 ms, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 the loan notification (serial number = k) as the third telegram. Then, within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 the loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k) as the fourth telegram, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball count receipt result.

Then, after 20 ms or more have passed since the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1) to the dedicated unit 170 as the fifth telegram. After that, the first through fourth communication sequences are repeated every 300 ms by sending and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit startup sequence 1)
Using Figure 58, we will explain the startup sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the gaming machine 1 starts up first).

First, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is off, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 is off, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 are off. Then, when the power to the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is turned on simultaneously, the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 begin to start up.

After that, when the gaming machine 1 completes startup before the dedicated unit 170, messages such as gaming machine information notifications and counting notifications are sent sequentially from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence described above. However, since the dedicated unit 170 is currently starting up, it is unable to receive the sent messages.

Once the dedicated unit 170 has finished starting up, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn ON, allowing the gaming machine 1 to release gaming balls and enabling operation of the counting button 20. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in Figure 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit startup sequence 2)
Using Figure 59, we will explain the startup sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (the case where the dedicated unit 170 starts up first).

First, when the dedicated unit 170 is powered on before the gaming machine 1, the dedicated unit 170 begins to start up, and when the dedicated unit 170 has finished starting up, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn ON, and the dedicated unit 170 enters a state of waiting for connection with the gaming machine 1.

After that, when the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming machine 1 begins to start up, and when the startup of the gaming machine 1 is complete, the gaming machine 1 becomes capable of releasing gaming balls and enabling operation of the counting button 20. After that, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence with a cycle of 300 ms in Figure 57.

(Sequence 1 of notification of gaming machine information between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
Using Figure 60, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 1 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where gaming information related to a game is not held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 waits for connection with the gaming machine 1. After that, when the gaming machine has finished starting up, gaming balls can be released from the gaming machine 1 and operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence at a cycle of 300 ms in Figure 57.

Then, 60 seconds after the completion of startup of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, when the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information arrives, the frame control board 120 sends a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine installation information to the dedicated unit 170 as the tenth telegram shown in the figure. Thereafter, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence at 300 ms intervals shown in FIG. 57.

Furthermore, if the timing of the two notifications, gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information, overlap 180 seconds after the completion of startup of gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine installation information with the highest priority is transmitted as the 11th telegram shown in the figure. After that, telegrams are transmitted and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of the gaming machine performance information with the lowest priority is transmitted. Thereafter, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly transmitted and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence at 300 ms intervals shown in FIG. 57.

(Sequence 2 for notifying gaming machine information between the frame control board and the dedicated unit)
Using Figure 61, we will explain the gaming machine information notification sequence 2 of the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case in which gaming information related to the game is held at the time of sending the gaming machine information notification).

First, the dedicated unit 170 waits for connection with the gaming machine 1. After that, when the gaming machine has finished starting up, gaming balls can be released from the gaming machine 1 and operation of the counting button 20 becomes valid. Then, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as shown in the basic communication sequence at a cycle of 300 ms in Figure 57.

Then, 60 seconds after the completion of startup of the gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the timing for notifying the gaming machine installation information arrives. However, because gaming information related to the game is still being held at this point, the frame control board 120 transmits to the dedicated unit 170 the sixth telegram shown in the figure, which is not gaming machine installation information but a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine installation information is transmitted. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 57.

Furthermore, the timing for notifying gaming machine performance information occurs 180 seconds after the completion of startup of gaming machine 1 and 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification. However, because gaming information related to the game is held at this point, the frame control board 120 transmits to the dedicated unit 170 as the 15th telegram shown in the figure a gaming machine information notification consisting of hall control and fraud monitoring information including gaming information, rather than gaming machine performance information. After that, telegrams are sent and received in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response, and 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification, a gaming machine information notification consisting of gaming machine performance information is transmitted. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in FIG. 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit count notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 62, we will explain counting notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1,000 gaming balls and the dedicated unit 170 stores 100 balls for the player, the count button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. Then, when the timing for sending a gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170, stating the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1,000). After 100 ms have passed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added by the counted number of 250, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120, a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

Furthermore, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fifth electronic message (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) to inform the player of the gaming machine information. 100 ms later, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of gaming balls owned by the player, bringing the total to 500. The frame control board 120 then sends the dedicated unit 170 a sixth electronic message (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 500) to inform the dedicated unit 170 that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted. 250 balls are then added to the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170, bringing the total to 600.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the seventh telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends the eighth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

After that, after the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is released and 300 ms have passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 500) as the ninth telegram. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a counting notification (counting serial number = m+2, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 500) as the tenth telegram.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the 11th telegram, a loan notification (loan serial number = k+2, number of loaned balls = 0), to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends the 12th telegram, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number k+2, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170. Thereafter, messages (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence with a 300 ms cycle shown in Figure 57.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit count notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 63, we will explain counting notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 1,000 gaming balls and the dedicated unit 170 stores 100 balls for the player, the count button 20 on the gaming machine 1 is pressed. Then, when the timing for sending a gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first telegram to the dedicated unit 170, stating the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1,000). After 100 ms have passed, 250 balls are subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player, making it 750, and when a second telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 notifying that the game balls (game value) have been counted (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 250), the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is added by the counted number of 250, making it 350.

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120, a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

Furthermore, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fifth gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 750) 100 ms later, the number of gaming balls owned by the player is subtracted by 250 to make it 500, and the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a sixth counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 250, cumulative counted number of balls = 500) to indicate that the gaming balls (gaming value) have been counted; however, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls owned by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the seventh telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 500). However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls held by the player stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated.

Then, 300 ms after the dedicated unit 170 detects the communication abnormality in the gaming machine information notification, the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns OFF, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn OFF, causing the release of gaming balls in the gaming machine 1 to stop and the operation of the counting button 20 to become invalid.

Then, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, it is time to send the counting notification, but at this point the operation of the counting button 20 is invalid (= the counting button 20 is deemed to have been released), so a counting notification with counted balls = 0 (counting serial number m + 2, counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 500) is sent, but due to a communication error the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification, and the number of balls the player has stored in the dedicated unit 170 is not updated. At this time, the dedicated unit 170 is waiting for the CU board error to be resolved, and waits until the error is resolved by the gaming store staff, and once the error is resolved it turns on VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting valid signal).

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 1)
Using Figure 64, we will explain the lending notification sequence 1 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where no communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. Then, when the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50). 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to lend game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125). The number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control board 120 is then increased by 125 loaned balls, totaling 175. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram informing it of the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the number of loaned balls receipt result.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the fifth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number n+1, number of gaming balls 175). After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence shown in Figure 57, with a cycle of 300 ms.

(Frame control board and dedicated unit rental notification sequence 2)
Using Figure 65, we will explain the lending notification sequence 2 between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 (a case where a communication abnormality occurs between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170).

First, when the player owns 50 gaming balls, he presses the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. Then, when the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 50). 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the frame control board 120 a third telegram instructing it to loan game balls (game value) (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125). The number of game balls owned by the player, as stored in the frame control board 120, is increased by 125 loaned balls, totaling 175. Within 10 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a fourth telegram informing it of the loan receipt result (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls receipt result = normal). However, due to a communication error, the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the loan receipt result response, and as it has not received the loan receipt result response 10 ms after the loan notification, it determines that the loan is incomplete.

Furthermore, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the fifth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 175). 100 ms after that, the sixth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0).

Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends (resends) to the frame control board 120 a seventh telegram: a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 125) instructing the loan of the same game balls (game value) as in the previously sent loan notification. However, because the frame control board 120 has already added the loaned amount to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in accordance with the loan notification for loan serial number = k, within 10 ms the frame control board 120 sends to the dedicated unit 170 an eighth telegram: a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal). This causes the dedicated unit 170 to confirm the loaned ball number receipt result, and because the serial number matches the previous loan notification, it determines that the previous loan notification has been received by the frame control board 120 and completes the loan that had been left unfinished.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number n+2, number of gaming balls 175) as the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170. After that, telegrams (gaming machine information notification, counting notification, loan notification, loan receipt result response) are repeatedly sent and received between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, as in the basic communication sequence at 300 ms intervals shown in Figure 57.

(Recovery sequence when the dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board and the dedicated unit is disconnected)
Using FIG. 66, a recovery sequence when a dedicated PIF that connects the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is disconnected will be described.

First, when the player owns 1,000 gaming balls and the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1,000). 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 0). Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a third telegram to the frame control board 120 as a loan notification (loan serial number = k, number of loaned balls = 0), and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = normal), and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loaned ball number receipt result.

Then, more than 20 ms after the transmission of the fourth loan receipt result response and 300 ms after the transmission of the first gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a fifth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 1000). When a disconnection in the dedicated PIF is detected, the frame control board 120's VL (power supply for connection confirmation) turns OFF, and the dedicated unit 170's VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) turn OFF, causing the gaming machine 1 to stop firing gaming balls and disable operation of the counting button 20.

After that, 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a sixth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, which is a counting notification (counting serial number = m+1, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0), but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification due to a PIF disconnection. Furthermore, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends a seventh telegram to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 1000), but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the gaming machine information notification due to a PIF disconnection. 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends an eighth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, which is a counting notification (counting serial number = m + 2, number of balls counted = 0, cumulative number of balls counted = 0), but the dedicated unit 170 is unable to receive the counting notification due to a PIF disconnection.

Then, when the disconnection in the dedicated PIF is restored (the connection is confirmed), the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) of the frame control board 120 turns ON, and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) and PSI (counting enable signal) of the dedicated unit 170 turn ON, allowing the gaming machine 1 to release game balls and enabling operation of the counting button 20.

After that, 300 ms after the previous gaming machine information notification was sent, the frame control board 120 sends the ninth telegram to the dedicated unit 170: gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+3, number of gaming balls = 1000). 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 sends the tenth telegram to the dedicated unit 170: counting notification (counting serial number = m+3, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted balls = 0). Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the 11th telegram as a loan notification (loan serial number = 0, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends the 11th telegram as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k, loaned ball number receipt result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, 300 ms after the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number = n+4, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the 12th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. 100 ms after that, the frame control board 120 sends the counting notification (counting serial number = m+4, number of counted balls = 0, cumulative counted number of balls = 0) as the 13th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. Then, within 170 ms of receiving the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends the 14th telegram as a loan notification (loan serial number = k+1, number of loaned balls = 0) to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends the 15th telegram as a loan receipt result response (loan serial number = k+1, loaned ball number receipt result = normal) to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaned ball number receipt result is confirmed by the dedicated unit 170.

(Notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information for frame control board and dedicated unit)
Using Figure 67, the notification sequence of hole control and fraud monitoring information (number of shot balls, returned balls) from the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 will be explained.

First, if the player owns 1,000 gaming balls and the cumulative number of balls fired stored in the dedicated unit 170 is 100, when the timing for sending a gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the first electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a gaming machine information notification (serial number = n, number of gaming balls = 1,000). 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the second electronic message to the dedicated unit 170, which is a counting notification.

After that, one game ball is released, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 999. Within 170 ms of the count notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification as the third telegram to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response as the fourth telegram to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the number of loaned balls received.

Then, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the fifth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170, containing gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+1, number of gaming balls = 999, number of fired balls = 1) reflecting the firing of one ball, and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 101. 90 to 100 ms later, the sixth telegram is sent from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 as a counting notification.

After that, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000, and within 170 ms of the counting notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification as the seventh telegram to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends an eighth telegram to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball receipt result.

Then, when the timing for sending the gaming machine information notification arrives, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+2, number of gaming balls = 1000, number of fired balls = -1) reflecting one returned ball to the dedicated unit 170 as the ninth telegram, and the cumulative number of fired balls stored in the dedicated unit 170 becomes 100. 90 to 100 ms later, the frame control board 120 sends the dedicated unit 170 a counting notification as the tenth telegram.

In addition, within 170 ms of the count notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification as the 11th telegram to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response as the 12th telegram to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball count receipt result.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+3, number of gaming balls = 1000) as the 13th telegram to the dedicated unit 170. After that, one gaming ball is released, bringing the number of gaming balls owned by the player to 999, and 90 to 100 ms after the transmission of the gaming machine installation information, the frame control board 120 sends the count notification as the 14th telegram to the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, one returned ball occurs, bringing the number of game balls owned by the player to 1,000. Within 170 ms of the count notification, the dedicated unit 170 sends a loan notification as the 15th telegram to the frame control board 120, and within 10 ms thereafter, the frame control board 120 sends a loan receipt result response as the 16th telegram to the dedicated unit 170, and the dedicated unit 170 confirms the loan ball receipt result.

After that, when it is time to send the gaming machine information notification, which arrives every 300 ms, the frame control board 120 sends the gaming machine installation information (serial number = n+4, number of gaming balls = 1000) to the dedicated unit 170 as the 17th telegram. After that, the first through fourth communication sequences are repeated every 300 ms by sending and receiving telegrams in the order of counting notification, loan notification, and loan receipt result response.

(Main processing of frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a disables all interrupts in step W1, performs CPU initialization such as setting internal registers in step W2, and then allows access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W3.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a backup flag indicating power restoration has been saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the backup flag has not been saved, it assumes that this is the first time the power has been turned on and proceeds to step W8. If the backup flag has been saved, it assumes that power restoration has occurred and in step W5, it calculates the checksum of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c matches the calculated checksum. If the checksum is abnormal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step W9. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), in step W7, the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area are cleared and the RWM area is set.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the game ball count memory area for storing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is set in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W9, it initializes (clears to 0) the areas to be initialized (excluding the game ball count memory area, etc.) in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not cleared and processing proceeds to step W15. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is stored in the game ball count memory area in the RWM area, is cleared.

In step W12, the frame control CPU 120a sets a game ball count clear start command, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W13, sets a game ball count clear flag, indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, in the frame control RAM 120c, and generates hole control/fraud monitoring information (Bit 3 of "Fraud Detection Status 2" is "1") indicating that the game ball count has been cleared. This causes the game ball count clear start command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is carried out to execute the game ball count clear notification.

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If the game ball count clear flag is not set, the error code corresponding to the game ball count clear is not displayed and processing proceeds to step W16. If the game ball count clear flag is set, in step W15, the game ball count display 135 displays "0" and the frame control display 125 displays "H67," an error code corresponding to the game ball count clear.

The game ball count clear flag set in the frame control RAM 120c will not be cleared until a game ball is released or the number of game balls is counted, and the error code "H64" will continue to be displayed on the frame control display 125. On the other hand, once a game ball is released or the number of game balls is counted, the game ball count clear flag will be cleared and the display of the error code "H64" on the frame control display 125 will cease.

In step W16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. If the ball removal switch 122 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step W20, assuming that the ball removal operation will not be performed. If the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, in step W17, a ball removal operation in progress designation command indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the ball removal operation in progress designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to execute the ball removal operation in progress notification.

Note that after step W16, there is no determination as to whether the ball removal switch 122 is being operated. In other words, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the ball removal operation command will not be set to notify the user that the ball removal operation is in progress, the ball removal operation flag will not be set to perform the ball removal operation, and the specific information "-" will not be displayed.

In step W18, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal operation in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. The ball removal operation in progress flag set here is referenced in the ball removal operation processing described below, and the ball removal operation will be performed on the condition that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set.

In step W19, the frame control CPU 120a displays the specific information "-" on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125, indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. Note that if the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67," indicating that the game ball count has been cleared, this display takes priority and the specific information "-" is not displayed on the frame control display 125.

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a activates the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) and enables all interrupts.

In step W21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110. If an RWM clear command has not been received, processing proceeds to step W25. If an RWM clear command has been received, interrupts are prohibited in step W22. In step W23, the initialization target area of the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c (storage area excluding the game ball count storage area and storage area related to display performance information, etc., and storage area mainly related to gaming machine information (hole control and fraud monitoring information)) is initialized (cleared to 0), and in step W24, interrupts are permitted.

In step W25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has not occurred, processing proceeds to step W21. If a power outage has occurred, interrupts are prohibited in step W26, and in step W27, output ports are cleared to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) and various displays (frame control display 125, game ball count display 135, etc.) and to stop the output of the launch permission signal.

In step W28, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the frame control RAM 120c and saves it in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W29, it saves a backup flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that the data in the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up (power has been restored). In step W30, it performs processing to prohibit RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, it is possible for a player to clear the number of game balls (game value) they own, provided that the ball removal switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. Therefore, if the number of game balls is stored in the gaming machine 1 when it is shipped from the manufacturing factory to the gaming parlor, or if a player stops playing when only a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) is stored in the gaming machine 1, it is possible for a new player to play, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming parlor.

In addition, when the number of game balls is cleared, clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming store staff. This allows gaming store staff to easily understand that the number of game balls has been cleared, improving convenience for gaming store staff.

Furthermore, if the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored after the number of game balls has been cleared without any game balls being released or the number of game balls being counted, the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming facility staff, will again display clear information (error code "H64") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared. This means that evidence that the number of game balls has been cleared will not disappear when the power is restored, improving convenience for gaming facility staff.

In addition, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, the game ball count will not be cleared, a game ball count clear notification will not be made, and clear information indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (error code "H64") will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 is unintentionally operated while inspecting the gaming machine, for example, no inconvenience will occur and the convenience of the gaming parlor will not be improved.

In addition, when the power is on and the ball removal switch 122 is operated, a ball removal operation is performed to remove (discharge) game balls circulating within the gaming machine 1. This allows game balls circulating within the gaming machine 1 to be replaced, preventing games from being played with dirty game balls and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the ball removal operation is in progress, the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming store staff, and the game ball count display 135, which is visible to players, display the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. This allows gaming store staff to easily understand that the ball removal operation is in progress, improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated while power is being supplied after the power is turned on, no notification will be given that the ball removal operation is in progress, the ball removal operation will not be performed, and the specific information "-" indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress will not be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball removal switch 122 is operated unintentionally while inspecting the gaming machine, for example, no inconvenience will occur and the convenience of the gaming facility will not be improved.

In addition, when an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110, the memory areas excluding the game ball count memory area and the memory area related to display performance information, which are primarily memory areas related to gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information), are initialized (cleared to 0). Therefore, by initializing the gaming machine information (information sent to the dedicated unit 170) stored in the frame control board 120 when the main control board 110 clears the RWM, there is no longer any discrepancy between the gaming machine information on the main control board 110 and the gaming machine information on the frame control board 120, and it becomes possible to send gaming machine information corresponding to the RWM clear on the main control board 110 to the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, the RWM area to be initialized differs depending on whether the checksum is normal (there is an error in the data in the RWM area) or when an RWM clear command is received from the main control board 110. This makes it possible to initialize the appropriate RWM area depending on the type of initialization factor.

If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the areas to be initialized, excluding the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, are initialized (cleared to 0). However, if the checksum is not normal, the game ball count storage area and game ball count clear flag storage area may also be initialized (cleared to 0).

In addition, the main processing determines whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initializes the RWM area, but the main processing may also determine whether an RWM clear command has been received from the main control board 110 and initialize the RWM area during the timer interrupt processing described below.

(Timer interrupt processing of frame control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120 will be described using Figure 69. Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m.

First, in step W100, the frame control CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c, and then in step W150, performs the ball removal operation process. Specifically, the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls collected from the game area 5a into the lifted ball passage, and the lifted game balls are then discharged outside the gaming machine through a ball removal opening located midway along the lifted ball passage. Details of the ball removal operation process will be described later.

In step W200, the frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine installation information reception processing. Specifically, when gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing such as transmitting a gaming machine installation information response to the main control board 110. Details of the gaming machine installation information reception processing will be described later.

In step W250, the frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information reception processing. Specifically, when gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the frame control CPU 120a updates the gaming machine information stored in the frame control RAM 120c and transmits a gaming machine information response to the main control board 110. Details of the gaming machine information reception processing will be described later.

In step W300, the frame control CPU 120a performs a game ball count update process. Specifically, it subtracts game balls in response to the launch of game balls, and adds game balls in response to foul balls and game balls entering various winning slots. Details of the game ball count update process will be described later.

In step W350, the frame control CPU 120a performs error control processing. Specifically, it detects whether or not various errors monitored by the frame control board 120 have occurred, and performs processing to cause the frame control board 120 to issue an error notification according to the type of error that has occurred (such as setting an error code to be displayed on the frame control display 125 and setting an error notification command to be sent to the performance control board 130). Details of the error control processing will be described later.

In step W400, the frame control CPU 120a performs a display performance information calculation process. Specifically, it counts the number of game balls (number of out balls) fired into the game area 5a and the number of game balls (number of prize balls) awarded to the player as a result of the game, and performs a process to calculate the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125 based on the counted number of game balls. The display performance information calculation process will be described in detail later.

In step W450, the frame control CPU 120a performs a gaming machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 and information about the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, it performs a process to calculate gaming machine performance information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. Details of the gaming machine performance information calculation process will be described later.

In step W500, the frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information notification processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit (data transfer) to the dedicated unit 170 gaming machine installation information related to gaming machine 1, gaming machine performance information calculated in the gaming machine performance information calculation processing, and hall control and fraud monitoring information generated from gaming machine information received from the main control board 110. Details of the gaming machine information notification processing will be described later.

In step W550, the frame control CPU 120a performs game ball counting processing. Specifically, based on the player's operation of the count button 20, it performs processing to transmit (transfer data) some or all of the game balls owned by the player to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the game ball counting processing will be described later.

In step W600, the slot control CPU 120a performs a game ball lending process. Specifically, based on a loan notification sent in response to the player's consumption of the player's valuables (the balance of cash inserted into the dedicated unit) through the player's loan operation on the dedicated unit 170, the slot control CPU 120a adds (lends) the number of game balls notified in the loan notification to the number of game balls owned by the player. Details of the game ball lending process will be described later.

In step W650, the frame control CPU 120a performs output control processing. Specifically, it transmits commands stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c to the performance control board 130, and outputs drive data for the ball feeding unit 91, launching device 92, lifting and polishing device 95, etc. from the output port.

In step W700, the frame control CPU 120a performs display control processing. Specifically, it displays the number of game balls owned by the player, the error code set in the error control processing described above, and the performance information (normal base value) calculated in the display performance information calculation processing described above on the frame control display 125, and also performs processing to display the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball count display 135. If no error code is set, the number of game balls and performance information are displayed alternately every 5 seconds (repeated in the following order: number of game balls → performance information for the current game section → number of game balls → performance information for the previous game section → number of game balls → performance information for the second previous game section → number of game balls → performance information for the third previous game section). If an error code is set, the number of game balls, performance information, and error code are displayed alternately every 5 seconds.

In step W750, the frame control CPU 120a restores to the register the information that was saved in the stack area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt processing.

In the display control process, when the winning limit device is activated, the frame control display 125 displays an error code corresponding to the winning limit device, the number of game balls, and performance information (normal base value). However, when the winning limit device is activated, the performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed, and only the error code corresponding to the winning limit device and the number of game balls may be displayed, or the number of game balls and performance information (normal base value) may not be displayed, and only the error code corresponding to the winning limit device may be displayed.

(Ball removal operation processing of frame control board)
The ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flowchart showing the ball removal operation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W151, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c contains a ball removal operation in progress flag, indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. If the ball removal operation in progress flag is not present, the current ball removal operation process is terminated. If the ball removal operation in progress flag is present, in step W152, the lifting and polishing device drive process is performed. Specifically, the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) is driven to lift the game balls up to the lifting ball passage in order to discharge the game balls out of the gaming machine through a ball removal opening located in the lifting ball passage, which is part of the game ball circulation path and slopes downward toward the ball feeding device.

In step W153, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not a ball removal lever operation error flag (described below) is present (a ball removal lever operation error is occurring). If the ball removal lever operation error flag is not present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W154. If the ball removal lever operation error flag is present, it is assumed that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W157.

In step W154, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal opening, has remained ON (a state in which a game ball has been detected) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). If the lift up switch 94c has not remained ON for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W156. If the lift up switch 94c has remained ON for the predetermined period, processing proceeds to step W154, assuming that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in which the ball removal lever has not been operated despite the ball removal operation being in progress, causing the ball removal opening to be closed (a state in which balls cannot be discharged).

In step W155, the frame control CPU 120a sets a ball removal lever error flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error is occurring, and in step W156, sets a ball removal lever operation error start command, indicating that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and ends this ball removal operation processing. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error start command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In step W157, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the lift up switch 94c, which is located in the middle of the lifting ball passage and upstream of the ball removal opening, has turned OFF (a state in which no game balls are detected). If the lift up switch 94c is not turned OFF, the current ball removal operation processing is terminated. If the lift up switch 94c is turned OFF, the ball removal lever operation error flag is cleared in step W158, and a ball removal lever operation error termination command is set in step W159, indicating that the ball removal lever operation error has ended, and the current ball removal operation processing is terminated. As a result, the ball removal lever operation error termination command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the ball removal lever operation error notification.

In this way, when the power is turned on (pre-loop processing of the main processing), the ball removal operation, which ejects circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1, is performed based on the ball removal operation in progress flag being set, until the power is turned off. This makes it possible to reliably eject circulating game balls outside the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, since no special operation is required to end the ball removal operation, convenience for gaming store staff can be improved.

In addition, if the lift upper switch 94c remains ON for a predetermined period (30 seconds), meaning that the ball removal operation has been performed for the time required to remove all of the circulating game balls from the gaming machine 1, but the lift upper switch 94c detects game balls and the removal of game balls has not been completed, a ball removal lever operation error notification will be initiated. This allows the gaming store staff to be notified that they have forgotten to operate the ball removal lever or that the ball removal operation has not been completed, improving convenience for the gaming store staff.

In addition, the ball removal lever operation error notification is terminated when the lift upper switch 94c is turned OFF. Therefore, the end of the ball removal error notification can be used to notify the customer that the gaming balls circulating in the gaming machine 1 have been ejected outside the gaming machine 1, improving convenience for gaming parlor staff.

(Gaming machine installation information reception processing of frame control board)
71, the gaming machine installation information reception processing of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine installation information reception processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W201, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether gaming machine installation information has been received from the main control board 110. If gaming machine installation information has not been received, processing proceeds to step W210. If gaming machine installation information has been received, processing proceeds to step W202, determining whether the communication serial number included in the gaming machine installation information is "0 (fixed value)." If the communication serial number is "0," processing proceeds to step W203. If the communication serial number is not "0," the gaming machine installation information is discarded as abnormal gaming machine installation information has been received, and the current gaming machine installation information reception processing is terminated.

In step W203, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains an in-machine communication abnormality flag, indicating that an in-machine communication abnormality error has occurred, which is an abnormality in communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120. If the in-machine communication abnormality flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W206. If the in-machine communication abnormality flag is present, the in-machine communication abnormality flag is cleared in step W204, and in step W205, an in-machine communication abnormality termination command indicating that the in-machine communication abnormality has ended (resolved) is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the in-machine communication abnormality termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to end the in-machine communication abnormality notification.

In step W206, the frame control CPU 120a generates new gaming machine installation information from the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) identified by the received gaming machine installation information and the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m, and stores this information in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W207, it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a ball removal operation flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. If the ball removal operation flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W209. If the ball removal operation flag is present, in step W208, it sends a gaming machine installation information response to the main control board 110 indicating that the reception result is a ball removal state (reception result = ball removal state), and ends this gaming machine installation information reception process.

In step W209, the frame control CPU 120a sends a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) to the main control board 110 indicating that the reception result is OK (the ball removal operation is not in progress, allowing the start of game progress control). In step W210, the frame control board 120 outputs (ON) a launch permission signal to the launching device 92 to permit the launch of gaming balls, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process ends.

In step W211, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which gaming machine installation information has not been received since the frame control board 120 was started has reached a predetermined period (e.g., three minutes). If the period during which gaming machine installation information has not been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. If the period during which gaming machine installation information has not been received has reached the predetermined period, in step W212, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W213, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has started (occurred) is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine installation information reception process is terminated. As a result, the internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to start an internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

Incidentally, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, but the control program (frame control program) that determines that information (e.g., gaming machine installation information) has not been received from the main control board 110 can also be said to be a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (e.g., a broken wire) in the communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

In this way, even if gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is processing the ball removal operation, it will send a gaming machine installation information response (received result = ball removal state) that prevents the main control board 110 from controlling the progress of the game. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience that would occur if the progress of the game were controlled during the ball removal operation.

Furthermore, when gaming machine installation information is received from the main control board 110, if the frame control board 120 is not processing the ball removal operation, it will send a gaming machine installation information response (reception result = reception OK) that will allow the main control board 110 to control the progress of the game. This makes it possible for the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 to control the progress of the game while ensuring communication between them.

In addition, if gaming machine installation information cannot be received within a predetermined time (three minutes, which is the maximum startup time for the main control board 110) after the frame control board 120 is started, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error notification will be initiated. This allows gaming facility staff to be notified that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error has occurred, preventing communication between the main control board 110 and frame control board 120, and allows them to take appropriate action.

In addition, even if the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set and communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not taking place, if gaming machine installation information is subsequently received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag will be cleared and the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification will be terminated. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as game progress not being controlled even though communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is ensured.

(Gaming machine information reception processing of frame control board)
72, the gaming machine information reception process of the frame control board 120 will be described.

First, in step W251, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether it has received the gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) that is scheduled to be received from the main control board 110 in 108 ms. If it has not received the gaming machine information, it proceeds to step W261. If it has received the gaming machine information, it proceeds to step W252, where it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag (whether an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred). If the internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is not present, it proceeds to step W255. If the internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is present, it clears the internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag in step W253, and sets an internal gaming machine communication abnormality termination command, indicating that the internal gaming machine communication abnormality has ended, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W254. This causes a command to terminate the gaming machine communication abnormality to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the gaming machine communication abnormality error notification.

In step W255, the frame control CPU 120a stores the main control status 1 and main control status 2 generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W256 it stores the gaming machine error status generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, in step W257 it stores the fraud detection status 1 generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W258 The number of prize balls for activation of the special feature and the number of prize balls for continuous activation of the special feature generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) are stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W259, the various game information generated by the main control unit 110m (usage area) is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W260, a gaming machine information response (reception result = reception OK) indicating that the reception result is OK (received normally) is sent to the main control board 110, and this gaming machine information reception process is terminated.

The various gaming information contained in the received gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) includes the number of wins at the starting slot, the number of wins at the large winning slot due to the activation of special electric devices, the number of wins at winning slots, the number of wins at all starting slots, the number of times a pattern has been confirmed, the number of jackpots, the number of times a device has been activated (the number of times the large winning slot has been opened), the number of times a specific area has been passed, the pulse output from the external terminal board, and performance information status notifications.

In step W261, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the setting is currently being changed or confirmed. If the setting is currently being changed or confirmed, it does not determine whether an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred and terminates the current gaming machine information reception process. If the setting is not currently being changed or confirmed, it proceeds to step W262.

In step W262, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the period during which no information has been received since the previous reception of gaming machine information has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 1000 ms). If the period during which no information has been received has not reached the predetermined period, the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. If the period during which no information has been received has reached the predetermined period, in step W263, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred. In step W264, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command indicating that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current gaming machine information reception process is terminated. As a result, the internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to start the internal gaming machine communication abnormality notification.

In this way, when the gaming machine internal communication abnormality flag is set (a gaming machine internal communication abnormality has occurred), and gaming machine information (hall control, fraud monitoring information, etc.) is received from the main control board 110, the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification is terminated. This prevents inconveniences such as an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error notification being issued even when communication with the main control board 110 is normal, and makes it possible to issue an appropriate error notification.

In addition, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the last time gaming machine information was received without receiving any gaming machine information (a period during which the main control board 110 can transmit gaming machine information multiple times), an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error alert will be initiated. This allows gaming store staff to be notified that communication with the main control board 110 is not occurring normally, allowing the gaming store staff to take appropriate action.

In addition, the various gaming information held by the frame control board 120 is updated based on gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110. This makes it possible to calculate and send detailed gaming machine performance information that is in line with actual gameplay in the gaming machine performance information calculation process and gaming machine information notification process described below.

In addition, if a setting is currently being changed or checked, the execution of an intra-machine communication abnormality error notification by sending an intra-machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120 is restricted (regulated) without determining whether or not an intra-machine communication abnormality has occurred. After the setting change or setting check is completed, it is possible to determine whether or not an intra-machine communication abnormality has occurred and then send an intra-machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120 to issue an intra-machine communication abnormality error notification. Therefore, by issuing an intra-machine communication abnormality error notification while the setting is being changed or checked, it is not disruptive to the setting change or setting check, improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, even when settings are being changed or confirmed, it may be possible to determine whether an internal gaming machine communication abnormality has occurred and issue an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error alert by sending an internal gaming machine communication abnormality start command from the frame control board 120.When an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error alert is issued during settings change or setting confirmation, an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error alert with a lower alert level (for example, one or two of the following: displaying an error code on the frame control display 125, outputting an error alert sound from the audio output device 9, or emitting error light from the frame lighting device 10) may be issued.

In addition, even if the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m continues to output a launch permission signal to the launching device that allows the launch of gaming balls. However, if the information includes information indicating that the winning limit device is operating, the frame control unit 120m may stop outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device that allows the launch of gaming balls.

(Frame control board game ball count update process)
73, the processing for updating the number of game balls in the frame control board 120 will be described.

First, in step W301, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c (a ball has been sent to the launch pad). If a detection signal has not been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will not be launched and processing proceeds to step W303. If a detection signal has been input from the subtraction port switch 91c, it is assumed that a game ball will be launched and in step W302, the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one.

In step W303, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a (a foul ball has been shot but returned without flying into the play area 5a). If a detection signal has not been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has not been hit, and processing proceeds to step W305. If a detection signal has been input from the foul ball switch 93a, it is assumed that a foul ball has been hit, and in step W304, the number of play balls owned by the player is incremented by one.

In step W305, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered a general winning slot 43. Specifically, it determines whether the number of winning slots included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or greater. If a gaming ball has not entered a general winning slot 43, processing proceeds to step W307. If a gaming ball has entered a general winning slot 43, in step W306, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning slot and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning slots are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W307, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the special prize slot 50. Specifically, it determines whether the number of special prize slot entries contained in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is one or more. If a gaming ball has not entered the special prize slot 50, processing proceeds to step W309. If a gaming ball has entered the special prize slot 50, in step W308, the number of prize balls corresponding to the special prize slot and the number of entries are added to the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

In step W309, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming ball has entered the first start slot 45 or the second start slot 47. Specifically, it determines whether the total number of winning start slots included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110 is 1 or greater. If a gaming ball has not entered the first start slot 45 or the second start slot 47, the current gaming ball count update process is terminated; if a gaming ball has entered the first start slot 45 or the second start slot 47, the process proceeds to step W310.

In step W310, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the number of wins for each type of start gate. Specifically, it identifies the number of wins at the first start gate 45 from the number of wins at the start gate included in the gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) sent from the main control board 110, and calculates the number of wins at the second start gate 47 from the number of wins at the start gate and the number of wins at all start gates.

In step W311, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of start port and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of wins to the number of game balls owned by the player, and terminates the current game ball number update process. Specifically, it adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first start port 45 and the number of wins in the first start port 45 calculated in step W310, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second start port 47 and the number of wins in the second start port 47 calculated in step W310 to the number of game balls owned by the player.

In this way, the number of game balls owned by a player is decremented by one when a game ball is released, and the number of game balls owned by a player is incremented by one when a foul ball is hit. This allows the number of game balls owned by a player to be appropriately updated taking foul balls into account, making it possible to avoid inconveniences that would cause a player disadvantage.

In addition, rather than the frame control board 120 monitoring the winnings at the various winning slots, the main control board 110 adds prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings at each winning slot detected to the number of game balls owned by the player. This eliminates the need to connect detection switches installed at the various winning slots to both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, making it possible to prevent complicated wiring.

In this embodiment, when a ball transfer occurs in which a game ball is sent to the launch pad, the game ball is always launched, so the number of game balls owned by the player is decremented by one when a detection signal is input from the subtraction port switch 91c. However, it is also possible to detect that a game ball has been launched when the launch pad switch 92a changes from ON to OFF, and decrement the number of game balls owned by the player based on this detection.

(Error control processing of frame control board)
The error control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing the error control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351, the frame control CPU 120a executes a severe error notification control process. Specifically, when a severe error with a high security alert level occurs, processing is performed to initiate an error notification according to the type of severe error. Details of the severe error notification control process will be described later.

In step W352, the frame control CPU 120a executes hardware error notification control processing. Specifically, when a hardware error caused by hardware occurs, it initiates error notification according to the type of hardware error, and when the hardware error is resolved, it performs processing to terminate error notification according to the type of hardware error. Details of the hardware error notification control processing will be described later.

In step W353, the frame control CPU 120a executes minor error notification control processing. Specifically, when a minor error occurs, which has a security alert level lower than that of a major error, it initiates error notification according to the type of minor error, and when the minor error is resolved, it performs processing to terminate error notification according to the type of minor error. Details of the minor error notification control processing will be described later.

In step W354, the frame control CPU 120a executes an error code display setting process. Specifically, if any of the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, the frame control CPU 120a performs settings to display the error code (alert event code) corresponding to the highest priority error among the currently occurring errors, according to the priority of the various errors; if no error detected by the frame control board 120 is occurring, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to prevent the frame control display 125 from displaying an error code. Details of the error priority for displaying error codes will be described later.

In step W355, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls, and whether a launch prohibition error that restricts the launch of game balls is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch prohibition error is not occurring, processing proceeds to step W357. If the launch permission signal is being output but a launch prohibition error is occurring, in step W356, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad), restricting the launch of game balls.

Note that "launch not permitted errors" in the frame control unit 120m include, but are described in more detail below, entrance switch disconnection errors, entrance switch abnormality errors, communication line abnormality errors, glass frame opening errors, inner frame opening errors, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation errors, and counting process notifications indicating that the number of game balls is less than 1,000.

In step W357, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control unit 120m is outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls, and whether a launch prohibition error that restricts the launch of game balls has occurred. If the launch permission signal is not stopped or a launch prohibition error has occurred, the current error control process is terminated. If the launch permission signal is stopped but a launch prohibition error has not occurred, in step W358, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal to the launching device to allow the launch of game balls, and the current error control process is terminated. This allows the launching device to be driven (ball delivery to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of launching one game ball) is in progress, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of launching one game ball) has ended.

In this way, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming store staff. This allows gaming store staff to be notified of the occurrence of various errors, enabling them to take appropriate action.

Furthermore, among the various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120, the error codes of high-priority errors are displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming store staff, prioritizing errors with lower priority. This allows gaming store staff to deal with errors in order of priority, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to players.

Furthermore, error codes (alert event codes) corresponding to various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 are displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to gaming store staff, while error codes corresponding to errors detected by the main control board 110 are not displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to gaming store staff. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing various errors (alert events) detected by the main control board 110 with various errors (alert events) detected by the frame control board 120 and being unable to take appropriate action, thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, if a launch prohibition error (alert event) occurs that would cause inconvenience if a game ball were to be launched, the frame control unit 120m stops outputting the launch permission signal that allows the game ball to be launched, thereby halting the launch of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience (detriment to the gaming facility or player) from occurring if a game ball is launched while a launch prohibition error (alert event) is occurring.

Furthermore, when a launch disallowance error (alert event) that makes it inconvenient to launch a gaming ball is resolved, the frame control unit 120m resumes outputting a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the gaming ball, thereby permitting the launch of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences (disadvantages to the gaming parlor or player) caused by the inability to launch a gaming ball.

In addition, error control processing is performed regardless of whether the ball removal operation is being performed by the frame control board 120. In other words, various error notifications (major errors, hardware errors, minor errors) can be issued whether or not the ball removal operation is in progress. This means that various error notifications are no longer limited by the execution of the ball removal operation, and various error notifications allow gaming facility staff to take appropriate action.

(Frame control board severe error notification control processing)
75, the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the severe error notification control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W351-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the radio wave detection sensor 54a detected unauthorized radio waves when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred. If there is an unauthorized radio wave detection flag or if unauthorized radio waves have not been detected, processing proceeds to step W351-3. If unauthorized radio waves are detected when there is no unauthorized radio wave detection flag, in step W351-2, the frame control CPU 120a sets the unauthorized radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c and sets an unauthorized radio wave detection designation command indicating that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the unauthorized radio wave detection designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an unauthorized radio wave detection error notification.

In step W351-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a has changed from OFF to ON (whether a gaming ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W351-5. If the winning passage count switch 94a has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-4, the number of winning passages passed stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the reported number of winning balls notified by the main control board 110 and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is greater than or equal to a specified number (e.g., 100). If it is less than or equal to the specified number, it assumes that a winning ball count abnormality error has not occurred and proceeds to step W351-8. If it is greater than or equal to the specified number, it determines in step W351-6 whether a winning ball count abnormality flag indicating that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred is present in the frame control RAM 120c. If a winning ball count abnormality flag is present, it proceeds to step W351-8. If there is no winning ball count abnormality flag, it assumes that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred and in step W351-7, it sets a winning ball count abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a winning ball count abnormality designation command indicating that a winning ball count abnormality error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes a winning ball count abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to start announcing an error indicating a winning ball count abnormality.

In step W351-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON (whether a game ball has passed). If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W351-10. If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-9, the number of balls fired stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a has changed from OFF to ON (whether a game ball has passed). If the foul ball switch 93a has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W351-12. If the foul ball switch 93a has changed from OFF to ON, in step W351-11, the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by -1.

In step W351-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a or non-winning passage count switch 94b, which is provided in the recovered ball passage (part of the ball passage unit 94) through which game balls recovered from the game area 5a flow, is ON (whether game balls have passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a or non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON, processing proceeds to step W351-14. If the winning passage count switch 94a or non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W351-13, the total number of returned balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated by +1.

In step W351-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of balls fired and the total number of balls returned is greater than or equal to a specified number (e.g., 100). If it is not greater than or equal to the specified number, it is assumed that an abnormal number of balls fired error has not occurred, and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If it is greater than or equal to the specified number, it is determined in step W351-15 whether the frame control RAM 120c has a abnormal number of balls fired flag indicating that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred. If the abnormal number of balls fired flag is present, the current severe error notification control process is terminated. If the abnormal number of balls fired flag is not present, it is assumed that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred, and in step W351-16, the frame control RAM 120c is set to the abnormal number of balls fired flag, and a command indicating an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and the current severe error notification control process is terminated. This causes the abnormal number of balls fired command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to start the abnormal number of balls fired error notification.

In this way, when a severe error requiring high security vigilance occurs, an error notification is initiated according to the type of severe error. This ensures the security of the gaming machine and makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as losses to gaming establishments or players.

(Frame control board hardware error notification control process)
76, the hardware error notification control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the hardware error notification control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W352-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, processing proceeds to step W352-3. If a break has occurred in the subtraction calculation port switch 91c, in step W352-2, an exit switch break flag is set to indicate that an exit switch break error has occurred, and an exit switch break designation command indicating that an exit switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an exit switch break error notification.

In step W352-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has turned ON within a specified time from the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a. If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has turned ON within the specified time, it is assumed that an exit switch abnormality error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W352-5. If the subtraction calculation port switch 91c has not turned ON within the specified time, in step W352-4, an exit switch abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred, and an exit switch abnormality designation command indicating that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b. If a break has not occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, processing proceeds to step W352-7. If a break has occurred in the subtraction entrance switch 91b, in step W352-6, an entrance switch break flag indicating an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch break designation command indicating an entrance switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an entrance switch break error notification.

In step W352-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b (the time during which no game ball is detected) has continued for a specified time (e.g., 10 seconds). If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has not continued for the specified time, it is assumed that an entrance switch abnormality error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W352-9. If the OFF time of the subtraction entrance switch 91b has continued for the specified time, in step W352-8, an entrance switch abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred, and an entrance switch abnormality designation command indicating that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality designation command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a. If a break has not occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, processing proceeds to step W352-11. If a break has occurred in the foul ball switch 93a, in step W352-10, a foul ball switch break flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a foul ball switch break error has occurred, and a foul ball switch break designation command indicating that a foul ball switch break error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the foul ball switch break designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to initiate a foul ball switch break error notification.

In step W352-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch 95a, which detects whether abrasive is installed to polish the game balls being lifted by the lifting and polishing device 95, is OFF (abrasive is not installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a is not OFF, it is assumed that an abrasive not installed error has not occurred (abrasive is installed), and processing proceeds to step W352-14. If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a is OFF, it is determined in step W352-12 whether the frame control RAM 120c has an abrasive not installed flag indicating that an abrasive not installed error has occurred. If the abrasive not yet installed flag is present, processing proceeds to step W352-14; if the abrasive not yet installed flag is not present, in step W352-13, an abrasive not yet installed flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred, and an abrasive not yet installed command indicating that an abrasive not yet installed error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the abrasive not yet installed command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start reporting the abrasive not yet installed error.

In step W352-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) are disconnected. If the processing path switch is not disconnected, it is assumed that a path switch unconnection error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W352-16. If the processing path switch is disconnected, in step W352-15, a path switch unconnection designation command indicating that a path switch unconnection error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the path switch unconnection designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate a path switch unconnection error notification.

In step W352-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch 95a has changed from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed). If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a has not changed from OFF to ON (abrasive has not been installed), processing proceeds to step W352-18. If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a has changed from OFF to ON (abrasive has been installed), in step W352-17, the frame control CPU 120a clears the abrasive not installed flag from the frame control RAM 120c and sets an abrasive not installed termination command indicating that the abrasive not installed error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the abrasive not installed termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the abrasive not installed error notification.

In step W352-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the processing path switches (winning path count switch 94a, non-winning path count switch 94b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state. If the processing path switches have not changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, processing proceeds to step W352-20. If the processing path switches have changed from an unconnected state to a connected state, in step W352-19, a processing path switch unconnected termination command indicating that the processing path switch unconnected error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the processing path switch unconnected termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the processing path switch unconnected error notification.

In step W352-20, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON (operated). If the error release switch 123 has not been turned from OFF to ON, the target error state is not reset and the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If the error release switch 123 has been turned from OFF to ON, in step W352-21, it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an exit switch disconnection flag. If the exit switch disconnection flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W352-23. If the exit switch disconnection flag is present, in step W352-22, the exit switch disconnection flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c and an exit switch disconnection end command indicating that the exit switch disconnection error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to end the exit switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an exit switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no exit switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-25. If there is an exit switch abnormality flag, in step W352-26, the exit switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an exit switch abnormality termination command indicating that the exit switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the exit switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the exit switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains an entrance switch disconnection flag. If the entrance switch disconnection flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W352-27. If the entrance switch disconnection flag is present, in step W352-26, the frame control CPU 120a clears the entrance switch disconnection flag from the frame control RAM 120c and sets an entrance switch disconnection end command, indicating that the entrance switch disconnection error has been resolved, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the entrance switch disconnection error notification.

In step W352-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is an entrance switch abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no entrance switch abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W352-29. If there is an entrance switch abnormality flag, in step W352-28, the entrance switch abnormality flag is cleared from the frame control RAM 120c, and an entrance switch abnormality termination command indicating that the entrance switch abnormality error has been resolved is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the entrance switch abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the entrance switch abnormality error notification.

In step W352-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has a foul ball switch disconnection flag. If the foul ball switch disconnection flag is not present, the current hardware error notification control process is terminated. If the foul ball switch disconnection flag is present, in step W352-30, the frame control CPU 120a clears the foul ball switch disconnection flag from the frame control RAM 120c, sets a foul ball switch disconnection end command indicating that the foul ball switch disconnection error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current hardware error notification control process. This causes the foul ball switch disconnection end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the foul ball switch disconnection error notification.

In this way, when a hardware error occurs due to the gaming machine 1's hardware, an error notification is initiated according to the type of hardware error. This allows gaming facility staff to take appropriate action, preventing players from suffering disadvantages due to being unable to play properly.

In addition, once a hardware error caused by the gaming machine 1's hardware has been resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of hardware error that has been resolved is terminated. This prevents the continued notification of a resolved hardware error from interfering with gameplay, and reduces inconvenience to gaming establishments and players.

In addition, for certain hardware errors (exit switch disconnection error, exit switch abnormality error, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, foul ball switch disconnection error, etc.), it is possible to terminate the error notification by operating the error release switch 123 after removing the cause of the hardware error. This means that the error notification can be terminated and play can be resumed without turning off the power to the gaming machine 1, improving convenience for gaming parlors and players.

(Frame control board minor error notification control processing)
77, the minor error notification control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the minor error notification control processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W353-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has no communication line abnormality flag indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred in the communication line with the dedicated unit 170, and whether the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is OFF. If the communication line abnormality flag is present or the VL is ON, it is assumed that a communication line abnormality error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-3. If the communication line abnormality flag is not present and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is OFF, in step W353-2, it sets a communication line abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a communication line abnormality designation command indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication line abnormality designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to initiate a communication line abnormality error notification.

Incidentally, as in this process, a process may be performed to determine whether there is an abnormality (such as a broken wire) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, and such a control program (frame control program) can also be said to be a detection means for detecting whether there is an abnormality (such as a broken wire) in the communication between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

In step W353-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a response has been received within a specified time from the transmission of the specific message to the dedicated unit 170. If a response is received within the specified time, it is assumed that a no-response communication error (no message response from the dedicated unit 170 (an abnormality in communication with the dedicated unit 170)) has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-5. If no response is received within the specified time, in step W353-4, a communication line abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a no-response communication error has occurred, and a no-response communication designation command indicating that a no-response communication error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the no-response communication designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate a no-response communication error notification.

In step W353-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the excess sensor 94e has turned ON during a customer waiting state where no special symbol changes or jackpot play is being performed, and during a firing stop where no game balls are being fired. If the excess sensor 94e has not turned ON, it is assumed that an excess ball error, in which an excessive number of game balls are circulating in the ball circulation mechanism, has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-7. If the excess sensor 94e has turned ON, in step W353-6, an excess ball error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an excess ball error has occurred, and an excess ball error designation command indicating that an excess ball error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the excess ball error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to initiate an excess ball error notification.

In step W353-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF during a customer waiting state where no special symbol changes or jackpot play is being performed, and during a firing stop where no game balls are being fired. If the undercount sensor 94f has not turned OFF, it is assumed that an undercount error, in which the number of game balls circulating in the ball circulation mechanism is too low, has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-9. If the undercount sensor 94f has turned OFF, in step W353-8, a undercount error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an undercount error has occurred, and a undercount error designation command indicating that an undercount error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the undercount error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to initiate a undercount error notification.

In step W353-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the retry operation of the lifting and polishing device 95 (the operation of driving the lifting mechanism to lift the game balls up to the lifted ball passage when the lift down switch 94d located at the downstream end of the recovered ball flow path, near the entrance of the lifting and polishing device 95, is ON) has failed three consecutive times (the retry operation was performed, but the lift up switch 94c located at the upstream end of the lifted ball passage, near the exit of the lifting and polishing device 95, did not turn ON for the specified time). If the retry operation does not fail three consecutive times, it is assumed that a lifting mechanism error that prevents the lifting and grinding device 95 from lifting the game ball has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-11. If the retry operation fails three consecutive times, in step W353-10, a lifting mechanism error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a lifting mechanism error has occurred, and a lifting mechanism error designation command indicating that a lifting mechanism error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the lifting mechanism error designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to start a lifting mechanism error notification.

In step W353-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has opened). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has not opened), it assumes that a glass frame open error that would cause the glass frame 4 to open has not occurred, and proceeds to step W353-13. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from ON to OFF (the glass frame 4 has opened), in step W353-12, a glass frame open designation command indicating that a glass frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate a glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (inner frame 3 has opened). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from ON to OFF (inner frame 3 has not opened), it is assumed that an inner frame open error that would cause the inner frame 3 to open has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W353-15. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from ON to OFF (inner frame 3 has opened), in step W353-14, an inner frame open designation command indicating that an inner frame open error has occurred is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate an inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0" and whether the launch pad switch 92a is ON (whether there are game balls on the launch pad). If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0" or the launch pad switch 92a is not ON (i.e., there are no game balls on the launch pad), it is assumed that a launch pad remaining ball error has not occurred, meaning that the game balls to be launched remain on the launch pad even though the number of game balls owned by the player is "0," and processing proceeds to step W353-17. If the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" and the launch pad switch 92a is ON, in step W353-16, a launch pad remaining ball error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred, and a launch pad remaining ball error designation command indicating that a launch pad remaining ball error has occurred is set in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the launch pad remaining ball error designation command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is carried out to initiate a launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c exceeds a specified number (for example, 40,000). If the number of game balls does not exceed the specified number, it assumes that an over-number of game balls has not occurred, and proceeds to step W353-19. If the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, in step W353-18, it sets an over-number of game balls flag in the frame control RAM 120c indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred, and sets an over-number of game balls designation command indicating that an over-number of game balls has occurred in the effect transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the over-number of game balls designation command to be sent to the effect control board 130.

In step W353-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a communication line abnormality flag indicating that a communication line abnormality error has occurred, and whether the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) input from the dedicated unit 170 is ON. If the communication line abnormality flag is not present or the VL is OFF, it is assumed that the communication line abnormality error has not been resolved, and processing proceeds to step W353-21. If the communication line abnormality flag is present and the VL (power supply for connection confirmation) is ON, in step W353-20, the frame control CPU 120a clears the communication line abnormality flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and sets a communication line abnormality termination command indicating that the communication line abnormality error has been resolved in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the communication line abnormality termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the communication line abnormality error notification.

In step W353-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a communication line abnormality flag indicating that a no-response communication error has occurred and whether a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170 (communication with the dedicated unit 170 is normal). If there is no communication line abnormality flag or no message has been received, it assumes that the no-response communication error has not been resolved and proceeds to step W353-23. If there is a communication line abnormality flag and a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, in step W353-22, it clears the communication line abnormality flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a no-response communication termination command, indicating that the no-response communication error has been resolved, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the no-response communication termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the no-response communication error notification.

In step W353-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an excess ball error flag and whether the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF (i.e., whether the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has decreased to the appropriate number). If there is no excess ball error flag or the excess sensor 94e has not changed from ON to OFF, it assumes that the excess ball error has not been resolved and proceeds to step W353-25. If there is an excess ball error flag and the excess sensor 94e has changed from ON to OFF, in step W353-24, it clears the excess ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sets an excess ball error termination command, indicating that the excess ball error has been resolved, in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the excess ball error termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the excess ball error notification.

In step W353-25, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has a low-ball error flag and whether the low-ball sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON (i.e., whether the number of game balls in the ball circulation mechanism has increased to the appropriate number). If there is no low-ball error flag or the low-ball sensor 94f has not changed from OFF to ON, it assumes that the low-ball error has not been resolved and proceeds to step W353-27. If there is an excessive-ball error flag and the low-ball sensor 94f has changed from OFF to ON, in step W353-26, it clears the low-ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a low-ball error termination command, indicating that the low-ball error has been resolved, in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the low-ball error termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the low-ball error notification.

In step W353-27, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON (whether the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W353-29. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a has changed from OFF to ON, the frame control CPU 120a determines that the glass frame 4 has entered a closed state, and in step W353-28, it sets a glass frame open end command indicating that the glass frame open error has ended in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the glass frame open end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the glass frame open error notification.

In step W353-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON (the inner frame 3 has entered a closed state). If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has not changed from OFF to ON, processing proceeds to step W353-31. If the inner frame open detection switch 31b has changed from OFF to ON, the inner frame 3 is deemed to have entered a closed state, and in step W353-30, an inner frame open end command indicating that the inner frame open error has ended is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the inner frame open end command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to end the inner frame open error notification.

In step W353-31, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has a launch pad remaining ball error flag and whether the launch pad switch 92a is OFF (there are no game balls on the launch pad). If there is no launch pad remaining ball error flag or the launch pad switch 92a is not OFF, processing proceeds to step W353-33. If there is a launch pad remaining ball error flag and the launch pad switch 92a is OFF, in step W353-32, the frame control CPU 120a clears the launch pad remaining ball error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c and sets a launch pad remaining ball error termination command, indicating that the launch pad remaining ball error has been resolved, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the launch pad remaining ball error termination command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to terminate the launch pad remaining ball error notification.

In step W353-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c has an over-number-of-game-balls flag and whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the frame control RAM 120c has fallen below the specified number (40,000). If the over-number-of-game-balls flag is not present or the number of game balls exceeds the specified number, the minor error notification control process is terminated. If the over-number-of-game-balls flag is present and the number of game balls has fallen below the specified number, the frame control CPU 120a clears the over-number-of-game-balls flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, sets an over-number-of-game-balls termination command indicating that the over-number of game balls has been resolved in the presentation transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates the current minor error notification control process. This causes the over-number-of-game-balls termination command to be sent to the presentation control board 130.

In this way, when a minor error with a low security level occurs, an error notification is initiated according to the type of minor error. This allows gaming facility staff to take appropriate action, making it possible to prevent inconvenience to gaming facilities or players.

In addition, once a minor error with a low security alert level has been resolved, the error notification corresponding to the type of minor error that has been resolved will be terminated. This prevents the continued notification of a resolved error from interfering with play, and reduces inconvenience to gaming establishments and players.

(Display contents and display priority of frame control display when various alarm events occur)
Using Figure 78, we will explain the display contents and display priority of the frame control display 125 when various notification events (notification events such as errors) occur.

The table shown in Figure 78 includes the priority of each type of alarm event, the type of alarm event, the detection board (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects the occurrence of an alarm event, the main control areas used for alarming (area used by main control unit 110m, outside the area used by main control unit 110m, area used by frame control unit 120m, outside the area used by frame control unit 120m), error code display on the game ball count display 135, error code display on the frame control display 125, operation restrictions (ball feeding operation to the launch pad, game ball launch operation, game progress control), and the state of the dedicated unit 170 during the occurrence of an alarm event (playback operation based on operation of the loan button on the dedicated unit 170). The system is associated with the lending of game balls by the technician within the amount of the deposited balance/replay within the number of game balls owned by the player stored in association with the identification information of the member card inserted by the player based on the operation of the replay button on the dedicated unit 170, counting from the number of game balls stored on the frame control board 120 based on the operation of the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 (storing the number of game balls associated with the identification information of the member card or visitor card), card operations (insertion of the member card or visitor card into the dedicated unit 170, and return of the member card or visitor card based on the operation of the return button on the dedicated unit 170), whether or not to control deposits into the dedicated unit 170, etc.

For example, "game ball count clear" has the highest priority, and when the frame control board 120 detects that the game ball count has been cleared, and when detecting or announcing the occurrence of the game ball count clear, the area used by the frame control unit 120m is used primarily, with the area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m being used as an auxiliary. The game ball count display 135 does not display a game ball count clear error code, and the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67". When the game ball count has been cleared, the operation restrictions include ball feeding, firing, and game progress control, and the state of the dedicated unit 170 allows control of lending/replay, counting, card operation (insertion/return), and deposit.

In addition, when a notification event occurs that allows ball feeding operations, firing operations, and game progress control, such as "clearing the game ball count," or even when a corresponding notification is executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel that restricts (restricts) one or more of the ball feeding operations, firing operations, and game progress control, the corresponding operations among the ball feeding operations, firing operations, and game progress control will be restricted (restricted).

In addition, when a notification event occurs that allows loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit, such as "clearing the number of game balls," or even when a corresponding notification is executed, if a notification event occurs simultaneously or in parallel that restricts (regulates) one or more of the controls related to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit, the corresponding controls related to loan/replay, counting, card operation, or deposit will be restricted (regulated).

In this way, the "game ball count clear" function, which clears the number of game balls owned by a player, has a higher priority than the various notification events detected by the main control board 110. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to appropriately notify (display an error code) that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

Furthermore, among the various notification events detected by the frame control board 120, the "game ball count clear" event, which clears the number of game balls owned by a player, has the highest priority. This makes it possible for the frame control display 125 to appropriately notify (display an error code) that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is the most important thing to the player, has been cleared.

In addition, when a "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming facility staff. However, when a game ball is released or the number of game balls owned by the player is counted, the display of the error code corresponding to "game ball count clear" on the frame control display 125 is terminated. This makes it possible to ensure that the player has performed a loan operation or played a game, and to prevent the game ball count from being cleared unnecessarily.

In addition, when "game ball count clear" is performed, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, which is visible to gaming facility staff. However, if the power is restored after the "game ball count clear" is performed without any balls being fired or counted, the error code is displayed again on the frame control display 125. As a result, evidence that the game ball count has been cleared will not disappear when the power is restored, improving convenience for gaming facility staff.

Furthermore, when various alarm events detected by the main control board 110 occur, no error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120, whereas when various alarm events detected by the frame control board 120 occur, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125 mounted on the frame control board 120. This makes it possible to separately deal with various alarm events detected by the main control board 110 and various alarm events detected by the frame control board 120, thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff.

In addition, when the "ball removal operation is in progress," an error code ("-") is displayed not only on the frame control indicator 125, which is located on the back side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to gaming facility staff, but also on the game ball count indicator 135, which is located on the front side of the gaming machine 1 and visible to players. Therefore, even if the inner frame is closed during the ball removal operation, it is possible to know that the ball removal operation is in progress, improving convenience for gaming facility staff.

Furthermore, even for various notification events (notification events) detected by the frame control board 120, for certain notification events that do not directly disadvantage the player (ball removal lever operation error, launch pad remaining ball error, counting process notification, counting process completion), the event notification is executed by the presentation control board 130, but the display of an error code on the frame control display 125 is not performed (it is regulated/restricted). Therefore, by not issuing excessive event notifications, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as panicking game store staff.

Furthermore, among the various alarm events, if a specific alarm event occurs that would cause inconvenience if game balls were to be released (settings change, settings confirmation, RWM abnormal error, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormal error, communication line abnormal error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.), the ball feeding operation and/or release operation will not be performed (will be restricted or limited). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring if game balls are released when a specific alarm event occurs.

Furthermore, among the various notification events, if a specific notification event (setting change, setting confirmation, RWM abnormal error, winning limit device activation, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) occurs that would cause inconvenience if game progress control were to be performed, game progress control is not executed (it is restricted/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience from occurring if game progress control is performed when a specific notification event occurs.

In addition, when a counting process notification is issued, if the player owns 1,000 or more game balls, the ball forwarding and firing operations are executed, but if the player owns fewer than 1,000 game balls, the ball forwarding and firing operations are not executed (are restricted or limited). This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the counting process clashing with the ball forwarding and firing operations, preventing the counting process from completing normally.

In addition, if an alarm event that allows ball feeding or firing operations occurs or is being notified (for example, an alarm event such as the game ball count being cleared), and an alarm event that restricts ball feeding or firing operations occurs (for example, an acquisition limit device activation, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error alarm event), regardless of whether it is of lower or higher priority, the ball feeding or firing operation will not be executed (it will be restricted or limited). This allows ball feeding and firing operations to be restricted at the appropriate time, making it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of ball feeding or firing operations. Furthermore, the occurrence of a high-priority alarm event (alert event) will no longer override restrictions on ball feeding or firing operations due to a lower-priority alarm event (alert event).

Furthermore, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts lending/replay occurs while an alarm event (alert event) that allows lending/replay is occurring or being notified, regardless of whether it is of higher or lower priority, lending/replay is restricted (regulated/restricted). This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by the execution of lending/replay. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority does not invalidate the restriction on lending/replay due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate appropriately.

Furthermore, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts card operations (insertion/return) occurs while an alarm event (alert event) that allows card operations (insertion/return) is occurring or being notified, regardless of whether the alarm event has a higher or lower priority, card operations (insertion/return) will be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by manufacturer operations being performed. Furthermore, the occurrence of a high-priority alarm event (alert event) does not invalidate the restriction on card operations (insertion/return) imposed by a low-priority alarm event (alert event), allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate appropriately.

Furthermore, if an alarm event (alert event) that restricts deposits occurs while an alarm event (alert event) that allows deposits is occurring, regardless of whether it is of higher or lower priority, deposits will be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by deposits being made. Furthermore, the occurrence of an alarm event (alert event) with a higher priority will not invalidate the deposit restriction due to an alarm event (alert event) with a lower priority, allowing the dedicated unit 170 to operate appropriately.

The priority of "Clear number of game balls" may be below "Change settings", or below "Check settings", or below "Power on (Clear RWM)", or below "Power restored", or below "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)", or below "Fraud detection 2 (Abnormal winning error)", or below "Fraud detection 1 (Magnet detection error)", or below "Winning limit device activated", or below "Fraudulent radio wave detection error", or below "Abnormal number of winning balls error", or below "Abnormal number of fired balls error", or below "Abnormal communication error within the gaming machine", or below "Exit switch disconnection error", or below "Exit switch abnormal error". Or it could be under "Entrance switch open circuit error", or under "Entrance switch abnormal error", or under "Foul ball switch open circuit error", or under "Communication line abnormal error", or under "No response communication error", or under "Too many balls error", or under "Too few balls error", or under "Lifting mechanism error", or under "Abrasive not installed error", or under "Aisle switch not connected error", or under "Glass frame open error", or under "Inner frame open error", or under "Ball removal operation in progress", or under "Ball removal lever operation error", or under "Ball remaining on launch pad error".

Furthermore, the frame control display 125 may display error codes for various alarm events detected by the main control board 110. In this case, the error codes for various alarm events detected by the main control board 110 may be designated as "PXXX" so as to be distinguishable from the error codes ("HXXX") for various alarm events detected by the frame control board 120. Specifically, "P64" may be displayed for "settings change," "P65" for "settings confirmation," "P66" for "power on (RWM clear)," "P67" for "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "P68" for "fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)," "P69" for "fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)," and "P70" for "winning limit device activated."

In addition, when the winning limit device is activated, an error code ("P70") indicating that the winning limit device has been activated may be displayed on the frame control display 125 visible to gaming facility staff and/or the game ball count display 135 visible to the player. When displaying an error code indicating that the winning limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125, the number of game balls → performance information → error code may be displayed repeatedly. When displaying on the game ball count display 135, the number of game balls → error code may be displayed repeatedly, or the error code may be displayed (repeatedly displaying the number of game balls → error code, or only the error code) only when the number of game balls owned by the player is "0" (when a game ball is fired and the number of game balls becomes "0", or when the number of game balls is counted and the number of game balls becomes "0").

Furthermore, during the ball removal operation, rather than displaying the same error code ("-") on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, different error codes may be displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, or an error code may be displayed on only one of the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

In addition, the game ball launching operation may be prevented from being executed when an "entrance switch disconnection error" or "entrance switch abnormality error" occurs, or the ball feeding operation or launching operation may be executed when an "inner frame opening error" occurs.

Furthermore, when a "counting process notification" occurs, if the player owns 1,000 or more game balls, rather than allowing ball feeding or firing operations, the number may be more than 1,000 or less than 1,000. However, if fewer than 1,000 balls are allowed, it is recommended that the number be set to 250 or more, which can be counted with one counting operation (single press).

Furthermore, when a "counting process notification" occurs, ball feeding and firing operations may not be performed regardless of the number of game balls owned by the player.

(Display performance information calculation process for frame control board)
The display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 79. Fig. 79 is a flowchart showing the display performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W401, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W405. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step W402, where it determines whether the game information has been updated. Specifically, in step W259 of the game machine information reception process described above, it determines whether various game information has been updated based on the game machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110. If the game information has not been updated, the process proceeds to step W405. If the game information has been updated, the process proceeds to step W403.

In step W403, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the current number of prize balls from the game information (the number of prizes won at each prize slot and the number of prize balls at each prize slot), and in step W404 adds the current number of prize balls to the normal prize ball counter, which counts the number of prize balls during normal game mode. For example, if there is one prize won at the first start slot 45 and the number of prize balls at the first start slot 45 is three, it calculates that there were 1 x 3 = 3 prize balls, and adds these 3 to the normal prize ball counter.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the winning passage count switch 94a or non-winning passage count switch 94b (an out ball that has passed through the play area 5a has been detected). If a detection signal has not been input, processing proceeds to step W409. If a detection signal has been input, in step W406, the total out counter, which counts the number of out balls in all play states in the current play area, is incremented by 1.

The frame control CPU 120a determines whether the current game state is normal. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step W409. If the current game state is normal, the normal out counter, which counts the number of out balls during normal game state, is incremented by 1 in step W408.

In step W409, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the section counter, which counts the number of the play section, is at the first play section value (0), indicating that it is the first play section. If it is not the first play section, it assumes that the current play section is a second or subsequent play section for which display performance information (normal base value) is calculated, and proceeds to step W411. If it is the first play section, it assumes that the current play section is a first play section for which display performance information is not calculated, and proceeds to step W410.

In step W410, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the first section update value (300). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the first section update value, the current display performance information calculation process is terminated; if the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the first section update value, the process proceeds to step W416.

In step W411, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the normal base value, which is the display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and rounds it off to the first decimal place. The "normal base value" is the ratio (proportion) of the amount of game value used in play during the normal game state (the number of out balls that have passed through the game area 5a) to the amount of game value that will be awarded in play during the normal game state (the number of prize balls that will be awarded as prize balls), and is calculated using the formula "(the number of prize balls during the normal game state, which is the number of prize balls ÷ the number of out balls during the normal game state, which is the number of out balls) × 100."

In step W412, the frame control CPU 120a saves the calculated normal base value in the first area of the base memory areas (first to fourth areas) set in the frame control RAM 120c. The "base memory area" is a memory area for storing normal base values for four play intervals, and is composed of a first area for storing the normal base value for the current play interval, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play interval two intervals ago, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play interval three intervals ago.

In step W413, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the total number of outs in the current play area indicated by the total number of outs counter is equal to or greater than the second area update value (60,000). If the total number of outs is not equal to or greater than the second area update value, the play area is not updated and the current display performance information calculation process is terminated. If the total number of outs is equal to or greater than the second area update value, the play area is updated and processing proceeds to step W414.

The game zones from the second game zone onwards are divided when the total number of outs reaches 60,000. This figure of 60,000 is sufficient to cover approximately one day's operation of gaming machine 1, which fires 100 game balls per minute. Therefore, the game zone is updated when gaming machine 1 has been operating for approximately one day.

In step W414, the frame control CPU 120a shifts down the contents of the first to third areas of the base memory area by one, and in step W415, it clears the first area of the base memory area to 0. This causes the normal base values stored in each area to be stored as the normal base values for the previous play interval, and the normal base values for the current play interval are reset, preparing to move on to the next play interval.

In step W416, the frame control CPU 120a adds "1" to the section counter to update the game section, and in step W417, it clears to 0 the total number of outs indicated by the total number of outs counter, the number of normal prize balls indicated by the normal prize ball counter, and the number of normal outs indicated by the normal outs counter, and then performs processing to transition to the next game section, and ends the current display performance information calculation processing.

In this way, a normal base value (a type of historical information) is calculated and stored as performance information for each gaming section from the number of normal outs and normal payouts for each gaming section. This makes it possible to provide information for appropriately understanding (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the calculation of the normal base value is not performed in the first gaming section. This prevents the provision (displayed on the frame control display 125) of unreliable information that is affected by operation checks during pre-shipment inspections of the gaming machine (checks of the operation of the detection switches for various winning ports, winning passage count switch 94a, and non-winning passage count switch 94b due to the launch and handling of gaming balls), making it possible to avoid inconveniences such as misunderstanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the normal base value is calculated from the second gaming zone onwards. This allows a highly reliable normal base value that eliminates the influence of pre-shipment inspections of the gaming machine to be displayed on the frame control display 125, making it possible to provide highly reliable information for accurately understanding the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

Note that performance information is calculated regardless of whether the acquisition limit device is operating or not, but it is also possible to prevent performance information from being calculated while the acquisition limit device is operating, or to calculate performance information but not display the calculated performance information on the frame control display 125.

(Gaming machine performance information calculation process of frame control board)
The gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 80. Fig. 80 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine performance information calculation process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W451, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of balls fired. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information about the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120 performs a process to calculate the total number of balls fired, which is the total number of gaming balls that have been fired into the gaming area 5a since the counting start condition was met to the present.

In step W452, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of game balls won. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information about the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the total number of game balls won, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player from the time the counting start condition was met to the present.

In step W453, the frame control CPU 120a performs a ball dispensing rate calculation process. Specifically, it performs a process to calculate the ball dispensing rate, which is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of game balls acquired calculated in step W452 to the total number of balls fired calculated in step W451, using the formula (total number of game balls acquired ÷ total number of balls fired) × 100.

In step W454, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute. Specifically, it performs processing to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information about the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120.

In step W455, the frame control CPU 120a performs a role ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information about the game balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the role ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various role devices (winnings into the second start slot 47 opened in the auxiliary game, winnings into the big prize slot 50 opened in the jackpot game) to the total number of game balls acquired as described above.

In step W456, the frame control CPU 120a performs a continuous feature ratio calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information on the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of gaming balls acquired based on the operation of continuous features (winning into the jackpot slot 50 opened during the jackpot game) to the total number of gaming balls acquired as described above.

In step W457, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the number of jackpots. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the number of jackpots, which is the total number of jackpot games that have been played since the counting start condition was met to the present.

In step W458, the frame control CPU 120a performs a maximum ball payout calculation process and terminates the current gaming machine performance information calculation process. Specifically, based on the gaming machine information (game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information) received from the main control board 110 and information about the gaming balls counted and managed by the frame control board 120, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to calculate the maximum ball payout, which is the largest difference in the number of winning balls that exceeds the total number of balls fired since a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game).

In this way, the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information that is sent to the dedicated unit 170 without being displayed on the frame control display 125. This makes it possible to provide highly reliable information that allows accurate understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine 1.

(Gaming machine information notification processing of frame control board)
The gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information notification process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W501, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the main control state (main control state 1, main control state 2) or game information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last notification of gaming machine information to the dedicated unit 170. If the main control state or game information has not been updated, processing proceeds to step W508; if the main control state or game information has been updated, processing proceeds to step W502.

In step W502, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the start of the frame control board 120 or the timing of the previous transmission of the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification. If 300 ms have not elapsed, it is not yet time to transmit the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and processing proceeds to step W504. If 300 ms have elapsed, it is now time to transmit the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, and in step W503, the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W504, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have passed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous gaming machine installation information notification was sent. If 60 seconds have not passed, it is not yet time to send a gaming machine installation information notification, and processing proceeds to step W506. If 60 seconds have passed, it is now time to send a gaming machine installation information notification, and in step W505, it sends a gaming machine installation information notification to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W506, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have passed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous gaming machine performance information notification was sent. If 180 seconds have not passed, it is determined that it is not time to send a gaming machine performance information notification and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 seconds have passed, it is determined that it is time to send a gaming machine performance information notification and in step W507, the gaming machine performance information notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated.

In step W508, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 60 seconds have passed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous gaming machine installation information notification was sent. If 60 seconds have not passed, it is assumed that it is not time to send a gaming machine installation information notification, and processing proceeds to step W510. If 60 seconds have passed, it is assumed that it is time to send a gaming machine installation information notification, and in step W509, gaming machine installation information is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W510, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 180 seconds have passed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous gaming machine performance information notification was sent. If 180 seconds have not passed, it is determined that it is not time to send a gaming machine performance information notification, and the current gaming machine information notification process is terminated. If 180 seconds have passed, it is determined that it is time to send a gaming machine performance information notification, and in step W511, gaming machine performance information is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W512, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 300 ms have elapsed since the frame control board 120 was started or the previous time a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification was sent. If 300 ms have not elapsed, it is assumed that it is not time to send a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and processing proceeds to step W512. If 300 ms have elapsed, it is assumed that it is time to send a hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, and in step W513, it sends hall control/fraud monitoring information to the dedicated unit 170, terminating the current gaming machine information notification processing.

In this way, the order in which the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, gaming machine installation information notification, and gaming machine performance information notification is sent is reversed depending on whether the main control status (main control status 1, main control status 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170, or whether the main control status (main control status 1, main control status 2) or gaming information stored in the frame control RAM 120c has not been updated since the last gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit 170. This makes it possible to send various information notifications to the dedicated unit 170 in an appropriate order depending on whether the main control status or gaming information has been updated.

In addition, gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 periodically (every predetermined time period (60 seconds)), including installation information for the frame control board 120 (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code). This allows the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether the frame control board 120 is appropriate, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as replacing or modifying the main control board 110 or frame control board 120.

(Game ball counting process on frame control board)
The gaming ball counting process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 82. Fig. 82 is a flowchart showing the gaming ball counting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W551, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether 100 ms have passed since the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification. If 100 ms have not passed, it is not yet time to send a counting notification, and the current gaming ball counting process is terminated. If 100 ms have passed, it is now time to send a counting notification, and the process proceeds to step W552.

In step W552, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting button switch 20a has been turned ON by operating the counting button 20. If the counting button switch 20a is not turned ON (OFF), processing proceeds to step W561. If the counting button switch 20a is turned ON, processing proceeds to step W553. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), processing proceeds to step W561. If the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than "0" ("0" meaning there are no game balls to be transferred to the dedicated unit 170 for counting), processing proceeds to step W554.

In step W554, the frame control CPU 120a sets a counting processing in progress flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that counting is in progress, and in step W555, sets a counting processing notification designation command, indicating that counting is in progress, in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting processing notification designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to notify the user that counting processing is in progress.

In step W556, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1,000. If the number of game balls owned by the player is more than (or not less than) 1,000, processing proceeds to step W559. If the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1,000, processing proceeds to step W557. In step W557, the frame control board 120 determines whether the frame control board 120 is outputting a launch permission signal to the launcher 92 to allow game balls to be launched and a launch denial error (setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection 3, acquisition limit device activation, entrance switch disconnection error, entrance switch abnormality error, communication line abnormality error, glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error, ball removal operation in progress, ball removal lever operation error, etc.) is occurring. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch denial error is not occurring, processing proceeds to step W559. If the launch permission signal is being output and a launch denial error is occurring, processing proceeds to step W558. This stops the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 (ball feeding to send game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad), restricting the launch of game balls.

In step W559, if the number of game balls owned by the player is 250 or more, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts 250 from the counted number of balls; if the number is less than 250, it subtracts all of the game balls from the counted number of balls. In step W560, the frame control CPU 120a adds the subtracted counted number of balls to the cumulative counted number stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and proceeds to step W567.

In step W561, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c has a counting processing in progress flag. If the counting processing in progress flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W567. If the counting processing in progress flag is present, the counting processing in progress flag is cleared in step W562, and in step W653, a counting processing completion command indicating that the counting processing has been completed is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the frame control RAM 120c. This causes the counting processing completion command to be sent to the performance control board, and processing is performed to end the counting processing in progress notification.

In step W564, the frame control CPU 120a clears the cumulative counted number of balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W565 determines whether the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch prohibition error has not occurred. If the launch permission signal is being output or a launch prohibition error has occurred, processing proceeds to step W567; if the launch permission signal is stopped and a launch prohibition error has not occurred, output of the launch permission signal is resumed in step W566. This allows the launch device to be driven (ball delivery to the launch pad and/or launch of game balls from the launch pad), making it possible to launch game balls.

In step W567, the frame control CPU 120a sends a counting notification (counting serial number, the number of counted balls corresponding to the subtracted number of counted balls, and the cumulative number of counted balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c) to the dedicated unit 170, and ends the current game ball counting process. This causes the number of game balls owned by the player to be stored in association with the identification information (card number, card ID, etc.) of the storage medium (card, coin, etc.) inserted in the dedicated unit 170.

When the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) has ended but the unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of launching one game ball) is in progress, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the launching device 92 has ended. Also, if the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 (the operation of feeding one game ball) is in progress, the driving of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped after the unit operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the subsequent unit operation of the launching device 92 (the operation of launching one game ball) has ended.

In this way, when the counting process is being performed, the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 (the ball feeding that sends game balls to the launch pad and/or the launching of game balls from the launch pad) is stopped, thereby restricting the launch of game balls. Specifically, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the specified number (1,000), the output of the launch permission signal is stopped and the operation of the ball feeding unit 91 and the launching device 92 is stopped. This prevents the inconvenience of counting the game balls used in the launch operation, ensures a stable number of game balls to be counted, and makes the game more enjoyable.

On the other hand, when the counting button 20 is operated to perform the counting process, if the player owns 1,000 or more game balls, the output of the launch permission signal is not stopped and the ball feeding unit 91 and launching device 92 are allowed to continue operating. Therefore, even if the counting process is performed, game balls to be launched can be guaranteed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, once the counting process is complete, the launching device is allowed to operate (sending game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad), allowing the game balls to be launched. This means that the launching of game balls is not restricted indefinitely due to the counting process being completed, making the game more enjoyable.

Note that while the number of game balls required to activate the launching device (sending game balls to the launch pad and/or launching game balls from the launch pad) is set to 1,000 or more, it may also be less than 1,000. In this case, the number may be set to 251 or more, which ensures the counting process and the launch of game balls even when the counting button 20 is pressed and held for a period of 250 game balls, or it may be set to 1 or more, which ensures the counting process and the launch of game balls even when the counting button 20 is pressed and held for a period of 1 game ball.

(Game ball lending process on frame control board)
The game ball lending process of the frame control board 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flowchart showing the game ball lending process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W601, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether a loan notification has been received, sent within 170 ms of the previous count notification or when the loan button on the dedicated unit 170 is operated. If a loan notification has not been received, the current game ball loan process is terminated. If a loan notification has been received, in step W602, it determines whether the loan serial number in the received loan notification is the previous loan serial number + 1 stored in slot control RAM 120c. If it is not the previous loan serial number + 1, processing proceeds to step W610. If it is the previous loan serial number + 1, in step W603, the loan serial number in the received loan notification is stored in slot control RAM 120c as the previous loan serial number.

In step W604, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a ball removal operation flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress. If the ball removal operation flag is present (the ball removal operation is in progress), processing proceeds to step W610. If the ball removal operation flag is not present (the ball removal operation is not in progress), processing proceeds to step W605, determining whether the number of game balls owned by the player (the number of game balls displayed on the game ball number display 135) is less than 100,000. If it is not less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W610 as it is assumed that game balls will not be loaned out. If it is less than 100,000, processing proceeds to step W606.

In step W606, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is a normal value (0 to 255). If it is not a normal value, it assumes that no game balls will be loaned and proceeds to step W610. If it is a normal value, it determines in step W607 whether the number of loaned balls in the received loan notification is greater than "0". If it is greater than "0", it proceeds to step W608. If it is not greater than "0" (it is "0"), the current game ball loan process is terminated.

In step W608, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification to the player's number of game balls. As a result, the number of game balls displayed on the game ball count display 135 and the frame control display 125 is updated to the number of game balls after the addition. Then, in step W609, a loan receipt result response (reception result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that game balls have been loaned (that the loan notification was received successfully), and the current game ball loan process is terminated. This makes it possible for the dedicated unit 170 to know that game balls have been loaned.

In step W610, the slot control CPU 120a sends a loan receipt result response (reception result = abnormal) to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that it was unable to receive a normal loan notification and therefore could not loan game balls (the loan notification was not received normally), and terminates the current game ball loan process. This makes it possible to understand that game balls were not loaned out by the dedicated unit 170.

In this way, even if a loan notification based on the operation of the loan button is received from the dedicated unit 170, the loan process of game value (game balls) will not be performed if the ball removal operation is in progress. This prevents the inconvenience of game value (game balls) being loaned out even when the ball removal operation is in progress and game control is not being performed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, each time a rental process of gaming value (gaming balls) is performed, a rental receipt result response (reception result = normal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the rental process has been performed, and if a rental process of gaming value (gaming balls) is not performed, a rental receipt result response (reception result = abnormal) is sent to the dedicated unit 170 indicating that the rental process has not been performed. This allows the dedicated unit 170 to determine whether or not the rental process has been performed, making it possible for gaming establishments to collect information they need, such as compiling sales data.

(Relationship between the processing order of various control contents and implementation area)
Next, the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and the implementation area (control area in which the processing is performed) will be described with reference to the tables shown in FIGS.
The tables shown in Figures 84 to 99 correspond to the processing order, the control content corresponding to the processing order, the implementation area (inside the use area, outside the use area) in which the control content is implemented, the related areas (send buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) used in connection with the control content, and the step numbers of the above-mentioned flowchart.

"Within the use area (ROM, RWM)" in the implementation area column indicates the above-mentioned game ROM area (ROM area within area) and game RWM area (RWM area within area), and the program stored in the game ROM area (program within area) will execute various control contents by using the game RWM area as a work area.
In addition, "outside the area in use (ROM, RWM)" indicates the above-mentioned information ROM area (outside the area ROM area) and information RWM area (outside the area RWM area), and the program stored in the information ROM area (outside the area program) will use the information RWM area as a work area to execute various control contents.

Note that "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that appear in the sections explaining the control content and processing order of the main control board 110 correspond to "within the use area" and "outside the use area" set in the memory area of the main control unit 110m, and "within the use area" and "outside the use area" that appear in the sections explaining the control content and processing order of the frame control board 120 correspond to "within the use area" and "outside the use area" set in the memory area of the frame control unit 120m.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after a setting change is made on the main control board)
Figure 84(a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when launch is permitted after a setting change is made on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

As the first process, a main processing program start-up process for executing the above-described main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``received = OK'').

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed (here, it is assumed that "an operation has been performed") by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the ninth process, a setting change process is executed that enables the setting value to be changed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).

As the tenth process, an RWM clear process is executed, in which data (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) stored in the area to be cleared within the RWM area within the area is cleared by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to send a power-on command to the performance control board 130, which indicates that the RWM clear process has been executed (power-on to initialize the game control state) by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the 13th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag (= OFF)'').
As the 14th process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (starting the output of a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside of the area program, outside of the area RWM area). After that, the process to control the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

In the sixth step, if the gaming machine installation information response determines that the ball has been removed, the seventh and subsequent steps will not be executed, and the game progress will not be controlled, and the machine will wait for the power to be turned off.

In addition, a launch permission signal that allows the launching device 92 to launch game balls (including ball forwarding) can be output from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and the launching device 92 is enabled to launch game balls (including ball forwarding) when launch permission signals are input from both the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after RWM clear on the main control board)
Figure 84 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when RWM is cleared on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started and then launch is permitted.
Note that the first to seventh processes and the thirteenth to seventeenth processes in Figure 84(b) are the same as the first to seventh processes and the eleventh to fifteenth processes in Figure 84(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is considered to be "normal").
As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "normal").

As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, "operation has been performed").
As the 12th process, an RWM clear process is executed, in which data (such as the acquisition limit device activation flag) stored in the area to be cleared within the RWM within the area is cleared by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As such, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting change processes, RWM clear processes, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the usage area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between those inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processes.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when a setting change or RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 immediately after power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup processing of the main processing program to permission to fire are executed using control within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area). This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing compared to when control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84(a) and 84(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

In the above, gaming machine installation information is generated through control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), but gaming machine installation information may also be generated through control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

Also, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after firing permission (output of the firing permission signal), it may be cleared before firing permission (output of the firing permission signal).

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after power is restored to the main control board)
Figure 85 (a) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not present) when launch is permitted after power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.

As the first process, a main processing program start-up process for executing the above-described main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``received = OK'').

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is considered to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "normal").
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed (here, "no operation") by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the thirteenth process, an initial setting process is executed to restore the game control state (game progress state) to that before the power outage by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed to send a power restoration designation command indicating that power has been restored to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to send other commands (special chart reserve number designation command, game status designation command, etc.) associated with the restoration of the game progress status to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (program within area, RWM area within area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag (= OFF)'').
As the 18th process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (starting the output of a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 19th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside of the area program, outside of the area RWM area). After that, the process to control the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

(Processing procedure when launch is not permitted after power is restored to the main control board)
Figure 85 (b) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present) when launch is not permitted after power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.
The first to sixteenth processes in FIG. 85(b) are the same as the first to sixteenth processes in FIG. 85(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the 17th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``flag exists (= ON)'').
As the 18th process, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device operation command indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 19th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is limited by the win limit device.

As shown in Figures 85(a) and 85(b), processes closely related to game progress control (initial setting process, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). This allows functions to be separated between inside and outside the area of use of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processes.

Furthermore, according to Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when power is restored on the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, multiple processes from the startup processing of the main processing program to permission to fire are executed by control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area). Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of control processing compared to when control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Furthermore, according to Figures 85(a) and 85(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

In the above, gaming machine installation information is generated through control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), but gaming machine installation information may also be generated through control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

In addition, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after firing was permitted (the firing permission signal was output), it may be performed before firing is permitted (the firing permission signal is output), or if firing is not permitted because the acquisition limit device is in operation, the increment counter (including the maximum increment) may not be cleared.

(Processing sequence when launch is permitted after the main control board has confirmed the settings)
Figure 86 (a) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is not set) when the main control board 110 checks the settings immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started and then permission to launch is granted.

As the first process, a main processing program start-up process for executing the above-described main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``received = OK'').

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is considered to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "normal").
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed (here, "operation has been performed") by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the thirteenth process, a setting confirmation process is executed that enables the current setting value to be confirmed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 14th process, an initial setting process is executed to restore the game control state (game progress state) to that before the power outage by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to send a power restoration designation command indicating that power has been restored to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to send other commands (special chart reserve number designation command, game status designation command, etc.) associated with the restoration of the game progress status to the presentation control board 130 by control using the area of use (program within area, RWM area within area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed to send a setting value designation command indicating the current setting value to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 18th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no flag (= OFF)'').

As the 19th process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (starting the output of a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 20th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside of the area program, outside of the area RWM area). After that, the process to control the progress of the game is executed without being restricted by the win limit device.

(Processing procedure when launch is not permitted after the main control board has confirmed the settings)
Figure 86 (b) shows the processing sequence (when the acquisition limit device activation flag is present) when launch is not permitted after the main control board 110 confirms the settings immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started.
The first to seventeenth processes in FIG. 86(b) are the same as the first to seventeenth processes in FIG. 86(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the 18th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``flag exists (= ON)'').
As the 19th process, a process is executed to send an acquisition limit device operation command indicating that the acquisition limit device is in operation to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 20th process, a process is executed to clear the increment counter (including the maximum increment) related to the operation of the win limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside of the area program, outside of the area RWM area). After that, the process for controlling the progress of the game is limited by the win limit device.

As such, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), processes closely related to game progress control (setting confirmation process, initial setting process, firing permission, etc.) are executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between those inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 checks the settings immediately after power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, multiple processes from the startup processing of the main processing program to permission to fire are executed using control within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area). This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing compared to when control using the usage area of the main control unit 110m is mixed with control using outside the usage area.

Furthermore, according to Figures 86(a) and 86(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

In the above, gaming machine installation information is generated through control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), but gaming machine installation information may also be generated through control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

Also, while the increment counter (including the maximum increment) was previously cleared after firing permission (output of the firing permission signal), it may be cleared before firing permission (output of the firing permission signal).

(Processing procedure when an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board and game progress control is not performed)
Figure 87 shows the processing sequence when an unrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started and game progress control is not performed.

As the first process, a main processing program start-up process for executing the above-described main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to generate gaming machine installation information (main control chip information: main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, main control chip ID number) to be sent to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the third process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine installation information is generated and transmitted to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process of updating the notification counter of the gaming machine installation information by +1 is executed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a gaming machine installation information response sent from the frame control board 120 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine the contents of the received gaming machine installation information response by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``received = OK'').

As the seventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a setting change operation has been performed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, it is assumed that "no operation" has been performed).
As the ninth process, a process is executed using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is considered to be "normal").

As the tenth process, a process is executed to determine whether the setting value stored in the RWM area within the area is a normal value (1 to 4) or not (here, it is assumed to be "abnormal") through control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, an irrecoverable error process is executed in which the progress of the game is no longer controlled by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the ninth process, the tenth process will involve control within the used area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) to execute an unrecoverable error process that will continue until the power is turned off, and game progress will no longer be controlled.

As such, according to Figure 87, processing closely related to game progress control (such as unrecoverable error processing) is performed by control using the area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) used by the main control unit 110m, which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control processing described below). This allows functions to be separated between the area used by the main control unit 110m and outside the area used, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figure 87, if an irrecoverable error occurs in the main control board 110 immediately after power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 and game progress control is not performed, multiple processes from the startup processing of the main processing program to the irrecoverable error processing are executed using control within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area). This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing compared to when control using the usage area and control outside the usage area are mixed.

Furthermore, according to Figure 87, when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

In the above, gaming machine installation information is generated through control using the area within the main control unit 110m's usage (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), but gaming machine installation information may also be generated through control using the area outside the main control unit 110m's usage (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when game progress control is performed by the main control board)
Figure 88 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the winning limit device activation flag is not set).

As the first process (main loop process), a process is executed to update various random number values (random number values for reach determination, random number values for special pattern determination, initial value random number, etc.) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to the stack area is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the third process, a time control process is executed using the control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric devices.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area used (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, if it is determined that there is no flag (= OFF)), the acquisition limit device will not be activated).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to update various random number values (random number values for determining a jackpot, random number values for determining special symbols, random number values for determining special symbol variation patterns, random number values for determining a hit, random number values for determining normal symbols, random number values for determining normal symbol variation patterns, etc.) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, an input control process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to set specified data when there is input to various switches (general prize opening detection switch 43a, large prize opening detection switch 50a, first start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a, gate detection switch 44a, etc.).

As the seventh process, a special symbol special electric control process is executed, which controls the variable display of special symbols and the jackpot game, etc., by using the control within the use area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the eighth process, a normal symbol/normal power control process is executed, which controls the variable display of normal symbols and auxiliary games, etc., using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, an earning limit management process is executed to control the operation of the earning limit device by controlling the area within the use area (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) and outside the use area (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a payout control process is executed that controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) by using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the eleventh process, an error control process is executed to control error notification based on the occurrence of various errors by using control within the used area (programs within the area, RWM area within the area) and outside the used area (programs outside the area, RWM area outside the area).
As the 12th process, a hole control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed, which performs processes such as sending hole control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120 by control using the area in use (programs within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the thirteenth process, a data creation process is executed to generate display data to be output to various displays, drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by control using the area in use (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) and outside the area in use (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).
As the 14th process, an output control process is executed using the control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to output display data to various displays and send commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage area).
As the fifteenth process, a process is executed to restore the registers saved in the stack area by control using the area in use (the program area, the RWM area in the area).

(Processing sequence when game progress control is limited by the main control board)
Figure 88 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the main control board 110 limits the control of game progress while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1 (when the winning limit device activation flag is present).
The first to third processes in FIG. 88(b) are the same as the first to third processes in FIG. 88(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area by control using the area used (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the acquisition limit device is activated when it is determined that the flag is present (= ON)).
As the fifth process, a process for operating the winning limit device is executed by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area). Specifically, a control is executed to skip the fifth to ninth processes shown in Figure 88(a) so that the processes related to the progress control of the fifth to ninth games shown in Figure 88(a) are not executed.
As the sixth process, a payout control process is executed that controls the awarding of prize balls (game value) by using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the seventh process, an error control process is executed to control the area in use (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) and outside the area in use (out-area programs, out-area RWM area) to notify errors based on the occurrence of various errors.
As the eighth process, a hole control/fraud monitoring information management process is executed, which performs processes such as sending hole control/fraud monitoring information to the frame control board 120, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, a data creation process is executed to generate display data to be output to various displays, drive data to be output to various electrical drive sources, etc., by control using the area in use (in-area programs, in-area RWM area) and outside the area in use (out-area programs, out-area RWM area).

As the tenth process, an output control process is executed by using the control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to output display data to various displays and send commands set in the transmission buffer (various transmission data storage area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to restore the registers saved in the stack area by control using the area in use (the program area, the RWM area in the area).

As shown in Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple processes related to game progress control (input control process, special chart special power control process, normal chart normal power control process, payout control process, etc.) are executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area). This allows functions to be separated between inside and outside the area used by the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processes.

Furthermore, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the update process for various random numbers, which is closely related to the control of game progress, is performed by control using the area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) used by the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to the control of game progress (such as the special chart special power control process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between the area used by the main control unit 110m and outside the area used, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), multiple complementary controls (winning limit management processing, error control processing, data creation processing, etc.) that are different from game progress control are executed by control using areas outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (outside area programs, outside area RWM area). This allows for efficient use of both the inside and outside of the usage area, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the process of activating the winning limit device, which restricts the execution of multiple processes related to game progress control (input control process, special chart special power control process, normal chart normal power control process, payout control process, etc.), is performed by control using the area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) used by the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between inside and outside the area used by the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processes.

In Figures 88(a) and 88(b), the process (processing sequence "4") of determining whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag in the in-area RWM area is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area), but the process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition upper limit device activation flag may also be performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m outside the area (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

In addition, in Figure 88(b), if there is an acquisition limit device activation flag in the RWM area within the area, the acquisition limit device is activated, preventing the processing of processing order "5" to processing order "9" shown in Figure 88(a) (various random number update processing, input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition limit management processing), but it is also possible to perform the processing of processing order "5" to processing order "9" shown in Figure 88(a). In this case, for example, even if the input control process in process sequence "6" detects a ball entering the outlet gate 39, the general gate 44, or one of the various winning gates (general winning gate 43, first starting gate 45, second starting gate 47, large winning gate 50), the detection information (information on the detection of the ball, data generated by detecting the ball, etc.) in the input control process in process sequences "7" to "9" may not be referenced (control based on the detection information may not be performed), thereby activating the winning limit device to stop the game (stop control of the game's progress).

Also, in Figure 88(b), if the processes in processing order "5" to processing order "9" shown in Figure 88(a) (various random number update processes, input control process, special chart special power control process, regular chart regular power control process, and win limit management process) are performed, for example, the input control process in processing order "6" detects balls entering the outlet gate 39, regular chart gate 44, and various winning gates (general winning gate 43, first start gate 45, second start gate 47, large winning gate 50), but by not generating the detection information referenced in processing order "7" to processing order "9" (information on detected balls, data generated by detecting balls, etc.), the game can be stopped (game progress control stopped) by the activation of the win limit device.

(Processing sequence 1 when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89(a) shows processing sequence 1 (when not in a jackpot) when the winning limit device is activated on the main control board 110.

As the first process, a general prize opening detection switch input process is executed, in which processing such as detecting a prize winning at the general prize opening 43 is performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a large prize opening detection switch input process is executed, in which processing such as detecting a prize being won at the large prize opening 50 is performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the third process, a first start port detection switch input process is executed, which performs processes such as detecting winnings at the first start port 45, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth process, a second start port detection switch input process is executed, which performs processes such as detecting winnings at the second start port 47 through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a gate detection switch input process is executed, which performs processes such as detecting winnings at the general gate 44, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, an out detection switch input process is executed, in which processes such as detecting a ball entering the out hole 39 are performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

As the seventh process, an increment counter update process is executed using control outside the usage area (out-area program, out-area RWM area) to update the increment counter related to the operation of the winning limit device according to the prize balls (game value) awarded based on winning at various winning ports.
As the eighth process, a maximum increment update process is executed to update the maximum increment according to the value of the increment counter by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a maximum increase number command indicating the maximum increase number is set in the transmission buffer by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a process of referencing the current maximum increase number is executed by control using the outside of the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether the maximum increase number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (95,000) by control using the area outside the use area (outside the area program, outside the area RWM area) (here, "greater than or equal to a predetermined number").
As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``No (not playing a jackpot game)'').

As the thirteenth process, a process is executed to set (ON) the acquisition upper limit device activation flag to activate the acquisition upper limit device by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed to prohibit the launching of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launching device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed in which an acquisition upper limit device operation command indicating that the acquisition upper limit device is operating is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the 16th process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 17th process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a message is generated and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 regarding hole control and fraud monitoring information indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated.
As the 18th process, an output control process is executed in which the commands set in the transmission buffer (maximum increase number command, acquisition upper limit device operation command) are sent to the performance control board 130 by control using the use area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).

In addition, if it is determined in step 11 that the maximum increase is not greater than the predetermined value, the winning limit device will not be activated, and steps 12 to 17 will not be executed, and step 18 will be executed instead.

(Processing procedure 2 when the acquisition limit device is activated on the main control board)
Figure 89(b) shows processing sequence 2 (when a jackpot occurs) when the winning limit device is activated on the main control board 110.
The first to eleventh processes in FIG. 89(b) are the same as the first to eleventh processes in FIG. 89(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a jackpot game is being played)").
As the 13th process, a process is executed to set (ON) an operation recognition flag, which is reservation information when the acquisition limit device cannot be activated immediately by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the 14th process, an output control process is executed to send the command (maximum increase number command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
Thereafter, the 15th to 32nd processes are the 1st to 18th processes in FIG. 89(a), respectively, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the increase counter update process, maximum increase update process, process of setting the maximum increase command in the transmission buffer, process of referencing the current maximum increase, and process of determining whether the maximum increase is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95,000) related to the operation of the winning limit device are performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes complementary control different from the game progress control. This allows the functions to be separated between the inside and outside of the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation flag, which activates the acquisition limit device that limits the control of game progress, is performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes complementary control that is different from the control of game progress. This makes it possible to separate the functions within and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), the firing prohibition process, which restricts game play in response to the activation of the winning limit device, is executed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes processes related to game progress control (such as the special chart special power control process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

Note that, although the processes in process order "7" to process order "11" in Figure 89(a) (increment counter update process, maximum increment update process, process of setting the maximum increment command in the send buffer, process of referencing the current maximum increment, process of determining whether the maximum increment is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (95,000)) are executed through control using the area outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (out-area program, out-area RWM area), some or all of the processes in process order "7" to process order "11" in Figure 89(a) may also be executed through control using the area inside the use area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

In addition, the process of processing sequence "12" in Figure 89(a) (processing to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played) was executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but it is also possible to execute the process of processing sequence "12" in Figure 89(a) by control using the area outside the area used by the main control unit 110m (out-area program, extra-area RWM area).

In addition, the process of processing sequence "13" in Figure 89(a) (the process of setting (ON) the acquisition limit device activation flag and activating the acquisition limit device) was executed by control using the area outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area), but it is also possible to execute the process of processing sequence "13" in Figure 89(a) by control using the area inside the use area of the main control unit 110m (inside area program, inside area RWM area).

In addition, the processes in steps "15" to "16" in Figure 89(a) (the process of setting the acquisition limit device activation command in the transmission buffer, and the process of generating hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 6 = "1") indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated) were executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), but the processes in steps "15" to "16" in Figure 89(a) may also be executed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m outside the area (out-of-area program, extra-area RWM area).

In addition, the process in process sequence "13" in Figure 89(b) (the process of setting (ON) the operation recognition flag) was executed by control using the area outside the use area of the main control unit 110m (outside area program, outside area RWM area), but the process in process sequence "13" in Figure 89(b) may also be executed by control using the area inside the use area of the main control unit 110m (inside area program, inside area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when error control processing is performed on the main control board)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed by the main control board 110.

As the first process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a magnet detection error has occurred by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, "magnet detected").
As the second process, a process is executed in which a magnet detection flag indicating that a magnet has been detected in the outside RWM area is set (ON) by control using the outside use area (outside area program, outside RWM area).
As the third process, a process is executed in which a magnet detection designation command indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred is set in the transmission buffer by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 3 = "1") indicating that a magnet detection error has occurred by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an abnormal winning error has occurred by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, "abnormal winning detected").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which an abnormal winning detection flag is set (ON) indicating that an abnormal winning has been detected in the outside area RWM area by control using the outside area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which an abnormal winning designation command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred is set in the transmission buffer by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 1 Bit 4 = "1") indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred by control using an area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a message is generated and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 for hole control and fraud monitoring information indicating that a magnet detection error or abnormal winning error has occurred.
As the tenth process, an output control process is executed to transmit the commands (magnet detection designation command, abnormal winning designation command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 by control using the area of use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

If it is determined in the first step that no magnet has been detected, steps 2 through 4 will not be executed and steps 5 and beyond will be executed; if it is determined in the fifth step that no abnormal winning has occurred, steps 6 through 9 will not be executed and step 10 will be executed.

As such, according to Figure 90, processing related to the detection of specified errors (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) is performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the main control unit 110m, which executes complementary control different from the game progress control. This allows the functions inside and outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m to be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figure 90, when the main control board 110 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (frame control board 120, presentation control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the main control unit 110m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to game progress control (such as the special chart special electric control processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

In the above example, the first through eighth processes are executed through control using the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), but it is also possible to execute one or more of the first through eighth processes through control using the main control unit 110m's usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

(Processing procedure when the number of game balls is not cleared after receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board)
Figure 91 (a) shows the processing sequence when the number of game balls is not cleared after the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information immediately after power supply to the game machine 1 is started (when there is no game ball number clearing operation or ball removal operation).

As the first process, a main processing program start-up process for executing the above-described main processing is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the second process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a backup flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that power has been restored, using control within the area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "backup flag exists").
As the third process, a process is executed using control within the used area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether the checksum calculated and stored from the RWM area within the area at the time of a power outage (power cut) matches the checksum calculated from the current RWM area within the area (here, this is considered to be "normal").

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an operation to clear the number of game balls has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, ``no operation'').
As the fifth process, a process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to determine whether or not there is a game ball count clear flag in the RWM area within the area indicating that the game ball count has been cleared (here, ``no flag'').
As the sixth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, it is assumed that there has been no operation).

As the seventh process, a process of starting a timer interrupt process is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the eighth process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to the stack area is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the ninth process, a ball removal operation process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to remove the game balls that are circulated in the game machine 1 from the game machine (here, the only determination as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag is that there is no flag).

As the tenth process, a determination is made as to whether or not gaming machine installation information transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the 11th process, a determination is made as to whether the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the specified value "0" or not, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the serial number is set to "0").
As the 12th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an in-machine communication abnormality flag in the in-machine RWM area, indicating that an in-machine communication abnormality has occurred, by control using the in-machine area (in-machine program, in-machine RWM area) (here, ``no flag'').

As the 13th process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area), gaming machine installation information is generated by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 with the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m.
As the 14th process, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress (here, "no flag") through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 15th process, a process is executed to generate and send a message of gaming machine installation information (received OK) to the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).
As the 16th process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (starting the output of a launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls is cleared after receiving gaming machine installation information on the frame control board)
Figure 91 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence (when the game ball count clearing operation and ball removal operation are performed) when the frame control board 120 receives game machine installation information immediately after power supply to the game machine 1 is started.
The first to third processes in FIG. 91(b) are the same as the first to third processes in FIG. 91(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the fourth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not an operation to clear the number of game balls has been performed by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "operation has been performed").
As the fifth process, a process is executed to clear the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the RWM area within the area by control using the area in use (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a game ball count clear start command indicating that the game ball count has been cleared is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed to set (ON) a game ball count clear flag indicating that the game ball count has been cleared by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed to generate hole control/fraud monitoring information (fraud detection status 2 Bit 3 = "1") indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is a game ball count clear flag (here, "flag exists") by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

As the tenth process, a process is executed to display an error code ("H67") corresponding to the clearing of the number of game balls on the frame control display 125 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to determine whether or not a ball removal operation has been performed (here, this is assumed to be "operation has been performed") by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the twelfth process, a process is executed in which a ball removal operation in progress designation command indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress is set in the transmission buffer by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the thirteenth process, a process is executed to set (ON) the ball removal operation in progress flag, which indicates that the ball removal operation is in progress, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 14th process, a process is executed to display corresponding specific information ("-") on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 during the ball removal operation by control using the area of use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifteenth process, a process of starting a timer interrupt process is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).

As the 16th process (hereinafter referred to as timer interrupt process), a process of saving registers to the stack area is executed by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the 17th process, a ball removal operation process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to remove the game balls that are circulated in the game machine 1 from the game machine.
As the 18th process, a determination is made as to whether or not gaming machine installation information sent from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").

As the 19th process, a determination is made as to whether the communication serial number of the received gaming machine installation information is the specified value "0" or not, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, the serial number is set to "0").
As the 20th process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an in-machine communication abnormality flag in the in-machine RWM area, indicating that an in-machine communication abnormality has occurred, by control using the in-machine area (in-machine program, in-machine RWM area) (here, ``no flag'').
As the 21st process, a process is executed in which, by control using the area in use (program within area, RWM area within area), gaming machine installation information is generated by combining the main control chip information (main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code) of the gaming machine installation information received from the main control board 110 with the frame control chip information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip manufacturer code, frame control chip product code) stored in the frame control unit 120m.

As the 22nd process, a determination is made as to whether or not there is a ball removal operation in progress flag indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress (here, "flag present") through control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).
As the 23rd process, a process is executed to generate and send a message of gaming machine installation information (ball removal status) to the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the 24th process, an output control process is executed to send the command set in the transmission buffer (a command to start clearing the number of game balls) to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes processes related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process for displaying an error code related to clearing the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball number update process described below). This makes it possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the processing related to the ball removal operation of the game balls (game media) used in the game is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes processing related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update processing described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the process of displaying specific information related to the ball removal action of the game balls (game media) used in the game is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). This makes it possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Furthermore, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), multiple processes from the startup processing of the main processing program to permission to launch are executed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area). This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing compared to when control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m is mixed with control using outside the area used.

Furthermore, according to Figures 91(a) and 91(b), when the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from other control boards (main control board 110, performance control board 130), the processing is performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area), which executes processing related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update processing described below). This makes it easier to achieve coordination between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

Note that, while ball removal operation processing, generation of gaming machine installation information (main control chip information + frame control chip information), setting of game ball count clear start command and ball removal operation in progress command to the transmission buffer, setting of game ball count clear flag, and generation of hole control/fraud monitoring information were performed through control using the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may also be performed through control using outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, extra-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when transmitting gaming machine information response after receiving gaming machine information on the frame control board)
Figure 92 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 transmits a gaming machine information response after receiving gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information).

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information message sent from the main control board 110 has been received by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the second process, a process is executed to determine whether or not there is an in-machine communication abnormality flag in the in-machine RWM area, indicating that an in-machine communication abnormality has occurred, by control using the in-machine area (in-machine program, in-machine RWM area) (here, "no flag").
As the third process, a process is executed to store main control status 1 and main control status 2 of the hole control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed to store the gaming machine error status from the hall control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed to store the fraud detection status 1 of the hole control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which the number of winning balls for activating special features and the number of winning balls for consecutive special features are stored from the hole control/fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed to store various game information from the hall control and fraud monitoring information generated using the usage area of the main control unit 110m by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and sent to the main control board 110 to respond to gaming machine information (received OK) by control using the usage area (program within area, RWM area within area).

Note that if it is determined in the first process that a gaming machine information message has not been received, the second through eighth processes will not be executed.

As such, according to Figure 92, the process by which the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages) to and from the main control board 110 is performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (in-area programs, in-area RWM area), which executes processes related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). This makes it easier to coordinate between multiple control boards, enabling more efficient control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figure 92, the process of storing gaming machine information, including information related to game progress control received from the main control board, is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes processes related to updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player (such as the gaming ball count update process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figure 92, when the frame control board 120 sends and receives information (messages, commands) to and from another control board (main control board 110), the processing is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it easier to achieve cooperation between multiple control boards, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, while storage of main control state 1 and main control state 2, storage of gaming machine error states, storage of fraud detection state 1, storage of the number of prize balls for device activation and the number of consecutive prize balls for device activation, and storage of various game information have been performed through control using the area within the use area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may also be performed through control using the area outside the use area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area programs, extra-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when updating and displaying the number of game balls on the frame control board)
Figure 93 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the number of game balls is updated and displayed on the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not a ball has been sent to the launch pad through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (ball has been sent)").
As the third process, a process is executed using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to subtract "1" from the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.

As the fourth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) as to whether or not a foul ball has been fired by the firing device 92 but has returned without flying into the game area 5a (here, this is assumed to be "yes (foul ball present)").
As the fifth process, a process is executed using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "1" to the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the sixth process, by using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the general winning port 43 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls that are expected to be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a prize has been entered)").

As the seventh process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "5", the number of prize balls in the general winning slot 43, to the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the intra-area RWM area.
As the eighth process, by using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening 50 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls that will be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a prize has been entered)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to add "15", the number of prize balls in the big prize slot 50, to the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the intra-area RWM area.

As the tenth process, by using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 includes information indicating that gaming balls have entered various starting ports (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls that are scheduled to be awarded to the player) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (a prize has been entered)").
As the eleventh process, a determination is made as to whether the game ball entered the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47 by control using the area of use (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area).
As the 12th process, by using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area), a process is executed to add the number of prize balls owned by the player stored in the intra-area RWM area by "3" which is the number of prize balls at the first start port 45 and/or "2" which is the number of prize balls at the second start port 47.
As the thirteenth process, a display control process is executed using control within the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) to display the number of game balls owned by the player, which is stored in the intra-area RWM area, on the frame control display 125 and the game ball number display 135.

If it is determined in the second process that no ball was sent, the third process is not executed and the fourth process and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the fourth process that no foul ball was sent, the fifth process is not executed and the sixth process and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the sixth process that no ball was won in the general prize slot 43, the seventh process is not executed and the eighth process and subsequent processes are executed; if it is determined in the eighth process that no ball was won in the special prize slot 50, the ninth process is not executed and the tenth process and subsequent processes are executed; and if it is determined in the tenth process that no ball was won in the starting slot, the eleventh and twelfth processes are not executed and the thirteenth process is executed.

As such, according to Figure 93, multiple processes (addition and subtraction of the number of game balls) related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player are executed by control using the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area). This allows functions to be separated between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figure 93, the process related to displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player (addition and subtraction of the number of game balls) is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by a player. This makes it possible to separate functions between inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

In addition, the number of game balls displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 may be updated according to information indicating that a game ball has entered one of the winning slots in the game machine information received from the main control board 110 (prize ball schedule information that can identify the number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded to the player), and then the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the RWM area within the area of the frame control unit 120m may be updated.

(Processing sequence when launch is not permitted due to error control processing performed on the frame control board)
Figure 94(a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed in the frame control board 120 and launch is not permitted.

As the first process, a severe error notification control process is executed using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level.
As the second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a hardware error caused by hardware, using control outside the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the third process, a minor error notification control process is executed using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a minor error, which has a lower security alert level than a major error.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (here, setting for displaying the error code) is executed to set the display of the error code corresponding to the error occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority of various errors, by control using the area in use (program in the area, RWM area in the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not an error that would cause the launch permission signal to be stopped has occurred (here, this is assumed to be "yes (occurred)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed to prohibit the launch of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launching device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which, through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area), a determination is made as to whether or not to resume output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not the error that caused the launch permission signal to be stopped has ended (here, this is set to "No (not ended)").
As the eighth process, a display control process is executed in which the error code set in the error code display setting process is displayed on the frame control display 125 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

(Processing sequence when launch is not permitted due to error control processing performed on the frame control board)
Figure 94(b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when error control processing is performed in the frame control board 120 and launch is permitted.

As the first process, a severe error notification control process is executed using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a severe error with a high security alert level.
As the second process, a hardware error notification control process is executed to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a hardware error caused by hardware, using control outside the used area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the third process, a minor error notification control process is executed using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to issue an error notification in response to the occurrence of a minor error, which has a lower security alert level than a major error.

As the fourth process, an error code display setting process (here, a display setting for hiding the error code) is executed to set the display of the error code corresponding to the error currently occurring on the frame control display 125 according to the priority of various errors, by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not to stop the output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not an error that would cause the launch permission signal to be stopped has occurred (here, this is set to "No (not occurred)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which, through control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not to resume output of the launch permission signal depending on whether or not the error that caused the launch permission signal to be stopped has ended (here, this is set to "yes (end)").

As the seventh process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch the game ball (including ball feeding) (to resume output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eighth process, a display control process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to hide the error code whose display setting has been canceled in the error code display setting process from the frame control display 125.

As shown in Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process for detecting and reporting predetermined errors (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) is performed by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. This allows the functions inside and outside the use area of the frame control unit 120m to be separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the process of disallowing launch, which restricts game play when a specified error occurs (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error), is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which executes the process related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, thereby making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 94(a) and 94(b), the processes (error code display setting process, display control process) for displaying an error code in the event of a specified error (magnet detection error, abnormal winning error) are performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which also performs processes related to updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as the game ball count update process described below). This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that while error code display setting processing, determination of whether to stop output of the launch permission signal, determination of whether to resume output of the launch permission signal, and error code display were performed through control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may also be performed through control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (outtra-area programs, extra-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when display performance information is calculated and displayed on the frame control board)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates and displays display performance information (normal base value).

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, by using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the current state is normal gaming by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, this is assumed to be "yes (normal gaming state)").
As the third process, a determination is made as to whether there has been an update since the previous game information by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, "Yes (there has been an update)").

As the fourth process, a process is executed using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of prize balls for this time by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110.
As the fifth process, a process is executed to update the normal prize ball number counter for counting the number of prize balls during normal game play according to the current number of prize balls, using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the sixth process, by using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not there is an out ball by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, ``yes (out ball present)'').

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the total out counter for counting the number of out balls in all game states in the current game area by control using the area outside the use area (out area program, out area RWM area).
As the eighth process, by using control outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether or not the current state is normal gaming by referring to the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 (here, "yes (normal gaming state)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which "1" is added to the normal out count counter, which counts the number of out balls during normal game play, by control using the area outside the use area (out area program, outside area RWM area).

As the tenth process, a determination is made as to whether or not the current time is the first game zone by control using the outside of the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, the negative is "second game zone or later").
As the eleventh process, a process is executed to calculate a normal base value, which is display performance information to be displayed on the frame control display 125, by control using the outside of the use area (outside of the area program, outside of the area RWM area).
As the 12th process, a process is executed in which the calculated normal base value is stored in the outside-area RWM area as the normal base value for the current game area by control using the outside-area (outside-area program, outside-area RWM area).

As the 13th process, a determination is made as to whether or not to update the game area based on the value of the total number of outs counter through control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (update occurs)").
As the 14th process, a process is executed in which the normal prize ball count counter, total out count counter, and normal out count counter are cleared to 0 and the game area is updated by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area).
As the fifteenth process, a display control process is executed to display the calculated current normal base value on the frame control display 125 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

If it is determined in the second process that the game is not in a normal game mode, the third through fifth processes are not executed, and the sixth process and subsequent processes are executed instead. If it is determined in the third process that the game information has not been updated, the fourth and fifth processes are not executed, and the sixth process and subsequent processes are executed instead. If it is determined in the sixth process that there are no out balls, the seventh through ninth processes are not executed, and the tenth process and subsequent processes are executed instead. If it is determined in the thirteenth process that the game zone will not be updated, the fourteenth process is not executed, and the fifteenth process is executed instead.

As such, according to Figure 95, the process of calculating display performance information (normal base value) that does not affect the control of game progress is performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs complementary control different from updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Also, according to Figure 95, the process of displaying the display performance information (normal base value) on the frame control display 125, which displays the number of game balls owned by the player, is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate functions within and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that while processing for displaying display performance information (normal base values) was performed using control within the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM areas), this processing may also be performed using control outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m (out-area programs, extra-area RWM areas).

In addition, rather than having the frame control unit 120m execute the calculation of the display performance information (normal base value) (display performance information calculation process) and the process of displaying the display performance information (normal base value) (display control process), the main control unit 110m may execute them and display them on the information display unit 115. In this case, they may be executed within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area), or outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (out-area program, out-area RWM area). Alternatively, one of the calculation and display of the display performance information may be executed within the usage area of the main control unit 110m (in-area program, in-area RWM area) and the other may be executed outside the usage area of the main control unit 110m (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

(Processing order when gaming machine performance information is calculated by the frame control board 120)
Figure 96 is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 calculates gaming machine performance information to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170).

As the first process, a gaming machine information reception process is executed to receive gaming machine information (hall control and fraud monitoring information) transmitted from the main control board 110 by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a total number of balls fired calculation process is executed by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the total number of balls fired into the game area 5a from the time the counting start condition was met to the present, by referring to the game machine information received from the main control board 110.
As the third process, by using control outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area), a total acquired game ball calculation process is executed by referring to the game machine information received from the main control board 110 to calculate the total number of acquired game balls, which is the number of prize balls from the time the counting start condition is met to the present.

As the fourth process, a ball output rate calculation process is executed by control using the area outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the ball output rate, which is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of game balls acquired to the total number of balls fired.
As the fifth process, a process for calculating the number of game balls acquired per minute is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of game balls acquired per minute, which is the total number of prize balls awarded to the player in the most recent minute.
As the sixth process, a device ratio calculation process is executed by control using outside the use area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the device ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of various devices (execution of auxiliary games and jackpot games) to the total number of game balls acquired.

As the seventh process, a continuous feature ratio calculation process is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of game balls acquired based on the operation of continuous features (execution of jackpot game) to the total number of game balls acquired.
As the eighth process, a jackpot count calculation process is executed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the number of jackpot games that have been played from the time the counting start condition was met to the present.
As the ninth process, a maximum ball output calculation process is executed by control using outside the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) to calculate the maximum ball output, which is the largest value among the difference balls where the total number of winning balls exceeds the total number of balls fired from a certain point in time (for example, the start of a jackpot game).

As such, according to Figure 96, the process of calculating (collecting) gaming machine performance information that does not affect the control of game progress is performed by control using the outside of the usage area (outside area program, outside area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which performs complementary control different from updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

(Processing sequence 1 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board)
Figure 97 (a) is a diagram showing processing order 1 (when transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information is given priority) when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification (here, "there has been an update") using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the third process, a process is executed in which a message of hole control and fraud monitoring information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the fourth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated hole control and fraud monitoring information by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to transmit gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a telegram of gaming machine installation information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which the generated gaming machine installation information is transmitted as a message by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the eighth process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to transmit gaming machine performance information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine performance information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the tenth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated gaming machine performance information as a message by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

If it is determined in the second process that it is not the time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed; if it is determined in the fifth process that it is not the time to send gaming machine installation information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed; and if it is determined in the eighth process that it is not the time to send gaming machine performance information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

(Processing sequence 2 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board)
Figure 97 (b) is a diagram showing processing order 2 when gaming machine information notification processing is performed on the frame control board 120 (when transmission of hall control and fraud monitoring information is not given priority).

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether there has been an update to the main control state or game information since the last game machine information notification (here, "no update") using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to transmit gaming machine installation information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the third process, a process is executed in which a telegram of gaming machine installation information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the fourth process, a process for transmitting the generated gaming machine installation information by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) is executed.
As the fifth process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to transmit gaming machine performance information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the sixth process, a process is executed in which a message of gaming machine performance information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a message of generated gaming machine performance information is transmitted by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the eighth process, a determination is made as to whether it is time to transmit hall control and fraud monitoring information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (dedicated unit 170) through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "yes (transmission timing)").
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which a telegram of hole control and fraud monitoring information is generated by referring to the RWM area through control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the tenth process, a process is executed to transmit the generated hole control and fraud monitoring information by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

If it is determined in the second process that it is not the time to send gaming machine installation information, the third and fourth processes will not be executed; if it is determined in the fifth process that it is not the time to send gaming machine performance information, the sixth and seventh processes will not be executed; and if it is determined in the eighth process that it is not the time to send hall control and fraud monitoring information, the ninth and tenth processes will not be executed.

As shown in Figures 97(a) and 97(b), the process of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of gaming machine information, including information related to the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player (message generation, message transmission, etc.), is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, while determining whether the game status or game information has been updated, determining whether it is time to send various information, etc., was performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (intra-area programs, intra-area RWM area), one or more of these processes may also be performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (out-area programs, extra-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when the number of game balls owned by a player is counted on the frame control board)
Figure 98(a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 counts the number of game balls owned by a player (transfers data to the outside).

As the first process, a determination is made by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) as to whether or not it is the counting timing (which occurs every 300 ms) 100 ms after the previous notification (message transmission) of gaming machine information (here, this is assumed to be "positive counting timing").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not the count button 20 has been operated (here, "operated") by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the third process, a determination is made as to whether or not there are any countable game balls by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "countable (number of game balls >0)").

As the fourth process, a process is executed in which a counting process in progress flag indicating that counting process is in progress is set (ON) by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which a counting process notification designation command indicating that counting process is in progress is set in the transmission buffer by control using the use area (program in area, RWM area in area).
As the sixth process, a determination is made as to whether the number of game balls that can be counted is the number of game balls that restricts the launch of game balls (here referred to as the "number of balls that are restricted from being launched") through control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a determination is made as to whether or not the conditions for stopping the output of the launch permission signal are met through control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (condition met)").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to prohibit the launch of game balls (including ball feeding) by the launching device 92 (stopping the output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, by using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a process is executed to subtract 250 game balls from the number of game balls owned by the player if the number of game balls is 250 or more, or all game balls if the number of game balls is less than 250.

As the tenth process, a process is executed in which the cumulative number of balls counted since the start of the counting process is added by the number of game balls subtracted in the ninth process, using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the eleventh process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a counting notification message is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170, including information on the number of game balls subtracted in this counting process.
As the 12th process, an output control process is executed to send the command (counting process notification designation command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

If it is determined in the sixth process that the number of balls is not within the launch restriction (number of game balls > 1,000), the seventh and eighth processes will not be executed, and the ninth process and subsequent processes will be executed. If it is determined in the seventh process that the condition for stopping the output of the launch permission signal is not met, the eighth process will not be executed, and the ninth process and subsequent processes will be executed.

(Processing sequence when the frame control board finishes counting the number of game balls owned by the player)
Figure 98 (b) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 finishes counting the number of game balls owned by the player (transfer of data to the outside).

As the first process, a determination is made by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area) as to whether or not it is the counting timing (which occurs every 300 ms) 100 ms after the previous notification (message transmission) of gaming machine information (here, this is assumed to be "positive counting timing").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether or not the count button 20 is operated (here, "no operation") by control using the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area).
As the third process, by using control within the use area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a determination is made as to whether or not counting is in progress based on whether or not the counting process in progress flag is set (here, "counting process in progress flag is set").

As the fourth process, a process of clearing the counting process in progress flag set in the RWM area is executed by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area).
As the fifth process, a process is executed in which a counting process completion designation command indicating that the counting process has been completed is set in the transmission buffer by control using the use area (program in the area, RWM area in the area).
As the sixth process, a process is executed to clear the cumulative number of balls counted from the start of the counting process (after the counting process in progress flag is set) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).

As the seventh process, a determination is made as to whether the conditions for resuming the output of the launch permission signal are met through control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) (here, this is assumed to be "yes (condition met)").
As the eighth process, a process is executed to allow the launching device 92 to launch game balls (including ball feeding) (to resume output of the launch permission signal) by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area).
As the ninth process, a process is executed in which, by control using the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area), a counting notification message is generated and sent, including information that the number of game balls counted for the dedicated unit 170 is "0".
As the tenth process, an output control process is executed to send the command (counting process completion designation command) set in the transmission buffer to the performance control board 130 by control using the area in use (program in area, RWM area in area).

If it is determined in the seventh process that the conditions for resuming the output of the launch permission signal are not met, the eighth process will not be executed and the ninth and subsequent processes will be executed.

As shown in Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process of counting the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player is performed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, thereby making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process of disallowing launch, which restricts game play in accordance with the counting of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player, is executed by control using the usage area (intra-area program, intra-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by a player. This makes it possible to separate functions between the area inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 98(a) and 98(b), the process (message generation, message transmission, etc.) of sending a counting notification containing information regarding the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player to the dedicated unit 170 is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of game balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, while the control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area) determines whether it is time to count, determines whether the count button 20 has been operated, sets the counting flag, sets various commands to the transmission buffer, determines the number of game balls, determines whether to stop or resume output of the launch permission signal, and adds up the cumulative number of counted balls, one or more of these processes may also be performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

(Processing sequence when lending processing is performed upon receipt of a lending notification by the frame control board)
Figure 99 (a) is a diagram showing the processing sequence when lending processing is performed upon receiving a lending notification at the frame control board 120.

As the first process, a determination is made as to whether or not the loan notification message sent from the dedicated unit 170 has been received by control using the area in use (the program in the area, the RWM area in the area) (in this case, it is assumed to be "yes (received)").
As the second process, a determination is made as to whether there is an abnormality in the loan serial number contained in the received loan notification (whether it is the previous loan serial number + 1) using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, this is assumed to be "normal").
As the third process, a process is executed in which the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is stored as the previous lending serial number by control using the use area (program in area, RWM area in area).

As the fourth process, a determination is made as to whether or not the ball removal operation is currently in progress by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) (here, "No (not in ball removal operation)").
As the fifth process, by using control within the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area), a determination is made as to whether game balls (game value) are available for loan (here referred to as "available for loan") based on whether the number of game balls owned by the player is below a specified value (100,000).
As the sixth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is a normal value (0 to 250) (here, it is assumed that this is "normal" and that game balls (game value) will be loaned out).

As the seventh process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is greater than "0" (loaned) (here, "yes").
As the eighth process, a process is executed using control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) to add the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message to the number of game balls owned by the player.
As the ninth process, a process is executed to generate and send a message of loan acceptance result response (normal) to the dedicated unit 170 by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

(Processing procedure when a lending notification is received on the frame control board but lending processing is not performed)
Figure 99(b) shows the processing sequence when the frame control board 120 receives a lending notification but does not perform lending processing.
The first to fifth processes in FIG. 99(b) are the same as the first to fifth processes in FIG. 99(a), respectively, and therefore will not be described here.

As the sixth process, a determination is made by control within the usage area (program within the area, RWM area within the area) as to whether the number of loaned balls contained in the received loan notification message is a normal value (0 to 250) (here, this is assumed to be "abnormal" and no loan of game balls (game value) will be performed).
As the seventh process, a process is executed in which a message is generated and sent to the dedicated unit 170 as a loan receipt result response (abnormal) by control using the area in use (in-area program, in-area RWM area).

In addition, if it is determined in the fourth process that a ball removal operation is in progress, it will not be assumed that game balls (game value) will be loaned, and the seventh process will be executed without performing the fifth and sixth processes.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process related to the lending of game balls (game value) is carried out by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls the updating of the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to separate the functions inside and outside the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, thereby making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the process (message generation, message transmission, etc.) of notifying the dedicated unit 170 of a loan receipt result response including information related to the loan of the number of gaming balls (gaming value) is performed by control using the usage area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m, which controls updating the number of gaming balls owned by the player. Therefore, it is possible to separate functions between the inside and outside of the usage area of the frame control unit 120m, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that, while the control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (in-area program, in-area RWM area) was used to perform tasks such as determining whether there is an abnormality in the loan serial number, storing the loan serial number, determining whether the ball is being removed, determining whether a loan is possible, and determining the number of loaned balls, one or more of these processes may also be performed by control using the area used by the frame control unit 120m (out-area program, out-area RWM area).

(Summary of the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and implementation areas)
84 to 99, the control boards (main control board 110, frame control board 120) related to the progress of the game are provided with an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for controlling the progress of the game (first control), an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the first control but not updated by the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the second control but not updated by the first control. Therefore, the control for operating the gaming machine 1 can be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of the control process.

Also, according to Figures 84 to 99, the control boards (main control board 110, frame control board 120) related to the progress of the game perform the awarding process (payout control process, game ball number update process) that awards prize balls (game value) based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots (the fulfillment of awarding conditions), the first update process (increase number counter update process, maximum increment update process) that updates the first game information (increase number counter, maximum increment) using information on the awarded prize balls (game value), and the stop process that stops the game progress control (first control) based on the first game information. The program is capable of executing a stop process (a process for determining whether the winning limit device has been activated), a second update process (a display performance information calculation process, a gaming machine performance information calculation process) that updates second gaming information (display performance information, gaming machine performance information) using information on the awarded prize balls (gaming value), and an output process (a display control process, a gaming machine information notification process) that outputs the second gaming information to an output target (a frame control display 125, a dedicated unit 170). The first update process and the second update process are executed using an out-of-area program (outside the use area). This allows multiple information update functions to be consolidated into the out-of-area program, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 has an in-area ROM area that stores in-area programs for performing control related to the progress of the game (first control), an out-area ROM area that stores out-area programs for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the first control but not by the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced by the second control but not by the first control. This allows the control for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110 is equipped with an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (first control) related to the launch of a gaming ball (gaming medium), an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (second control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. This allows the control for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 is equipped with an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (third control) related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player, an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. This allows the controls for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 has an internal ROM area that stores an internal program for performing control (third control) to output predetermined information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine, an external ROM area that stores an external program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an internal RWM area that is updated and referenced by the third control but not by the fourth control, and an external RWM area that is updated and referenced by the fourth control but not by the third control. This allows the control for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 is equipped with an in-area ROM area that stores an in-area program for performing control (third control) to notify the player of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player (displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135), an out-area ROM area that stores an out-area program for performing complementary control of the game (fourth control), an in-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and an out-area RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. This allows the controls for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, communication (information message transmission, response message transmission, etc.) between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is performed using an internal program stored in the internal ROM area of the main control board 110 or an internal program stored in the internal ROM area of the frame control board 120. This makes it easier to achieve coordination between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the frame control board 120 includes an internal ROM area that stores an internal program for performing control (third control) to output specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1; an external ROM area that stores an external program for performing control (fourth control) to generate specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.); an internal RWM area that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control; and an external RWM area that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. The specific information (gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) is the result of a predetermined calculation related to gaming balls (gaming value). This allows the control for operating the gaming machine 1 to be functionally separated, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing. It also makes it possible to utilize specific information outside the gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, executes a first control for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and a second control for transmitting the first information to the frame control board 120, and the frame control board 120, which controls the awarding of gaming balls (gaming value), executes a third control for generating second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), a fourth control for receiving the first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.), a fifth control for transmitting the first information and the second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1, and a sixth control for transmitting the third information (counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the information output function of the gaming machine 1 to the outside can be consolidated on the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Furthermore, according to Figures 84 to 99, the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, and the frame control board 120, which controls the awarding of game balls (game value), are capable of permitting the launch of game balls (game media) (outputting a launch permission signal), and the launching device 92 is capable of launching game balls (game media) when launch is permitted by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 (two launch permission signals are input). Therefore, the launch of game balls can be stopped from either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120, making it possible to improve the efficiency of control processing.

Note that the related areas (send buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) used in relation to the control content are designed to be used in common within the use area (in-area program, in-area RWM area) and outside the use area (out-area program, out-area RWM area), but it is also possible to provide separate related areas (send buffer, receive buffer, input port, output port) within the use area and outside the use area, or to provide some common areas within the use area and outside the use area, and others separate areas within the use area and outside the use area.

Furthermore, although the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred on the main control board 110 to waiting for the power outage may be executed by control using an area outside the main control unit 110m's usage area (outside area programs, outside area RWM area), it is preferable to execute them by control using an area inside the main control unit 110m's usage area (inside area programs, inside area RWM area).

Furthermore, although the multiple processes from determining whether a power outage has occurred in the frame control board 120 to waiting for the power outage may be executed by control using an area outside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (outside area programs, outside area RWM area), it is preferable to execute them by control using an area inside the area used by the frame control unit 120m (inside area programs, inside area RWM area).

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt disable state to disable timer interrupts, and then performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when power is turned on, it loads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b and initializes flags and other settings stored in the sub-RAM 130c, performing initialization processing and other processing.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to allow timer interrupts, and in step E40, it performs sub-random number update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update the various random number values stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, it repeats the processing of step E40 above until the specified interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub-CPU 130a to the stack area, and in step E120, performs timer update processing. In this timer update processing, the sub-CPU 130a updates various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs the input control processing shown in FIG. 102. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and joystick detection switch 19a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set specified data. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E170, the sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change command or a setting confirmation command has been received. If a setting change command has been received, it performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above. If a setting confirmation command has been received, it performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

In step E200, the sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to issue a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72, and fourth image display device 73 to display a power-on screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power restoration designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to issue a power outage recovery notification. More specifically, it sends a power restoration notification command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72, and fourth image display device 73 to display a power restoration screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power restoration sound.

The sub-CPU 130a sends a "power-on command" to the lamp control unit 150 during power-on processing and power outage recovery processing. Upon receiving the "power-on command," the lamp control unit 150 drives the panel drive device 75 to perform the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b. Initial operation refers to the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b operating in the same or substantially the same manner as they do during the variable performance when a power-on notification or power outage recovery notification is being made. This initial operation allows the operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b to be checked to ensure that they are operating normally.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo effect after a predetermined time has elapsed. More specifically, it sends a customer waiting effect command to the image control unit 145, causing the first image display device 70 (main LCD), second image display device 71 (sub-LCD), third image display device 72, and fourth image display device 73 to display a customer waiting demo screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a customer waiting demo sound. Details of the customer waiting demo effect will be described later.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, it performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special reserved number designation command or a regular reserved number designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special reserved number, second special reserved number, regular reserved number, etc. stored (knowledge) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs pre-reading effect processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a pre-reading designation command or a special chart change pattern designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to pre-reading effect functions such as icon change effects, consecutive preview effects, lamp change effects, and pending consecutive win effects. Details of the pre-reading effect processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of that icon to make the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game. In this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect," and an icon change effect for that icon may be referred to as a "relevant icon change effect."

The "continuous preview effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that makes the player expect a big win game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable effects.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of predictive preview effect that makes the player anticipate a jackpot game by changing the lighting pattern of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable effects.

The "reserved consecutive win effect" is a type of predictive preview effect that is executed during jackpot play. For example, in a high-probability time-saving play state, if a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special chart determination information reserved memory area of main RAM 110c, the movable effect device 77 is operated at a predetermined timing to notify the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory, which is executed after the jackpot play ends, is a jackpot prior to the variable display being executed.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special signal effect processing. Specifically, it references the reception buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command, special symbol stop designation command, jackpot opening designation command, number of rounds designation command, or jackpot ending designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

If the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol change pattern designation command (second information signal) are received correctly as start commands (start signals) that initiate the change display, a change effect accompanied by a change display of the effect symbol 70a (a first change effect corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol, and a second change effect corresponding to the change display of the second special symbol), will be executed. However, if there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol change pattern designation command (a miss, a jackpot, or a mismatch in the relationship between the two, or the type of special symbol indicated by the MODE in the command, or the DATA in the command is corrupted and has changed to content that should not exist), the command will be deemed invalid and the change effect will not be executed. Furthermore, if the special symbol designation command and the special symbol change pattern designation command are not received correctly (for example, if the special symbol designation command is not received within a specified time after receiving the special symbol designation command, or if the special symbol change pattern designation command is received without receiving the special symbol designation command), the command will be deemed invalid and the change effect will not be executed. In the following explanation, an abnormality in the command or an inability to receive the command correctly will be referred to as a "command abnormality."

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal symbol and normal power display processing. Specifically, it references the reception buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal symbol designation command, normal symbol variation pattern designation command, normal symbol stop designation command, winning opening designation command, or winning ending designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the display corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether the update conditions (such as a change in the game state, winning the mode update lottery, or the execution of an SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that defines the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, first image display device 70, second image display device 71, third image display device 72, fourth image display device 73, etc. have been met, and if the update conditions have been met, it performs processing to update the presentation mode to one of multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A-C, which are set in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state), presentation modes D-E, which are set in the special probability game state (high-probability time-saving game state), and presentation mode F, which is set in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state). Note that when the game is controlled to the normal game state upon power-on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or confirming the settings), the presentation mode initially set is always presentation mode A; when the game is controlled to the special probability game state upon power-on, the presentation mode initially set is always presentation mode D; and when the game is controlled to the time-saving game state upon power-on, the presentation mode initially set is always presentation mode F.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative parts) corresponding to the numbers + pattern effect images (decorative parts) that decorate the background of the numbers and characters, and the designs of the numbers and characters differ between presentation modes. In presentation modes D to G, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) only, and the number designs are the same between presentation modes. In addition, in presentation modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each presentation mode scrolls left and right (back and forth motion).

In step E850, the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing. Specifically, it references the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error specification command or error cancellation specification command has been received from the main control board 110 or frame control board 120, and if so, performs processing to execute the error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing)
The input control processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E130-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a custom effect input has been made (whether it has been made). Specifically, it determines whether an input (custom effect input) has been made via the joystick detection switch 19a. If a custom effect input has been made, processing proceeds to step E130-2; if a custom effect input has not been made, processing proceeds to step E130-5.

In step E130-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether customization is ON. Specifically, when effect customization input is made, it determines whether the effect customization input specifies ON or OFF. If customization is ON, processing proceeds to step E130-3; if customization is not ON (customization is OFF), processing proceeds to step E130-4.

In step E130-3, the sub-CPU 130a turns ON the customization of the corresponding effect and ends the current input control processing, and in step E130-4, turns OFF the customization of the corresponding effect and ends the current input control processing.

Here, we will explain the custom effect settings using Figure 103. Custom effect settings are displayed on a settings screen on the third image display device 72 (left sub-display device) during the customer waiting effect, and can be set by operating the joystick 19 (up, down, left, right, and enter button). Note that custom effect settings may also be possible during variable effect performance, but the settings will not be reflected until the current variable effect has finished (if the next variable effect is being performed, they will be reflected from the next variable effect).

Examples of custom effect settings include "Golden Hot Mode," "Handle Airflow," and "Super Hot Icon Change." The example in Figure 103 shows that all of these are set to "OFF." For example, to set "Golden Hot Mode" to "ON," in the state shown in Figure 103, simply move the joystick 19 to the left and press the confirm button on the joystick 19.

When "Gold Heat Mode" is set to ON, in the jackpot preview effect determination process, when a jackpot occurs, the dialogue preview (gold) is more likely to be selected (displayed) if it is a dialogue preview, the SU preview (gold) if it is an SU preview, and the cut-in preview (gold) if it is a cut-in preview. In other words, this setting makes gold-based previews more likely to appear. On the other hand, when set to OFF, they are less likely to be selected (displayed) than when set to ON, or they are not selected (displayed) at all. Note that each preview will be described in detail in the jackpot preview effect determination process. For example, for dialogue previews, the order of highest jackpot expectation is dialogue preview (gold), dialogue preview (red), and dialogue preview (normal), with dialogue preview (gold) having the highest jackpot expectation. Furthermore, these previews are previews determined in the jackpot preview effect determination process, and can be executed in the variable presentation once execution has begun; they are not pre-reading presentations.

When "Handle Air Blowing" is set to ON, there is a certain probability that an air blowing effect will occur from the launch handle 15 in the event of a jackpot, compared to when it is set to OFF. On the other hand, when it is set to OFF, it is less likely to be selected, or may not be selected at all, compared to when it is set to ON. The air blowing effect is an effect in which air is blown toward the player (or their hand) holding the launch handle 15, and only the player holding the launch handle 15 can recognize the occurrence of this effect. Furthermore, the air blowing effect can only be selected (executed) in the event of a jackpot, and the occurrence of the air blowing effect is considered to be a confirmation of a jackpot. Furthermore, the air blowing effect can only occur during a variable effect that is currently being performed (it is not a predictive effect), and can occur at the start of a variable effect, while a variable effect is being performed, or at the end of a variable effect (when it temporarily stops after a miss is announced), etc.

"Icon Change Hot" is a setting that, when set to ON, makes it easier for the icon change effect to be selected (executed) in the event of a jackpot compared to when set to OFF. In other words, it can be said that this setting makes it easier for a jackpot to occur when an icon change effect occurs. On the other hand, when set to OFF, it is less likely to be selected compared to when set to ON, or it is not selected at all. The selection rate of icon change effects when effect customization is set to ON and the selection rate of icon change effects when effect customization is set to OFF will be described later in the icon change effect determination process.

Note that the effect custom settings are not limited to these three examples and other settings may be possible. Furthermore, the ON and OFF settings can be managed in the management area corresponding to each effect setting, for example, in the area of sub-RAM 130c that manages the effect custom settings: if "Golden Hot Mode" is ON, "1" is set; if "Golden Hot Mode" is OFF, "0" is set; if "Handle Air Blowing" is ON, "1" is set; if "Handle Air Blowing" is OFF, "0" is set; if "Icon Change Super Hot" is ON, "1" is set; if "Icon Change Super Hot" is OFF, "0" is set. In other words, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the area that manages the effect custom settings in sub-RAM 130c, confirms whether "1" or "0" is set for each effect setting, and then determines each effect.

Furthermore, although it is possible to individually set the OFF settings, it is also possible to set all the effect settings to "all OFF" at once. This saves a player who is starting a new game the trouble of individually setting the OFF settings, and allows the player to start playing quickly.
Furthermore, the performance settings may be initialized when the power supply is cut off or when the RWM is cleared.

Returning to the flowchart of FIG. 102, the sub-CPU 130a determines in step E130-5 whether any other input has been made (whether any other input has been made). For example, it determines whether any input has been made from the effect button detection switch 17a. If any other input has been made, the process proceeds to step E130-6; if no other input has been made, the current input control process ends.

(Predictive performance processing by the performance control unit)
The predictive performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a flowchart showing the predictive performance processing of the performance control unit 130m.

In step E505, the sub-CPU 130a references the value of the increment counter (MY counter). Then, upon referencing the value of the increment counter (MY counter), in step E506 it determines whether or not it is a period in which a look-ahead effect can be executed. For example, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) referenced in step E505 is "93000", it determines that it is a period in which a look-ahead effect cannot be executed, and terminates the current look-ahead effect processing. If the value of the increment counter (MY counter) is not "93000", the processing proceeds to step E510. In other words, if the value of the increment counter (MY counter) is a predetermined number, the execution of a look-ahead effect is restricted.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect, the presentation format of the icon change effect, etc. Details of the icon change effect determination processing will be described later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs icon change effect execution processing to execute the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination processing (changing the display mode of an already displayed pending icon or the icon in question).

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance, and in step E540, it performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (to light up the winning slot lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed).

In step E560, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved consecutive win effect determination process to determine whether or not to execute a reserved consecutive win effect and the presentation mode of the reserved consecutive win effect. In step E570, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved consecutive win effect execution process to execute the reserved consecutive win effect that was determined to be executed in the reserved consecutive win effect determination process, and then ends this look-ahead effect processing.

Note that while predictive effects are permitted to be determined and executed in the situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds the limit" described below, their determination and execution are restricted in the situation immediately before the "maximum acquisition limit device" is activated, as described above. The situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds the limit" is assumed to be, for example, a state in which the game value displayed on the number of game balls display 135 reaches "38,000." On the other hand, the situation immediately before the "maximum acquisition limit device" is activated is assumed to be, for example, a state in which the maximum increase number reaches "93,000," as described above. In other words, predictive effects are restricted from being determined and executed when the maximum increase number is between "93,000" and "95,000." Note that "38,000" and "93,000" are merely examples, and may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine. Restrictions on the determination and execution of predictive effects will be discussed in more detail later.

(Icon Change Presentation Determination Processing of Presentation Control Unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, processing proceeds to step E510-2; if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a references the received look-ahead command to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current period is one in which the icon change effect can be performed. If the current period is one in which the icon change effect can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current period is not one in which the icon change effect can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It is also possible to set only one or two of the three conditions above. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received look-ahead command is based on a win in the first start port 45, or a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received look-ahead command is based on a win in the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the icon change is ON. That is, the sub-CPU 130a references the area in the sub-RAM 130c that manages the custom effect settings, and determines whether the icon change is "1" (ON) or "0" (OFF). If the icon change is "1" (ON), processing proceeds to step E510-5; if the icon change is "0" (OFF), processing proceeds to step E510-6.

In step E510-5, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining whether to execute when Super Hot is selected and determines whether to execute. While the table used to determine whether to execute is not shown, it may have a table with a ratio of, for example, "95/100" for execution and "5/100" for non-execution in the case of a jackpot, and "1/100" for execution and "99/100" for non-execution in the case of a loss. The obtained random number value and this table are used to determine whether to execute. Note that these ratios are merely examples and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the ratios may be "100/100" for execution and "0/100" for non-execution in the case of a jackpot, and "0/100" for execution and "100/100" for non-execution in the case of a loss. After completing step E510-5, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a obtains a random number value for determining whether to execute when Super Hot is not selected, and determines whether to execute. The table for determining whether to execute is not shown, but for example, the table may have a ratio such that for a jackpot, execution is "70/100" and no execution is "30/100," and for a miss, execution is "40/100" and no execution is "60/100." The obtained random number value and this table are used to determine whether to execute. Note that the ratio is merely an example, and may be the ratio (0:100) described in step E510-5. After completing step E510-6, processing proceeds to step E510-7.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect. That is, based on the processing of step E510-5 or step E510-6, it determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect. If an icon change effect is to be executed, processing proceeds to step E510-8; if an icon change effect is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E510-11.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and in step E510-9, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see Figure 106) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a references the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 106 and determines one final icon display mode from among multiple final icon display modes based on the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change effect. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change effect, processing proceeds to step E510-13. If it is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, processing proceeds to step E510-16.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (not shown) for determining the change scenario for the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition in the display mode from when the pending icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending number counter. Specifically, it references the change scenario determination table and determines one change scenario from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the pending number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-15, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change presentation determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E510-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change effects are executed and sets this in the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E510-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change effect determination process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the type of notification sound that is generated when each icon type is displayed is also listed.

The final icon display mode is set to a white icon as the normal icon, and blue, red, and rainbow icons as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The likelihood of winning a jackpot with the special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, with the rainbow icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The image display device is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, a first occurrence alert sound is output, when a blue icon is displayed, a second occurrence alert sound is output, when a red icon is displayed, a third occurrence alert sound is output, and when a rainbow icon is displayed, a fourth occurrence alert sound is output.

The main feature of the final display mode determination table is that the selection rate of the icon's final display mode varies depending on the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is a normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in a reach.

Note that in the icon final display mode determination table, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode when a jackpot is hit, but it may be selected instead.

In this embodiment, different alert sounds are set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), but there may be two types: an alert sound when a white icon appears and an alert sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no alert sound may be output when a white icon appears, and an alert sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of these modes. Furthermore, a dedicated alert sound may be set for the rainbow icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, making three types available.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 107 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C that is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 107 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game state) that is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes D to G.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special chart variable effect pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the variable effect pattern that will be selected, and also lists the effect configuration for each variable effect pattern for reference.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which a reach state is not formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not create a reach state.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display is executed in which a reach state is not formed for a longer period than in the normal fluctuation display.

"Pseudo-failure" means that after a performance is performed to suggest whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of one changing special pattern and then changed again, a pseudo consecutive failure performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance not being performed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is given to suggest whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a provocative effect that suggests whether or not a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success effect that results in a pseudo consecutive effect being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a provocative effect that suggests whether or not a pseudo consecutive effect will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success effect that results in a pseudo consecutive effect being performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N "7"Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed when a reach state is formed by the "7" effect pattern 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"Special SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP Reach performance is executed.
"SPSP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP Reach performance is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the expiration of the valid period.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be played is executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the expiration of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful decision effect is executed, which suggests that a big win game will be executed as a result of the successful decision effect.

"Miss" means that a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) is formed by a performance pattern 70a that consists of only numbers and does not contain characters, and the reels temporarily stop.
"Missing c pattern" indicates that a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) is formed and temporarily stopped by the display pattern 70a that includes a character.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop and be displayed on the image display device.
"Pattern matching" means that a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters.
"C pattern alignment" indicates that a jackpot result (jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a in a display pattern including a character.

"Re-lottery" refers to the execution of a re-lottery effect in which, after the player has been prompted to decide whether the effect pattern 70a that temporarily stops on the jackpot result (jackpot display mode) will be a jackpot result that is advantageous to the player (whether it will change from an even-numbered effect pattern 70a that results in a normal jackpot to an odd-numbered effect pattern 70a that results in a special jackpot, or whether it will become a "7" effect pattern 70a that results in the most advantageous jackpot game), a promotion success effect that results in a favorable jackpot result or a promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot result is executed.

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that confirms a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 1 second.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state), when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern is 03 (normal reach presentation) or 05 to 06 (SP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 70%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special pattern 00 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 07 to 11 (SP reach presentation or SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an even presentation pattern 70a is 65%, the probability that a reach presentation will occur with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability that a reach presentation will occur with a "7" presentation pattern 70a is 5%.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even presentation symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special symbol 02 (probable big win) and the variable presentation pattern 18 to 19 (SP reach presentation), the reach presentation occurs with an even number presentation symbol 70a at a rate of 60%, and with an odd number presentation symbol 70a other than "7" at a rate of 40%.

In the case of special pattern 02 (probable big win) and variable presentation patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even presentation pattern 70a is 6%, the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 4%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 90%.
In the case of special pattern 03 (probable big win) and variable presentation patterns 23 to 25 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special symbol 10 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern 26 to 27 (special SP reach presentation), the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with the even presentation symbol 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probable jackpot) and variable presentation pattern 27 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with even presentation symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states), when the special pattern is 00 (miss) and the variable presentation pattern is 32 (special SP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.
In the case of the special patterns 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable jackpot), and 03 (probable jackpot) and the variable presentation pattern 33 (special SP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with the even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 10 (miss) and variable presentation pattern 36 (normal reach presentation), 38 to 42 (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 04 (normal jackpot) and variable presentation patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach presentation, SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation), the rate at which the reach presentation is performed with even presentation patterns 70a is 100%.

In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (probable big win) and variable presentation pattern 49 to 50 (SP reach presentation), the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an even-numbered presentation pattern 70a is 60%, and the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an odd-numbered presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (probable big win) and variable presentation patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach presentation), the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an even presentation pattern 70a is 3%, the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 2%, and the probability that a reach presentation will be performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 95%.
In the case of special pattern 05 and special pattern 06 (probable big win) and variable presentation pattern 54 to 55 (full rotation reach presentation), the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an even presentation pattern 70a is 20%, the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7" is 30%, and the probability that the reach presentation will be performed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a is 50%.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that when an SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is executed, an eye-catching effect is executed that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will stop and the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the change in the display mode of the effect pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the effect pattern 70a will stop and increase the player's interest in the game.

A second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that, in the event of a jackpot, there are variable effect patterns in which a successful winning effect is executed and symbols line up, and variable effect patterns in which a successful winning effect is executed after symbols line up. This can enhance the effect of a jackpot, making the game more enjoyable.

A third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that, in a variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when a pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed, in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds. This effectively creates the illusion of a jackpot, making the game more exciting.

A fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that when the effect symbols 70a including the character line up (the c symbol line up), a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed, in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. This effectively conveys the jackpot, making the game more exciting.

A fifth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) occur with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (effect symbols that result in a normal jackpot when a jackpot result is reached) is higher than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) occur with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a other than "7" (effect symbols that result in a special jackpot when a jackpot result is reached). This effectively heightens the player's joy when a jackpot occurs with an odd-numbered effect symbol 70a other than "7," making the game more enjoyable.

A sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) occur with the "7" effect pattern 70a (a pattern that results in the most advantageous variable jackpot when it results in a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects occur with the even-numbered effect pattern 70a (a pattern that results in a normal jackpot when it results in a jackpot). This effectively heightens the player's joy when a jackpot occurs with the "7" effect pattern 70a, making the game more enjoyable.

A seventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) occur with the "7" effect pattern 70a (the effect pattern that results in the most advantageous variable jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) occur with odd-numbered effect patterns 70a other than "7" (the effect pattern that results in a probability variable jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). This effectively heightens the player's joy when a jackpot occurs with the "7" effect pattern 70a, making the game more enjoyable.

An eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a reach effect is executed with the "7" effect pattern 70a than when a reach effect is executed with an even effect pattern 70a or an odd effect pattern 70a other than "7." This increases the player's sense of anticipation as to which type of effect pattern 70a will result in a reach effect, making the game more enjoyable.

A ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that in effect modes D to G (specific game states), when the most advantageous jackpot is achieved, a reach effect (SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed with the "7" effect symbol 70a (the effect symbol that results in the most advantageous jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) than in effect modes A to C (normal game states). This makes it possible to improve the effect of effect in effect modes D to G (specific game states), and increase the enjoyment of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table is that in effect modes A to C (normal gaming mode), even if a reach effect is executed with the "7" effect symbol 70a, a jackpot is not confirmed; however, in effect modes D to G (specific gaming mode), if a reach effect is executed with the "7" effect symbol 70a, a jackpot is confirmed. This improves the effect of effect in effect modes D to G (specific gaming mode), making gaming more enjoyable.

Note that while a reach effect is always executed in a variable effect pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed, it is also possible to provide a variable effect pattern in which a reach effect is not executed even when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

Also, if the reel temporarily stops on a losing number after a cut-in effect or a failed attempt, it will confirm a loss, but it may also be possible to execute a revival effect that confirms a jackpot after a cut-in effect or a failed attempt.

(Jackpot notice effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The big win notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a flowchart showing the big win notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable effect pattern determination process (processing for determining the variable effect pattern based on the special symbol variable pattern designation command) in the special symbol special power effect process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a references the variable effect pattern to be executed in this variable effect, and in step E650-2, selects a pre-reach notification determination table (not shown) for determining the notification pattern of the pre-reach notification effect that will make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed during the pre-reach presentation period (high-speed variable period), and determines the notification pattern.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern for the pre-reach preview effect is one that will execute a dialogue preview effect. If it is one that will execute a dialogue preview effect, processing proceeds to step E650-4; if it is not one that will execute a dialogue preview effect, processing proceeds to step E650-6.

A "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which an effective period occurs during the variable effect (high-speed variable period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the effective time has passed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview effect to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-5, sets a dialogue preview effect command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the dialogue preview effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a dialogue preview effect corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the pre-reach preview effect is a step-up preview (SU preview) effect. If a step-up preview effect is to be executed, processing proceeds to step E650-7; if a step-up preview effect is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E650-9.

A "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without triggering an active period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up preview pattern for the step-up preview effect to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a step-up preview effect command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the step-up preview effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a step-up preview effect corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-consecutive effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo-consecutive effect, processing proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not a variable effect pattern that does not execute a pseudo-consecutive effect, processing proceeds to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to determine the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-11, sets a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect (SP development effect, SPSP development effect, full rotation development effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect, processing proceeds to step E650-13; if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a development effect, processing proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the development effect pattern of the development effect to determine the development effect pattern, and in step E650-14, sets a development effect command corresponding to the development effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the development effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and the development effect corresponding to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a reach effect (post-reach effect). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a reach effect, processing proceeds to step E650-16. If it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a reach effect, the current jackpot advance notice effect determination process ends.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation effect pattern is a variation effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variation effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, processing proceeds to step E650-17. If it is not a variation effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, processing proceeds to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect to determine the cut-in effect pattern, and in step E650-18, sets a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in effect corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a deciding effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a deciding effect, processing proceeds to step E650-20. If it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a deciding effect, processing proceeds to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the final effect pattern of the final effect to determine the final effect pattern, and in step E650-21, sets a final effect command corresponding to the final effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and the final effect corresponding to the final effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, processing proceeds to step E650-23. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, processing proceeds to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern to determine the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-24, sets a re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery effect corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that can execute a confirmation presentation (a presentation that definitely notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred) (resulting in a jackpot). If the variable presentation pattern is one that can execute a confirmation presentation, processing proceeds to step E650-26. If the variable presentation pattern is not one that can execute a confirmation presentation, the sub-CPU 130a terminates the current jackpot advance presentation determination process.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a fixed effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the fixed effect pattern of the fixed effect to determine the fixed effect pattern, and in step E650-27, sets a fixed effect command corresponding to the fixed effect pattern in the transmission buffer, thereby terminating the current jackpot preview effect determination process. This causes the fixed effect command to be transmitted to the image control unit 145 and lamp control unit 150, and a fixed effect corresponding to the fixed effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

(Regarding the type of event to be notified, the priority of the event to be notified, and the notification mode of the event to be notified)
The notifiable event types, the priorities of the notifiable events, and the notification modes of the notifiable events will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111.

The notification modes are comprised of audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification, and a combination of these is determined for each notification event type.
The types of notifiable events include events detected by the main control board 110 and events detected by the frame control board 120, and a priority is set for each notifiable event type.

Regarding audio notification, when multiple events occur at the same time, the event with the highest priority is notified by audio based on the priority order.
Furthermore, when the audio notification of a high-priority event has ended, if it is within the notification time of a low-priority event, audio notification of the low-priority event is started.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs twice (if another specific event occurs while a specific event is being notified), a new audio notification is started.
In addition, some events may be announced simultaneously, and once the announcement of a high-priority event has ended, an announcement of a lower-priority event may be made even if it is outside the announcement time for the lower-priority event.

In addition, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notifications are displayed so that they do not overlap each other (screen notifications). In other words, when multiple events occur at the same time, the screen notifications can notify all of the events that have occurred at the same time.
It should be noted that some events may be notified on the screen separately without being notified simultaneously.

In addition, when multiple events occur at the same time, the event with the highest priority is notified by illumination, based on the priority order.
Furthermore, when the illumination notification of an event with a high priority is completed, if it is within the notification time of the event with a low priority, the illumination notification of the event with a low priority is started anew.
Furthermore, if the same event occurs twice (a specific event occurs while a specific event is being notified), a new illumination notification is started.
Depending on the event, illumination alerts may be made simultaneously, and once the illumination alert for a high-priority event has finished, illumination alerts for lower-priority events may be made even if the alert time for the lower-priority event has expired.

It should be noted that the player cannot adjust the volume by operating the joystick 19 while an audio alert is being played, nor can the player adjust the light intensity by operating the joystick 19 while an illuminated alert is being played. However, it is possible for an employee to adjust the volume by operating a specific switch located in a position that can only be operated by an employee (but not by the player) while an audio alert is being played, or to adjust the light intensity by operating the specific switch while an illuminated alert is being played.

The highest priority notification event type, priority 1, is "number of game balls cleared."
The notification of "game ball count clear" is started upon receiving the "game ball count clear start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs a 5-second audio message saying "The number of game balls has been cleared" once in "audio notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image "H67 Game Ball Count Clear" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The voice output "The number of game balls has been cleared" ends after one output, and is not output in a loop or terminated by receiving an end notification command.
In addition, the display of the icon image "H67 Game ball count cleared" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will end 30 seconds after either the launch handle 15 is gripped and the game ball is launched, or the counting button switch 20a detects the operation of the counting button 20.

Since it is expected that clearing the number of game balls will mainly be done before the opening of the gaming parlor, by ending the audio notification only once, it is possible to prevent players from being put off playing after the parlor has opened due to the audio notification continuing. On the other hand, by continuing the visual notification and the illuminated notification as long as no balls are fired or counted, it is possible to make it easier for employees to recognize that the number of game balls, which has the highest priority, has been cleared.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is displayed by displaying a rectangular icon image "H67 Number of game balls cleared" in the upper left display area (a position that does not overlap with the three effect symbols 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). This prevents a situation where, even if a player starts playing on a gaming machine that displays an icon image indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared, it becomes difficult to see the changing display of the effect symbol 70a (until 30 seconds have passed since the ball was fired).

As shown in the "Frame Control Board Main Processing," the game ball count is cleared by clearing the game ball count stored in the RWM area, and then a "game ball count clear start command" is set and sent. Therefore, the notification that the game ball count has been cleared is positioned as a notification after the game ball count has been cleared (post-notification).

In addition, in the past, not only have players stopped playing by completely discarding all game balls, but some have also stopped playing without realizing that a small number of game balls remain. Clearing the number of game balls is the act of clearing the small number of game balls (for example, one game ball) that such players have left in the gaming machine 1. This is an important act in which the gaming establishment clears the player's possessions without the player's consent, so the notification priority is set to the highest. This allows the gaming establishment to recognize that clearing the number of game balls is an important act.

Furthermore, for example, if a gaming parlor opens with a small number of game balls remaining, new players may end up playing on other players' property, which could lead to trouble. Therefore, by giving the highest notification priority to the game ball count clear, employees can be sure that they have cleared the game ball count (preventing players from thinking they have cleared the game ball count when they haven't), preventing such trouble from occurring.

The notification event type with priority 2 is "setting change" (see FIG. 33).
Notification of "setting change" (notification according to control related to setting value) is started upon receiving a "setting change designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "Settings are being changed" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of "siren."
The entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is used to display "Settings being changed" in red letters on a black background,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "settings change" are terminated upon receiving the power-on command (see Figure 31). This ensures that all notification methods quickly end notification when the setting change process is complete, making it easier for the user to recognize that the setting change process has ended.

The notification event type with priority 3 is "settings check" (see FIG. 36).
The notification of "setting check" (notification according to control related to the setting value) is started upon receiving the "setting check designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "Checking settings" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of "siren."
The entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is used to display "Checking settings" in red letters on a black background.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in red (40% brightness).

All audio, visual, and illumination notifications for "settings confirmation" are terminated upon receiving the power restoration command (see Figure 31). This ensures that all notification methods quickly end notification when the settings confirmation process is complete, making it easier for users to recognize that the settings confirmation process has ended.

The notification event type with priority level 4 is "power on (RWM clear)" (see FIG. 35).
The notification of "Power On (RWM Clear)" (notification in response to clearing of predetermined information) is started upon receiving the "RWM Clear Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio "RWM has been cleared" in the "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the BGM "input BGM."
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) does not directly notify that the RWM has been cleared, but displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a.
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

The audio message "RWM has been cleared" and the "Input BGM" background music output will end 30 seconds after output begins, and the white illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 will end 60 seconds after illumination begins.

As shown in the "RWM Clear Process," RWM Clear initializes everything except the set value area in the gaming RWM area, and then sets and sends the "RWM Clear Designation Command." Therefore, the RWM Clear error notification is positioned as a notification after the RWM clear is complete (post-notification). In other words, it is positioned in the same way as the "Game Ball Count Clear" described above, but the notification time differs between "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Power On (RWM Clear)."

For example, the above-mentioned "Ball count clear" audio output is output once for 5 seconds and then ends, whereas the "RWM clear" audio output and the input BGM output are output repeatedly and end after 30 seconds. As a result, if, for example, the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON, the "RWM clear" audio output and the input BGM output begin after the "Ball count clear" audio output ends, preventing the employee from missing the fact that the "RWM clear" has been performed. In other words, since "Ball count clear" and "RWM clear" can occur simultaneously, if the execution times of these audio notifications were the same, the "RWM clear" audio notification would not be executed according to priority, and the employee might miss it. Therefore, by setting the audio output for "game ball count cleared" to 5 seconds, and the audio output for "RWM cleared" and the input BGM output to 30 seconds on a repeating cycle, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned cases from being missed, so it is preferable to vary the audio notification output times for events that can occur simultaneously (for example, game ball count cleared and RWM cleared).

In addition, when the power switch 164 is turned ON while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the first image display device 70 (main LCD) displays the initial result of the effect pattern 70a (screen notification of RWM clear), and an icon image notifying "game ball count clear" (screen notification of game ball count clear) is displayed so as not to overlap with the initial result display of the effect pattern 70a (see Figure 112). As a result, both the RWM clear screen notification and the game ball count clear screen notification are displayed, so that it is possible to immediately visually recognize that the RWM has been cleared and that the game ball count has been cleared.

In addition, the on-screen notification of "Number of game balls cleared" can continue to be displayed even after the audio notification of "Number of game balls cleared" has ended, so even if you miss the audio output of "Number of game balls cleared," you can recognize that the "Number of game balls cleared" has been performed by checking the display of the icon image.
On the other hand, in the "RWM Clear" screen notification, no icon image is displayed, but the initial result display of the performance pattern 70a, the audio output output for 30 seconds, and the BGM output played can make it clear that "RWM Clear" has been performed without displaying an icon image. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an icon image to notify "RWM Clear", which is expected to improve development efficiency and reduce storage space.

Furthermore, when the power switch 164 is turned on while both the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are pressed, the frame lighting device 10 flashes red (a game ball count clear illumination notification is executed). On the other hand, when a game ball count clear illumination notification is being executed, an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed. This prevents the player from becoming confused as to which error notification is being executed in the illumination notification. Furthermore, even if an RWM clear illumination notification is not executed, an "RWM clear" screen notification is executed as described above, allowing the player to recognize that an "RWM clear" has been executed.
The relationship between the notifications of each notification means when the RWM clear switch 111a and the game ball count clear switch 121 are both pressed and the power switch 164 is turned ON will be explained later in the time chart.

In this embodiment, the audio notification time for "clear game ball count," which has a higher priority, is shorter than that for "power on (RWM clear)," but the audio notification time for "clear game ball count" may be longer than that for "power on (RWM clear)," or the notification times for both may be the same.

The event type with priority level 5 is "power restoration."
The notification of "power restoration" is started upon receiving the "power restoration designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs the "input BGM" with "audio notification (volume MAX)";
The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) displays "123" as the initial result (symbol combination) of the performance symbol 70a,
The frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are turned on in white (40% brightness).

When power is restored, the "Power-on BGM" BGM output ends 30 seconds after output begins, and the white illumination of the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 ends 60 seconds after illumination begins. This simplifies the process by eliminating the need for further operation once the power switch 164 is turned ON.

The event type for notification with priority level 6 is "Fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" is initiated upon receiving the "Unrecoverable Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "Please change the settings" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of "siren."
Using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), the word "ERROR" is displayed in red letters on a black background, and the message "PLEASE CHANGE SETTINGS" is displayed in white letters.
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off and the power switch 164 is turned ON without any setting change operations being performed, the error notification "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" will begin again. In other words, if "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)" occurs, it is necessary to turn the power switch 164 OFF, perform the setting change operation, turn the power switch 164 ON, and complete the setting change process.

In the case of "Fraud Detection 3 (RWM Abnormal Error)," the audio, visual, and illuminated alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alert will end when the power is cut off). This allows the gaming machine 1 to be powered off and the player to be prompted to change the settings. Furthermore, changing the settings will resolve the RWM abnormality, requiring an employee to take action, preventing the player from continuing to play while the RWM abnormality has occurred.

The notification event type for priority 7 is "Fraud detection 2 (abnormal winning error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 2 (Abnormal Winning Error)" is initiated upon receiving the "Abnormal Winning Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio message "An abnormal winning has occurred" in the "audio notification (volume MAX)" mode and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image saying "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The audio message "An abnormal winning has occurred" and the siren warning sound will end 180 seconds after the start of output. The icon image "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" will be displayed, and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the warning will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in Figure 112, the abnormal winning error is notified on the screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "Abnormal winning error. Please turn the power back on" in the upper right display area (a position that does not overlap with the three effect symbols 70a) of the first image display device 70 (main LCD). This prevents the icon image from being obscured by overlapping with the effect symbols 70a, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an abnormal winning error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority level 8 is "Fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error)."
The notification of "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)" is initiated upon receiving the "Magnet Detection Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio message "A magnet has been detected" and the warning sound of a siren in the "audio notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image of "magnet detection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

For "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)", the audio, visual, and electric alerts will end 180 seconds after the alert begins.

After audio, visual, and illuminated alerts have begun, alerts will continue for 180 seconds, even if the magnet is removed. Furthermore, if a "magnet detection command" is received again within 180 seconds, alerts will continue for the next 180 seconds. This further strengthens security.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of a magnet detection error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) by displaying a rectangular icon image "Magnet Detected." This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a magnet detection error has occurred.

The screen notification of a magnet detection error may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) to display "Magnet detection error" in red or white text on a black background.

The notification event type with priority 9 is "acquisition upper limit device activated."
The notification of "Acquisition limit device activation" is started upon receiving the "Acquisition limit device activation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio message "Audio notification (volume MAX)" saying "Capacity limit device in operation."
An icon image saying "Winning limit device in operation. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in white (40% brightness).

The audio output of "Earning limit device in operation" will end 10 seconds after the start of output, and the display of the icon image "Earning limit device in operation, play ends for today" and the white flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue to notify you until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notification will end when the power is cut off).

The winning limit device stops operating if the power switch 164 is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a (if the RWM is cleared) after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. If only the power switch 164 is turned on after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off,
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio message "Audio notification (volume MAX)" saying "Capacity limit device in operation."
An icon image saying "Winning limit device in operation. Today's game is over" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is made to flash in red (40% brightness). This prevents the game from being made playable simply by turning the power switch 164 OFF and ON after the win limit device has been activated.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of the activation of the acquisition limit device is a rectangular icon image "Acquisition limit device activated, play ends for today" displayed in the upper left display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H67 Game ball count cleared" icon image). The icon image is displayed so that it overlaps with part of the effect pattern 70a on the left (so that the icon image is the front layer). In other words, because play is made impossible when the acquisition limit device is activated, there is no need to consider the visibility of the effect pattern 70a, and the freedom of display of the icon image (no need to worry about display position) can be increased.

In addition, audio notifications end 10 seconds after they start, on-screen notifications are displayed as icon images, and illuminated notifications are displayed as white flashing lights, so as to avoid excessive notifications. This helps to avoid unnecessary gambling urges and helps prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

The screen notification of the activation of the earning limit device may be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) in white text on a black background, saying "Earning limit device activated. Play ends today." This configuration makes it difficult to see other effect images, making it easier for players to recognize that they can no longer continue playing.

It is also possible that after the acquisition limit device is activated, the power switch 164 is turned OFF, and the next time the power switch 164 is turned ON, the number of game balls is cleared at the same time (the power switch 164 is turned ON while the game ball count clear switch 121 is pressed). In this case, the audio and visual alerts notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the visual alerts display an icon image notifying the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and an icon image saying "acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM" so that they do not overlap each other. As a result, while the audio and visual alerts notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the visual alerts display the icon image saying "acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM." This allows the player to recognize that the number of game balls has been cleared, but also that an RWM clear operation is required.
The relationship between the notifications from the notification means in this situation will be explained later in the time chart.

The notification event type with priority 10 is "unauthorized radio wave detection error."
The notification of the "unauthorized radio wave detection error" is started upon receiving the "unauthorized radio wave detection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "Radio waves detected" and a warning sound of a "siren" in "audio notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The audio "Radio waves detected" and the siren warning sound will end 30 seconds after output begins, and the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio waves detected" and the red flashing of the frame lighting device 10 will continue to alert until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alert will end when the power is cut off).

After the audio alert begins, the alert will continue for 30 seconds, even if the radio waves are removed. Furthermore, if the "unauthorized radio wave detection command" is received again within 30 seconds, the audio alert will continue for the next 30 seconds. This further strengthens security.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an unauthorized radio wave detection error is displayed in the upper display area (below the display position of the "Magnet Detected" icon image) of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) by displaying a rectangular icon image "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 11 is "Abnormal number of winning balls error."
The notification of the "winning ball number abnormality error" (notification in response to the detection of the gaming medium corresponding to the gaming value) is started upon receiving the "winning ball number abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the event of an "abnormal winning ball count error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the alerts will end when the power is cut off).

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an abnormal winning ball count error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H66 Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected" icon image) by displaying a rectangular icon image "H68 Abnormal Winning Ball Count." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to communicate to employees that an abnormal winning ball count error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 12 is "abnormal number of balls fired error."
The notification of the "abnormal number of shot balls error" (notification in response to the detection of game media shot into the game area) is initiated by receiving the "abnormal number of shot balls designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H69 Abnormal number of shots" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the event of an "abnormal number of balls fired" error, the audio, visual, and illuminated notifications will continue until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (the notifications will end when the power is cut off).

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off, the notification will end, but if the abnormal number of balls fired has not been resolved (for example, if the situation where a large number of gaming balls are still standing on the gaming board has not been resolved), after the power switch 164 is turned ON, a "number of balls fired abnormal designation command" will be received and the notification of the "number of balls fired abnormal error" will begin again.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H68 Abnormal Number of Winning Balls" icon image), displaying a rectangular icon image "H69 Abnormal Number of Balls Fired." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an abnormal number of balls fired error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 13 is "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error."
The notification of the "gaming machine communication abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "gaming machine communication abnormality start designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H06 Board connection error Check connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the event of an "internal machine communication abnormality error," audio, visual, and illumination notifications will continue until the error is resolved (the notifications will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the on-screen notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-hand image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H69 Abnormal Number of Balls Fired" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H06 Board Connection Error Check Connection." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to inform employees that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 14 is "exit switch disconnection error."
An "exit switch disconnection error" is an abnormality that occurs when a disconnection of the subtraction exit switch 91c is detected.
The notification of the "exit switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image saying "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher."
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "exit switch disconnection error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarms will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an exit switch disconnection error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) with a rectangular icon image "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch Malfunction with launcher." This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that an exit switch disconnection error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 15 is "exit switch abnormal error."
An "exit switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction outlet switch 91c does not turn ON within the specified time after the subtraction solenoid 91a operates (when the subtraction outlet switch 91c cannot detect the passage of the ball even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated).
The notification of the "exit switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "exit switch abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
The third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image saying "H14 Abnormal subtraction port switch. Malfunction in launcher."
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "exit switch abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarms will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the exit switch abnormality error is displayed on screen in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H06 Board connection error Check connection" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H14 Subtraction port SW abnormality Malfunction with launcher." This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that an exit switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 16 is "entrance switch disconnection error."
The "entrance switch disconnection error" is an abnormality that occurs when a disconnection of the subtraction entrance switch 91b is detected. Specifically, this is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b cannot be detected as OFF even when the subtraction solenoid 91a is operated (when a gaming ball is stopped).
The notification of the "entrance switch disconnection error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch disconnection designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch, problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "entrance switch open circuit error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the entrance switch open circuit error is displayed on screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "H15 Subtraction entrance switch abnormality, malfunction with ball feed section" in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction entrance switch abnormality, malfunction with launcher" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped with other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that an entrance switch open circuit error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 17 is "entrance switch abnormality error."
An "entrance switch abnormality error" is an abnormality that occurs when the subtraction entrance switch 91b remains OFF (the time during which no game ball is detected) for a specified period of time (for example, 10 seconds) (the OFF state continues).
The notification of the "entrance switch abnormality error" is started upon receiving the "entrance switch abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H15 Abnormal subtraction inlet switch, problem with ball feed section" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "entrance switch abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alarms will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the entrance switch abnormality error is displayed on screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "H15 Subtraction entrance switch abnormality - malfunction with ball feed section" in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H14 Subtraction entrance switch abnormality - malfunction with launcher" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped with other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that an entrance switch abnormality error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 18 is "foul ball switch open circuit error."
The notification of the "Entrance Switch Abnormal Error" is initiated upon receiving the "Foul Ball Switch Disconnection Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check wiring of foul ball switch" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of a "foul ball switch open circuit error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the foul ball switch open circuit error is displayed on screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "H24 Foul ball switch abnormality Check foul ball switch wiring" in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H15 Subtraction entrance SW abnormality Problem with ball delivery section" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped with other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees to be informed of the occurrence of a foul ball switch open circuit error.

The notification event type with priority 19 is "communication line abnormality error."
The notification of a "communication line abnormality error" is initiated upon receiving a "communication line abnormality designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of a "communication line abnormality error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated (the alerts will end once the error is resolved and the error release switch 123 is operated).

As shown in Figure 112, the communication line abnormality error is displayed on screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H24 Foul ball SW abnormality Check foul ball SW wiring" icon image). This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees to be informed of the occurrence of a communication line abnormality error.

The notification event type with priority 20 is "communication no response error."
The notification of the "no response error" is initiated upon receiving the "no response command." The notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of a "no response communication error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved (the alarms will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of a no-response communication error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left-hand image display device) (below the display position of the above-mentioned "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a no-response communication error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 21 is "excess ball error."
The notification of the "excess ball error" is initiated upon receiving the "excess ball error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image saying "H25 Excessive Game Ball Error Please Set to Proper Number of Balls" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "excess ball error," both the visual and electric alerts will continue until the error is resolved (the alerts will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the on-screen notification of an excess ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), with a rectangular icon image "H25 Excessive game ball error Please set the appropriate number of balls" displayed so as to overlap part of the right-hand effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an excess ball error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the excessive ball error will continue until the error is resolved (until the appropriate number of balls is reached), so the effect pattern 70a on the right will remain difficult to see unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called to promptly resolve the error.

The notification event type with priority 22 is "insufficient ball error."
The notification of the "Insufficient Ball Error" is initiated upon receiving the "Insufficient Ball Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "Please refill the out hole with balls" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and a warning sound of "siren."
An icon image "H24 Insufficient Game Ball Error, Refill Balls from Outlet" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of a "too few balls error," the audio, visual, and electric alarms will continue to sound until the error is resolved (the alarms will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an insufficient ball error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "H25 Excessive game ball error Please set the correct number of balls" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "H24 Insufficient game ball error Refill balls from outlet" is displayed so as to overlap part of the right-hand effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly communicate to employees that an insufficient ball error has occurred.

In addition, the on-screen notification of the insufficient balls error will continue until the error is resolved (until balls are replenished), so the right-hand effect pattern 70a will remain difficult to see unless the error is resolved. Therefore, an employee can be called to promptly resolve the error.

Comparing an "excess ball error" and a "too few balls error," the difference is that an "excess ball error" does not produce an audio alert, while a "too few balls error" does. If the "too few balls error" continues, there is a risk that if a jackpot game is played, there will not be enough game balls to fire, preventing the ball from entering the jackpot. Therefore, by also producing an audio alert when an "insufficient balls error" occurs, it is possible to prompt an employee to quickly replenish balls, which can help prevent the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring.

The event type with priority 23 is "lifting mechanism error."
The notification of the "lifting mechanism error" is started upon receiving the "lifting mechanism error designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
No notification is made by the audio output device 9.
An icon image "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check the lift" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of a "lifting mechanism error," both the visual and electric alarms will continue to be displayed until the error is resolved (the alarms will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the lifting mechanism error is reported on screen by displaying a rectangular icon image "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check lift" in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device). This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped with other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that a lifting mechanism error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 24 is "abrasive not attached error."
The notification of the "abrasive not attached error" is started upon receiving the "abrasive not attached command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image "H22 Abrasive material installation error Abrasive material not set" is displayed on the fourth image display device 73 (right image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The voice message "Please call an attendant" and the siren warning sound will end 30 seconds after output begins, and the icon image "H22 Abrasive loading error - Abrasive not set" will be displayed and the frame lighting device 10 will continue to flash red until the error is resolved (the warning will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the on-screen notification of an abrasive not loaded error is displayed in the upper display area of the fourth image display device 73 (right-side image display device) (below the above-mentioned "H29 Lift mechanism error Please check the lift" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H22 Abrasive loaded error Abrasive not loaded." This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an abrasive not loaded error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 25 is "passage switch unconnection error."
The notification of the "passage switch unconnected error" is started upon receiving the "passage switch unconnected designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please call an attendant" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" and the warning sound of a "siren."
An icon image of "H26 Frame out switch error, check frame out switch wiring" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the case of an "aisle switch unconnected error," audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the error is resolved (alerts will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the on-screen notification of an aisle switch unconnected error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the above-mentioned "H05 Dedicated unit communication error Restart unit" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H26 Frame out switch error Check frame out switch wiring." This prevents the icon image from being obscured by other presentation images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that an aisle switch unconnected error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 26 is "glass frame open error."
The notification of the "glass frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "glass frame opening command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the audio output begins. The display of the icon image "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" ends when the glass frame 4 is closed, and the frame lighting device 10 stops flashing red 30 seconds after the glass frame 4 is closed.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of a glass frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the above-mentioned "H26 Frame out SW error Check wiring for frame out SW" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to communicate to employees that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 27 is "inner frame opening error."
The notification of the "inner frame opening error" is started upon receiving the "inner frame opening designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message saying "The door is open" in "voice notification (volume MAX)".
An icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

The audio output of "Door is open" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed or a maximum of 37 seconds after the audio output begins. The display of the icon image "H65 Inner frame open error" ends when the inner frame 3 is closed, and the frame lighting device 10 stops flashing red 30 seconds after the inner frame 3 is closed.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of an inner frame opening error is displayed in the upper display area of the third image display device 72 (left image display device) (below the above-mentioned "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" icon image) as a rectangular icon image "H65 Inner Frame Open Error." This prevents the icon image from becoming difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that an inner frame opening error has occurred.

In addition, the audio notification format of "Door is open" and the conditions for terminating the audio notification are the same for glass frame open errors and inner frame open errors. This allows for the audio data and control processing related to error notifications to be standardized, improving the efficiency of error notifications.

Note that while a glass frame opening error or an inner frame opening error is being reported, the launch of game balls is not permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area is restricted) to prevent game balls from flying out of the gaming machine, but the launch of game balls may be permitted (the launch of game balls into the game area may be permitted).

The notification event type with priority 28 is "ball removal operation in progress."
The "ball removal operation in progress" notification (notification according to discharge control) is started upon receiving the "ball removal operation in progress command", and the notification mode is as follows:
At the start of the ball removal operation, the audio output device 9 outputs a voice message (volume MAX) saying "Ball removal mode in progress" once for three seconds, and then, 60 seconds later, a voice message saying "Ball removal mode completed" is output once for five seconds.
An icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illumination notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As mentioned above, the audio notification during the "ball removal operation" is as follows: at the start of the ball removal operation, the audio notification (volume MAX) will output the audio "Ball removal mode in progress" once for 3 seconds, then 60 seconds later, the audio "Ball removal mode ended" will be output once for 5 seconds, ending the operation; the display of the icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" will cease 60 seconds after it started.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification during the ball removal operation is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Winning limit device in operation, play ends for today" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Ball removal mode in progress" is displayed overlapping part of the left-hand effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy for employees to understand that ball removal mode is in progress.

The notification event type with priority 29 is "ball removal lever operation error."
The notification of the "ball removal lever operation error" is started upon receiving the "ball removal lever operation error start command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Please remove the ball" in "voice notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image saying "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
The frame lighting device 10 is caused to flash in red (40% brightness).

In the event of a "ball removal lever operation error," the audio, visual, and electric alerts will continue until the error is resolved (the alerts will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification of a ball removal lever operation error is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "ball removal mode in progress" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" is displayed overlapping part of the left performance pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other performance images or icon images, and makes it easy to understand for employees that a ball removal lever operation error has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 30 is "launch pad remaining ball error."
The notification of the "Launcher Remaining Ball Error" is initiated upon receiving the "Launcher Remaining Ball Error Designation Command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio message "There are balls left that can be fired" in "audio notification (volume MAX)" until the error is resolved.
An icon image saying "There are balls left that can be shot" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illumination notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

Both the audio and visual notifications for the "Launch Pad Remaining Ball Error" will continue until the error is resolved (the notifications will end once the error is resolved).

As shown in Figure 112, the on-screen notification of a remaining ball error on the launch pad is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the above-mentioned "Please operate the ball removal lever to remove the ball" icon image), and a rectangular icon image "There are remaining balls that can be launched" is displayed so as to overlap part of the left-hand effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it possible to clearly communicate to employees that a remaining ball error has occurred on the launch pad.

The notification event type with priority 31 is "counting process notification."
The notification of the "counting process notification" is started upon receiving the "counting process notification designation command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The voice output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Counting is in progress" repeatedly for three seconds in a voice notification (volume MAX).
An icon image saying "Counting processing in progress" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) for three seconds.
No illumination notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

Both the audio and visual notifications for the "Counting Process Notification" will end when three seconds have passed since the start or when counting is complete. If the counting button switch 20a detects operation of the counting button 20 three seconds after the start, audio and visual notifications will continue for another three seconds, and the same process will then be repeated.

As shown in Figure 112, the counting process notification screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the "Balls remaining to be fired" icon image mentioned above), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process in progress" is displayed overlapping part of the left effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy for players and employees to understand that a counting process notification has occurred.

The notification event type with priority 32 is "counting process completed."
The notification of "counting process completion" is started upon receiving the "counting process completion command", and the notification mode is as follows:
The audio output device 9 outputs a voice message saying "Counting process completed" once for 5 seconds in "audio notification (volume MAX)" mode.
An icon image saying "Counting process completed" is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display),
No illumination notification will be provided by the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76.

As mentioned above, the audio output of "Counting process completed" ends after a single 5-second output, and the display of the icon image "Counting process completed" ends 30 seconds after it started to be displayed.

As shown in Figure 112, the screen notification that the counting process is complete is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) (displayed below the "Counting process in progress" icon image mentioned above), and a rectangular icon image "Counting process completed" is displayed overlapping part of the left effect pattern 70a. This prevents the icon image from being difficult to see due to being overlapped by other effect images or icon images, and makes it easy for players and employees to understand that the counting process has been completed.

The notification event type with priority 33 is "number of game balls exceeded."
When "number of game balls exceeded," the "number of game balls exceeded command" and "number of game balls exceeded end command" are received, but the audio notification, visual notification, and electric notification all remain "current" (no special notification is given).
The "Overloaded Balls" message is primarily intended to be sent to the gaming machine information center when the number of gaming balls reaches the specified number (40,000), and is therefore not displayed as an audio notification, a visual notification, or an illuminated notification on the gaming machine 1. This prevents players who are enjoying themselves because the number of gaming balls has reached the specified number (40,000) from being upset. Meanwhile, the gaming machine information center can obtain information indicating that the number of gaming balls has reached the specified number (40,000), allowing it to recognize that a certain number has been reached before the aforementioned acquisition limit device is activated, and to grasp the progression of the number of gaming balls in detail and step-by-step. Since the "Overloaded Balls" message is sent when the number of gaming balls reaches the specified number (40,000), it may be transmitted as "40,000" or "40,005" depending on the number of gaming balls owned.

Note that the above-mentioned notification mode is merely an example, and the start condition, end condition, notification time, and notification mode can be changed as appropriate. For example, an event whose end condition is a power outage may end with the passage of time, or an event whose end condition is the passage of time may end with a power outage.

Furthermore, with regard to on-screen notifications, some events are notified by displaying icon images, but this is not limited to this. On-screen notifications may also be displayed using the entire display area of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) with red or white text on a black background.

Furthermore, with regard to on-screen notifications, if multiple events occur, it is possible to display icon images notifying the occurrence of each event, but it is also possible to display only the event with the highest priority among the events that have occurred. Then, when the conditions for ending the on-screen notification of a high-priority event are met, if the notification period for a lower-priority event is still in progress, the on-screen notification of that event may be displayed.

The priorities are also merely examples and may be changed as appropriate. For example, "setting change" (alert in response to control related to setting values), "setting confirmation" (alert in response to control related to setting values), "power on (RWM clear)" (alert in response to clearing of specified information), and "power restoration" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls." For example, a "magnet detection error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls," and an "illegal radio wave detection error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls." Also, for example, an "abnormal number of winning balls error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls," and an "abnormal number of fired balls error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls." Also, for example, a "glass frame opening error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls," and an "inner frame opening error" may be given higher priority than "clearing the number of game balls." Furthermore, for example, "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls," and "communication line abnormality error" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls." Furthermore, for example, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls," and "acquisition limit device activated" may be given a higher priority than "clearing the number of gaming balls." Furthermore, "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "glass frame opening error" and "inner frame opening error," and "acquisition limit device activated" and "ball removal operation in progress" may be given a higher priority than "setting change" and "setting confirmation."

Here, we will explain with reference to Figure 78 whether control of game progress is possible or impossible when each type of notification event occurs. If the "Game" column under "Game Action" in Figure 78 shows a "○", it indicates that control of game progress is possible, and if it shows an "×", it indicates that control of game progress is impossible.

Event types that indicate a "state in which game progress cannot be controlled" include "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "capture limit device activated (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." On the other hand, other event types indicate a "state in which game progress can be controlled." For example, while a "setting change" is being executed, the main control board timer interrupt process is not permitted to be executed, and game progress cannot be controlled. On the other hand, while a "game ball count clear" is being executed, if "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," or "capture limit device activated" have not occurred on the main control board 110, game progress can be controlled.

Another feature is that "clear game ball count," which indicates a state in which game progress can be controlled, has higher priority than "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "acquisition limit device activated (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error," which indicate a state in which game progress cannot be controlled. This allows the "game ball count cleared" notification to be given priority in any case, ensuring that players are aware that the game ball count has been cleared.

Another feature is that the priorities differ for "states where game progress cannot be controlled" such as "setting change," "setting confirmation," "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," "winning limit device activated (partial control impossible)," "ball removal operation in progress," and "ball removal lever operation error." For example, a "setting change" is required to resolve "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," but if a "setting change" is made after the occurrence of "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)," the "setting change" can be reported as a priority (by not reporting "fraud detection 3 (RWM abnormal error)"), allowing the employee to recognize that the correct operation is being performed.

Another feature is that the priorities of "states in which game progress can be controlled," such as "clearing the number of game balls," "powering on (clearing the RWM)," and "power restoration," differ. For example, between "clearing the number of game balls" and "powering on (clearing the RWM)," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority, and between "clearing the number of game balls" and "power restoration," "clearing the number of game balls" takes priority. This allows the "clearing the number of game balls" notification to be executed with priority in any case, ensuring that the player is aware that the number of game balls has been cleared.

Also, as shown in Figures 110 and 111, the conditions for terminating notifications differ depending on the type of notification event. For example, notifications can be divided into "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not restarting after power is restored)" and "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not restarting after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which notifications end with a power outage (not restarting after power is restored)" include "winning ball count abnormal error," "fired ball count abnormal error," and "RWM abnormal error." Examples of "events in which notifications do not end with a power outage (not restarting after power is restored)" include "clearing the number of game balls," "setting change," and "setting confirmation." For example, the "clearing the number of game balls" notification will not end simply by turning power switch 164 OFF and ON, unless a ball is fired or counted. Furthermore, when comparing "an event in which the notification ends when the power is turned off (not restarting after power is restored)" with "an event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting after power is restored)," the "event in which the notification does not end when the power is turned off (not restarting after power is restored)" tends to be set with a higher priority. This allows the notification to continue until the number of game balls is cleared or counted, thereby notifying the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that play is possible. Furthermore, if the setting is changed, the notification can continue until the setting key SW112a is returned to its initial position (the operation to end the setting change), so by ending the notification following the operation, the employee can be notified that the setting change is complete.

Another feature is that the priorities of "clear ball count," "change settings," and "check settings," which are "events for which notifications do not end with a power outage (notifications resume after power is restored)," are different. For example, between "clear ball count" and "change settings," "clear ball count" takes priority, and between "clear ball count" and "check settings," "clear ball count" takes priority. This allows the "clear ball count" notification to be executed with priority in any case, ensuring that players are aware that the number of game balls has been cleared.

Another notable feature is that the priorities of "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error," "Abnormal Number of Balls Fired," and "Abnormal RWM Error," which are events in which "the notification ends when the power is shut off (the notification does not resume after power is restored)," are different. For example, "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error" takes priority over "Abnormal Number of Balls Fired." For example, "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error" is assumed to be a fraudulent attempt, such as using illegal devices or game balls with string attached to detect only the winning switch, preventing the out ball detection switch 39a, which is located downstream from the winning switch, from detecting the balls. Meanwhile, "Abnormal Number of Balls Fired" is assumed to be a situation in which a large number of game balls are stationary on the game board (a situation in which "grapes" have occurred). In other words, since "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error" is more likely to be fraudulent, prioritizing the notification of "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error" can enhance security. Furthermore, "Abnormal RWM Error" takes priority over "Abnormal Number of Winning Balls Error." This prevents games from being played when there is an abnormality in the main RAM 110c (which is more serious than an abnormal winning ball count error), and prevents games from being played improperly.

The "RWM abnormality error" notification is terminated on the assumption that a setting change operation is performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply has been cut off, and the setting change is completed. In other words, if a setting change operation is not performed the next time power is supplied after the power supply has been cut off, the "RWM abnormality error" notification continues.
Therefore, if a setting change operation is performed when power is next supplied after the power supply has been cut off and the setting is changed, this can be said to be an event that is categorized as "an event in which notification ends due to a power outage (not restarting notification after power is restored)."

Note that "an event in which an alert is terminated by a power outage (an alert is not resumed after power is restored)" may mean that all audio, visual, and illumination alerts are terminated by a power outage, or that some audio, visual, and illumination alerts are terminated by a power outage. In other words, some audio, visual, and illumination alerts may be resumed. In other words, it may be possible not to resume alerts after power is restored (some alerts may be resumed and some may not).
Furthermore, "an event in which the notification does not end due to a power outage (the notification resumes after the power is restored)" may mean that the notification does not end due to a power outage for all audio, visual, and illumination notifications, or that the notification does not end due to a power outage for some audio, visual, and illumination notifications. In other words, it may be possible to resume notifications after the power is restored (some notifications may resume and some may not).

Furthermore, for the error codes displayed on the frame control display 125 shown in Figure 78, the conditions for terminating the display (conditions for hiding the display) differ depending on the type of notification event. For example, they can be divided into "events in which the display terminates due to a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" and "events in which the display does not terminate due to a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)." Examples of "events in which the display terminates due to a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" include "illegal radio wave detection error," "abnormal number of winning balls error," and "abnormal number of fired balls error," while examples of "events in which the display does not terminate due to a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)" include "clearing the number of game balls." Specifically, the error code "H67" corresponding to "clearing the number of game balls" has its display termination condition (condition for hiding the display) met 30 seconds after firing or counting. On the other hand, the error code "H66" corresponding to the "unauthorized radio wave detection error," the error code "H68" corresponding to the "abnormal number of winning balls error," and the error code "H69" corresponding to the "abnormal number of fired balls error" have their display termination conditions (conditions for not displaying the message) met when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. This makes it possible to confirm that the high-priority "game ball count clear" has been performed even after the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (after the power is turned back on), ensuring that the game ball count has been cleared even in the event of a sudden power outage.

Furthermore, with regard to "events where the display does not terminate due to a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)," in addition to the aforementioned "clearing the number of game balls," events such as "glass frame open error" and "inner frame open error" can also be included in "events where the display does not terminate due to a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)." For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on without closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for terminating the error code display will not be met. In the case of a "glass frame open error," "H64" will be redisplayed, and in the case of an "inner frame open error," "H65" will be redisplayed. On the other hand, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open (with an error code displayed), and the power is turned on after closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3, the condition for terminating the error code display will be met. In other words, whether or not the condition for ending the display of the error code is met changes depending on whether or not the action of closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is performed (it can be said that this applies to both events). As a result, if the number of game balls has been cleared, it is possible to reliably recognize that the number of game balls has been cleared, even in the event of a sudden power outage. Furthermore, in the case of a "glass frame open error" or "inner frame open error," if the error code is displayed when the power is turned back on, it is possible to encourage the user to close the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3. On the other hand, if the power is turned back on after the action of closing the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 has been performed, the error code display will end, allowing the user to recognize that the appropriate action has been taken.

Note that "an event in which the display is terminated due to a power outage (the display does not resume after power is restored)" may be a mode in which no display is made at all after power is restored, or a mode in which the display is made for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after power is restored and then hidden after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, it may be possible not to resume the display after power is restored (it may not be made to display at all, or it may be made to display for only a predetermined time).
Furthermore, "an event in which the display does not end due to a power outage (the display resumes after power is restored)" may be a mode in which the display continues until the corresponding error is resolved after power is restored, or a mode in which the display is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after power is restored and then hidden after the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, the display may be able to resume after power is restored (it may continue to be displayed until the error is resolved, or it may only be displayed for a predetermined time).

Also, as mentioned above, in the cases of "setting change," "setting confirmation," "power on (RWM clear)," and "win limit device activation," the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. In addition, in the case of "game ball count clear," Bit 3 of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is turned ON and the information that is turned ON is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. On the other hand, in the cases of "ball removal operation in progress," "ball removal lever operation error," "communication line abnormality error," "communication no response error," etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON and no information is transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. This makes it possible to distinguish between information necessary for proper management of the gaming machine 1 and unnecessary information, and prevents the dedicated unit 170 and gaming machine information center from receiving all information (receiving everything), which could lead to an increase in the amount of information to be managed and poor management.

In the above description, the "setting change,""settingconfirmation," and "power on (RWM clear)" events turn on the corresponding bit for "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in the "HC/fraud monitoring information" and transmit the information to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center. However, for example, if these events occur outside the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may not be transmitted, or if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, the information may be transmitted. In other words, if these events occur during the business hours of the gaming establishment, there is a high probability that fraud has been committed. Therefore, minimum security can be maintained by receiving information only during the business hours of the gaming establishment. In other words, depending on the business hours of the gaming establishment, information related to the event may be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (during the business hours of the gaming establishment) or may not be transmitted to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (outside the business hours of the gaming establishment).
On the other hand, in the case of "ball removal operation in progress,""ball removal lever operation error,""communication line abnormality error,""no communication response error," etc., the corresponding bit of "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not turned ON, and no information is sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center; however, information relating to these events may be sent to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center, or may be configured so that it is sent during or outside the business hours of the gaming facility, or not sent at all.
In other words, it may be possible to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally transmitted, but may not be transmitted depending on business hours), or it may be possible not to transmit information related to the event to the dedicated unit 170 and the gaming machine information center (it is generally not transmitted, but may be transmitted depending on business hours).

Here, we will explain the order in which error codes are displayed. As shown in Figure 78, there are alert events detected by the main control board 110 and alert events detected by the frame control board 120. For alert events detected by the main control board 110, no error code is displayed on the frame control display 125, but for alert events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the frame control display 125. Furthermore, for alert events detected by the main control board 110 and alert events detected by the frame control board 120, audio alerts, visual alerts (display of an error code as an icon image), and illuminated alerts are issued under the control of the presentation control board 130 (except for exceeding the number of game balls). For alert events detected by the frame control board 120, an error code is displayed on the display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

For example, when the frame control board 120 detects that the number of game balls has been cleared, first the frame control display 125 displays the error code "H67," then the first image display device 70 displays "H67 Game Balls Cleared," and finally the display 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "H67." If the process were reversed, for example, an employee performing the game ball clearing operation on the back of the gaming machine would have to go through the trouble of first checking the first image display device 70 and display device 174, which are visible from the front of the gaming machine. However, displaying the error codes in the above order has the advantage of making it easier to confirm the game ball clear notification.

Figures 113 and 114 show the relationship between the notification modes for each event when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is turned on. The "audio notification," "visual notification," and "illuminated notification" in the figures correspond to those described in Figures 110 and 111. Note that Figure 113 assumes the cases where the power is turned on after both the clear game ball operation and the setting change operation or setting confirmation operation are performed, the cases where the power is turned on after both the clear game ball operation and the RWM clear operation are performed, and the cases where the clear game ball operation is performed and the power is turned on (power restored). The time charts can be interpreted as a comparison between "clear game balls" and "setting change or setting confirmation," a comparison between "clear game balls" and "power on (RWM clear)," and a comparison between "clear game balls" and "power restored."

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and changing or checking the settings)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, a game ball count clear operation is performed, if the setting is to be changed, a setting change operation is performed, and if the setting is to be confirmed, a setting confirmation operation is performed.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) is the timing at which the presentation control board 130 receives the setting change command sent from the main control board 110. Note that in the gaming machine 1, when the power switch 164 is turned ON, the frame control board 120 and presentation control board 130 start up slightly earlier than the main control board 110. In other words, the main processing on the frame control board 120 and the main processing on the presentation control board 130 start before the main processing on the main control board 110. Therefore, the game ball count clear notification starts at (b), and the setting change notification or setting confirmation notification starts later at (c).

In (c), although a setting change command has been received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and since the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, audio and illumination notifications related to the setting change are not initiated. On the other hand, with regard to visual notifications, the first image display device 70 begins to display "Settings being changed."

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of the setting change begins, "Settings being changed + siren," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 114, the notification modes (c) to (d) for setting change and setting confirmation (c) to (d) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed. The first image display device 70 displays "Settings being changed" in red letters on a black background, and an icon image of "H67 Game Balls Cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area so as not to overlap with this display. The icon image displays "H67" in white letters on a red background and "Game Balls Cleared" in black letters on a yellow background (the background color is two-tone red and yellow).

Although the ball count clear notification has higher notification priority, the "settings changing" message is displayed in a larger font size than the ball count clear icon image, in red, and in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to notice. This ensures that even in situations where the ball count clear notification takes priority and the audio and illuminated setting change notification cannot be executed, employees are made fully aware that a setting change is in progress. Furthermore, even if the ball count clear and setting change notifications are executed at the same time, both notifications can be distinguished, preventing employees from failing to recognize that either event is occurring.

(e) is the timing when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command (or power-on command if checking settings) sent from the main control board 110. When the performance control board 130 receives this command, it terminates the audio and visual notification of the setting change that is being performed.

As shown in Figure 114, the notification modes (d) to (e) for setting change and setting confirmation are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and that the setting is being changed, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the setting is being changed. In this way, if the audio notification for the number of game balls has ended but the setting change notification period is still in progress, the audio notification for the setting change can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the setting is being changed. Although not shown in the figure, after (e), the first image display device 70 displays an icon image for the number of game balls has been cleared, the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a, and a background image.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and settings are changed or confirmed at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified by audio, visual, and illuminated notifications, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of the setting change is initiated, but the audio notification of the setting change does not have to be initiated. Also, while the visual notification of the setting change is initiated from (c), it may also be initiated from (d). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may be terminated in (d), and the illuminated notification of the setting change may be initiated.

Also, for the sake of convenience, we have used a setting change as an example, but if a setting check is being performed, the above setting change can be read as a setting check, as appropriate.

(Comparison between clearing the number of game balls and clearing the RWM)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared, and if the RWM is to be cleared, the RWM is cleared.

(b) is as described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the timing when the effect control board 130 receives the RWM clear command sent from the main control board 110. Although the RWM clear command is received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clear has a higher priority as shown in Fig. 110, so the audio notification and the illumination notification related to the RWM clear are not started. On the other hand, as for the screen notification, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of effect patterns 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image).

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of RWM clearing begins: "RAM cleared + BGM when the ball is inserted," and this is output repeatedly.

In the notification modes (c) to (d), as shown in Power-on (RWM Clear) (c) to (d) in Figure 114, the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result 123" (including the background image). In other words, instead of directly displaying that the RWM has been cleared, the display of the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result 123" (including the background image) indirectly notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared.

(f) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification of RWM clear ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the display of the "initial result 123 combination of effect symbols 70a" (including the background image) continues until the player starts playing (although it may be interrupted by a demo effect, etc.).

As shown in Figure 114, when power is turned on (RWM clear) (d) to (f), the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 effect pattern 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the RWM has been cleared. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended but the RWM clear notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of the RWM clear can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the RWM has been cleared. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls and the RWM are cleared, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated notifications, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of RWM clearing is started, but the audio notification of RWM clearing does not have to start. Also, the visual notification of RWM clearing is set to start from (c), but it may start from (d). Also, the illuminated notification of the number of game balls cleared may end in (d), and the illuminated notification of RWM clearing may start.

(Comparison of clearing the number of game balls and power restoration)
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned on.

(b) is as described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
(c) is the same as the RWM clear described above, and therefore its explanation will be omitted. However, since this is a power restoration command, the command received from the main control board 110 here is a power restoration command.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the game ball count being cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illumination notification continue. In addition, when the audio notification of the game ball count being cleared ends, a new audio notification of the power being restored, "Power-on BGM," starts.
(f) is the same as the RWM clear described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 114, the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result of 123" (including the background image). In other words, instead of directly displaying that the power has been restored, the fact that the power has been restored is indirectly notified by displaying the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result of 123" (including the background image). Note that, when power is restored, the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result of 123" is displayed, just like when the RWM is cleared, but a different combination of effect symbols 70a may also be displayed. For example, when power is restored, the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result of 357" may also be displayed.

As shown in power restoration (d) to (f) in Figure 114, the notification modes (d) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 effect symbols 70a" (including the background image), and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the power has been restored (outputs the BGM played when the player is inserted). In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the power restoration notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of power restoration can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that the power has been restored. Note that (g) is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, even if the number of game balls is cleared and power is restored at the same time, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated notifications, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of power restoration is started, but the audio notification of power restoration does not have to start. Also, while the visual notification of power restoration is set to start from (c), it may start from (d). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d), and the illuminated notification of power restoration may start.

Figure 115 is a time chart showing the relationship between the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the number of game balls is cleared and when the power is restored. Figure 115 also compares the notification modes of each effect device when the power is turned on with the operation to clear the number of game balls and when the power is turned on only.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed, and if the power is to be restored, only the power switch 164 is turned ON.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) is the timing at which the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command sent from the main control board 110.
When the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the effect patterns 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image),
Even when the power is only ON, the first image display device 70 starts displaying the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image). In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the display of the "combination of the effect symbols 70a of the initial result 123" (including the background image) starts is also the same.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is started,
Even when the power is only ON, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) is started. In other words, regardless of whether the number of game balls is cleared or not, the timing at which the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration command is the same, and the timing at which the initial operation is started is also the same.
This eliminates the need to change the timing at which the initial result is displayed, the timing at which the initial action is executed, or the content of the initial action depending on whether or not the number of game balls is cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

In any case, the initial operation is (c) to (g), with the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 1, then the second movable member 77b operating in operation mode 1, and then the first movable member 77a operating in operation mode 2. In other words, the start timing and initial operation mode are the same in any case. Therefore, there is no need to prepare initial operation modes depending on whether or not the number of game balls has been cleared, and commonality can be achieved, preventing an increase in control load.

Also, in (c), when the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared, the power restoration command is received, but the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and since the game ball count clearing has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, the audio notification and illuminated notification related to the power restoration are not initiated.

Also, in (c), when the power is only ON, the audio notification of power restoration, "Power-on BGM," is output, and the electric notification of power restoration, "The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 light up white," begins.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). If the power is turned on while the number of game balls is cleared, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends at this timing. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of power restoration, "Input BGM," begins to be output.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). In the case of only power ON, the audio notification by the BGM input is terminated. Similarly, in the case of power ON accompanied by the clearing of the number of game balls, (f) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (d), and the audio notification by the BGM input is terminated at this timing.
Also, (f) when only the power is ON is the timing 60 seconds after (c), and the illumination notification ends at this timing.

(g) is the timing at which the initial operation ends in either case. In other words, in either case, the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) that began in (c) ends in (g). This eliminates the need to change the timing at which the initial operation ends depending on whether or not the number of game balls is cleared, thereby preventing an increase in the control load.

(h) is the timing when, in the case of power-on accompanied by the clearing of the number of game balls, the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the on-screen notification and the illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared end 30 seconds after the operation.

Although not specifically shown, in either case, the light emitting means provided on the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) may emit the same light in the same manner when performing the initial operation. For example, whether the power is turned on in conjunction with clearing the number of game balls or only when the power is turned on, the light emitting means provided on the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) may be illuminated in blue while performing the initial operation. This simplifies the control process, as there is no need to change the light emitting pattern depending on whether or not the number of game balls is cleared.

Furthermore, a comparison was made between the initial operation of the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a, second movable member 77b) when the power is turned on with the number of game balls cleared and when the power is turned on only. However, when the power is turned on only, it may be interpreted as a power on with a setting confirmation operation, a power on with a setting change operation, or a power on with an RWM clear operation. In other words, in any case, the control load can be simplified by standardizing the execution start timing, execution end timing, operation mode, etc. of the initial operation.

Figures 116 and 117 show the relationship between the game ball count clear and the notification modes for each event (abnormality). As examples of each event (abnormality), a magnet detection error and an unauthorized radio wave detection error are given. Figure 116 also assumes the case where a magnet is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the case where a radio wave is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on. The time chart can be read as "game ball count clear" and "magnet detected," and "game ball count clear" and "radio wave detected."

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "magnet detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) is the timing when the main processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable, and (d) is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable. In other words, this is the timing when the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable and the error control processing executed within the main control board timer interrupt processing becomes executable.

(e) is the timing when magnet detection is performed by the error control process executed within the main control board timer interrupt process, and the magnet detection designation command is received by the performance control board 130. Although the magnet detection designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clearing has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, so the audio notification and electric light notification related to magnet detection are not initiated. On the other hand, for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins displaying an icon image such as "Magnet Detected."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared ball count ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the cleared ball count ends, a new audio notification of magnet detection begins: "Magnet detected + siren," which is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 117, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with an initial result of 123" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "magnet detection" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if magnet detection occurs when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the game ball count being cleared, which has the highest priority, is displayed while a "magnet detection" icon image is displayed on the third image display device 72.This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if game ball count clearing and magnet detection are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event is occurring.

(h) is the timing 180 seconds have passed since (e). At this timing, the audio and visual notification of magnet detection ends. Meanwhile, the visual and illuminated notification of ball count clearing continues.

As shown in magnet detection (f) to (h) in Figure 117, the notification modes (f) to (h) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared; the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a and a background image; the third image display device 72 notifies the player that the magnet detection has been detected; and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the magnet detection has been detected. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the player is still in the magnet detection notification period, the audio notification of magnet detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a magnet detection has been performed, which is highly likely to be fraudulent.

(i) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and a magnet is detected, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a magnet is not detected at (e) but is detected between (f) and (i), an audio notification and visual notification of the magnet detection will be immediately issued. However, since the visual notification of the cleared ball count has already been issued, the visual notification corresponding to the magnet detection will not be issued.

Also, at (f), a new audio notification of magnet detection is started, but the audio notification of magnet detection does not have to start. Also, while the visual notification of magnet detection is set to start at (e), it may start at (f). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end at (f), and the illuminated notification of magnet detection may start.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "radio wave detection."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls during the frame control board main processing, and the presentation control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the presentation control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays an on-screen notification saying "H67 Number of game balls cleared," and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red with an electric light notification.

(e) is the timing when an illegal radio wave is detected during error control processing within the frame control board timer interrupt processing, which is performed after the frame control board main processing, and the effect control board 130 receives an illegal radio wave detection command. Although the illegal radio wave detection command was received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification was being executed, and the game ball count clearing has higher priority as shown in Figure 110, so audio and illumination notifications related to the radio wave detection are not initiated. Meanwhile, for visual notifications, the third image display device 72 begins displaying an icon image such as "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detected." Note that the "H66 Illegal Radio Wave Detected" icon image continues to be displayed until the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the cleared ball count ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the cleared ball count ends, a new audio notification of the detection of illegal radio waves begins, "Radio waves detected + siren," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in radio wave detection (e) to (f) in Figure 117, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with an initial result of 123" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H66 Illegal radio wave detected" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls cleared described above.

In this way, if radio wave detection occurs when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the high-priority game ball count clear is made, while an "unauthorized radio wave detected" icon image is displayed on the third image display device 72. This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if the game ball count clear and radio wave detection are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (f). At this timing, the audio notification of the detection of unauthorized radio waves ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification of the cleared number of game balls and the illuminated notification continue to be displayed. (i) is the same as that described in the magnet detection section.

As shown in radio wave detection (f) to (g) in Figure 117, the notification modes (f) to (g) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared; the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a and a background image; the third image display device 72 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected; and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that an illegal radio wave has been detected. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the radio wave detection notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of radio wave detection can be started immediately, making it easier for the player to recognize that a radio wave detection with a high probability of fraud has occurred.

As described above, even if both the game ball count is cleared and radio wave detection occurs, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If radio wave detection does not occur at (e) but occurs between (f) and (i), audio and visual notifications of radio wave detection will be immediately issued. However, since the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has already been issued, the illumination notification corresponding to the radio wave detection will not be issued.

Also, at (f), a new audio notification of radio wave detection is started, but the audio notification of radio wave detection does not have to start. Also, while the visual notification of radio wave detection is set to start at (e), it may start at (f). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end at (f), and the illuminated notification of radio wave detection may start.

Figures 118 and 119 are diagrams showing the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification modes for each event (abnormality). Examples of each event (abnormality) are explained below, including an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error, a communication line abnormality error, and a no-response communication error. Figure 118 also assumes a case where an internal gaming machine communication abnormality is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and a case where a communication line abnormality or no-response communication error is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on. The time chart can be interpreted as "number of game balls cleared" and "internal gaming machine communication abnormality error," and "number of game balls cleared" and "communication line abnormality error, no-response communication error."

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal communication error within the gaming machine."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) is the timing when the main processing on the main control board 110 becomes executable. At this time, the main processing on the main control board 110 sends a "gaming machine installation information notification," but the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is partially inserted or broken, preventing communication, and the receipt result of the "gaming machine installation information notification" is not received.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 determines that the period after startup when gaming machine installation information has not been received is three minutes, and the presentation control board 130 receives a command to start an internal gaming machine communication error. Although the command to start an internal gaming machine communication error is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clearing has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, so audio and illumination notifications related to the internal gaming machine communication error are not initiated. Meanwhile, with regard to the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H06 Board connection error, check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of an internal machine communication abnormality, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins, and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 119 for the in-machine communication abnormality errors (d) to (e), the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with an initial result of 123" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image that reads "H06 Board connection error. Check connection" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the game balls being cleared described above.

In this way, if an internal communication abnormality is detected when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the high-priority game ball count clear is issued, while the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H06 Board connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if the game ball count clear and the internal game machine communication abnormality are executed at the same time, preventing the user from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the partial insertion or disconnection of the wiring connecting the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is resolved. This ends the audio and visual notification of the abnormal communication error within the gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 119, the notification modes (e) to (f) for the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a and a background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error has occurred. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error can be started immediately, prompting the player to check the connection status between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120.

(g) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an internal gaming machine communication error occur, both events can be appropriately reported through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If an internal gaming machine communication error is detected between (e) and (g), an audio and visual notification of the internal gaming machine communication error will be immediately issued. However, since the illumination notification indicating the number of game balls cleared has already been issued, no illumination notification corresponding to the internal gaming machine communication error will be issued.

In addition, at (e), a new audio notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error is initiated, but the audio notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error does not have to be initiated. Also, while the visual notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error is set to start at (d), it may also start at (e). Also, the illuminated notification of the number of game balls cleared may end at (e), and the illuminated notification of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error may start.

Next, we will explain "Game Ball Count Clear" and "Communication Line Abnormal Error, No Communication Response Error." Note that since both are connection errors between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, we will use the term "Communication Line Abnormal Error" to describe them, and consider "No Communication Response Error" to be interchangeable. In this example, the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is partially inserted or broken.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball count clear operation is performed. (b) is the same as (b) in the above-mentioned gaming machine internal communication abnormality error. Also, (c) is the timing related to the gaming machine internal communication abnormality error, so its explanation is omitted.

(d) is the timing when the frame control board 120 detects that the VL signal (connection confirmation signal) with the dedicated unit 170 is OFF, and the performance control board 130 receives a communication line abnormality designation command. Although the communication line abnormality designation command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clearing has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, so audio and illumination notifications related to the communication line abnormality are not initiated. Meanwhile, with regard to the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display an icon image such as "H04 Dedicated unit connection error, check connection."

(e) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of a communication line abnormality, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins, and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in the communication line abnormality errors (d) to (e) in Figure 119, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with an initial result of 123" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image that reads "H04 Dedicated unit connection error. Check connection" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the number of game balls that has been cleared described above.

In this way, if a communication line abnormality is detected when the power is turned on and the game ball count is cleared, a notification of the high-priority game ball count clear is issued, while the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H04 Dedicated unit connection error Check connection." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if the game ball count clear and the communication line abnormality are executed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(f) is the timing when the partial insertion or breakage of the wiring connecting the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is resolved. This ends the audio and visual notification of the communication line abnormality error. (g) is the same as (g) in the above-mentioned gaming machine internal communication abnormality error.

As shown in communication line abnormality error (e) to (f) in Figure 119, the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a and a background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player that the communication line abnormality error has been issued, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the communication line abnormality error has been issued. In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the communication line abnormality error notification period is still in progress, the audio notification of the communication line abnormality error can be initiated immediately to prompt the player to check the connection status between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and a communication line abnormality error or no-response error occur, both events can be appropriately reported through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

If a communication line abnormality is detected between (e) and (g), an audio and visual notification of the communication line abnormality error will be immediately issued. However, since the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has already been issued, the illumination notification for the communication line abnormality error will not be issued.

In addition, at (e), a new audio notification of a communication line abnormality error is initiated, but the audio notification of a communication line abnormality error does not have to be initiated. Also, while the visual notification of a communication line abnormality error is set to start at (d), it may also start at (e). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end at (e), and the illuminated notification of a communication line abnormality error may start.

Figures 120 and 121 show the relationship between the game ball count clear and the notification modes for each event (abnormality). Examples of each event (abnormality) are explained below, citing a glass frame open error, an inner frame open error, and a ball removal operation in progress. Figure 120 also assumes the case where the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open, and the case where the game ball count clear operation and ball removal operation are performed and the power is turned on. The time chart can be read as "game ball count clear" and "glass frame open error, inner frame open error," and "game ball count clear" and "ball removal operation in progress."

First, we will explain "game ball count clear" and "glass frame opening error, inner frame opening error." Note that since both errors are door opening system errors detected by the frame control board 120, we will use the term "glass frame opening error" to explain them, and the term "inner frame opening error" can be used interchangeably.

(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball clear operation is performed.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(d) shows the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt process is started in the frame control board 120. When the frame control board timer interrupt process is started, the error control process performed within the frame control board timer interrupt process can detect whether the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open.

(e) is the timing when the opening of the glass frame 4 is detected during the error control process (frame control board minor error notification control process) and the performance control board 130 receives a glass frame opening command. Although the glass frame opening command is received at this timing, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and the game ball count clearing has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, so audio and illumination notifications related to the glass frame opening error are not initiated. Meanwhile, for visual notifications, the third image display device 72 begins displaying an icon image such as "H64 Glass Frame Open Error."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of a glass frame open error, "Door open + siren," begins, and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 121 for glass frame (inner frame) opening error (e) to (f), the notification modes (e) to (f) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of performance symbols 70a with an initial result of 123" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H64 glass frame opening error" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on while the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has the highest priority, is made, while the "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" icon image is displayed on the third image display device 72.This makes it possible to distinguish between the notifications even if the game ball count clear and the glass frame open error are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

(g) is the timing 37 seconds after (e). At this timing, the audio notification of the glass frame open error ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification continues. The visual notification and the illuminated notification of the cleared ball count also continue to be displayed.

As shown in Figure 121 for glass frame (inner frame) open error (f) to (g), the notification modes (f) to (g) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the initial result (123) of the effect symbol 70a and a background image, the third image display device 72 notifies the player of a glass frame open error, and the audio output device 9 notifies the player of a glass frame open error. In this way, if the audio notification of the number of game balls has ended but the player is still in the glass frame open error notification period, the audio notification of the glass frame open error can be started immediately to alert the player that the glass frame 4 has been opened, preventing the player from playing the game with the glass frame 4 open.

(h) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, let's say an employee closes the glass frame 4. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the on-screen notification of the glass frame open error ends. This prevents confusion for employees caused by the "H64 Glass Frame Open Error" icon image not disappearing even when the glass frame 4 is closed.

(j) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and the glass frame opening error occur, both events can be appropriately notified by audio notification, visual notification, and electric notification, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.
Note that between (b) and (e), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared is being made, the launching of game balls into the game area is permitted, but between (e) and (h), that is, during the period when the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared and the notification of an error in the glass frame or inner frame are being made, the launching of game balls into the game area is restricted. This prevents game balls from being shot out and flying out of the gaming machine, which could result in the game being unable to secure the game balls needed for play.

If a glass frame open error is detected between (f) and (j), an audio and visual notification of the glass frame open error will be immediately issued. However, since the illumination notification for clearing the number of game balls has already been issued, the illumination notification corresponding to the glass frame open error will not be issued.

Also, at (f), a new audio notification of a glass frame opening error is started, but the audio notification of a glass frame opening error does not have to be started. Also, while the visual notification of a glass frame opening error is set to start at (e), it may also start at (f). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end at (f), and the illuminated notification of a glass frame opening error may start.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "ball removal operation in progress."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, the game ball count clear operation and the ball removal operation are performed. (b) is the same as the case of the glass frame opening error described above.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board 120 sets the ball removal operation in progress flag and the presentation control board 130 receives the ball removal operation in progress command. As mentioned above, in the frame control board main processing, clearing the number of game balls is executed before the processing related to ball removal, so the timing chart is in the order of (b) and (c) as shown above. In (c), although the ball removal operation in progress command is received, the game ball count clear notification is being executed, and since clearing the number of game balls also has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, audio and illumination notifications related to the ball removal operation are not initiated. Meanwhile, with regard to visual notifications, the first image display device 70 begins to display "Ball removal mode in progress."

(f) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification that the ball removal mode is in progress is output, as at the start of (f), "You are in ball removal mode" (once). At the timing (i) when the ball removal mode ends, the audio notification that was in ball removal mode, "You are in ball removal mode" (once), is output.

As shown in (c) to (f) of Figure 121, during the ball removal operation, the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, displays the "combination of the initial result 123 and the effect pattern 70a" (including the background image), and displays "Ball removal mode in progress" so as to be superimposed on the "combination of the initial result 123 and the effect pattern 70a".

The "Ball removal mode in progress" message may be displayed superimposed on the back so that part of the "combination of initial result 123 and effect pattern 70a" is not visible, or it may be displayed superimposed on the back so that part of the "combination of initial result 123 and effect pattern 70a" is visible (through the back side).

(i) is the timing 60 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, as described above, the audio notification "Ball removal mode has ended" (once) during ball removal mode is output. The "Ball removal mode in progress" message also ends. (j) is the same as (j) for the glass frame open error.

As shown in (f) to (i) during the ball removal operation in Figure 121, the notification modes (f) to (i) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 displays the notification that the number of game balls has been cleared, the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result 123" (including the background image), and the message "ball removal mode in progress" superimposed on the "combination of effect symbols 70a with initial result 123." In this way, if the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared has ended but the player is still in the notification period for the ball removal operation, the audio notification for the ball removal mode can be started immediately to notify the player that the ball removal mode is in progress, allowing the ball removal mode to proceed efficiently.

As described above, even if both the game ball count has been cleared and the ball removal operation is in progress, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that, although the audio notification of the ball removal mode is started at (f), the audio notification of the ball removal mode does not have to start. Also, although the visual notification of the ball removal mode is set to start at (c), it may start at (f). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end at (f) and the illuminated notification of the ball removal mode may start.

Figure 122 shows the relationship between a glass frame (inner frame) open error and the ball removal operation in progress. The situation is assumed to be one in which the glass frame 4 or inner frame 3 is open and the power switch 164 is turned on while the ball removal operation is being performed. Note that the following explanation uses an example in which the glass frame 4 is opened and closed, but glass frame 4 can be read as inner frame 3.

(a) in Figure 122 is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, the ball removal operation is performed. (b) is the timing when the ball removal operation process of the frame control board timer interrupt process is executed. The audio notification "In ball removal mode" is output once for three seconds, and the visual notification begins to display "In ball removal mode". The display "In ball removal mode" continues until (f). Note that no illumination notification is specified during the ball removal operation (see Figure 111), so it is not executed.

In addition, the game ball count display 135 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) begins to display a "-" (bar symbol), and the frame control display 125 (the segment corresponding to the last digit) begins to display a "-" (bar symbol), and the display of this "-" (bar symbol) notifies the player that the ball removal operation is in progress.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board timer interrupt process (the first time after power-on) is executed, and (d) is the timing when the glass frame open command is set in the error control process executed within the frame control board timer interrupt process, and the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame open command.

When the performance control board 130 receives the glass frame opening command, it repeatedly outputs the audio message "The door is open," displays an icon image "H64 Glass frame opening error" on the third image display device 72 as a visual message, and flashes the frame lighting device 10 red as an electric message.

Note that the glass frame open error has a higher priority than the ball removal operation (see Figure 111), so in principle, the voice output from (b) saying "In ball removal mode" would be interrupted and the voice output saying "The door is open" would begin. However, since the voice output from (b) saying "In ball removal mode" is output once every three seconds, if it is interrupted midway through, it becomes difficult to understand what the voice notification is about. Therefore, in this example, as an exception, even if an alarm event with a higher priority than the current alarm event occurs while the voice notification is being executed, the voice notification "In ball removal mode" is output (completed) without interruption. This allows for a notification that is easy to understand for employees performing the ball removal operation.

On the other hand, in accordance with the principle of priority, it would be acceptable to interrupt the voice output of "Ball removal mode" midway and start outputting the voice "Door is open."

Also, in (d), the display on the frame control display 125 changes from "-" (bar symbol) to "H64" (the segment corresponding to the last three to last one digits). This notifies the employee performing the ball removal operation while looking at the back of the gaming machine that a glass frame opening error has occurred.

On the other hand, the ball count display 135 does not switch to "H64" (the segment corresponding to the last three digits to the last digit), but maintains the "-" (bar symbol) display. The ball count display 135 is located in a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, and on the front of the gaming machine, the first image display device 70 also displays "Ball removal mode in progress." Therefore, it is possible to notify the employee that a glass frame opening error has occurred without switching the ball count display 135 to "H64." This has the advantage of reducing the processing load on display control on the frame control board 120 (eliminating the need to switch to H64).

In addition, in (d), the display on the game ball count display 135 may be switched to "H64." This prevents, for example, confusion among employees caused by different information being displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

(e) is the timing when the glass frame 4 changes from an open state to a closed state. For example, let's say that an employee closes the glass frame 4. When the glass frame 4 is closed, the audio, visual, and electric light notifications of the glass frame open error end. Note that at the timing of (e), the bulb removal operation is still in progress.

In (e), the game ball count display 135 displays "-" (bar symbol), and the frame control display 125 switches from displaying "H64" to displaying "-" (bar symbol). This allows a notification that the ball removal operation is in progress to be made without delay after the glass frame opening error notification has ended, making it possible to provide a notification that is easy for employees to understand.

(f) is the timing 60 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the ball removal operation ends. The audio notification "Ball removal mode has ended" is output once for 5 seconds, and the visual notification "Ball removal mode in progress" no longer displays.

In addition, at (f), the game ball count display 135 stops displaying the "-" (bar symbol) and goes completely dark, and the frame control display 125 stops displaying the "-" (bar symbol) and goes completely dark. This makes it easier for a player who is performing the ball removal operation while staring at the back of the gaming machine to recognize that the frame control display 125 has gone completely dark (together with the audio notification output at (f)) and recognize that the ball removal operation has ended.

Then, when the voice output of "Ball removal mode has ended" ends, the ball removal operation ends at (g).
Although the light display is not used to notify the ball removal operation, it may be performed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. Also, while the "ball removal mode in progress" message is displayed continuously between (d) and (e), it may be hidden between (d) and (e).

In addition, the game ball count display 135 always displays a "-" (bar symbol) between (b) and (f), and the frame control display 125 always displays a "-" (bar symbol) between (b) and (d) and (e) and (f), but this is not limited to this. The "-" (bar symbol) may be displayed for a few seconds from the start of the ball removal mode, and then not displayed thereafter.

Figures 123 to 125 show the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). The explanation will use the acquisition limit device (operation) as an example of each event (abnormality). Figure 123 assumes that the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated. In other words, an RWM clear operation is required to stop the operation of the acquisition limit device, and the power is turned on along with the number of game balls clear operation. Figure 124 assumes that an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, and that it is not detected.

(a) in Figure 123 shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the game ball clear operation is performed.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) shows the start of startup of the main control board 110, at the timing when the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command sent by the main control board main processing. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the acquisition limit activation command, it is already issuing a game ball count clear notification, and since clearing the game ball count has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, audio and illumination notifications related to the activation of the acquisition limit device are not initiated. Meanwhile, with regard to the visual notification, the first image display device 70 begins to display a message such as "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM."

In the notification modes (b) to (c), as shown in the game ball count clear & acquisition limit device (b) to (c) in Figure 125, the game ball count clear notification is made by the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10, and the game ball count clear notification is made by the first image display device 70. Note that it is preferable to use a color (a different color) for the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time that does not overlap with the display color used for the game ball count clear icon image. This prevents the game ball count clear notification icon image from becoming difficult to see.

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification from the acquisition limit device begins, stating "Acquisition limit device in operation," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 125, the notification modes (c) to (d) for the game ball count clear and maximum acquisition device (c) to (d) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the game ball count clear, and the first image display device 70 notifies the game ball count clear and the maximum acquisition device activation. Specifically, the message "Maximum acquisition device activated, please clear RWM" is displayed in the center of the display area, and an icon image "H67 Number of game balls cleared" is displayed in the upper left of the display area. It is preferable that the background color of the first image display device 70 at this time be a color (different from the display color used for the icon image for the game ball clear and the display color (text color) used for the maximum acquisition device activation notification. This prevents the icon image for the game ball count clear notification and the maximum acquisition device activation notification from becoming difficult to see.

(e) is the timing 30 seconds have passed since (c). At this timing, the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification continues. Note that although the audio notification from the acquisition limit device ends after a predetermined time has passed, it may also end when the power supply is cut off.

As shown in Figure 125 for the game ball count clear & maximum acquisition limit device (d) to (e), the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the frame lighting device 10 notifies the player that the game ball count has been cleared, the audio output device 9 notifies the player that the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the game ball count has been cleared and the maximum acquisition limit device is in operation. The display modes are the same as those of (c) to (d) described above.

Thus, while the ball count clear notification has higher notification priority, the message "Earning limit device activated, please clear RWM" is displayed in a larger font size than the ball count clear icon image and in the center of the display area, making it easy for employees to notice. This makes it possible to fully recognize that the earning limit device is activated, even in situations where the ball count clear notification takes priority and the audio and illuminated notifications for the earning limit device cannot be executed, making it easier for employees to understand the operations required to stop the earning limit device from operating. Furthermore, even if the ball count clear notification and the earning limit device activation notification are executed at the same time, both notifications can be distinguished, preventing employees from failing to recognize which event is occurring.

Note that if the power switch 164 is turned ON without operating the RWM clear switch 111a while the acquisition limit device is in operation (when power is restored), the message "Acquisition limit device in operation, please clear RWM" will be displayed, but the initial operation of the movable presentation device may be performed in the same way as when power is restored while the acquisition limit device is not in operation. This simplifies the control process because the processing related to the initial operation of the movable presentation device does not need to be changed depending on whether the acquisition limit device is in operation or not.

In addition, when the earning limit device is activated and the power switch 164 is turned ON without operating the RWM clear switch 111a (when power is restored), the message "Earning limit device has been activated. Please clear the RWM" is displayed, but an audio notification regarding power restoration (output of input background music) may also be given. This simplifies the control process because the processing related to the audio notification regarding power restoration does not need to be changed depending on whether the earning limit device is activated or not.

(h) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

(a) in Figure 124 shows the timing when the power switch 164 is turned ON. If there is no RWM abnormality, (b) begins a notification that the acquisition limit device is activated. Specifically, the audio notification "Acquisition limit device activated" is repeatedly output, the visual notification displays "Acquisition limit device activated. Please clear the RWM," and the illuminated notification displays "The frame lighting device 10 flashes red." As shown in Figure 125, "Acquisition limit device activated, no RWM abnormality," the audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, and first image display device 70 notify the acquisition limit device that it is activated. In this way, if no RWM abnormality (e.g., a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned ON after the acquisition limit device is activated, a notification that the acquisition limit device is activated is issued, making it easier for the user to understand the operations required to stop the acquisition limit device.

On the other hand, if an RWM abnormality (for example, a checksum abnormality in the main RAM 110c) is detected when the power is turned on after the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be initiated in (b), but an RWM abnormality notification will be initiated. Specifically, the audio notification will repeatedly output "Please change settings + siren," the visual notification will display "Error, please change settings," and the electric notification will display "The frame lighting device 10 will flash red." Note that (c) is the timing when the power supply is cut off, and the RWM abnormality notification will continue until the power supply is cut off. In other words, the acquisition limit device activation notification will not be issued as long as the RWM abnormality notification is being executed.

For example, even if the power is turned OFF at (c) and then turned ON without any setting changes, the RWM abnormality notification will start at (b). If the power is turned OFF at (c) and then turned ON with a setting change, the RMW clear process is also executed after the setting change process (the main RAM 110c is initialized). Therefore, the initialization of the main RAM 110c also stops the operation of the acquisition limit device, and therefore the acquisition limit device operation notification will not be executed in this case either. In other words, if an RWM abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device is activated, the acquisition limit device operation notification will not be executed whether the power is then turned ON with a setting change or without a setting change. This encourages the main RAM 110c to be set to the appropriate state, but also eliminates the need for initialization to stop the acquisition limit device when the power is turned ON with a setting change, thereby improving work efficiency by not issuing an acquisition limit device operation notification.

As shown in Figure 125, when the win limit device is operating and there is an RWM abnormality, the notification will be sent by the audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, and first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 displays "Error" in red letters on a black background, with "Please change settings" displayed in white letters below. This will prompt the player to quickly change the settings and prevent them from playing while there is an RWM abnormality.

Furthermore, if priority is given to the notification of the acquisition limit device operation when there is an RWM abnormality, there is a concern that the necessary operation that employees will be prompted to perform will be the RWM clear operation, and the RWM abnormality will not be resolved. However, by prioritizing the RWM abnormality notification, this concern can be eliminated.

Figures 126 and 127 show the relationship between the number of game balls cleared and the notification modes for each event (abnormality, etc.). As examples of each event (abnormality), an abnormal number of winning balls error and an abnormal number of shot balls error are given. Figure 126 also assumes the case where an abnormal number of winning balls is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, and the case where an abnormal number of shot balls is detected when the number of game balls clear operation is performed and the power is turned on. In terms of how to read the time chart, it is "number of game balls cleared" and "abnormal number of winning balls error," and "number of game balls cleared" and "abnormal number of shot balls error."

Note that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of winning balls notified and the number of balls passing through the winning passage is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, and an abnormality in the number of balls fired is determined to be an abnormality when the difference between the number of balls fired and the total number of balls returned is equal to or greater than a specified number (100), as indicated by the frame control board severe error notification control process, so it is unlikely that this would occur shortly after power has been supplied. Therefore, Figures 126 and 127 assume a situation in which the power supply is cut off when an abnormality in the number of winning balls or the number of balls fired has occurred, and the power is turned on without these abnormalities being resolved.

First, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal error in the number of winning balls."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared.

(b) shows the timing when the frame control board 120 clears the number of game balls and the performance control board 130 receives a command to start clearing the number of game balls. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 130 outputs an audio notification saying "The number of game balls has been cleared," displays "H67 Number of game balls cleared" on the screen, and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red on the display.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected, and the presentation control board 130 receives a command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the command to designate an abnormality in the number of winning balls, it is already executing a game ball count clear notification, and since clearing the game ball count has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, audio and electric notifications related to the abnormality in the number of winning balls are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for the visual notification, the third image display device 72 begins to display "H68 Abnormality in the number of winning balls."

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the electric light notification continue. Also, when the audio notification of the number of game balls cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal winning ball count error, "Please call an attendant + siren," begins, and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 127 for abnormal winning ball count errors (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H68 abnormal winning ball count."

(e) is the timing when the player operates the counting button 20 to count the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, or when the launch handle 15 is gripped and a game ball is shot out. When either of these operations is performed, the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends 30 seconds after the operation. This allows the notification to end without delay after the player takes their seat, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and avoiding the game if the visual and illuminated notification that the number of game balls has been cleared continues for an extended period of time.

As shown in Figure 127, the notification modes (d) to (e) for abnormal winning ball count errors are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player of an abnormal winning ball count error, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player of the cleared number of game balls and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H68 abnormal winning ball count" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the cleared number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of winning balls is detected when the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, a notification of the game ball count clear, which has the highest priority, is made, while the third image display device 72 displays the icon image "H68 Abnormal number of winning balls." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if the game ball count clear and the abnormal number of winning balls error are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an abnormal number of winning balls error occur, both events can be appropriately notified through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal winning ball count error is initiated, but the audio notification of an abnormal winning ball count error does not have to be initiated. Also, while the visual notification of an abnormal winning ball count error is set to start from (c), it may also start from (d). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d), and the illuminated notification of an abnormal winning ball count error may start.

Next, we will explain "clearing the number of game balls" and "abnormal number of shot balls error."
(a) is the timing when the power switch 164 is turned on. At this time, if the number of game balls is to be cleared, the number of game balls is cleared. (b) is the same as (b) of the winning ball count abnormality error.

(c) is the timing when the frame control board error control process is executed, an abnormal number of balls fired is detected, and the presentation control board 130 receives a command to specify an abnormal number of balls fired. Although the presentation control board 130 receives the command to specify an abnormal number of balls fired, it is already issuing a notification to clear the number of game balls, and since clearing the number of game balls has a higher priority as shown in Figure 110, audio and visual notifications related to the abnormal number of balls fired error are not initiated. Meanwhile, as for visual notifications, the third image display device 72 begins to display "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired."

(d) is the timing 5 seconds have passed since (b). At this timing, the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends. Meanwhile, the visual notification and the illuminated notification continue. Also, when the audio notification that the number of game balls has been cleared ends, a new audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired begins, "Please call an attendant + siren," and this is output repeatedly.

As shown in Figure 127 for abnormal number of balls fired errors (c) to (d), the notification modes (c) to (d) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and frame lighting device 10 notify the player that the number of game balls has been cleared, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player that the number of game balls has been cleared and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 performance pattern 70a" (including the background image). Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays an icon image for "H69 abnormal number of balls fired."

(e) is the same as (e) of the abnormal winning ball number error.
As shown in Figure 127, the notification modes (d) to (e) are as follows: the audio output device 9 and the frame lighting device 10 notify the player of an abnormal number of balls fired error, and the first image display device 70 notifies the player of the clear number of game balls and displays the "combination of the initial result 123 effect symbols 70a" (including the background image). The third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal Number of Balls Fired" (see Figure 112 for the display position). The design (color, etc.) of this icon image is the same as the icon image for the clear number of game balls described above.

In this way, if an abnormality in the number of balls fired is detected after the game ball count clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, a notification of the higher-priority clearing of the number of game balls is made, while the third image display device 72 displays an icon image of "H69 Abnormal number of balls fired." This makes it possible to distinguish between notifications even if the game ball count clear and the abnormal number of balls fired error are performed at the same time, preventing the player from failing to recognize which event has occurred.

As described above, even if both the number of game balls cleared and an abnormal number of balls fired error occur, both events can be appropriately reported through audio, visual, and illuminated alerts, which also leads to improved work efficiency for employees.

Note that in (d), a new audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is initiated, but the audio notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error does not have to be initiated. Also, while the visual notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error is set to start from (c), it may also start from (d). Also, the illuminated notification of the cleared number of game balls may end in (d), and the illuminated notification of an abnormal number of balls fired error may start.

Figure 128 shows the information output and notification modes for various events. Note that as examples of each event (abnormality), we will explain the number of game balls exceeding the limit and the activation of the winning limit device.

(a) is the timing (during a jackpot) when, as a result of the player's play, the gaming value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 reaches "40,000." Note that, although it is stated here that, as a result of the player's play, the gaming value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 reaches "40,000," since this is the gaming value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135, this "40,000" may also include the gaming value obtained by loaning gaming balls.

In (a), one byte of information indicating an overload of game balls is sent from the frame control board 120 to the U board 171 as a gaming machine error, and is ultimately sent to the gaming machine information center. The frame control display 125 also displays the error code "H23," indicating an overload of game balls. This makes it possible to confirm from the back of the gaming machine that the overload of game balls has occurred. The error code display will turn off after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In (a), as an example, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 during a jackpot reaches "40,000 balls," so the audio output device 9 outputs win background music, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot effect, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 emit light during a win. Even if the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" during a jackpot, these effect devices do not notify the player that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit. In other words, from the player's perspective, the player cannot recognize that the number of game balls has exceeded the limit, allowing the player to enjoy the jackpot. Meanwhile, as described above, one byte of information indicating an error state (excessive game balls) is transmitted, allowing the administrator (game parlor, gaming machine information center) to obtain the necessary information.

In addition, the exceeding of the number of game balls may be notified using at least one of the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the third image display device 72, the fourth image display device 73, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 76. Also, as an example, an example is given in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" during a jackpot, but this is not limited to this. Winning may occur when a variable display is being displayed in each of the low-probability non-time-saving game states, low-probability time-saving game states, and high-probability time-saving game states, or when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed.

Furthermore, while it has been stated that the "40,000" may include gaming value obtained through the lending of gaming balls, in the extreme case, even if all of the "40,000" are gaming value obtained through lending, it may still be considered an excess of gaming balls.

(b) is the timing when the maximum increase reaches "95,000" (during a jackpot). Note that this "95,000" does not include the gaming value obtained through the loan of gaming balls. When the maximum increase reaches "95,000," the winning limit device is activated. Note that the timing of activation of the winning limit device for each situation when "95,000" is reached (during a jackpot, during a variable display, during a customer waiting demo) is as described above (see the explanation of step S28 in the main control board main processing).

When the win limit device is activated, the audio notification is "Win limit device activated" which is output repeatedly (for 10 seconds) from the audio output device 9, the visual notification is "Win limit device activated, play ends for today" which is displayed on the first image display device 70 (this remains displayed until the power is turned off), and the electric notification is displayed by the frame lighting device 10 flashing white (it flashes white until the power is turned off). On the other hand, the frame control display 125 does not issue a notification corresponding to the activation of the win limit device and remains invisible.

To go into more detail about the display mode of the first image display device 70, the message "Earning limit device activated. Play has ended for today" is displayed at the top of the display area, and below that, a message such as "Please press the count button to count" is displayed, encouraging the player to operate the count button 20. This allows the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 to be recorded on the inserted member card or visitor card, reducing the chances of the player losing money by stopping play without operating the count button 20.

In addition, below the message "Press the count button to count," two cautionary images are displayed: "Watch out for getting addicted!" and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!". "Watch out for getting addicted!" is a message encouraging players to avoid excessive playing, while "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" is a message encouraging players to avoid forgetting to remove their inserted membership card or visitor card. The display of a cautionary image such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" can calm players down if they are getting excited after winning a lot of gaming value. Furthermore, the display of a cautionary image such as "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" can reduce the number of situations in which players forget to take their cards and end up losing money. This helps prevent a decline in interest in playing.

The message "Please press the count button to count" may remain displayed until the count button 20 is operated (it will disappear once the count button 20 is operated). This makes it easier to notice that the count button 20 has not been operated.
Furthermore, if the counting button 20 is operated and then becomes inactive, and there are still game balls to be counted, a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed again. This makes it easier for the player to notice that there are still game balls to be counted.
In addition, the message "Please press the count button to count" may be continued until all counting is completed (the message may not be hidden even if the count button 20 is operated).

The background color of the first image display device 70 may be black, for example, with the various text images displayed in white, or the background color may be white with the various text images displayed in black (the background and text colors being different colors). However, when the acquisition limit device is activated, the audio notification ends after 10 seconds, the visual notification is displayed in a relatively small size, and the electric notification is displayed by the frame lighting device 10 only flashing white, so it is preferable to use a combination of white and black for the background and text colors as well. Such an announcement with a limited amount of effect can prevent players who are likely to have acquired a lot of game value from standing out too much. It can also prevent the player's motivation to play from being stimulated more than necessary.

The various text images may all be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at different times. For example, first, "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today" and "Please press the count button to count" may be displayed, followed by "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". By displaying them in this order, each piece of information is more easily seen by the player, making it more effective.

Also, first, the message "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today" and "Please press the count button to count" may be displayed, and when the count button 20 is operated, "Please press the count button to count" is hidden and "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" are displayed. This allows the display to be tailored to the player's operations, making each piece of information more easily visible to the player, making it more effective.

In addition, in (a), a message such as "Please press the counting button to count" may be displayed, or a warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a warning image such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" may be displayed.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the display of messages such as "Press the count button to count" in (b), caution images such as "Be careful not to get addicted!", and caution images such as "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". For example, it is possible that a player may change places just before reaching (b). In such a case, the display of caution images, etc. may be annoying to a player who started playing just before reaching (b). Therefore, it is possible to provide a detection means for detecting a change in player, etc., and prevent the display of caution images, etc., when a change in player is detected.

Although not shown in the figure, when the win limit device is activated, a message such as "Do not turn off the power" is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) after the notification begins (e.g., from timing (b) in Figure 128). After the predetermined time has elapsed, the message "Do not turn off the power" is stopped and a message such as "Please turn off the power" is displayed. This allows players and employees to be notified that the win limit device has been activated before the predetermined time has elapsed, allowing them to perform necessary operations such as counting. On the other hand, after the predetermined time has elapsed, employees can be prompted to turn off the gaming machine 1, allowing for appropriate notification according to the situation. Note that the predetermined time is the expected time it will take for a player to finish counting and leave their seat. Furthermore, the message "Do not turn off the power" or "Please turn off the power" may be accompanied by audio. In this case, the audio may be output repeatedly.

Figure 129 is a diagram showing the information output and notification modes for various events. As with Figure 128, an example of each event (abnormality) will be explained using the number of game balls exceeding the limit and activation of the acquisition limit device. Figure 129 is a diagram illustrating an exceptional case in which the number of game balls exceeding the limit and the acquisition limit device activation occur at the same time.

In (a), gaming machine 1 is available for play (a so-called "empty machine"), and the maximum number of increments for that gaming machine 1 is "55,000." Then, in (b), a player sits down to play gaming machine 1. Furthermore, let's say that the player immediately wins a jackpot.

Then, at (c), successive jackpots occur due to the high-probability time-saving game state (probability change), and at (d), the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 becomes "40,000 balls" (the player has won 40,000 balls). In this case, the number of game balls is exceeded, and since the maximum increase also reaches "95,000," the acquisition limit device is activated. Therefore, one byte of information indicating an excess number of game balls as a game machine error state is sent from the frame control board 120 of the gaming machine 1 to the U board 171, and one byte of information indicating that Bit 6 of the fraud detection state 1 is "1" is sent. This is then finally sent to the gaming machine information center.

It is acceptable to send either the one-byte information indicating an excessive number of game balls as a gaming machine error state, or the one-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1", first; however, it is rare for the excessive number of game balls and the activation of the acquisition limit device to occur at the same time. Basically, the flow is that the excessive number of game balls occurs, and then the activation of the acquisition limit device occurs depending on the subsequent situation. Therefore, it is preferable to follow the flow and send the one-byte information indicating the excessive number of game balls as a gaming machine error state first, and then send the one-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1". This prevents confusion, for example, at a gaming machine information center, caused by first receiving the one-byte information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1".

Note that Figure 129 uses numbers such as "55,000," "40,000," and "95,000" for ease of explanation, but in actual play, due to differences in the number of prize balls at each winning slot, it is possible that the numbers may be slightly exceeded, causing the number of game balls to exceed the limit and the winning limit device to activate at the same time. Therefore, some error (an error slightly exceeding the numbers) is included in the example in Figure 129.

Figure 130 shows the effects that occur when various events occur, and Figure 131 shows the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the look-ahead effects. As with Figures 128 and 129, we will use exceeding the number of game balls and the activation of the winning limit device as examples of each event (abnormality), and will particularly explain the relationship with the look-ahead effects. Explanations of parts that are common to Figures 128 and 129 will be omitted.

First, as described above, the gaming machine 1 is assumed to have two situations: a situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds the limit" and a situation immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated. The situation immediately before the "number of game balls exceeds the limit" corresponds to a state in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "39,000," and the situation immediately before the "acquisition limit device" is activated corresponds to a state in which the maximum increase reaches "94,000."

More specifically, if the number of game balls is "exceeding," the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 may be "39,000" and a second jackpot game (10 rounds) may be executed; in other words, the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 may reach "40,000" as a result of the second jackpot game being executed; or the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 may be "39,990" and a high-probability time-limited game state (low-probability time-limited game state or low-probability non-time-limited game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot may be initiated (during the variable display or customer waiting demo performance).

Similarly, in the case of a "winning limit device," cases such as when the maximum increase is "94,000" and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) is played, i.e., when the second jackpot game is played and the maximum increase reaches "95,000," or when the maximum increase is "94,990" and a high-probability time-limited game state (low-probability time-limited game state, low-probability non-time-limited game state) in which game balls are more likely to enter each winning slot is initiated (during variable display, customer waiting demo performance), etc. are anticipated. Note that the following explanation will use as an example a jackpot, when it is expected that the maximum increase is most likely to reach the above value.

(a) shows a jackpot win during a high-probability time-saving game state, during which a right-hit image is displayed encouraging the player to fire a game ball toward the right-hand game area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" due to a prize being awarded to the large prize slot 50 or the like during the jackpot. In other words, this is a situation in which the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" due to the execution of a second jackpot game. Although not specifically shown, it is assumed that a random number value for determining a jackpot, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. The high-probability time-saving game state may be interpreted as a low-probability time-saving game state. Furthermore, the high-probability time-saving game state may be interpreted as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreted as a low-probability, non-time-saving game state), the random number value for determining a jackpot, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

If the number of game balls exceeds the limit, it is possible to execute a reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot. That is, since a random number value for determining a jackpot that is determined to be a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, a lottery is held with a predetermined probability to determine whether to execute the reserved consecutive win effect, and if it is determined that it can be executed, the reserved consecutive win effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in (b), by operating the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) in front of the first image display device 70, a variable display corresponding to the reserved memory executed after the jackpot game ends indicates that a jackpot has occurred prior to the execution of the variable display. Then, in (c), the jackpot game ends, and a variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed to indicate that a jackpot has occurred.

This means that there is no need to restrict the execution of predictive effects just because the number of game balls is about to exceed the limit, and the excitement of the game can be maintained without restricting the freedom of the effects.

Note that while the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been explained as an example, the execution of pre-reading effects when there is no jackpot game may also be permitted. For example, when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 is "39,990", an icon change effect may be executed, or a continuous preview effect or a lamp change effect may be executed. On the other hand, the execution of pre-reading effects may be restricted in a situation just before the "game ball count exceeds the limit".

(d) is the timing when a jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving game state, the maximum increase value is "94,000," and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, the execution of the second jackpot game causes the maximum increase value to reach "95,000." Although not specifically shown, it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. Note that the high-probability time-saving game state may also be interpreted as a low-probability time-saving game state. Also, the high-probability time-saving game state may also be interpreted as a low-probability non-time-saving game state. In this case (when interpreted as a low-probability non-time-saving game state), it is assumed that a random number value for jackpot determination, which is determined to be a jackpot, is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c.

When the "win limit device is activated," the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot is restricted. In other words, although a random number value for jackpot determination that determines a jackpot is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserved memory area of the main RAM 110c, no lottery is held to execute the reserved consecutive win effect, and naturally, the reserved consecutive win effect is not executed either. Specifically, as shown between (d) and (e), the jackpot game ends without the movable effect device 77 (first movable member 77a and second movable member 77b) operating. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the win limit device is activated at (f), and the notification described in Figure 128 is executed. Furthermore, game progress control (specific control processing) is not performed, and the game cannot be continued any further.

(f) If the reserved consecutive win effect is executed in a situation where it is impossible to play after that, simply because the random number value for determining a jackpot is stored in the reserved memory, the player will be disappointed that they are unable to play despite having won the jackpot. To address this issue, the reserved consecutive win effect can be restricted from being executed if the situation is immediately before the activation of the "winning limit device," preventing the player from feeling disappointed.

Note that while the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot has been explained as an example, the execution of pre-reading effects when there is no jackpot game may also be restricted. For example, when the maximum increase number value is "94990", the icon change effect may be restricted, or the consecutive preview effect and lamp change effect may be restricted. On the other hand, the execution of pre-reading effects may also be permitted in situations just before the "acquisition limit device is activated". This eliminates the need to determine whether the situation is just before the "acquisition limit device is activated", which is expected to reduce the control load.

The "restrictions" in the above-mentioned restriction on the execution of the reserved consecutive win effect during a jackpot include the following:
For example, the execution of the reserved consecutive performance during the jackpot is not performed at all (not executed),
For example, it may be difficult to execute the reserved consecutive performance during the jackpot (it may be executed with a low probability),
For example, if there are multiple types of reserved consecutive win effects during a jackpot, reserved consecutive win effect A will not be executed, but reserved consecutive win effect B can be executed.
For example, when realizing the effect of consecutive reserved wins during a jackpot by operating the movable effect device 77 and changing the reserved icon, the movable effect device 77 may not be operated, but the reserved icon may be allowed to change.

Similarly, the "restrictions" in the restriction on the execution of predictive effects when the game is not a jackpot include the following:
For example, if the icon changes,
For example, icon change effects may not be performed at all (not executed),
For example, it may be difficult to execute icon change effects (they may be executed with a low probability),
For example, certain icons (red icon, rainbow icon) in the icon change effect may not be displayed (changed), but predetermined icons (blue icon, green icon) may be displayed (changed).
The same applies to restrictions on consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects. Note that in predictive effects (e.g., icon change effects, consecutive preview effects, lamp change effects), for example, "restrictions" may mean that the icon change effects are not performed (executed) at all, but the consecutive preview effects and lamp change effects can be executed.

Figure 131 is a time chart showing the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the predictive effects, and in particular, explains the relationship between the value of the increment counter and the effect custom setting (icon change super hot). Note that in the figure, the effect custom setting is always "enabled," indicating that the icon change super hot has been set to "ON" or "OFF" by the player. Also, the game state is assumed to be a high-probability time-saving game state. Note that the interpretation of the restrictions is the same as that described in Figure 130.

(a) shows a situation where the value of the increment counter is less than "93000." This indicates that a predictive effect can be executed. It also indicates that the player has turned "Icon Change Super Hot" on in the effect custom settings.

(b) shows that a game ball has entered the second start hole 47 (start entry), and the preliminary determination process (e.g., second preliminary determination process) has determined that it is a jackpot. At this time, a red icon (shown by a black circle in the figure) is displayed in the area corresponding to hold 2 in the second hold icon display area 70D (the second area from the left in the second hold icon display area 70D). In other words, because the preliminary determination process based on the start entry has determined that it is a jackpot, and the icon change super hot is set to "ON," the red icon (shown by a black circle in the figure) is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the start entry is likely to be a jackpot.

After that, the high-probability time-saving game state continues, and the value of the increment counter reaches "93000" at timing (c). This indicates that it is a period during which pre-reading effects cannot be executed. At this timing, "Icon Change Super Hot" remains "ON". This also indicates that "Icon Change Super Hot" is turned OFF at timing (d) and then turned "Icon Change Super Hot" back to "ON" at timing (e). Even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000" and it becomes a period during which pre-reading effects cannot be executed, it is still possible to set "ON" or "OFF" in the effect custom settings.

Then, "Icon Change Super Hot" remains "ON" until timing (f), at which point (f) indicates that a game ball has entered the second start hole 47 (start entry), and a jackpot has been determined in the preliminary determination process (e.g., the second preliminary determination process). At this time, a normal icon (shown by a white circle in the figure) is displayed in the area corresponding to hold 2 in the second hold icon display area 70D (the second area from the left in the second hold icon display area 70D). As explained in the pre-reading effect processing, if a pre-reading effect is not executable during a period in which it is not possible to execute a pre-reading effect, the normal icon is uniformly determined and displayed at (f). In other words, when the value of the increment counter reaches "93000," there is a restriction on the display of icons other than the normal icon (e.g., a red icon).

When the icon change super heat is turned "ON" and, for example, a red icon (high probability of a jackpot) is displayed, anticipation of a jackpot rises dramatically. However, if the win limit device is activated before the variable effect corresponding to the red icon is executed, the player may feel as if they have lost an entire jackpot, which could result in a decrease in interest in the game. In response to this, by restricting the display of icons other than normal icons (for example, red icons) when the value of the increment counter reaches "93000," it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the emotions described above and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000," the custom effect settings are still set to "enabled." This prevents players from feeling that their freedom in effect settings has been limited, and prevents a decline in their interest in the game.

In addition, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93,000," it is now possible to turn "On" the "Icon Change Hot" effect. However, the effects corresponding to this "On" (the display of icons other than the normal icon due to the icon change effect) are limited. This prevents players from feeling that their freedom in the effects has been limited, and prevents a decline in their interest in the game. Furthermore, there is no need to change the processing in the effect customization settings depending on the value of the increment counter, which simplifies the control flow and reduces the burden of control processing.

Note that even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000," the custom effect setting is "enabled (ON)" and the effects corresponding to this "ON" setting (displaying icons other than the normal icon due to the icon change effect) are restricted. However, the restricted effects are those that predict the future (for example, hot icon change), and the aforementioned "golden hot mode" and "air blowing effect" may be allowed to be reflected in accordance with the "ON" setting. In other words, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "93000," for example, an SU preview (gold) or an air blowing effect may occur. This prevents situations where the custom effect setting is "ON" but is not uniformly reflected (though some effects may be reflected), maintaining the excitement of playing without narrowing the range of effects available.

Figure 132 is a time chart showing how the value of the increment counter is reported. It is assumed that the gaming machine is vacant (no one is playing) when the value of the increment counter is "89900." The gaming state at this time is a low-probability, non-time-saving gaming state. It is also assumed that a new player begins playing at timing (a).

When a new player begins playing at timing (a), the game will be played in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, and the value of the increment counter will decrease from "89,900." Then, at timing (b) when the increment counter has decreased to "89,000," it is assumed that a jackpot has been won. At this time, the first image display device 70 will announce that a jackpot has been won, but the value of the increment counter will not be announced on the third image display device 72.

Assuming that as a jackpot is played and the number of winning balls increases, the value of the increment counter increases from "89,000" until it reaches "90,000" at timing (c). At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90,000/95,000" on the third image display device 72. A pre-announcement such as "5,000 remaining until the maximum winning limit device is activated" is also displayed. The displayed increment counter value and pre-announcement are subsequently updated according to the value of the increment counter. For example, if the game subsequently transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state and a jackpot is won, "90,000" is added to "90,000/95,000" (e.g., "91,500/95,000"), and "5,000 remaining until the maximum winning limit device is activated" is updated by subtracting "5,000" (e.g., "3,500 remaining until the maximum winning limit device is activated").

Timing (d) indicates the fifth consecutive jackpot (if (b) is the first jackpot, then this is the fifth jackpot) that occurred in the high-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot at timing (b) ended, after which the game transitioned to a high-probability time-saving game state. At timing (d), the value of the increment counter is "94200." The jackpot won at timing (d) is the second jackpot (10 rounds).

Timing (e) is the timing when, as a result of a game ball entering the jackpot slot 50 during a jackpot game, the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" in the sixth round of the jackpot game. At this time, the value of the increment counter displayed on the third image display device 72 becomes "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), and the advance notification is hidden. Once the value of the increment counter becomes "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), it will no longer be updated even if a win or other event occurs, and will maintain the display of "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner). As an example, "MAX" is displayed decorated in rainbow colors.

When the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the value of the increment counter is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner). This is because, even if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the jackpot game can be played to the end. In other words, if the jackpot game is in progress when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the jackpot game can be played to the end. However, doing so would mean that the display of the value of the increment counter (the numerator value) would also be updated and displayed until the jackpot game ends. In such a case, even though the standard (95000) for activating the winning limit device is set, this would appear ambiguous. For this reason, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the value of the increment counter is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), and no further updates would be displayed. In other words, even during a jackpot game, if the win limit device is activated immediately when the increment counter value reaches 95,000, such considerations are no longer necessary.

Meanwhile, the first image display device 70 displays information necessary for continuing play, such as "Right Hit," "6R" indicating that the current round is the sixth round of the jackpot, a "Game Media Acquisition Display (e.g., 800/1500)" indicating the number of game media acquired in one jackpot game, and a "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display (e.g., 6800)" indicating the cumulative number of game media acquired in consecutive jackpot games (the fifth in this example). The "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" can also be updated in real time in response to winning (however, unlike the display of the increment counter value, they are not subtracted). For example, if one win occurs in the jackpot slot 50, "15" is added to these displays. Furthermore, these displays can be updated if there are further wins even after the increment counter value reaches "95000." In other words, once the displayed increment counter value reaches "95,000," it will not be updated even if a win or other event occurs, but the "game media acquisition display" and "cumulative game media acquisition display" will be updated if a win or other event occurs even after the increment counter value reaches "95,000."

The above configuration provides the following effects.
First, once the displayed value of the increment counter reaches "95,000," it will not be updated even if a win or other event occurs, but the "game media acquisition display" and "cumulative game media acquisition display" will be updated even after the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" if a win or other event occurs. Therefore, by viewing the "game media acquisition display" and "cumulative game media acquisition display," the player can continue to check the status of game media acquisition, which gives the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the value of the increment counter is displayed as "MAX/95000" (displayed in a specific manner), and thereafter, even if a win or other event occurs, the display is not updated.This prevents the standard (95000) for activating the win limit device from appearing ambiguous, such as when one player's win ends and the win limit device is activated with a display of "96000/95000," while another player's win ends and the win limit device is activated with a display of "95100/95000."

In addition, by displaying the value of the increment counter in a specific format, such as "MAX/95000," it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and increase their interest in the game.

When displaying the value of the increment counter as "MAX/95000," it is possible to first display "95000/95000" and then "MAX/95000," or to update the display to "94999/95000" and then display "MAX/95000" without displaying "95000/95000." In the former case, it is easier to recognize that the "MAX" display has been reached because "95000" has been reached, and in the latter case, the "MAX" display can be quickly notified to the player.

Also, instead of displaying "MAX/95000", it may simply be displayed as "95000/95000". This makes it easier to recognize the standard (95000) at which the earning limit device activates.

In addition, the "Game Media Acquisition Display" and "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" are updated if a win occurs even after the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000," but these may also be displayed as "MAX" once the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000." Alternatively, one may be displayed as "MAX" while the other continues to be updated. However, when the "Game Media Acquisition Display" or "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display" is displayed as "MAX," the condition is that a certain number or more has been acquired. For example, if gaming machine 1 is available for play at timing (d) (assuming it is in a low-probability, non-time-saving gaming state), and a jackpot is won at timing (e), and during the jackpot, the game media acquisition display shows "MAX/1500" or the cumulative game media acquisition display shows "MAX," this could be exaggerated and potentially upsetting to a player who has not yet acquired many game balls. Therefore, for example, if the cumulative game media acquisition display shows 10,000 or more balls, the "game media acquisition display" or "cumulative game media acquisition display" could be displayed as "MAX," but if the cumulative game media acquisition display shows less than 10,000 balls, the "game media acquisition display" or "cumulative game media acquisition display" could not be displayed as "MAX." This avoids exaggerated displays and prevents players from being upset.

Note that the "increase counter value display," "gaming media acquisition display," and "cumulative gaming media acquisition display" correspond to the display of "predetermined gaming information related to the gaming value acquired by the player."

Returning to the explanation of Figure 132, when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" at timing (e), a pre-notification message is displayed on the first image display device 70 informing the player that the win limit device will be activated after the jackpot ends. Specifically, a message such as "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After you win, the win limit device will be activated and your game will end" is displayed. The message is displayed in a rectangular box displayed in front of the background image, and the rectangular box is light black (a color that makes the background image slightly visible). The entire text of the message is white with the periphery (edge) of the text red, making the message easily noticeable to the player.

Once the advance notice message starts to be displayed, it may continue to be displayed, or it may be displayed intermittently. Alternatively, it may be hidden after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the message started to be displayed, and not be displayed again. Note that if the increment counter reaches 95,000 during a jackpot, there may be a grace period before the win limit device activates after the jackpot ends, depending on the timing (e.g., if the increment counter reaches 95,000 in the first round). In such cases, continuing to display the advance notice message could be irritating to the player. Therefore, during a jackpot, it is desirable to display the message intermittently, or to hide the message after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the message started to be displayed, and not be displayed again.

As mentioned above, the rectangular box makes the background image difficult to see during a jackpot game (although it is not completely invisible), but it is displayed so that it does not overlap with the "Right Hit," "6R," "Game Media Acquisition Display," or "Cumulative Game Media Acquisition Display," so these images remain easily visible. This prevents the player from being unable to see that they are still in a state where they should hit the right, that they are currently in the sixth round of a jackpot game, or the status of game media acquisition, which could have an impact on their game.

In addition, by displaying the advance notice message, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that the win limit device will be activated, preventing the device from being activated unexpectedly and disappointing the player. Furthermore, by including a message such as "You are in the jackpot. Please continue playing," the advance notice message can prevent the player from stopping the shooting of game balls just because the advance notice message has been displayed, thereby putting them at a disadvantage by preventing them from winning prize balls.

Timing (f) indicates the seventh round of the jackpot game. The first image display device 70 continues to display the advance notification message, and displays such things as "Right Hit," "6R," "Game Media Acquisition Display," and "Total Game Media Acquisition Display" so as not to overlap the advance notification message (including the rectangular box). The third image display device 72 also continues to display the value of the increment counter, "MAX/95000." If the 10th round (final round) is completed with this display, the jackpot game will end and the acquisition limit device will then be activated.

Although the advance notification message is displayed from the start of its display until the end of the final round, it may be ended after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) (without being displayed again), or it may be displayed and hidden repeatedly at predetermined time intervals, or after being displayed for a predetermined time on the first image display device 70, the notification image on the first image display device 70 may be hidden and continued to be displayed on the third image display device 72, etc., or it may be hidden by the player operating the effect button 17, etc.
Alternatively, a rectangular box may be displayed superimposed over the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Although the rectangular box is colored to make the background image less visible, it may be colored to make the background image completely invisible.

Figure 133 shows the effects that occur when various events occur, and in particular explains the effects that occur when the number of game balls exceeds the limit during a jackpot, and when the maximum winning limit device is activated during a jackpot.

(a) shows a jackpot being won in a high-probability time-saving game state, and during the jackpot, a "Right Hit" message is displayed encouraging the player to fire the game ball toward the right-hand game area. This is the timing when the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 reaches "40,000 balls" due to a win in the jackpot entry slot 50 or the like during the jackpot. During the jackpot, a character introduction effect (normal effect) that is displayed during the execution of an SP reach or SPSP reach is executed, and the jackpot game ends at (b). Note that the normal effect can also be executed in jackpot games other than those in which the "number of game balls exceeded" or the "winning limit device activated" occurs; for example, it is an effect that can be executed in the first jackpot won after the opening of the gaming parlor.

When the jackpot game ends in (b), a jackpot ending effect is executed. The jackpot ending effect continues to display the "Right Hit" display, a text image of "Jackpot End" indicating that the jackpot game has ended, and warning images such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!". In this way, these warning images are displayed when the jackpot game ends. However, if consecutive jackpots occur (for example, if the game transitions to a special mode and consecutive jackpot games occur), the display of these warning images may be omitted in the jackpot endings for the second and subsequent jackpots. This prevents excessive playing and encouraging players to avoid forgetting to remove their membership cards or visitor cards, while also preventing excessive playing and causing discomfort to the player.

(c) is the timing when a jackpot is won during high-probability time-saving game mode, the increment counter value is "94,000," and the second jackpot game (10 rounds) begins. In other words, the increment counter value reaches "95,000" when the second jackpot game is played. Then, in (d), the increment counter value reaches "95,000."

In (d), the above-mentioned advance notification message is displayed, such as "You have won the jackpot. Please continue playing. After you win, the winning limit device will be activated and your play will end."

After timing (d), a warning image may be displayed stating, "The earning limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to remove your card." This warning image may, for example, continue to be displayed until just before timing (h), or it may be displayed intermittently until just before timing (h), or it may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) and then hidden. Additionally, an audio notification may be given stating, "The earning limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to remove your card," or it may be configured to be an audio notification only.

Then, when the jackpot game ends at (e), a completion effect is executed. In other words, only when the winning limit device is activated will a completion effect be executed, which notifies the player that no more gameplay is possible and congratulates the player who is likely to have acquired a lot of game value. The completion effect may, for example, display special images that differ from the normal effects described above, or an image that grants a special title (for example, "Master"), and may also display a text image below the display area saying something like "Game will end soon."

By executing the completion effect in this way, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player who activated the winning limit device. In addition, by displaying a text image such as "Game will end soon," it is possible to prepare the player mentally compared to when notification (g) is suddenly executed after the end of a jackpot, and even if notification (g) is executed afterwards, it is possible to smoothly lead to the end of the game.

Furthermore, when the completion effect ends (timing (g)), "Completion effect FIN" is displayed to indicate that the completion effect has ended, and a prompt image such as "Please press the count button to count" is displayed at the bottom of the display area, encouraging the player to operate the count button 20 to transfer the game value displayed on the game ball count display 135 to the dedicated unit 170. This allows counting to begin gradually from the stage before it becomes impossible to continue playing at (h), which will be described later, and allows the counting to be completed more smoothly than if counting were to begin after reaching (h), resulting in a smooth end to the game.

Note that while the promotion image is displayed from timing (g), this is not limited to this. For example, the display may begin from timing (d) when the increment counter reaches "95,000," or from the start of a jackpot game (timing (c)), when there is a high probability that the increment counter will reach "95,000." Note that the promotion image will not be displayed before this.

Then, at (h), the maximum win limit device is activated, and the notification described in Figure 128 is executed. Furthermore, no progress control (specific control processing) of the game is performed, and the game cannot be continued any further. The execution period of the completion effect, which takes place from (e) to (g), is expected to be, for example, three minutes. Furthermore, when the completion effect ends at (g), the maximum win limit device is immediately activated, and the game is promptly ended.

If the "acquisition limit device activates" during a jackpot, the jackpot ending effect described at timing (b) is not executed at times (e) to (g). In other words, in cases where the "acquisition limit device" does not activate during a jackpot, such as timing (b), the jackpot ending effect is executed when the jackpot ends, displaying warning images such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" On the other hand, if the "acquisition limit device activates" during a jackpot, the activation notification of the acquisition limit device at timing (h) displays warning images such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" and "Watch out for forgetting to take your card!" Therefore, even if the jackpot ending effect is omitted at timing (e), it is possible to prevent excessive playing and encouraging players to avoid forgetting to take their membership card or visitor card, while preventing excessive playing and causing discomfort to the player.

It is also possible to execute a jackpot ending effect at timing (e), and display a warning image such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" and a warning image such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" during the jackpot ending effect. This increases the likelihood that the warning images will come into the player's field of vision, more effectively preventing excessive playing and forgetting to take the member card or visitor card.

Also, for example, if a new player starts playing immediately before timing (c) (if this is the player's first win), the jackpot ending effect may be executed at timing (e); otherwise (if a certain number of consecutive jackpots have occurred and timing (c) has been reached), the jackpot ending effect may not be executed at timing (e). This allows for the execution of an appropriate caution notification according to the game situation.

In addition, while the completion effect is executed within a set execution period after the end of the jackpot game, it may also be executed from the timing when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000". Also, in the case of the above-mentioned Type 1/Type 2 type, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" due to winning in a specific area during the small jackpot game (first round), the completion effect may be executed from the start of the jackpot game (second round onwards) that is executed thereafter. However, regardless of the specifications, considering that the execution period of the effect is not determined depending on the winning status of the large prize slot 50 during the jackpot game, it is preferable to execute the effect within a set execution period after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in (a), a normal presentation is performed, but a special jackpot presentation corresponding to "excessive game balls" may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the game value of "40,000 balls" does not include the game value obtained by lending game balls. In other words, since the purpose is to congratulate the player for having worked hard to obtain game value, it is preferable to exclude the game value obtained by lending game balls even when a special jackpot presentation is performed.

Furthermore, multiple types of completion effects may be provided, and one of these may be selected and executed. Furthermore, in gaming machines with multiple setting values, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of completion effect being executed. Since gameplay cannot be continued after the completion effect is executed, suggesting a setting value does not provide useful information, but it can be said that there is value in doing so because it allows players to know at what setting value the win limit device was activated.

Furthermore, as with the caution image described above, if a change of player is detected just before the win limit device is activated, the completion effect may not be executed. This prevents players who have just started playing from feeling uncomfortable (as they may wonder what the effect is for having completed).

Note that the specified warning notification corresponding to the restriction on executing the specified control is not limited to that shown in (h) of Figure 133, but also includes the warning image mentioned above, such as "The acquisition limit device will be activated soon. Please be careful not to forget to remove your card."

In addition to displaying a promotional image such as "Press the counting button to count" as described above, a sticker attached to the game board or glass frame 4 that reads "If you wish to suspend or end play, press the counting button to count" and is always visible to the player may be included in the "notification encouraging operation of the counting operation unit." Also, if the display 174 of the dedicated unit 170 displays "If you wish to suspend or end play, press the counting button to count," this display may be included in the "notification encouraging operation of the counting operation unit."

Figure 134 is a diagram explaining the customer waiting presentation.
In this embodiment, the customer waiting effects include "customer waiting waiting effect A,""customer waiting waiting effect B,""customer waiting demo effect A," and "customer waiting demo effect B" shown in the figure.

First, the symbols are confirmed and stopped at timing (a) (the special symbol and the effect symbol are stopped) and if no subsequent reserved memory is stored, customer waiting standby effect A starts from there. In customer waiting standby effect A, the first image display device 70 displays the combination "523" of effect symbols 70a that were confirmed and stopped at timing (a), and the third image display device 72 displays a predetermined background image (not shown). Note that the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a format consisting of numbers and characters.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) elapses without any initial winnings or other occurrences after the start of customer waiting standby effect A, customer waiting standby effect B begins at timing (b). During customer waiting standby effect B, the first image display device 70 continues to display the "523" combination of effect symbols 70a that were confirmed and stopped at timing (a), and the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting a win limit device, "This machine is equipped with a win limit device," instead of a predetermined background image. At this time, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a format consisting of numbers, characters, and character names, and are displayed in a different format from customer waiting standby effect A. Furthermore, the win limit device suggestion image displayed on the third image display device 72 is a suggestion image intended to inform the player that the win limit device will be activated, making it difficult to continue playing. This is made known to the player in advance using customer waiting effects, etc. This prevents the player from being surprised or dissatisfied even if the win limit device is activated, making it difficult to continue playing.

In addition to the image suggesting the presence of a win limiting device, the suggestion of a win limiting device may also include a sticker affixed to the game board or glass frame 4 stating "This machine is equipped with a win limiting device." This type of indication is more likely to catch the player's eye than an image, making it more appealing.

In addition, while the image suggesting the installation of an acquisition limit device is displayed on the third image display device 72, it is not limited to this and may also be displayed on the first image display device 70, second image display device 71, fourth image display device 73, or display unit 174 of the dedicated unit 170.

Then, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of customer waiting standby performance B without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting demo performance A begins at timing (c). In customer waiting demo performance A, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is painted white, and on this white background, a "DEMO" message (e.g., blue text) indicating that a demo performance is in progress and a message such as "Pachinko XX" (e.g., black text) indicating the model name of the gaming machine are displayed. Furthermore, the third image display device 72 displays a game promotion image "Let's start playing!" to encourage the player to play, in place of the image suggesting the installation of a winning limit device. When customer waiting demo performance A begins, the performance symbol 70a displayed in customer waiting standby performances A and B, as well as the icon display area 70C, the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and other elements (not shown) such as the background image and special symbol TZ, are hidden.

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of customer waiting demo performance A without any initial wins or the like, customer waiting demo performance B begins at timing (d). During customer waiting demo performance A, the entire display area of the first image display device 70 continues to have a white background, and on this white background, a "DEMO" display (e.g., blue letters) indicating that a demo performance is in progress and a predetermined caution notification display (red letters) are displayed. Additionally, the third image display device 72 continues to display the image indicating the installation of a winning limit device, "This machine is equipped with a winning limit device," which was displayed during customer waiting standby performance B, at this timing as well.

Examples of specified caution promotion notifications include an image that reads "Watch out for addiction!" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to gaming, an image that reads "No gaming for those under 18" to prohibit players under the age of 18, an image that reads "Watch out for strategy scams!" to prevent players from getting caught up in scams that advertise strategies for winning at gaming machines, and an image that reads "No machine banging" to prohibit players from banging on gaming machines. Displaying these displays during customer waiting demo performance B can lead to healthy gaming.

Note that the images displayed in customer waiting effects A and B are not limited to those described above, and may also include, for example, actual reach effect images, images introducing characters displayed as effects on the gaming machine, and images introducing preview effects that can be expected in jackpot games (for example, three key effects). Furthermore, the "Beware of addiction!" images displayed in customer waiting effects, at the jackpot ending, and when announcing the operation of the win limit device may all be the same (same color, shape, size), or may be different.

If a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting demo performance B without a start winning or other occurrence, the game will return to customer waiting standby performance A. If a start winning or other occurrence occurs, the performance will immediately end regardless of which performance is currently being performed, and a screen will be displayed showing the changing display of performance pattern 70a, etc.

In this embodiment, the customer waiting effects are configured as described above, but they may also include either customer waiting wait effects A or B, or either customer waiting demo effects. Alternatively, in a low-probability, non-time-saving game state, customer waiting wait effects A, customer waiting wait effects B, customer waiting demo effects A, and customer waiting demo effects B may all be executed, while in a high-probability, time-saving game state, customer waiting wait effects A and customer waiting wait effects B may be executed, but customer waiting demo effects A and customer waiting demo effects B may not be executed. Also, customer waiting wait effects A and B may be defined as customer waiting effects, or customer waiting demo effects A and B may be defined as customer waiting effects.

Furthermore, while customer waiting waiting effect A, customer waiting waiting effect B, customer waiting demo effect A, and customer waiting demo effect B can be executed before the winning limit device is activated, their execution is restricted after the winning limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in Figure 133). In other words, it is possible to prevent a customer waiting effect from being executed even when game progress control (specific control processing) is not being performed, leading players to mistakenly believe that they are in a state where they can play. It is also possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are prompted to sit down by a customer waiting effect and are then unable to play. This helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Note that after the winning limit device is activated (for example, after timing (h) in Figure 133), execution is restricted, which can be interpreted as meaning that execution is not performed at all, that the execution frequency is reduced, or that some of customer waiting waiting effect A, customer waiting waiting effect B, customer waiting demo effect A, and customer waiting demo effect B are not executed.

135 to 137 are time charts 1/3 to 3/3 showing advance notification.
First, at timing (a), a start win is made in the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the value of the increment counter is less than "90000."

Then, at timing (b), a jackpot is won, and if a prize is won in the jackpot slot 50 or the like during the jackpot game, the value of the increment counter increases, and at timing (c), the value of the increment counter reaches "90,000." At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed on the third image display device 72 as "90,000/95,000." In addition, a pre-announcement such as "5,000 remaining until the winning limit device is activated" is displayed.

When the jackpot game ends at timing (d) thereafter, the first image display device 70 displays a jackpot game ending image (for example, jackpot end time reduction 100 times) notifying the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90,500/95,000," and the advance notice reads, "4,500 remaining until the win limit device is activated."

In addition, the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting that a maximum win limit device is installed, saying "This machine is equipped with a maximum win limit device." In other words, the image suggesting that a maximum win limit device is installed is displayed even when the jackpot game ending image is displayed.

At the subsequent timing (e), the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) begins. At this time, the first image display device 70 begins displaying the variable time-saving game state, but the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90,500/95,000", and the advance notice is displayed as "4,500 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

When the symbols (special symbols, effect symbols, special symbols) are confirmed and stopped at timing (f), customer waiting effect A begins in the time-saving game mode. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the message "Time-saving mode" indicating that the time-saving game mode is in effect, the message "Right hit," and the frozen display of the "463" combination of effect symbols 70a that were confirmed and stopped at timing (f). The third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notification. At this time, the displayed value of the increment counter is "90490/95000," and the advance notification is "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated."

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting standby performance A without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting standby performance B begins at timing (g). At this time, the display mode of the first image display device 70 remains the same as customer waiting standby performance A, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notification. At this time, the value displayed on the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notification is "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated."

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting standby performance B without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting demo performance B will begin at timing (h). At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned customer waiting demo performance A, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value displayed on the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notice shows "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting demo performance A without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting demo performance B will begin at timing (i). At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned customer waiting demo performance B, and the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notice. At this time, the value displayed on the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notice shows "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

In other words, the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are displayed during jackpot play as shown at timing (c), while the variable display is being executed as shown at timing (e), and while the customer waiting effect is being executed as shown at timings (f) to (i). In other words, after the display begins at timing (c), it will be displayed so that it can be seen in any situation, such as during jackpot play, while the variable display is being executed, or while the customer waiting effect is being executed.

Note that Figures 136 and 137 use the customer waiting effect in a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) as an example for explanation, but this may also be interpreted as customer waiting effect in a normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) or in a probability variable game state (high-probability time-saving game state).

Then, at timing (j), the time-saving game state ends. At timing (j), there are no subsequent pending memories, and customer waiting standby effect A has begun. At this time, the first image display device 70 does not display "Time-saving" or "Right hit", and the appearance of the effect pattern 70a has changed from a number-only appearance to an appearance consisting of numbers and characters. Furthermore, the third image display device 72 continues to display the value of the increment counter and an advance notification. At this time, the displayed value of the increment counter is "90490/95000", and the advance notification is displayed as "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated".

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the start of customer waiting standby performance A without any initial winnings or the like, customer waiting standby performance B begins at timing (k). At this time, the first image display device displays performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers, characters, and character names, while the third image display device 72 displays an image suggesting the installation of a winning limit device, the value of the increment counter, and an advance notification. At this time, the value of the increment counter is displayed as "90490/95000," and the advance notification reads, "4510 remaining until the winning limit device is activated."

After that, from timing (l), the player plays in the normal game mode (low probability non-time-saving game mode) and does not win the jackpot. At timing (m), the customer waiting standby effect A begins when the value of the increment counter falls below 90,000. At this time, the third image display device 72 hides the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification. This indicates that the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification have ended when the value of the increment counter falls below 90,000 (for example, when it reaches 89,000).

According to Figures 135 to 137 above, the image suggesting the installation of an earning limit device is displayed even when the jackpot game ending image is displayed, so the player can be notified in advance that the earning limit device will be activated and it will be difficult to continue playing. This reduces the player's surprise or dissatisfaction even if the earning limit device is activated and it becomes difficult to continue playing. This consideration helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the value of the increment counter reaches "90,000," the display of the increment counter value and an advance notification begin. The display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are displayed during the jackpot game shown at timing (c), while the variable display is being executed at timing (e), and while the customer waiting effect is being executed at timings (f) to (i). This makes it easier for the player to see the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification regardless of the game situation, reducing the chance of the player being surprised or frustrated by the unexpected activation of the winning limit device. This consideration helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in timings (d), (i), and (k), even when the value of the increment counter and the advance notification are displayed, it is possible to display an image suggesting the installation of a maximum win device. Furthermore, these images are displayed so that they do not interfere with each other. This makes both pieces of information easy to see, allowing players to understand that the gaming machine is equipped with a maximum win device and that the device is about to be activated. This consideration makes it easier to recognize various pieces of information, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown at timing (h), even when the game promotion image "Let's start playing!" is displayed, which is one aspect of customer waiting demo presentation A and encourages players to play, it is possible to display the value of the increment counter and the advance notification. Furthermore, these images are displayed so that they do not interfere with each other. This makes both pieces of information easier to see, and allows players to understand, for example, that when they start playing, they are just about to activate the winning limit device. This consideration makes it easier to recognize various pieces of information, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown at timing (m), when the value of the increment counter falls below "90,000" (for example, when it reaches "89,000"), the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are terminated. This prevents the player from mistakenly thinking that the win limit device is about to be activated.

Figure 138 shows an example of when the winning limit device is activated during the customer waiting performance.
First, timing (a) is the timing when the variable display in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) ends (the symbols stop being fixed), and customer waiting standby effect A starts. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the combination of the "Time-saving" display, the "Right Hit" display, and the fixed and stopped effect symbol 70a, "463." Also, the third image display device 72 displays the value of the increment counter, "94999/95000," and the advance notice, "1 remaining until the winning limit device is activated." In other words, the value of the increment counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999."

At timing (b), the player shoots the game ball into the game area (hits it to the right), but it enters the general winning slot 43 before entering the second starting slot 47. As a result, the value of the increment counter becomes "95003," and upon receiving the win limit device activation command, an activation notification for the win limit device begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays messages such as "Win limit device activated. Play ends today," "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!", while the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72.

Specifically, a dark image is displayed on the front layer so as to be superimposed on part of the display screen for customer waiting standby effect A, and messages such as "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" are displayed. Note that once a predetermined time has passed from the display screen in (b), the display screen for customer waiting standby effect A, which was displayed behind the dark image, will no longer be displayed.

In this way, even when customer waiting effect A is being executed, if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" and the winning limit device is activated, an activation notification of the winning limit device is issued, informing the player that play cannot be continued any further. This allows for quick restrictions on the execution of game progress control (specific control processing) even in situations where no variable display is being displayed, such as when a customer waiting effect is being executed, thereby ensuring healthy play. Furthermore, even when a customer waiting effect is being executed, the activation notification of the winning limit device makes it clear that it will be difficult to continue play any further. This consideration helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

While the explanation has been given using the example of customer waiting standby effect A, it may also be interpreted as customer waiting standby effect B. Furthermore, when announcing the operation of the win limit device, the first image display device 70 immediately goes dark. However, this is not limited to this. The win limit device operation notification may also be executed while the background image on the back side (in the example of Figure 157, the display screen of customer waiting standby effect A) is partially visible. Specifically, a message such as "Win limit device in operation, play has ended for today" may be displayed superimposed on a portion of the display screen of customer waiting standby effect A, allowing the display screen (background image, etc.) of customer waiting standby effect A to be visible from the non-superimposed portion. This reduces the surprise to the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background to notify the operation of the win limit device, and prevents the player from mistaking that a malfunction or the like has occurred.

Next, timing (c) shows that customer waiting demo performance A is being performed. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays "Time-saving", "DEMO", "Right hit", and "Pachinko XX", and the third image display device 72 displays the value of the increment counter as "94999/95000" and the advance notification "1 remaining until the winning limit device is activated". In other words, the value of the increment counter from timing (a) to timing (b) is "94999".

At timing (d), the player shoots the game ball into the game area (hits it to the right), but it enters the general winning slot 43 before entering the second starting slot 47. As a result, the value of the increment counter becomes "95003," and upon receiving the win limit device activation command, an activation notification for the win limit device begins. Specifically, on the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70 goes dark so as to be superimposed on a portion of the display screen for customer waiting demo performance A, and the front layer displays "Win limit device activated. Play ends for today," "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!", while the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification are hidden on the third image display device 72.

Specifically, a dark image is displayed on the front layer so as to be superimposed on part of the display screen for customer waiting standby effect A, and messages such as "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" are displayed. Note that once a predetermined time has passed from the display screen in (b), the display screen for customer waiting standby effect A, which was displayed behind the dark image, will no longer be displayed.

In this way, even when customer waiting demo performance A is in progress, if the value of the increase counter reaches "95,000" and the winning limit device is activated, a notification of the activation of the winning limit device is issued, informing the player that play cannot be continued any further. This allows for quick restrictions on the execution of game progress control (specific control processing) even in situations where no variable display is being displayed, such as when a customer waiting performance is in progress, thereby ensuring healthy play. Furthermore, even when a customer waiting performance is in progress, the activation notification of the winning limit device makes it clear that it will be difficult to continue play any further. This consideration helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

While the explanation has been given using the example of customer waiting demo effect A, it may also be interpreted as customer waiting demo effect B. Furthermore, when announcing the operation of the win limit device, the first image display device 70 immediately goes dark. However, this is not limited to this. The win limit device operation notification may also be executed while the background image on the back side (in the example of Figure 157, the display screen of customer waiting demo effect A) is partially visible. Specifically, a message such as "Win limit device in operation, play has ended for today" may be displayed superimposed on a portion of the display screen of customer waiting demo effect A, allowing the display screen (background image, etc.) of customer waiting standby effect A to be visible from the non-superimposed portion. This reduces the surprise to the player compared to suddenly displaying a black background to notify the operation of the win limit device, and prevents the player from mistaking that a malfunction or the like has occurred.

In addition, Figure 138 explains, as an example, the customer waiting effect in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state), but this may also be interpreted as the customer waiting effect in the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) or the probability variable game state (high-probability time-saving game state).

In addition, in Figure 138, it is assumed that the player shot the game ball into the game area (hit to the right), but that it entered the general winning slot 43 before entering the second starting slot 47. However, if the ball enters the second starting slot 47 and the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000," the symbol (special symbol, performance symbol, special symbol) may not be displayed in a variable manner, and the activation notification of the winning limit device shown in Figure 138 may be executed. This allows the processing related to the activation of the winning limit device to proceed quickly (since processing to stop the symbols, etc. is not necessary), thereby simplifying the control processing. It also prevents the player from becoming too distracted by the symbol display results and losing sight of various information such as "Winning limit device activated, play ends today," "Press the counting button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!".

On the other hand, if a win is made in the second starting slot 47 and the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000," a variable pattern (special pattern, performance pattern, special pattern) may be displayed. For example, in the first image display device 70, a variable performance pattern 70a or a variable special pattern TZ may be displayed behind the operation notification of the winning limit device. This can eliminate boredom for the player until the screen goes dark (until the black background appears).

Figure 139 shows an example of the operation notification mode of the win limit device for each situation. Figure 133 describes the operation notification mode of the win limit device during a jackpot, and Figure 138 describes the operation notification mode of the win limit device during a customer waiting effect, so here we will mainly explain the operation notification mode of the win limit device during non-jackpot times (during the fluctuation display and inter-fluctuation interval).

In the figure, the case during a jackpot is as described in Figure 133, so an explanation will be omitted here. When not during a jackpot, timing (a) indicates that a variable display is in progress, and as an example, it is during a variable display in a time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state). At this time, the "right hit" display, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, etc. are being displayed.

Timing (b) is the timing when the value of the increase counter reaches "95,000" as a result of a game ball entering the second start slot 47 or the general winning slot 43 during the variable display in the time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state). This causes the reception of an acquisition limit device activation command, and an activation notification for the acquisition limit device begins. Specifically, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the front layer displays messages such as "Acquisition limit device activated, today's game is over," "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!".

In the case of a jackpot, from (d) onwards, the operation notification of the win limit device will continue unless the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Similarly, in the case of a non-jackpot, from (b) onwards, the operation notification of the win limit device will continue unless the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. In other words, once the operation notification of the win limit device begins, the audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification will not change unless an error with a higher priority than the operation of the win limit device occurs. As a result, once the operation notification of the win limit device begins, there will be no transition to the customer waiting standby effect or customer waiting demo effect, and the rainbow light emission in customer waiting demo effect B will not be executed.

Note that although it has been stated that the audio, visual, and illumination alerts will not change when the operation of the win limit device is notified unless an error with a higher priority than the operation of the win limit device occurs, they may be configured to change. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is not cut off for a predetermined period of time after the operation of the win limit device is notified, a rainbow light may be emitted as an illumination alert to prompt the administrator of the gaming machine 1 to turn off the power to the gaming machine 1.

In this way, if the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a jackpot, a pre-notification message is displayed first, stating, "You are in a jackpot. Please continue playing. The post-jackpot win limit device will be activated and your game will end." After the jackpot ends, a message is displayed stating, "The win limit device is activated. Your game will end for today." This pre-notification message informs the player that they should continue playing and that they will no longer be able to play after the jackpot ends, thereby reducing the risk of the player being surprised or frustrated by the unexpected activation of the win limit device. This consideration prevents a decline in interest in the game. On the other hand, if the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a non-jackpot period (during the variable display or the inter-variation interval), the first image display device 70 immediately goes dark and notifies the player that the win limit device has been activated. This prevents players from becoming so distracted by the displayed pattern changes that they lose sight of various information such as "Winning limit device activated, play ends for today", "Press the counting button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!".

It is also possible that the result of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) may be a jackpot symbol combination. In that case, the activation of the win limit device prevents the jackpot game corresponding to the symbol that has been confirmed (symbol stop), which could disappoint the player. In response to this, the first image display device 70 quickly goes dark and notifies the player that the win limit device has been activated, eliminating the risk of the player being disappointed because they will not be able to determine whether the result of the confirmed stop (symbol stop) is a jackpot or a miss.

Note that if the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a non-jackpot period (during the variable display or the interval between variations), the first image display device 70 is quickly made to go dark and an announcement is made regarding the operation of the maximum win limit device. However, the announcement regarding the operation of the maximum win limit device may also be made after the pattern has stopped being determined.

Furthermore, if the increment counter reaches "95000" while a jackpot symbol combination (for example, "555") is temporarily stopped (just before it is fixed), the win limit device may be immediately activated to cause the first image display device 70 to go dark, or the win limit device may be activated after a jackpot game is played.

In addition, on the first image display device 70, the "Right Hit" display is hidden, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ remains visible without being covered by a rectangular box. By hiding the "Right Hit" display, it is possible to indicate that the situation is no longer one in which a right hit is required, and by allowing the special symbol TZ to remain visible, it becomes easier to grasp the timing for the confirmation stop (symbol stop) and activation of the winning limit device. Although not shown in the illustration, the right hit indicator 67 also turns off (ending the right hit notification) when the "Right Hit" display becomes hidden.

Once the advance notice message is displayed, it may continue to be displayed, or it may be displayed intermittently, or it may be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since its display began so that it will not be displayed again. It has been stated that during a jackpot, it is desirable to display the advance notice message intermittently or to hide it after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since its display began so that it will not be displayed again. However, during non-jackpot periods (during variable display or inter-variation intervals), the grace period until the win limit device is activated is likely to be shorter than during jackpot periods. Therefore, if the advance notice message is displayed intermittently or hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., 10 seconds) since its display began so that it will not be displayed again, the purpose of stopping the launch of game balls may be impaired. Therefore, during non-jackpot periods (during variable display or inter-variation intervals), it is desirable to continue displaying the message once it is displayed.

When a fixed stop occurs (a symbol stops), the following messages are displayed superimposed on the symbol combination of the fixed stop effect symbol 70a (for example, "463") to notify the player that the win limit device is operating: "Win limit device activated, play ends for today", "Press the count button to count", "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!". Note that these images are displayed superimposed on the effect symbol 70a, but not on the special symbol TZ, so the fixed stop special symbol TZ "463" is visible. This makes it easier to recognize a fixed stop (a symbol stop).

This allows players to be informed in advance by a warning message that the balls must be stopped from being shot immediately and that they will no longer be able to play once the symbols have stopped moving, reducing the risk of players being surprised or frustrated by the unexpected activation of the winning limit device. This consideration helps to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, this prevents the player from being surprised by the forced termination of the variable display and the activation of the win limit device. Furthermore, the player can prepare to stop playing in advance, such as by operating the counting button 20, in time with the timing of the fixed stop (pattern stop) that will activate the win limit device, leading to a smooth end to the game.

If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (due to a power outage, disconnection, etc.) during the variable display and then the power is restored, a power restoration command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130, upon receiving the power restoration command, displays an image during restoration such as "Restoring, please wait a moment" on the first image display device 70. Then, upon receiving a stop command (symbol confirmation command) following the end of the variable display, the display of the image during restoration is terminated, and the combination of symbols in the performance symbol 70a, etc., becomes visible.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated during the variable display and then power is restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the image during restoration will not be displayed, and an image such as "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 125 will be displayed.
In this way, even when the same power supply is restored and a power restoration command is received, the display mode will differ depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated. This allows for accurate notification depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated.

Furthermore, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (due to a power outage, disconnection, etc.) while the special chart determination information is reserved and a reserved icon corresponding to the reserved memory is displayed, if the power is subsequently restored, a power restoration designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130, upon receiving the power restoration designation command, displays an image during restoration such as "Restoring, please wait a moment" on the first image display device 70. Meanwhile, while the restoration image is being displayed, the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved memory (which was displayed before the power outage) is not displayed.
On the other hand, if the acquisition limit device is activated while the special chart determination information is in reserved storage, and then the power is restored, even if a power restoration command is received, the image during restoration and the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved storage (which was displayed before the power outage) will not be displayed, and an image such as "Acquisition limit device in operation, please clear RWM" as shown in Figure 144 will be displayed.
In this way, even if the power restoration command is received during the same power restoration, the display mode will differ depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated. This allows for accurate notification depending on whether the acquisition limit device is activated or not. Furthermore, if a hold icon is displayed even though the image during restoration says "Please wait a moment," this can give the user the misconception that they do not need to wait, but this can be prevented. Furthermore, even when power is restored after the acquisition limit device is activated, the hold icon is not displayed, and an image such as "Acquisition limit device activated, please clear RWM" is displayed, allowing the worker to focus on clearing the RWM.

Figure 140 shows an example of the mode of notification of the operation of the win limit device for each situation. Figure 140 explains an example in which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the value of the increment counter reaches "95000". Specifically, examples of the mode of notification of operation are explained for when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" but before the win limit device is activated (hereinafter referred to as "A"), and when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" and after the win limit device is activated (hereinafter referred to as "B").

First, regarding (i), timing (a) is the timing when the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" during, for example, the fourth round of a jackpot game (a 10-round jackpot game is being played), and the first image display device 70 displays the above-mentioned advance notification message superimposed on the presentation image for the fourth round of the jackpot game.

Then, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (due to a power outage, a broken wire, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the presentation image during the jackpot game becomes invisible. Then, at subsequent timing (c), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored (the power outage is resolved, the broken wire is resolved, etc.), the first image display device 70 again displays the above-mentioned advance notification message superimposed on the presentation image for the fourth round during the jackpot game (when a 10-round jackpot game is being played).

Then, when the 10th round of the jackpot game ends, the above-mentioned completion effect is executed. After the completion effect ends, at timing (d), an acquisition limit device activation command is received, and the acquisition limit device activation notification, such as "Acquisition limit device activated, game play ends for today," "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" is displayed. Thus, in case (a), even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the acquisition limit device activation notification is not executed immediately. Instead, the acquisition limit device activation notification is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored and the jackpot game and completion effect are all completed. For example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while the completion effect is being executed, the acquisition limit device activation notification is executed after the power supply is restored and the completion effect is all executed.

At timing (c), the display of the advance notice message is also restored. This allows the player to recognize that even if the power supply is cut off during a jackpot game (while the advance notice message is being displayed), the situation is immediately before the win limit device is activated after power is restored.

Also, although not shown in the figure, at timing (c), the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification on the third image display device 72 are hidden. This is because the increment counter is cleared when the power is turned OFF→ON (see Figure 31), and when the increment counter is cleared, the display of the increment counter value is also cleared. In other words, if the value of the increment counter were displayed at timing (c), it would be "0/95000." However, since the advance notification message is being displayed on the first image display device 70, there is a risk that the player will perceive a contradiction. Therefore, by hiding the display of the increment counter value and the advance notification on the third image display device 72 at timing (c), this risk can be eliminated.

Next, regarding (B), timing (a) is the timing when the operation notification of the win limit device is executed. Then, at timing (b), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is interrupted (due to a power outage, a disconnection, an employee intentionally turning the power off, etc.). At this time, the first image display device 70 goes dark, and the operation notification of the win limit device, such as "Win limit device activated. Play ends for today," "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", are not visible. Then, at timing (c), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored (due to the power outage being resolved, the disconnection being resolved, an employee intentionally turning the power on, etc.), the first image display device 70 displays "Win limit device activated. Please clear RWM," which is one form of the operation notification of the win limit device. In other words, in case (B), unlike case (A), when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored, the operation notification of the win limit device is executed immediately.

As such, the timing between power restoration and the notification of the operation of the win limit device differs between the case where the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" but before the win limit device is activated (hereinafter "A") and the case where the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off after the increment counter value reaches "95000" but after the win limit device is activated (hereinafter "B"). As a result, in example (A), the player is notified of the operation of the win limit device immediately after power restoration, which would cause discomfort to the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. On the other hand, in example (B), the current situation and required operations can be quickly notified by issuing a notification immediately after power restoration, allowing an employee to take appropriate action.

In addition, the activation notification of the winning limit device in (a)(d) informs the player that it is difficult to play any further, prompts the player to operate the counting button 20 to count (a necessary operation), and provides various warnings, making it easier for the player to recognize the situation and preventing a decline in interest in the game. Meanwhile, the immediate notification after recovery in (b)(c) displays "Winning limit device activated" as in (a)(d), but also displays "Please clear RWM," which is not displayed in (a)(d). In other words, the notification format in (a)(d) is different from the notification format in (b)(c). This allows for appropriate notification to be issued for each situation, preventing a decline in interest for players and making it easier for employees to understand the required operation (that the RWM needs to be cleared).

In addition, the immediate post-recovery notification in (b)(c) may be the same as the notification of the operation of the win limit device in (a)(d). Specifically, in (b)(c), notifications such as "Win limit device activated, play ends for today," "Please press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", or "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" may be made. For example, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off immediately after the screen in (b)(a) is displayed, there is a possibility that a player may still be seated in front of the gaming machine. In that case, if the notification in (b)(c) is made, it may confuse the player who is still seated. Therefore, in anticipation of such a scenario, the immediate post-recovery notification in (b)(c) may be the same as the notification of the operation of the win limit device in (a)(d).

Furthermore, if power is restored before a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the screen display of (b)(a) has been displayed, the same notification as the activation of the winning limit device in (a)(d) may be executed; if power is restored after a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed since the screen display of (b)(a) has been displayed, the immediate notification after restoration in (b)(c) may be executed. In this way, even if power is restored when there is a possibility that a player is seated, a notification similar to the activation notification of the winning limit device in (a)(d) may be executed, so that the player is not confused and can be made to recognize that it may be difficult to continue playing. On the other hand, if power is restored after the predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the player is not seated, and an employee may be able to take appropriate action (clear the RWM).

(Another example during a jackpot game)
While Figures 133, 139, and 140 illustrate notification modes when the increment counter reaches "95,000" during a jackpot game, notification modes are not limited to these and may be configured as follows. For example, when the increment counter reaches "95,000" in Figure 133(d), an image with a closed shutter image (an image that blocks the effects of the jackpot game) is displayed, indicating a standby state for the win limit device activation. An image such as "You're in a jackpot. Please continue playing. After you win, the win limit device will activate and end your game" is displayed in front of the shutter image. At this time, the fourth image display device 73 (the right-side image display device) also displays "Be careful not to get carried away!", "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", and "Press the count button to count." These displays are then continued until the final round. When the final round is over, the first through fourth image display devices 70 through 73 are dimmed, and the first image display device 70 displays "Win limit device activated. Play has ended for today" (standby information). In this case, the completion effect is not executed, but it may be executed and the first to fourth image display devices 70 to 73 may be darkened after the completion effect ends. Information regarding the winning of the jackpot into the jackpot slot 50 per round (count number information) may also be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. For example, if 10 balls are possible to win per round, 10 count images may be displayed, and one count image may be erased for each ball that wins into the jackpot slot 50. Also, as shown in FIG. 152, information indicating the gaming media won in a jackpot game, such as "Winning XXX/YYY" (winning information), or information indicating the gaming media won in consecutive jackpot games, such as "ZZZZ" (total winning information), may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image. Alternatively, only waiting information may be displayed on the front side of the shutter image, and the count number information, winning information, and total winning information may be displayed on the third image display device 72 and the fourth image display device 73. By displaying the standby information as a standby state for the win limit device to be activated in this manner, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the win limit device will be activated after the big win game ends.

If the normal symbol display 62 is displaying a changing normal symbol and the system transitions to a state where the maximum win device is on standby, the display of the changing normal symbol may continue. Also, if a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 after the system transitions to a state where the maximum win device is on standby, the display of the changing normal symbol may begin. This configuration prevents the act of passing the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44 from being wasted, even if the system transitions to a state where the maximum win device is on standby. Furthermore, if the maximum win device is activated while the changing normal symbol is being displayed, the normal symbol display 62 is turned off, even if the display of the changing normal symbol is still in progress.

Figure 141 shows an example of what happens when power is restored during information output. Specifically, suppose that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off when HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device activation information) is generated in step S450-6-8 of the "acquisition limit device activation determination process" and is being sent (output) to the frame control board 120 in step S600-2 of the "HC/fraud monitoring information management process," or when the HC/fraud monitoring information (acquisition limit device activation information) is being sent (output) to the dedicated unit 170 in step W503 of the "frame control board gaming machine information notification process." Therefore, the output control of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" in the figure may be read by either the main control board 110 or the frame control board 120. Furthermore, case (a) is a case where, when power is restored, it is not determined that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set in step W151 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" (i.e., the ball removal operation is not in progress), and case (b) is a case where, when power is restored, it is determined that the ball removal operation in progress flag is set in step W151 of the "frame control board ball removal operation processing" (i.e., the ball removal operation is in progress).

First, in case (i), the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" at timing (a), the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned ON at timing (b), and "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) at timing (c). The output period of "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" is from timing (c) to timing (e), and if it is active from (c) to (e), it is considered to have been output normally.

Let's assume that the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off (due to a power outage, a broken wire, etc.) at timing (d) during the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information." In this case, because the power supply was cut off before the output period of the "HC/fraud monitoring information" had elapsed, for example, if the main control board 110 was sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the frame control board 120, the transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 was not completed successfully; and if the frame control board 120 was sending "HC/fraud monitoring information" to the dedicated unit 170, the transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 was not completed successfully. Note that the value of the increment counter falls, as it is initialized when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Then, at timing (f), the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored. At this time, if the ball removal is OFF (the ball removal operation flag is not determined to be present), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) from that timing. This information is then output until timing (g), at which point transmission and reception between the main control board 110 and frame control board 120 is completed normally, or transmission and reception between the frame control board 120 and dedicated unit 170 is completed normally.

Then, at the subsequent timing (h), specific control processing is restricted (steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "main control board timer interrupt processing" are not executed), and at timing (i) the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF by an employee. Then, at timing (j), the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned ON accompanied by an RWM clear operation, and the win limit device activation flag is turned OFF.

In this way, if the ball removal is OFF (the ball removal operation flag is not determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), it is possible to turn ON (output) the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") again from timing (f).

On the other hand, in case (b), if the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation in progress flag is determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") will not be turned ON (not output) from that timing. In this case, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned OFF→ON again after steps W152 to W159 of the "Frame Control Board Ball Removal Operation Processing" are completed, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") will be turned ON (transmitted) from that timing.

In this way, if the ball removal is ON (the ball removal operation flag is determined to be present) when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is restricted from being turned ON again (output) from timing (f).

As a result, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is being output, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") will be re-output at a specified timing, preventing necessary information from being sent or received and improving the accuracy of information transmission.

In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f), whether the ball removal is on or off also determines whether the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") is re-output. This prevents the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") from being re-output even when the ball removal operation is in progress, which can lead to the mistaken belief that information indicating that the ball removal operation is in progress has been output.

In addition, the ball removal operation process and the re-output process of "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information where Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") are not mixed together, preventing the control process of the frame control board 120 from becoming complicated.

In case (b), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f), or if the ball removal is turned OFF immediately at timing (f), the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information indicating that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") may be re-output at timing (f). This eliminates the need to power the gaming machine 1 OFF and then ON again after steps W152 to W159 of the "Frame Control Board Ball Removal Operation Processing" are completed, thereby improving work efficiency.

Note that if the ball removal is ON when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restored at timing (f) (the ball removal in progress flag is determined to be present), and the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is restricted from being turned ON again (output) at timing (f), this interpretation includes not turning it ON again at timing (f), but also including the possibility that if the ball removal is turned OFF immediately at timing (f) as described above, it may be turned ON again (it may be permitted to be turned ON again at timing (f)).

Figure 142 shows an example of the information output timing for each situation. Specifically, it shows the information output timing when not in a jackpot (during a fluctuation display, during an interval between fluctuations) and when in a jackpot.

First, when not in a jackpot (during a fluctuation display or an interval between fluctuations), the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" at timing (a), the win limit device activation flag is turned ON at timing (b), the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information that Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) at timing (c), and output is completed normally at timing (d). Then, at the subsequent timing (e), specific control processing is restricted (steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "Main Control Board Timer Interrupt Processing" are not executed). In other words, when not in a jackpot (during a fluctuation display, during an interval between fluctuations), the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is shorter than when in a jackpot, as described below, and the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection state 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is roughly unchanging and constant. Note that this "roughly unchanging and constant" refers to the fact that, as mentioned above, when the winning limit device is activated after waiting for the symbol to be determined and stopped, the timing at which the symbol is determined and stopped varies slightly depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) being executed. On the other hand, if the winning limit device is activated without waiting for the symbols to be determined and stopped (it activates immediately when the increment counter reaches 95,000), then the period from when the increment counter value reaches 95,000 until the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) can be said to be constant and unchanging.

Next, during a jackpot, the value of the increment counter reaches "95,000" at timing (a), the activation recognition flag is turned ON at timing (b) (see the acquisition limit device activation determination process in Figure 44), and when the jackpot game (including the completion effect) ends at timing (c), the activation recognition flag is turned OFF and the acquisition limit device activation flag is turned ON. Then, at timing (d), the "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output), and at timing (e), the output is completed normally. Then, at subsequent timing (f), specific control processing is restricted (steps S120, S130, S200, S300, S400, and S450 of the "Main Control Board Timer Interrupt Processing" are not executed). Note that timing (a) may be the first round of a jackpot game or the tenth round of a jackpot game. Additionally, in the case of the above-mentioned "Type 1/Type 2" machines, it is also possible that a "small win" is occurring. Therefore, depending on when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000," the period until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") is subsequently turned ON is variable and undefined. In other words, during a jackpot, the period from when the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is longer than during the above-mentioned non-jackpot period. Furthermore, the period from when the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is variable and undefined.

In this way, the period from when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000" until the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is turned ON (output) is made different between during non-jackpot play and during jackpot play. As a result, during non-jackpot play, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is quickly output, allowing the gaming machine information center or the like to grasp the status of the gaming machine 1 in real time and improving the management performance of the gaming machine 1. On the other hand, during jackpot play, the "HC/fraud monitoring information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") is output, even though the gaming machine is in jackpot play, which can prevent confusion for the administrator.
Furthermore, if such confusion occurs, it is expected that confirmation work on the gaming machine 1 will be necessary, which may cause discomfort to the player. In contrast, this configuration can prevent such a situation. In this way, the accuracy of information transmission can be improved.

In addition, during a jackpot, "HC/Fraud Monitoring Information" (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection Status 1 is "1") may be output when the value of the increment counter reaches "95000."

Figure 143 shows the case where an abnormality occurs after the earning limit device is activated. Specifically, it is assumed that after the earning limit device is activated, an input (magnetic detection) is made to the main control board 110 from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b.

At timing (a), the earning limit device activation command is received, and the following messages are displayed to notify the operation of the earning limit device: "Earning limit device activated. Play ends for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Earning limit device activated," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Then, at timing (b), an input (magnetic detection) is made to the main control board 110 from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b. Let's assume that timing (b) occurs five seconds after timing (a). In this case, in accordance with the priority order of the notification event type described in Figure 110, a notification of fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error, priority order 8) is issued instead of activation of the acquisition limit device (priority order 9) (with the exception of on-screen notifications). Specifically, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs a voice message (volume MAX) saying "Magnet detected" and a warning siren sound, displays an icon image of "Magnet detected" on the third image display device 72 (left image display device), and causes the frame lighting device 10 to flash red (40% brightness).

At this time, the first image display device 70 continues to display the win limit device activation notification, "Win limit device activated. Play has ended for today." (the exception mentioned above), but does not display the messages "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", or "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!". Thereafter, at timing (c), when input (magnetic detection) from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 ceases, the notification of fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error, priority level 8) described above ends, and the win limit device activation notification is again executed. However, because more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at the time of timing (c), the audio output device 9 has not yet activated the win limit device activation notification, and the first image display device 70 and the frame lighting device 10 are still issuing activation notifications.

In this way, if input (magnetic detection) is received from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 even after the earning limit device has been activated, a fraud detection 1 (magnet detection error) alert is issued. This prevents a deterioration in security performance after the earning limit device has been activated.

In addition, if input (magnetic detection) is received from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 even after the earning limit device has been activated, an alert will be issued according to the priority of the alert event type described in Figure 110. This prevents the alert priority from changing just because the earning limit device has been activated, allowing for accurate alerts.

Also, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 continues to display "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today," but hides "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!" This allows the employee to recognize that the earning limit device has been activated, but also prevents the employee from being overwhelmed by the amount of information in their field of vision and failing to notice the "Magnet detected" icon image displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (c), when input (magnetic detection) from the first magnetic detection sensor 53a or the second magnetic detection sensor 53b to the main control board 110 ceases, the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is again executed. This allows the user to recognize that the acquisition limit device has continued to operate. This allows the appropriate response (RWM clear operation) to be taken.

In addition, at timing (b), the message "Winning limit device activated. Play ends today" may also be hidden on the first image display device 70. This allows the employee to focus on the "Magnet detected" icon image displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may maintain the display of "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!" This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden on display control.

Figure 144 shows the case where an abnormality occurs after the acquisition limit device is activated. Specifically, it is assumed that an input (radio wave detection) is made from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 after the acquisition limit device is activated.

At timing (a), the earning limit device activation command is received, and the following messages are displayed to notify the operation of the earning limit device: "Earning limit device activated. Play ends for today," "Press the counting button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" The audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the voice "Earning limit device activated," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

Then, at timing (b), the radio wave detection sensor 54a inputs (radio wave detection) to the frame control board 120. In this case, according to the priority order of the notification event types described in FIG. 110, the operation of the win limit device (priority 9) is maintained, and the notification of the unauthorized radio wave detection error (priority 10) is only executed by the third image display device 72 (left image display device). Specifically, the first image display device 70 continues to display the win limit device operation notification, "Win limit device activated. Play ends today." However, the messages "Press count button to count," "Beware of addiction!", and "Beware of forgetting to remove cards!" are hidden, and the third image display device 72 (left image display device) displays an icon image reading "Unauthorized radio wave detected." Additionally, the audio output device 9 repeatedly outputs the audio "Win limit device activated," and the frame lighting device 10 flashes white.

After that, at timing (c), when input (radio wave detection) from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 ceases, the "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detected" display that was being executed on the third image display device 72 (left image display device) ends, and the operation notification of the acquisition limit device is executed again. However, because more than 10 seconds have passed since timing (a) at the time of timing (c), the audio output device 9 has not yet executed the operation notification of the acquisition limit device, and the operation notification is being executed by the first image display device 70 and the frame lighting device 10.

In this way, if input (radio wave detection) is received from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, an unauthorized radio wave detection error will be notified. This prevents a deterioration in security performance after the acquisition limit device has been activated.

In addition, if input (radio wave detection) is received from the radio wave detection sensor 54a to the frame control board 120 even after the acquisition limit device has been activated, an alert will be issued according to the priority of the alert event type described in Figure 110. This prevents the alert priority from changing just because the acquisition limit device has been activated, allowing for accurate alerts.

Also, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 continues to display "Earning limit device activated, play ends for today," but hides "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!" This allows the employee to recognize that the earning limit device has been activated, but also prevents the employee from being overwhelmed by the overwhelming amount of information that comes into view and causes them to miss the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (c), when the radio wave detection sensor 54a stops inputting (radio wave detection) to the frame control board 120, the system is set to again notify the player that the win limit device has been activated. This allows the player to recognize that the win limit device has continued to be activated. This allows the player to take appropriate action (clear the RWM).

Note that at timing (b), the message "Winning limit device in operation. Play ends for today" may also be hidden on the first image display device 70. This allows the employee to focus on the icon image "H66 Unauthorized radio wave detected" displayed on the third image display device 72.

Furthermore, at timing (b), the first image display device 70 may maintain the display of "Press the count button to count," "Be careful not to get addicted!", and "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!" This allows the display content of the first image display device 70 to remain unchanged from timing (a), thereby reducing the burden on display control.

In addition, while the explanation has been given using as examples "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," which has a higher priority than "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)," and "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error (Priority 10)," which has a lower priority than "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)," as shown in Figure 110, the same can be applied to other notification events. For example, a notification event with a higher priority than "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)" shown in Figure 110 can be configured in the same way as "Fraud Detection 1 (Magnet Detection Error)," as described above, and a notification event with a lower priority than "Earning Limit Device Activated (Priority 9)" can be configured in the same way as "Unauthorized Radio Wave Detection Error," as described above.

(Example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while waiting for customers)
Figure 145 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted while waiting for customers.

As shown in Figure 145 (a), in the waiting state where no variable effects are being performed and the player is waiting for a customer, three effect symbols 70a are displayed on the first image display device 70, and the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135 show "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in Figure 145 (b). Specifically, an icon image that says "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, there is one blue colored gauge) in which the number and color of the colored gauge changes depending on the counted quantity in units of 1000 are displayed, and the audio message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "8750."

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 1,000 (the first achievement effect value), as shown in FIG. 145(c), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement effect is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement effect value is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "8,000."

Then, as the counted number of game balls increases by 1,000, the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one, and when the counted number of game balls reaches 3,000, as shown in FIG. 145(d), the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one to four, and the audio message "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "6,000."

Furthermore, when the counted number of game balls reaches 5,000 (the second achievement effect value), as shown in FIG. 145(e), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to six, and the achievement effect is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay, yay!" corresponding to the second achievement effect value is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "4,000."

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 9,000 and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes "0," the counting end effect is executed, as shown in Figure 145 (f). Specifically, an icon image saying "Counting process completed" is displayed, and a voice saying "Counting process completed" is output. At this time, 10 blue colored gauges are displayed as the counting number gauge image, and "0" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135.

After 5 seconds have passed, the audio output of "Counting process completed" will stop, as shown in Figure 145 (g), and after another 30 seconds have passed, the icon image of "Counting process completed" and the counting quantity gauge image will disappear, as shown in Figure 145 (h).

(Example of a performance when the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable performance)
Figure 146 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted during a variable presentation.

As shown in Figure 146 (a), in the waiting state where no variable effects are being performed and the player is waiting for a customer, three effect symbols 70a are displayed on the first image display device 70, and the frame control display 125 and the number of game balls display 135 show "9000," which is the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in Figure 146 (b). Specifically, an icon image of "Counting in progress" and an image of a counting quantity gauge (at this point, there is one blue gauge) are displayed, and the voice "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "8750."

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the variable effect starts, as shown in Figure 146 (c), the hold icon that was briefly displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B shifts and is displayed as the icon in the icon display area 70C. Additionally, the variable effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed behind the "Counting processing in progress" icon image, and the counting quantity gauge image becomes semi-transparent and is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a in a non-priority state.

Then, when the counted number of game balls reaches 1,000 (the first achievement effect value), the number of blue-colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement effect is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement effect value is output. At this time, the number of blue-colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "8,000."

Furthermore, when the left and right effect symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same symbol and the normal reach effect begins, as shown in Figure 146 (d), the sounds "Reach!" and "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "7250."

After that, when the duration of the normal reach effect has elapsed, the development effect to the SP reach effect begins, as shown in Figure 146 (e). Specifically, the left and right effect symbols 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the screen, and become symbols consisting of numbers only, and the development effect image is displayed behind the icon image "Counting process in progress." In addition, a development effect sound and the voice "Counting process in progress" are output. At this time, the number of blue-colored gauges in the counting quantity gauge image increases by one to three, and the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "7000."

Then, when the performance time for the development performance has elapsed, the SP Reach performance begins, as shown in Figure 146 (f). Specifically, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are hidden, and the SP Reach performance image is displayed. In addition, the SP Reach BGM and the sound "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 display "6750."

Furthermore, when the presentation time for the SP Reach presentation has elapsed, as shown in Figure 146 (g), the development presentation to the SP Reach presentation begins. Specifically, the icon display area 70C (including the icon) is hidden, the three presentation patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen, and a development presentation image is displayed behind the icon image of "Counting processing in progress." In addition, a development presentation sound effect and the voice "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, "5500" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

After that, when the performance time for the development performance has elapsed, the SPSP Reach performance begins, as shown in Figure 146 (h). Specifically, an SPSP Reach performance image is displayed. In addition, the SPSP Reach BGM and the sound "Counting processing in progress" are output. At this time, "5250" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135.

If the SPSP reach effect is a miss and the effect period has elapsed, the first hold icon display area 70B, the icon display area 70C (including the icon), and the second hold icon display area 70D will be displayed again, and after the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (after the state has shifted to waiting for customers), the counting quantity gauge image will be displayed in front of the effect pattern 70a.

(Example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated)
Figure 147 shows an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted after the acquisition limit device is activated.

When the win limit device is activated following the end of a jackpot game, a win limit device activation notification effect is executed, as shown in Figure 147 (a). Specifically, the first image display device 70 changes to a black background and the effect pattern 70a is hidden. In addition, text images of "Win limit device activated. Play ends for today" and "Please press the count button to count" are displayed, along with cautionary images of "Be careful not to get addicted!" and "Be careful not to forget to remove your cards!", and a voice message stating "Win limit device activated" is output. At this time, "95,000" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135.

When the count button 20 is operated in this state, counting of the number of game balls owned by the player begins, and a count notification effect is executed, as shown in Figure 147 (b). Specifically, an icon image saying "Counting in progress" and a counting quantity gauge image (at this point, there is one blue colored gauge) are displayed, and the voice saying "Counting in progress" is output. At this time, "94750" is displayed on the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135. Note that after the winning limit device is activated, the effect image is no longer displayed in front of the counting quantity gauge image.

Then, when the counted number of game balls reaches 1,000 (the first achievement effect value), as shown in FIG. 147(c), the number of blue colored gauges in the counted number gauge image increases by one to two, and the achievement effect is executed. Specifically, the sound "Yay!" corresponding to the first achievement effect value is output. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "94,000."

After that, the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image increases by one as the counted number of game balls increases by 1,000. When the counted number of game balls reaches 10,000 (the third achievement effect value), the number of blue colored gauges in the counting number gauge image reaches MAX, as shown in FIG. 147(d), and an achievement effect is executed. Specifically, the sound "Amazing!" corresponding to the third achievement effect value is output, and an effect is executed in which the colored gauge goes up one rank. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "85,000."

Then, when the 10,250th game ball is counted, the colored gauge in the count gauge image returns to one and turns yellow. After that, the number of colored gauges increases every time the counted game balls increase by 1,000, and the achievement effect and color change of the colored gauge are repeated every time the counted game balls increase by 10,000 (reaching the achievement effect value).

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 90,000 (the 11th achievement effect value), the number of the purple colored gauge in the counted number gauge image reaches MAX, and the achievement effect is executed, as shown in Figure 147 (e). Specifically, the sound "Amazing! Amazing!" corresponding to the 11th achievement effect value is output, and an effect is executed in which the colored gauge goes up one rank. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "5,000."

After that, when the counted number of game balls reaches 95,000 and the number of game balls owned by the player becomes "0," the counting end effect is executed, as shown in Figure 147 (f). Specifically, an icon image saying "Counting process completed" is displayed, and a voice message saying "Counting process completed" is output. At this time, six rainbow-colored gauges are displayed as the counting number gauge image, and the text image saying "Press the count button to count" is erased. At this time, the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 display "0."

After 5 seconds have passed, as shown in Figure 147 (g), the audio output of "Counting process completed" stops, and a congratulatory display of "Congratulations" is played to celebrate the fact that 95,000 game balls have been counted, at which point the maximum acquisition limit device will be activated, and the frame control display 125 and game ball count display 135 will display the error code "CP," indicating that the maximum acquisition limit device has been activated.

After that, the game ball count "0" and error code "CP" will be displayed repeatedly every 5 seconds. Then, when 30 seconds have passed since the counting process was completed, the "Counting process completed" icon image and the counting quantity gauge image will disappear, and the counting notification and counting completion effects will end, as shown in Figure 147 (h).

In this way, according to Figures 145 to 147, while the counting process is being carried out to count the number of game balls owned by the player, it is possible to execute counting effects (counting notification effects, achievement effects) that indicate that the counting process is in progress. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored while counting the number of game balls owned by the player, and to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, according to Figures 145 to 147, when the counting process that counts the number of game balls owned by the player is completed, it is possible to execute an end effect (counting end effect, celebration effect) that indicates that the counting process has ended. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the counting process has ended, and makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player continuing to operate the count button 20 even though the counting process has ended.

Furthermore, according to Figures 145 to 147, when a variable effect is executed while a counting notification effect is being executed, or when a counting notification effect is executed during a variable effect, the counting quantity gauge image is displayed in a restricted state (semi-transparent, on the layer behind the effect pattern 70a). This prevents the variable effect from being hindered by the counting notification effect, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, according to Figures 145 to 147, when a specific effect (development effect, SP/SPSP reach effect) that anticipates the execution of a jackpot game is executed during a variable effect, it is possible to hide the various icons (the icon in question, the hold icon) and icon display area, while continuing to display the "Counting processing in progress" icon image and the counting quantity gauge image. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that counting processing is being executed even during a specific effect.

Furthermore, according to Figures 145 to 147, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has finished, it is possible to display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible for the player to properly recognize that the acquisition limit device has been activated.

Furthermore, according to Figures 145 to 147, after the acquisition upper limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has finished, it is possible to alternately display an error code indicating that the acquisition upper limit device has been activated and the number of game balls displayed as "0" on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible for the player to properly recognize that the counting has finished.

In the counting notification effect, the counting quantity gauge image, which increases in number according to the counting quantity, may not be displayed so as to overlap the front and back of the effect pattern 70a, but may be displayed in a position where it does not overlap the front and back of the effect pattern 70a, or may be displayed in a reduced size in a position where it does not overlap the front and back of the effect pattern 70a, or may be displayed so as to overlap the front and back of the effect pattern 70a while waiting for customers, and may be displayed in a reduced size in a position where it does not overlap the front and back of the effect pattern 70a while the variable effect is being performed.

Furthermore, in the counting notification effect, instead of displaying a counting quantity gauge image whose number increases according to the counting quantity, it is also possible to display a gauge image whose length increases according to the counting quantity, or to display a number image that increases according to the counting quantity, or to display a meter image whose indicated value increases according to the counting quantity.

Furthermore, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has been completed, rather than displaying an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated on the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135, it is also possible to display an error code on either the frame control display 125 or the game ball count display 135, and display the number of game balls owned by the player on the other.

Furthermore, after the acquisition limit device has been activated and the counting of the number of game balls owned by the player has been completed, the frame control display 125 and the game ball count display 135 may not display the number of game balls owned by the player, but may instead display an error code indicating that the acquisition limit device has been activated.

In addition, the effects corresponding to the counted amount (count notification effects, achievement effects, and congratulatory effects) cannot be customized even by performing operations to customize the game effects, but it may be possible to customize one or more of the count notification effects, achievement effects, and congratulatory effects.

In addition, a hand rest may be provided near the launch handle 15 for the player to place their hand on while operating the launch handle 15, and a vibration motor (separate from the button vibration motor) may be provided in the hand rest, so that when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) reaches a predetermined number ("3" or "4") during normal game play, the vibration motor may be vibrated in a predetermined manner (for example, a weak vibration for one second) to provide an auxiliary vibration effect that prompts the player to perform a stop shot. In this case, the game effect may be customized to allow for customization of whether or not the auxiliary vibration effect is to be performed (ON/OFF) and the value of the reserved first special symbol number ("3" or "4") that will cause the auxiliary vibration effect to be performed.

Also, instead of providing a vibration motor in the hand rest, it may be provided in another position where vibrations are transmitted to the launch handle 15. Even in this case, it is advisable not to execute the auxiliary vibration effect when the number of reserved second special symbols (U2) reaches a predetermined number ("3" or "4") during normal play, or during low-probability time-saving play or high-probability time-saving play.

In addition to vibrating the vibration motor when the auxiliary vibration effect is executed, when the button vibration motor vibrates (during the jackpot confirmation vibration effect, the jackpot confirmation vibration effect, etc.), the vibration motor may be made to vibrate in the same manner as the button vibration motor, or in a manner (vibration duration, vibration intensity) different from that of the button vibration motor.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will now be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
Here, differences from the first embodiment will be described, and explanations of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted. The differences from the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment are mainly in the game characteristics of the gaming machine 1 and the control specifications of the frame control board 120.

(Game characteristics of the gaming machine of the second embodiment)
The game characteristics of the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 148. Figure 148 is a game flow showing the game characteristics of the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is a so-called "type 1/type 2" machine. It extracts special symbol determination information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start slot 45 or the second start slot 47 to determine whether a jackpot has occurred. If a jackpot determination determines that a special symbol has occurred, the display of the special symbols changes, resulting in a static display of the jackpot special symbol. A jackpot game is executed in which multiple rounds of play are played to open the large prize slot 50 in a maximum of 29.5 seconds. If a small prize is determined to have occurred, a small prize game is executed in which the large prize slot 50 is opened in a maximum of 1.8 seconds. If a gaming ball enters a specific area within the large prize slot 50 during the small prize game, a jackpot game is executed in which multiple rounds of play are played to open the large prize slot 50 in a maximum of 29.5 seconds, with the small prize game being the first round. If a loss is determined, neither the jackpot game nor the small prize game is executed.

When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a situation where a jackpot determination cannot be made, such as during the display of a changing special symbol, during a jackpot game, or during a small jackpot game, the right to make a jackpot determination (extracted special symbol determination information) is stored as the first special symbol reserve memory (first special symbol reserve number: U1). Also, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 47 in a situation where a jackpot determination cannot be made, such as during the display of a changing special symbol, during a jackpot game, or during a small jackpot game, the right to make a jackpot determination (extracted special symbol determination information) is stored as the second special symbol reserve memory (first special symbol reserve number: U2). Furthermore, when both the first special symbol reserved memory (number of reserved first special symbols: U1) and the second special symbol reserved memory (number of reserved first special symbols: U2) exist, the jackpot determination based on the second special symbol reserved memory (number of reserved first special symbols: U2) is performed in priority over the jackpot determination based on the first special symbol reserved memory (number of reserved first special symbols: U1). Note that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not performed in parallel, and only the variable display of one of the special symbols is performed.

The game states during gameplay are a "normal game state" which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, a "normal time-saving game state" which is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state, and a "special time-saving game state" which is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

In the normal game state, normal time-saving game state, and special time-saving game state, the probability of being determined to be a win in the auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) based on the game ball entering the normal gate 44 is the same. Furthermore, in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state, the average time for the variable display of the normal symbol based on the result of the auxiliary game judgment is the same, and in the normal time-saving game state, the average time for the variable display of the normal symbol based on the result of the auxiliary game judgment is shorter than in the normal game state and the special time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the auxiliary game executed when a winning normal symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the second start gate 47 can be opened in a manner that is more advantageous in the special time-saving game state than in the normal game state, and the second start gate 47 can be opened in a manner that is significantly more advantageous in the normal time-saving game state than in the special time-saving game state.

In the normal game state, left-handed play, in which the game ball is fired aiming at the left area of the game area 5a, is advantageous to the player, and the presentation control board 130 controls the presentation mode to either normal mode, C-time mode, or result mode. Furthermore, when the game transitions from the normal game state in result mode after the normal time-saving game state ends to the normal game state in C-time mode, a left-handed play notification is issued, suggesting that the game ball should be fired aiming at the left area of the game area 5a, and a right-handed play notification is not issued, suggesting that the game ball should be fired aiming at the right area of the game area 5a.

The normal time-saving game state is advantageous for the player when playing with a right-hand hit, in which the game ball is fired aiming at the right area of the game area 5a. The game ends when the effect control board 130 switches the effect mode to RUSH mode and displays the second special symbol in a variable manner seven times (seven time-saving times). In addition, a right-hand hit notification is issued, suggesting that the game ball should be fired aiming at the right area of the game area 5a.

The special time-saving game state is advantageous for the player when left-handed play, in which the game ball is fired at the left side of the game area 5a, is activated. The special time-saving game state ends when the presentation mode controlled by the presentation control board 130 is switched to normal mode and the first special symbol has been displayed 700 times (700 time-saving cycles). Furthermore, a left-handed notification suggesting that the game ball should be fired at the left side of the game area 5a is not executed, and a right-handed notification suggesting that the game ball should be fired at the right side of the game area 5a is executed during the execution of an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 47 opens in a specific manner (long opening).

In the gaming machine 1 of this second embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is first powered on or when power is turned on with an RWM clear (RWM clear with a setting change, or RWM clear without a setting change), the machine is controlled to a normal gaming state in normal mode.

In the normal game mode of normal mode or C-time mode, when the first special jackpot symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, a first jackpot game is executed in which four rounds of play are played, and when the second special jackpot symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a second jackpot game is executed in which ten rounds of play are played. When the first jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal game mode of C-time mode, and when the second jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game mode of RUSH mode.

In addition, in the normal game mode of normal mode or C-time mode, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, control is made to the special time-saving game state of normal mode, and if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol, control is made to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

In the special time-saving game state of normal mode, when the first special jackpot symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, a first jackpot game is executed in which four rounds of play are played, and when the second special jackpot symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a second jackpot game is executed in which ten rounds of play are played. When the first jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal game state of C-time mode, and when the second jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state of normal mode, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, or if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a static display, the static display is invalidated and the special time-saving game state of normal mode is maintained. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol has been executed 700 times, control is returned to the normal game state of C-time mode.

In the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode, when the first special jackpot symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, a first jackpot game is executed in which four rounds of play are played, and when the second special jackpot symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a second jackpot game is executed in which ten rounds of play are played. When the first jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal game state of C-time mode, and when the second jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

In addition, in the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode, if the third jackpot special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 47, a third jackpot game is executed, in which 10 rounds of play are played, and if the small jackpot special symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a small jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, if a game ball enters a specific area within the large winning port 50 during the small jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game is executed. Then, when the third jackpot game or the fourth jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

In addition, in the normal time-saving play state of RUSH mode, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a static display as a result of the first special symbol changing display based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 45, or if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a static display, the static display is invalidated and the normal time-saving play state of normal mode is maintained. Then, when the special symbol changing display has been executed seven times, if there is a second reserved memory (remaining reserved) based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 47, the game is controlled to the normal play state of result mode, and if there is no second reserved memory, the game is controlled to the normal play state of C-time mode.

In addition, in the normal game state of result mode, if the third jackpot special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second special symbol reservation memory (remaining reservation) resulting from the game ball entering the second start port 47 during the normal time-saving game state, a third jackpot game is executed, in which 10 rounds of play are played, and if the small jackpot special symbol is displayed as a static display, a small jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, if a game ball enters a specific area within the large prize entry port 50 during the small jackpot game, a fourth jackpot game is executed. Then, when the third jackpot game or the fourth jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

In this way, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a static display as a result of the first special symbol changing display based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 during normal time-saving play mode, or if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed as a static display, the static display is invalidated and the normal time-saving play mode in normal mode is maintained. Therefore, even if the first special symbol reserved memory exists when transitioning to the normal time-saving play mode, or if a gaming ball is accidentally placed into the first starting hole 45 during normal time-saving play mode, the normal time-saving play mode can be continued without ending, making play more enjoyable.

In addition, if the first time-saving losing special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the special time-saving game state, or if the second time-saving losing special symbol is displayed as a static display, the static display is invalidated and the normal mode special time-saving game state is maintained. This prevents the inconvenience of the number of time-saving times (700) being reset due to control being newly established in the special time-saving game state, preventing the special time-saving game state from ending, and makes the game more enjoyable.

In addition, when a variable display of the first special symbol is executed in which the first time-saving miss special symbol or the second time-saving miss special symbol is stopped and displayed during the special time-saving game state, there are cases in which the reach effect is not executed during the variable display, and cases in which various reach effects are executed, and it is advisable to set the probability that various reach effects are not executed higher than the probability that various reach effects are executed.

(Various determination tables related to special symbols)
Using Figure 149, various judgment tables related to special patterns will be explained.

(Special symbol jackpot determination table)
Figure 149(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) the special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (entry) of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 149(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) the special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (entry) of the game ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 149(a) and 149(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, current probability state, random number value for jackpot determination, and jackpot determination result (jackpot, small win, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate winning probability for a "jackpot" and the approximate winning probability for a "small win."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in Figure 149(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in Figure 149(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot," "small jackpot," or "miss" based on the current setting value, probability state, and random number value for jackpot determination.

Note that while the jackpot determination table in the second embodiment uses two setting levels, this is not limiting; six setting levels may be used, or the setting function may not be implemented. Also, while the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not set "small win" as a jackpot determination result, "small win" may be set.

(Special symbol determination table)
Figure 149(c) is a special pattern determination table for a big win for determining the type of special pattern when a big win is determined, Figure 149(d) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined, and Figure 149(e) is a special pattern determination table for a small win for determining the type of special pattern when a small win is determined.

As shown in Figures 149(c) to 149(e), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, the random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol stop data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbol "01" is the first jackpot special symbol that triggers the first jackpot game, the special symbol "02" is the second jackpot special symbol that triggers the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "04" is the third jackpot special symbol that triggers the third jackpot game. The special symbol "10" is the first time-saving miss special symbol that triggers a transition to a special time-saving game state, the special symbol "11" is the second time-saving miss special symbol that triggers a transition to a normal time-saving game state, and the special symbol "20" is the normal miss special symbol that triggers no jackpot game. The special symbol "30" is the small win special symbol that triggers a small win game.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in one of Figures 149(c) to 149(e), and determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and the special symbol stop data and special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and sends the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figures 149(c) to 149(e) is that it sets the special symbols for losses as normal loss special symbols that do not change the game state, and time-saving loss special symbols that transition to time-saving game state. By doing this, even if there is a loss that does not result in a big win or small win game, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in Figures 149(c) to 149(e) is that the special time-saving failure symbols for transitioning to the time-saving game state include a first special time-saving failure symbol that transitions to a special time-saving game state, and a second special time-saving failure symbol that transitions to a normal time-saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the special time-saving game state. By doing this, even when transitioning to the time-saving game state, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied, making the game more enjoyable.

(Summary of various judgment tables related to special symbols)
The first feature of the various judgment tables related to the special symbols shown in Fig. 149 is that when a missing variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the normal game state, the first time-saving missing special symbol or the second time-saving missing special symbol is always displayed in a stopped state, and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state or the special time-saving game state. By doing this, the first time the first special symbol is displayed in the normal game state, the player's expectations can be high, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A second feature of the various judgment tables related to the special symbols shown in Figure 149 is that when a missing variable display of the second special symbol is performed during normal game play, the normal missing special symbol is always displayed stationary, and the normal game play state is maintained. By doing this, when the game is controlled to the normal game play state after the time-saving game play state ends, even if the second reserve memory (remaining reserve) remains, the game will not be controlled to the time-saving game play state due to this second reserve memory. Therefore, the game can be controlled to the normal game play state and the player can be encouraged to place a game ball into the first starting hole 45, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine 1 while also increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Various determination tables related to normal symbols)
Using Figure 150, various judgment tables related to normal patterns will be explained.

(Normal symbol winning table)
Figure 150 (a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols for determining (making a hit determination) the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the game ball entering (passing through) the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in Figure 150(a), the win determination table for normal symbols associates a win determination random number value with a win determination result (win, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning if the result is a "win" and the approximate probability of winning if the result is a "miss."

The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table for normal symbols shown in Figure 150 and determines whether it is a "win" or "lose" based on the random number value for determining a jackpot.

(Normal symbol determination table)
Figure 150(b) is a normal symbol determination table for determining the type of normal symbol.

As shown in Figure 150 (b), the normal symbol determination table associates the current game state, the result of the win determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, the normal symbol determination result, the stop normal symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol that does not result in the execution of an auxiliary game, while the normal symbols "1" and "2" are winning normal symbols that result in the execution of an auxiliary game.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in Figure 150(b), and determines the type of normal symbol to be stopped and the normal symbol data and normal symbol designation command based on the type of normal symbol to be stopped and the normal symbol determination random number value, and transmits the normal symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
Figure 150 (c) is a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 150 (c), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the current game state, the result of the win determination, a random number value for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates the normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 150 (c), determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (normal symbol fluctuation time) based on the win determination result and the random number value for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and displays the normal symbol fluctuation according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, while also sending a normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 150 (c) is that the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the normal time-saving game state is shorter than the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the normal game state. This clearly differentiates between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state, while allowing the auxiliary game to be executed immediately after entering the normal time-saving game state and causing the game ball to enter the second start slot 47, making the game more interesting.

A second feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 150 (c) is that the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the special time-saving game state is longer than the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the normal time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to clearly differentiate between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, while also differing the degree of advantage to the player even in the same time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 150 (c) is that the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in normal game mode is the same as the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in special time-saving game mode. By doing this, it is less likely to feel strange even if the special time-saving game mode is made to look like the normal game mode, which broadens the range of presentation for the gaming machine and makes gameplay more enjoyable.

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
Figure 150 (d) is an auxiliary game control table for controlling the auxiliary game that converts the second starting hole 47 into an open state where the game ball can enter.

As shown in Figure 150 (d), the auxiliary game control table associates the current game status, stop map data, the number of times the second start opening 47 has been opened, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the first opening time of the second start opening 47, the interval time between the first and second openings of the second start opening 47, the second opening time of the second start opening 47, and the ending time of the auxiliary game.

The main CPU 110a refers to the auxiliary game control table shown in Figure 150 (d), identifies the stop normal data, number of openings, opening time, first opening time of the second start slot 47, interval time, second opening time of the second start slot 47, and ending time, and executes the auxiliary game.

A first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in Figure 150 (d) is that the opening mode of the second start opening 47 when an auxiliary game is executed with stop normal map data "01" in normal game mode is the same as the opening mode of the second start opening 47 when an auxiliary game is executed with stop normal map data "01" in special time-saving game mode. By doing this, it is less likely to feel strange even if the special time-saving game mode is made to look like the normal game mode, the range of presentation of the gaming machine can be expanded, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

A second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in Figure 150 (d) is that in the special time-saving game state, the opening mode of the second start opening 47 when the auxiliary game is executed with stop normal map data "02" is more advantageous to the player than the opening mode of the second start opening 47 when the auxiliary game is executed with stop normal map data "01". By doing this, the opening performance of the second start opening 47 in the auxiliary game can be improved in the special time-saving game state compared to the normal game state, reducing frustration that the time-saving game state is not more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and making the game more enjoyable.

(Summary of various judgment tables related to normal symbols)
A first feature of the various judgment tables relating to normal symbols shown in Fig. 150 is that when a normal symbol variable display is made in the special time-saving game state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 than when a normal symbol variable display is made in the normal game state, and when a normal symbol variable display is made in the normal time-saving game state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 than when a normal symbol variable display is made in the special time-saving game state. By doing this, it is possible to differentiate between each game state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the special time-shortened game state, the opening mode of the second start opening 47 allows the player to play an auxiliary game that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. However, it is also possible to play only auxiliary games in which the opening mode of the second start opening 47 is the same as in the normal game state. In this case, the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the special time-shortened game state may be longer than the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the normal game state and shorter than the average fluctuation time of normal symbols in the normal game state (for example, the fluctuation time in the case of a miss and/or a win may be set to 59 seconds), or the probability of a win in the special time-shortened game state and the normal time-shortened game state may be set higher than the probability of a win in the normal game state (for example, the probability of a win in the normal game state may be set to 254/256, and the probability of a win in the special time-shortened game state and the normal game state may be set to 255/256).

(Main processing of frame control board)
The main processing of the frame control board 120 of the second embodiment will be described using Figures 151 and 152. Figure 151 is a flowchart showing the main processing (pre-loop processing) of the frame control board 120 of the second embodiment, and is a flowchart showing the main processing (pre-loop processing, loop processing) of the frame control board 120 of the second embodiment.

The main processing of the frame control board 120 consists of pre-loop processing from steps W1 to W25, and loop processing from steps W26 to W39, which is repeatedly executed after the pre-loop processing.

First, the frame control CPU 120a sets the stack pointer in step W1, performs CPU initialization such as setting the internal registers in step W2, and then allows access to the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c in step W3.

In step W4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has been operated, processing proceeds to step W8. If the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated, processing proceeds to step W5, determining whether a game ball count backup flag indicating that the number of game balls owned by the player has been backed up is present in the RWM area of the frame control RAM 120c. If the game ball count backup flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W8, assuming that this is the first time the power has been turned on. If the game ball count backup flag is present, processing proceeds to step W6.

In step W6, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the game ball count memory area set in the frame control RAM 120c, which stores the number of game balls owned by the player. In step W7, it compares the calculated checksum of the game ball count memory area with the checksum of the game ball count memory area calculated at the time of the previous power outage and stored in the frame control RAM 120c to determine whether the checksum is normal. If the checksum is normal, it does not initialize (clear to 0) the number of game balls owned by the player (game value) and proceeds to step W9. If the checksum is abnormal, it proceeds to step W8.

In step W8, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player and stored in the game ball count storage area due to either the operation of the game ball count clear switch 121 or the abnormality (data abnormality) of the checksum in the game ball count storage area.

In step W9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has been operated. If the RWM clear switch 111a has been operated, processing proceeds to step W13. If the RWM clear switch 111a has not been operated, processing proceeds to step W10, determining whether a game information backup flag indicating that the game information stored in the game information storage area of the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up is present. If the game information backup flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W13, assuming that this is the first time the power has been turned on. If the game information backup flag is present, processing proceeds to step W11.

In step W11, the frame control CPU 120a calculates the checksum of the game information storage area, and in step W12, compares it with the checksum of the game information storage area calculated the previous time the power was turned off and stored in the frame control RAM 120c to determine whether the checksum is normal. If the checksum is normal, the game information storage area is not initialized (cleared to 0) and processing proceeds to step W14. If the checksum is abnormal, processing proceeds to step W13.

In step W13, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the game information stored in the game information storage area (a buffer area primarily used for sending and receiving electronic messages) for either the RWM clear switch 111a being operated or the checksum of the game information storage area being abnormal (data abnormal).

In step W14, the frame control CPU 120a initializes (clears to 0) the working area of the RWM area, and in step W15 determines whether there is a security information backup flag indicating that the security information stored in the security information storage area of the frame control RAM 120c has been backed up. If there is a security information backup flag, the security information storage area is not initialized (cleared to 0) and processing proceeds to step W17. If there is no security information backup flag, in step W16, the security information stored in the security information storage area is initialized (cleared to 0) assuming that this is the first time the power is turned on.

In step W17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player was initialized (cleared to 0) in step W8. If the number of game balls was not initialized, the process proceeds to step W20. If the number of game balls was initialized, the game ball count clear detection flag in security information 2 is turned ON (set), and in step W19, the number of times security information 2 has been output is set. As a result, security information 2 indicating that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player has been initialized is sent to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (to the dedicated unit 170 or hall computer).

In step W20, the frame control CPU 120a performs an internal/external work area initialization process to set initial values in the internal and external work areas of the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W21, it reads the frame identification information (frame control chip ID number, frame control chip product code, frame control chip manufacturer code) unique to the frame control unit 120m, transfers it to the internal work area, and starts the interrupt timer used for timer interrupts.

In step W22, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area is "0." If the number of game balls is not "0" (if game balls remain), the game machine 1 will not enter ball removal mode, which performs the ball removal operation for game balls circulated within the game machine 1, and proceeds to step W25. If the number of game balls is "0," the game machine 1 proceeds to step W23.

In step W23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. If the ball removal switch 122 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step W25, assuming that the game will not transition to ball removal mode. If the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, the game performs a ball removal mode transition setting process. Specifically, the game performs a process to set the ball removal mechanism control flag referenced in the game ball circulation management process described below, set the ball removal mode time (1 minute), which is the execution time for the ball removal mode, and transition to ball removal mode. As a result, the lifting and polishing device 95 is driven for a predetermined period (1 minute) by the game ball circulation switch management process and motor drive process described below, and media discharge control is performed to discharge the game balls circulated within the game machine 1 by the ball circulation mechanism 90 out of the game machine 1.

In step W25, the frame control CPU 120a performs error ball non-count mode check processing. Specifically, when game balls are collected from the outlet 39 due to an insufficient number of game balls circulating within the gaming machine 1, processing is performed to set the game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a not to be counted until the insufficient number sensor 94f is turned ON, so that an abnormal number of balls fired error does not occur.

The frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts in step W26 and performs power-off processing in step W27. Specifically, it determines whether a power-down signal has been input from the power-off detection circuit on the power supply board 160, and if a power-down signal has been input, it calculates various checksums, stores the calculated checksums and backup flags in the frame control RAM 120c, and waits until the power is completely cut off.

The frame control CPU 120a permits an interrupt in step W28, and performs launch stop control processing in step W29. Specifically, it performs processing to permit or stop the launch of game balls by the launching device 92 depending on the game situation. Details of the launch stop control processing will be described later.

In step W30, the frame control CPU 120a performs main control board communication processing. Specifically, it receives and analyzes messages from the main control board 110, stores them in the frame control RAM 120c, and sends a message response to the main control board 110. Details of the main control board communication processing will be described later.

In step W31, the frame control CPU 120a performs gaming machine information management processing. Specifically, it analyzes the gaming machine information received from the main control board 110 and creates gaming information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the gaming machine information management processing will be described later.

In step W32, the frame control CPU 120a performs dedicated unit communication processing. Specifically, it receives a message from the dedicated unit 170, generates data according to the received content, and transmits the message. Details of the dedicated unit communication processing will be described later.

In step W33, the frame control CPU 120a performs game ball count display control processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as creating data to be displayed on the game ball count display 135 in the game ball count LED control processing described below. Details of the game ball count display control processing will be described later.

In step W34, the frame control CPU 120a performs an in-area error resolution process. Specifically, it performs a process to resolve various errors detected by the in-area program depending on the operation state of the error resolution switch 123 and the detection state of the input port. Details of the in-area error resolution process will be described later.

In step W35, the frame control CPU 120a performs game ball circulation management processing. Specifically, it controls the lifting and polishing device 95 according to the detection status of various switches and sensors, and performs processing to circulate game balls within the gaming machine 1.

In step W36, the frame control CPU 120a performs out-of-area error management processing. Specifically, it performs processing to detect and resolve various errors using the out-of-area program. Details of the out-of-area error management processing will be described later.

In step W37, the frame control CPU 120a performs fraud detection processing. Specifically, it detects the occurrence of an error due to fraud involving game balls on the gaming machine 1 and clears the detected error. Details of the fraud detection processing will be described later.

In step W38, the frame control CPU 120a performs performance information management processing. Specifically, it accumulates information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and calculates performance information from the accumulated information.

In step W39, the frame control CPU 120a performs performance display monitor control processing and then proceeds to step W26. Specifically, it aggregates the game information (performance information such as normal base values) to be displayed on the frame control display 125, and controls the display of the game information (performance information such as normal base values), various error codes, the number of game balls owned by the player, etc. that has been aggregated on the frame control display 125.

In this way, if the gaming ball count clear switch 121, which can be operated by a gaming facility staff member, is operated when power is first supplied to the gaming machine 1 (at the start of power supply), the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player, which is stored in the gaming ball count memory area (first memory area), is initialized. If the RWM clear switch 111a, which can be operated by a gaming facility staff member, is operated when power is first supplied to the gaming machine 1 (at the start of power supply), the game-related information (predetermined information) stored in the game information memory area (second memory area) is initialized. This allows for optimal control processing of the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, it is possible to separate and initialize important data, such as the number of gaming balls (gaming value), which can be considered the player's assets, from game-related information (predetermined information), which is unrelated to the player's assets, thereby improving convenience for the gaming facility. It also makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as accidentally operating the RWM clear switch 111a and resetting the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, causing the player to suffer disadvantages.

In addition, the number of game balls (game value) stored in the game ball count memory area is initialized first based on the operation of the game ball count clear switch 121, and then the game information (predetermined information) stored in the game information memory area is initialized based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. As a result, processing in response to the operation of the game ball count clear switch 121 implemented on the frame control board 120 can be prioritized over processing in response to the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, which is not implemented on the frame control board 120, making it possible to smoothly carry out control processing after the start of power supply while improving control efficiency.

Furthermore, if the game ball count clear switch 121 has not been operated when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (at the start of power supply), the checksum of the game ball count storage area is calculated, and the calculated checksum of the game ball count storage area is compared with the checksum of the game ball count storage area stored in the frame control RAM 120c at the time of the previous power outage to determine whether the checksum is normal. Even if the checksum is abnormal (data is abnormal), the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area is cleared. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the number of game balls stored in the game ball count storage area due to the power supply being stopped and then restarted, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of game play continuing in that state, and to provide fair play.

Furthermore, if the RWM clear switch 111a has not been operated when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (at the start of power supply), the checksum of the game information storage area is calculated, and the calculated checksum of the game information storage area is compared with the checksum of the game information storage area stored in the frame control RAM 120c at the time of the previous power outage to determine whether the checksum is normal. Even if the checksum is abnormal (data is abnormal), the game-related information (predetermined information) stored in the game information storage area is cleared. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the game-related information stored in the game information storage area due to the power supply being stopped and then restarted, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of game play being continued in that state, and to provide fair play.

In addition, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (at the start of power supply), the working area set in the RWM area within the frame control RAM 120 is initialized even if the game ball count clear switch 121 or RWM clear switch 111a is not operated. This prevents the inconvenience of control proceeding with incomplete data remaining in the working area, making it possible to provide fair gaming.

In addition, even if the game ball count clear switch 121 or RWM clear switch 111a is operated when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (when power supply starts), the security information stored in the security information storage area set in the RWM area outside the frame control RAM is not initialized. As a result, information related to the occurrence of security abnormalities that occurred before power supply to the gaming machine 1 was stopped and the determination of security abnormalities can be carried over even after power supply is resumed, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities that occur when power supply is repeatedly stopped and restarted, and ensuring the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, after power supply starts and before the timer interrupt is executed (before the interrupt timer is started), the number of game balls (game value) is initialized based on the operation of the game ball count clear switch 121, game-related information (predetermined information) is initialized based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and security information is initialized. This makes it possible to avoid problems occurring when initializing various types of information, and allows control processing to be carried out appropriately.

In addition, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started (at the start of power supply), provided that the ball removal switch 122 is operated, the gaming machine will transition to a ball removal mode in which play is disabled, and media discharge control (ball removal mode transition setting process, gaming ball circulation switch management process, motor drive process, etc.) will be executed to cause the ball circulation mechanism 90 to discharge gaming balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 out of the gaming machine 1. This means that gaming balls remaining within the gaming machine 1 can be discharged before the gaming machine 1 is disposed of (discarded or resold), improving convenience for gaming parlors.

Furthermore, when the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c does not contain any game balls owned by the player (the game value is "0"), it is possible to transition to a ball removal mode in which play is not possible and initiate media discharge control. This makes it possible to optimally perform control processing related to the game value owned by the player. It is also possible to prevent the occurrence of unnatural situations such as the player still having game balls (game value) that allow game balls to be fired, even though the mode has transitioned to a ball removal mode in which play is not possible and media discharge control is being executed. It is also possible to prevent inconveniences such as players mistakenly believing that they have no game balls (game value) remaining due to the execution of media discharge control and disposing of the gaming machine 1 (discarding, reselling, etc.), thereby improving the convenience of gaming parlors.

In addition, if the player owns game balls (game value), the system does not determine whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated. This makes it possible to achieve more efficient control than determining whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated before determining whether the player owns game balls.

Furthermore, the main control board communication process, which receives and analyzes messages from the main control board 110, stores them in the frame control RAM 120c, and sends a message response to the main control board 110, is executed first, and the dedicated unit communication process, which receives messages from the dedicated unit 170, generates data according to the received content, and sends the message later, is executed. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as communication with the main control board 110, which controls the progress of the game, being interrupted by communication with the dedicated unit 170, which could result in delays in updating the number of game balls owned by the player (such as updates based on winning), or even the update of the number of game balls being stopped.

Note that the processing order is to initialize the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, which is stored in the game ball count storage area, before initializing the game-related information (predetermined information) stored in the game information storage area, but the processing order may be reversed.

Furthermore, when determining whether there is a data anomaly in the number of game balls stored in the game ball count memory area, the checksums at the time the power supply is stopped and restarted are compared. However, rather than determining whether there is a data anomaly using the checksum, it is also possible to directly compare the number of game balls at the time the power supply is stopped and restarted, or to determine whether there is a data anomaly using some other method.

Furthermore, when determining whether there is a data anomaly in the game information stored in the game information storage area, the checksums at the time the power supply is stopped and restarted are compared. However, rather than determining whether there is a data anomaly using the checksum, it is also possible to directly compare the information stored in a specific area of the game information storage area at the time the power supply is stopped and restarted, or to determine whether there is a data anomaly using some other method.

In addition, the processing order is to determine whether the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is absent (is "0") in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and then to determine whether the ball removal switch 122 has been operated, but the processing order may be reversed.

(Frame control board firing stop control processing)
153, a description will be given of the firing stop control process included in the loop process of the main process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the firing stop control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W29-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal mode is currently in effect. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, which indicates that the ball removal mode is in effect, is ON (set). If the ball removal mode is in effect, processing proceeds to step W29-8. If the ball removal mode is not in effect, processing proceeds to step W29-2.

In step W29-2, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an abnormality (such as a broken wire or short circuit) has occurred in the subtraction port switch 91c, which detects the game ball being sent to the launcher 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending it to the launcher 92. If an abnormality has occurred in the subtraction port switch 91c, processing proceeds to step W29-8; if no abnormality has occurred in the subtraction port switch 91c, processing proceeds to step W29-3.

In step W29-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the VL signal, which is used to confirm the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, is OFF (not connected). If the VL signal is OFF, it is assumed that communication with the dedicated unit 170 (sending gaming machine installation information notifications, sending gaming machine information notifications, sending hall control/fraud monitoring information notifications, sending counting notifications, receiving loan notifications, and sending loan receipt result responses) is not possible, and processing proceeds to step W29-8. If the VL signal is not OFF (ON), it is assumed that communication with the dedicated unit 170 is possible, and processing proceeds to step W29-4.

In step W29-4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count button 20 has been operated. Specifically, it determines whether the count button switch 20a is ON. If the count button 20 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step W29-7. If the count button 20 has been operated, the process proceeds to step W29-5.

In step W29-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player is 65,536 or more. If the number of game balls is 65,536 or more, processing proceeds to step W29-7. If the number of game balls is not 65,536 or more, processing proceeds to step W29-6, determining whether the number of game balls owned by the player is less than 1,000. If the number of game balls is less than 1,000, processing proceeds to step W29-8. If the number of game balls is not less than 1,000, processing proceeds to step W29-7.

In step W29-7, the frame control CPU 120a performs a launch permission process to allow the launching device 92 to launch game balls. Specifically, the frame control board 120 outputs (ON) a launch permission signal to the launching device 92 to allow the launching device 92 to launch game balls, and ends this launch stop control process. This allows the launching device 92 to launch game balls.

In step W29-8, the frame control CPU 120a performs a launch stop process to stop (not allow) the launching of game balls by the launching device 92. Specifically, the frame control board 120 stops (turns OFF) the launch permission signal that allows the launching device 92 to launch game balls. The current launch stop control process is then terminated. This stops the launching of game balls by the launching device 92.

In this way, the launch stop control process, which allows or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launching device 92, prohibits the launch of game balls when the medium discharge process (the ball removal mode described above) is executed to discharge game balls circulated within the gaming machine 1 by the ball circulation mechanism 90 from the gaming machine 1. However, it is possible to permit the launch of game balls when the counting trigger reduction process (such as the counting trigger game ball number subtraction process described below) is executed, which sends game ball count information (counting notification) to the dedicated unit 170 to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player. This allows for optimal control processes related to the game value owned by the player. It also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as game balls being launched even during the medium discharge process (ball removal mode), when game play is not possible. Furthermore, even while the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player is being counted, game balls can be fired using the number of game balls owned by the player, making it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine 1 while improving convenience for players.

In addition, if an abnormality (such as a broken wire or short circuit) occurs in the subtraction port switch 91c, which detects the game balls being sent to the launching device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a for sending them to the launching device 92, the launch of the game balls is prohibited, but if no abnormality has occurred in the subtraction port switch 91c, the launch of the game balls is permitted. Therefore, the launch of game balls can be permitted with the assurance that the launching device 92 is capable of launching game balls, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the launching device 92 performing a launch operation even when the launch of game balls cannot be guaranteed.

In addition, if the VL signal, which confirms the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, is OFF (not connected), the launch of game balls is prohibited, and if the VL signal is ON (connected), the launch of game balls is permitted. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of game balls being launched when communication between the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 is not possible.

In addition, if the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is less than the specified number (less than 1,000, which is more than 250 counted by pressing and holding the counting button 20), the launch of game balls is prohibited, but if the number is equal to or greater than the specified number (1,000), the launch of game balls is permitted. This makes it possible to count the number of game balls owned by the player and launch game balls at the same time, ensuring convenience for players while improving the operation of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, the launch stop control process, which allows or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 92, is included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. Therefore, if an event occurs that requires permission or prohibition of launch, it is possible to immediately permit or prohibit launch.

In addition, when a counting trigger reduction process (such as the counting trigger game ball number subtraction process described below) is executed, which sends game ball counting information (counting notification) to the dedicated unit 170 to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, the launch of game balls may be prohibited without determining whether the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is less than the specified number. In this way, the number of game balls (game value) intended by the player can be counted, providing a sense of satisfaction to the player.

In addition, when determining whether the number of game balls owned by a player is equal to or greater than the specified number, the specified number is set to 1,000. However, the specified number may be more or less than 1,000, but it is desirable that the number be at least greater than the 250 balls counted by pressing and holding the count button 20.

(Main control board communication processing of frame control board)
154, a description will be given of the main control board communication processing included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the main control board communication processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W30-1, the frame control CPU 120a clears the prize ball count buffer for device operation, which is set in the frame control RAM 120c and stores the number of prize balls obtained as a result of the opening of the second start opening 47 and the large prize opening 50. In step W30-2, the frame control CPU 120a clears the prize ball count buffer for continuous device operation, which is set in the frame control RAM 120c and stores the number of prize balls obtained as a result of the opening of the large prize opening 50 due to a jackpot game.

In step W30-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a reception timeout (no reception for 1000 ms) has occurred for the message sent from the main control board 110. If a reception timeout has not occurred, it assumes that no internal machine communication error has occurred and proceeds to step W30-6. If a reception timeout has occurred, it determines in step W30-4 whether the game is currently in ball removal mode. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, indicating that the game is in ball removal mode, is ON (set). If the game is in ball removal mode, normal message communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 is not taking place, so it assumes that no internal machine communication error has occurred and proceeds to step W30-6. If the game is in ball removal mode, it assumes that an internal machine communication error has occurred and sets an internal machine communication error flag in the frame control RAM 120c in step W30-5, indicating that an internal machine communication error has occurred.

In step W30-6, the frame control CPU 120a performs main control board message reception processing. Specifically, it receives the message sent from the main control board 110, and if the message is received successfully, it sets the reception completion flag in the main control information reception flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W30-7, the frame control CPU 120a checks the main control information reception flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W30-8, determines whether message reception from the main control board has been completed. Specifically, it determines whether the reception completion flag is set in the main control information reception flag. If message reception has been completed, processing proceeds to step W30-9; if message reception has not been completed, the current main control board communication processing is terminated.

In step W30-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the received message is a gaming machine installation information notification. If it is not a gaming machine installation information notification, it assumes that it may be a gaming machine information notification and proceeds to step W30-14. If it is a gaming machine installation information notification, it proceeds to step W30-10.

In step W30-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming machine information notification has been received. Specifically, it determines whether the gaming machine information notification reception completion flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If a gaming machine information notification has been received, processing proceeds to step W30-23. If a gaming machine information notification has not been received, processing proceeds to step W30-11, determining whether the message length of the received gaming machine installation information notification is "25," which is the normal message length for gaming machine installation information. If the message length is not "25," processing proceeds to step W30-23. If the message length is "25," processing proceeds to step W30-12.

In step W30-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the serial number of the received gaming machine installation information notification is "0," which is the serial number for a normal gaming machine installation information notification. If the serial number is not "0," the process proceeds to step W30-23. If the serial number is "0," the process proceeds to step W30-13, where it performs processing upon reception of the gaming machine installation information notification message, and then proceeds to step W30-20. Specifically, it checks whether reception of the gaming machine installation information notification has been completed successfully, and if reception has been completed, it sets a reception completion flag for the gaming machine installation information notification and performs processing to start message communication with the dedicated unit 170.

In step W30-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the received message is a gaming machine information notification. If it is not a gaming machine information notification, processing proceeds to step W30-23. If it is a gaming machine information notification, processing proceeds to step W30-15.

In step W30-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a gaming machine installation information notification has been received. Specifically, it determines whether a gaming machine installation information notification reception completion flag has been set in the frame control RAM 120c. If a gaming machine installation information notification has been received, processing proceeds to step W30-16; if a gaming machine installation information notification has not been received, processing proceeds to step W30-23.

In step W30-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the message length of the received gaming machine information notification is greater than "21". If the message length is greater than "21", the received message is not considered to be a gaming machine information notification and processing proceeds to step W30-23. If the message length is not greater than "21", processing proceeds to step W30-17.

In step W30-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of pieces of gaming information included in the received gaming machine information notification is 6 or more. If the number of pieces of gaming information is 6 or more, the received message is not considered to be a gaming machine information notification and processing proceeds to step W30-23. If the number of pieces of gaming information is 6 or more, processing proceeds to step W30-18.

In step W30-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the message length of the received gaming machine information notification is greater than a specific value. If the message length is greater than the specific value, the received message is not a gaming machine information notification and processing proceeds to step W30-23. If the message length is not greater than the specific value, the received message is a gaming machine information notification and processing is performed upon reception of the gaming machine information notification message in step W30-19. Specifically, it checks whether reception of the gaming machine information notification has been completed successfully, and if reception has been completed, it sets a reception completion flag for the gaming machine information notification and performs processing to start message communication with the dedicated unit 170 as necessary.

In step W30-20, the frame control CPU 120a performs main control board response message transmission processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as sending a response message corresponding to the received message to the main control board 110.

In step W30-21, the frame control CPU 120a sets a reception timeout time in the frame control RAM 120c to determine the timeout for receiving a message from the main control board 110, and in step W30-22, it clears the gaming machine communication abnormality flag, which indicates that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error has occurred, and cancels the internal gaming machine communication abnormality error.

In step W30-23, the frame control CPU 120a clears the reception completion flag set in the main control information reception flag in the frame control RAM 120c that corresponds to the currently received message, and ends the current main control board communication process.

In this way, if a reception timeout occurs (no reception for 1000 ms) for the messages sent from the main control board 110 (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification, hall control/fraud monitoring information notification), it is possible to issue an abnormality alert, assuming that an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error has occurred, in which the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 are unable to communicate normally. This makes it possible to inform gaming parlor staff that normal gameplay is not possible.

Furthermore, during ball removal mode, when normal message communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and game progress control by the main control board 110 are not performed, even if a reception timeout (no reception for 1000 ms) occurs for messages sent from the main control board 110 (gaming machine installation information notification, gaming machine information notification, hall control/fraud monitoring information notification), it is possible to determine that no abnormal communication error has occurred within the gaming machine. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary abnormality alerts from being issued during ball removal mode, when game progress control is not performed, thereby improving convenience for gaming parlor staff.

(Gaming machine information management processing of frame control board)
155, a description will be given of the gaming machine information management process included in the loop process of the main process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the gaming machine information management process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W31-1, the slot control CPU 120a processes game information data (including adding the number of game balls that trigger a win). Specifically, it analyzes the game information received from the main control board 110 and performs processes such as adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the wins at various winning slots to the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and creating game information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170. Details of game information data processing will be described later.

The frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts in step W31-2, loads the subtraction ball count counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c in step W31-3, clears the subtraction ball count counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and allows interrupts in step W31-4.

In step W31-5, the frame control CPU 120a saves the number of balls fired stored in the frame control RAM 120c, prohibits interrupts in step W31-6, adds the saved number of balls fired to the fired ball signal output counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c and stores the result in step W31-7, permits interrupts in step W31-8, and performs a firing trigger game ball number subtraction process in step W31-9. Specifically, triggered by the firing of a game ball by the launching device 92, the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball number storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is loaded, and the saved number of balls fired is subtracted from the loaded number of game balls.

In step W31-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls after subtraction is a negative value. If the number of game balls is a negative value, the number of game balls after subtraction is not stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player, and processing proceeds to step W31-12. If the number of game balls is not a negative value, the number of game balls after subtraction is stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player in step W31-11.

The frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts in step W31-12, loads the foul ball counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c in step W31-13, clears the foul ball counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and then permits interrupts in step W31-14.

In step W31-15, the frame control CPU 120a saves the number of foul balls corresponding to the loaded foul ball counter value, and in step W31-16, performs a foul ball trigger game ball count addition process. Specifically, when a foul ball is struck, the frame control CPU 120a loads the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and adds the saved number of foul balls to the loaded number of game balls.

In step W31-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls after the addition is equal to or greater than the limit value (65,535). If it is equal to or greater than the limit value, the number of game balls after the addition is not stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player, and processing proceeds to step W31-19. If it is not equal to or greater than the limit value, the number of game balls after the addition is stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player in step W31-18.

In step W31-19, the frame control CPU 120a subtracts the number of foul balls that had been saved from the number of shot balls that had been saved; in step W31-20, it stores the number of shot balls after the subtraction in the frame control RAM 120c; in step W31-21, it adds the number of shot balls after the subtraction to the number of shot balls to be sent to the dedicated unit 170; and in step W31-22, it stores the number of shot balls to be sent to the dedicated unit after the addition in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W31-23, the frame control CPU 120a loads the total number of prize balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W31-24, adds the loaded total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls for dedicated unit transmission to be sent to the dedicated unit 170. In step W31-25, the added total number of prize balls for dedicated unit transmission is stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W31-26, interrupts are prohibited.

In step W31-27, the frame control CPU 120a adds the total number of prize balls loaded to the prize ball signal output counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c and stores the result. In step W31-28, it allows an interrupt and ends this gaming machine information management process.

In this way, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player based on the game balls entering the various winning slots is added first (winning ball number addition process), and the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player based on the game balls being fired (ball feed) is subtracted later. Therefore, when the game balls are fired, the number of game balls based on the winning has already been added, which avoids the inconvenience of postponing the firing of the game balls even though they have entered the various winning slots, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is subtracted first based on the launch of game balls (ball feed), and then the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is added based on the occurrence of foul balls resulting from the launch of game balls. This allows the number of game balls owned by the player to be updated in an order that matches the progress of the game, making it possible to perform appropriate control processing.

In addition, if the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player exceeds the limit (65,535, the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte game ball number storage area), the number of game balls owned by the player will not be added, even if the number of game balls should be added based on the occurrence of a foul ball. This prevents the value after addition from being carried over and becoming a value less than the limit when stored in the 2-byte game ball number storage area, which can cause inconvenience to the player, resulting in a loss.

(Game information data processing on the frame control board)
156, a description will be given of the gaming information data processing included in the gaming machine information management processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the gaming information data processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W31-1-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of pieces of game information stored in the game information buffer for dedicated unit transmission is equal to or greater than the maximum number. Specifically, in step W31-1-13, described below, it determines the number of pieces of game information stored in the game information buffer for dedicated unit transmission. If the number is less than the maximum number, it proceeds to step W31-1-2. If the number is equal to or greater than the maximum number, it determines that no more game information can be stored in the game information buffer for dedicated unit transmission and terminates this game information data processing.

In step W31-1-2, the frame control CPU 120a acquires game information (type, count information) from the game information storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, which is the area where game machine information from the main control board 110 is stored during processing when a game machine information notification message is received. In step W31-1-3, it determines whether any new game information has been received from the main control board 110. If no new game information has been received from the main control board 110, it determines that there is no game information to store in the game information buffer for dedicated unit transmission and terminates this game information data processing. If new game information has been received from the main control board 110, in step W31-1-4, it stores the newly received game information (type, count information) from the main control board 110 in the game information buffer for performance information calculation in the frame control RAM 120c, which is used to calculate the performance information to be sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W31-1-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the type of game information newly received from the main control board 110 is winning information. If the type of game information is not winning information, processing proceeds to step W31-1-12. If the type of game information is winning information, in step W31-1-6, the main control detected winning number counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is incremented according to the number of wins in the winning information, and in step W31-1-7, it determines whether the number of prize balls according to the winning information is equal to or greater than "0." If the number of prize balls is not "0," it is assumed that there are prize balls to be awarded to the player and processing proceeds to step W31-1-8. If the number of prize balls is "0" (for example, if a prize has been awarded to a normal gate 44 with a prize ball count of "0"), it is assumed that there are no prize balls to be awarded to the player and processing proceeds to step W31-1-12.

In step W31-1-8, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to add the number of game balls that trigger a win. Specifically, when a win is triggered at any of the various winning slots (various starting slots, various general winning slots, and large winning slots), the frame control CPU 120a loads the number of game balls owned by the player that are stored in the game ball count memory area of the frame control RAM 120c, and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning information to the loaded number of game balls.

In step W31-1-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls after the addition is equal to or greater than the limit value (65,535). If it is equal to or greater than the limit value, the number of game balls after the addition is not stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player, and processing proceeds to step W31-1-1. If it is not equal to or greater than the limit value, in step W31-1-10, the number of game balls after the addition is stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player, and in step W31-1-11, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning information is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W31-1-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the type of game information newly received from the main control board 110 is information to be transmitted to a dedicated unit. If it is not information to be transmitted to a dedicated unit, processing proceeds to step W31-1-1. If it is information to be transmitted to a dedicated unit, processing proceeds to step W31-1-1. In step W31-1-13, the received game information is stored in the game information buffer for dedicated unit transmission in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W31-1-14, the number of game information pieces to be transmitted to a dedicated unit is incremented by 1, and processing proceeds to step W31-1-1.

In this way, if the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player exceeds the limit value (65,535, the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte game ball number storage area), the number of game balls owned by the player will not be added, even if prize balls should be awarded based on game balls entering various winning slots. This makes it possible to prevent the value after addition from being carried over and becoming a value less than the limit value when stored in the 2-byte game ball number storage area, resulting in inconvenience to the player, such as a loss.

(Dedicated unit communication processing for frame control board)
157 to 158, a description will be given of the dedicated unit communication processing included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. Figures 157 to 158 are flowcharts showing the dedicated unit communication processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W32-1, the frame control CPU 120a performs dedicated unit message reception processing. Specifically, it receives the message sent from the dedicated unit 170, stores it in the dedicated unit reception buffer of the frame control RAM 120c, and turns ON (sets) the reception completion flag of the dedicated unit reception control flag of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W32-2, the frame control CPU 120a checks the main control information reception completion flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W32-3, determines whether the dedicated unit communication start flag is set. If the dedicated unit communication start flag is not set, the current dedicated unit communication process is terminated. If the dedicated unit communication start flag is set, in step W32-4, it determines whether the gaming machine information notification transmission cycle timer has reached "0" (whether it is time to transmit a gaming machine information notification). If the gaming machine information notification transmission cycle timer has reached "0," processing proceeds to step W32-5. If the gaming machine information notification transmission cycle timer has not reached "0," processing proceeds to step W32-19.

In step W32-5, the frame control CPU 120a sets the gaming machine information notification transmission cycle timer and the count notification transmission cycle timer to their initial values. In step W32-6, it sets the main control information reception completion flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c to a count transmission request. In step W32-7, it checks the number of dedicated unit transmission game information pieces to be sent to the dedicated unit 170. In step W32-8, it determines whether the number of dedicated unit transmission game information pieces is "0." If the number of dedicated unit transmission game information pieces is "0," it proceeds to step W32-9. If the number of dedicated unit transmission game information pieces is not "0," it proceeds to step W32-15.

In step W32-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the gaming machine installation information notification transmission cycle timer is "0" (whether it is time to transmit a gaming machine installation information notification). If the gaming machine installation information notification transmission cycle timer is "0", processing proceeds to step W32-10; if the gaming machine installation information notification transmission cycle timer is not "0", processing proceeds to step W32-12.

In step W32-10, the frame control CPU 120a performs a gaming machine installation information notification transmission process. Specifically, it performs a process of transmitting a gaming machine installation information notification to the dedicated unit 170. Then, in step W32-11, it sets an initial value to the gaming machine installation information notification transmission cycle timer, which determines the timing of transmitting the next gaming machine installation information notification, and proceeds to step W32-16.

In step W32-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the performance information notification transmission cycle timer is "0" (whether it is time to transmit a performance information notification). If the performance information notification transmission cycle timer is "0", processing proceeds to step W32-13; if the performance information notification transmission cycle timer is not "0", processing proceeds to step W32-15.

In step W32-13, the frame control CPU 120a performs a performance information notification transmission process. Specifically, it performs a process to transmit a performance information notification to the dedicated unit 170. Then, in step W32-14, it sets an initial value to the performance information notification transmission cycle timer, which specifies the timing for transmitting the next performance information notification, and proceeds to step W32-16.

In step W32-15, the frame control CPU 120a performs a hole control/fraud monitoring information notification transmission process. Specifically, it performs a process of transmitting a hole control/fraud monitoring information notification to the dedicated unit 170. Then, the process proceeds to step W32-16.

In step W32-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the dedicated unit no-reception counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is less than a specified value. If it is not less than the specified value (if it is equal to or greater than the specified value), it determines that a communication no-response error has occurred, in which there is no response from the dedicated unit 170, and in step W32-17 it sets a dedicated unit communication no-response flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a communication no-response error has occurred, and terminates the current dedicated unit communication process. If it is less than the specified value, in step W32-18 it increments the dedicated unit no-reception counter by 1 and terminates the current dedicated unit communication process.

In step W32-19, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting notification transmission cycle timer is "0" (whether it is time to transmit a counting notification). If the counting notification transmission cycle timer is not "0," it proceeds to step W32-25. If the counting notification transmission cycle timer is "0," it proceeds to step W32-20, where it determines whether the main control information received flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c indicates a counting transmission request. If there is no counting transmission request, it proceeds to step W32-25. If there is a counting transmission request, it resets the counting transmission request in the main control information received flag in step W32-21.

The frame control CPU 120a performs a counting notification transmission process in step W32-22. Specifically, if the counting button 20 has been operated, it subtracts the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player and sends a counting notification containing information about the subtracted number of game balls to the dedicated unit 170. If the counting button 20 has not been operated, it does not subtract the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, and sends a counting notification containing information about the number of game balls being "0" to the dedicated unit 170. Details of the counting notification transmission process will be described later.

In step W32-23, the frame control CPU 120a sets an initial value to the loan notification reception valid timer, which determines whether to validate the reception of the loan notification sent from the dedicated unit 170 in response to the reception of the counting notification. In step W32-24, it clears the dedicated unit reception control flag and dedicated unit reception buffer storage pointer stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates this dedicated unit communication process.

In step W32-25, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether the loan notification reception valid timer is "0". If the loan notification reception valid timer is "0", it does not send a loan reception result response in response to the receipt of the loan notification, and terminates the current dedicated unit communication process. If the loan notification reception valid timer is not "0", it executes loan reception result response processing in step W32-26. Specifically, it performs processing such as sending a loan reception result response in response to the receipt of the loan notification sent from the dedicated unit 170, and adding up the number of game balls owned by the player based on the information on the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification. Thereafter, it terminates the current dedicated unit communication process. Details of the loan reception result response processing will be described later.

In this way, if the number of times that a response message is not received despite messages being sent to the dedicated unit 170 exceeds a specified value, it is possible to issue an abnormality alert, assuming that a dedicated unit communication no-response error has occurred, in which the frame control board 120 and dedicated unit 170 are unable to communicate normally. This makes it possible to inform game store staff that normal information cannot be sent to the dedicated unit 170, and that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player cannot be counted or the number of game balls (game value) cannot be loaned from the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, when it is time to send a periodically arriving counting notification, a counting notification sending process is executed to send a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 (subtracting the number of game balls owned by the player in response to the operation of the counting button 20), but a loan receipt result response process is not executed to send a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170. If it is not time to send a periodically arriving counting notification, the counting notification sending process is not executed to send a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170, but a loan receipt result response process is executed to send a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170 (adding the number of game balls owned by the player in response to the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification). Therefore, by not executing the counting notification sending process to send a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 and the loan receipt result response process to send a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 170 in the same sequence, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the counting notification and the loan receipt result response overlapping.

(Frame control board counting notification transmission process)
159, a description will be given of the counting notification transmission process included in the dedicated unit communication process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the counting notification transmission process of the frame control board 120.

First, the frame control CPU 120a updates the count serial number stored in the frame control RAM 120c in step W32-22-1 to send a count notification, prohibits interrupts in step W32-22-2, and performs a count subtraction value setting process in step W32-22-3. Specifically, the count subtraction value to be subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player through the counting process is set. Details of the count subtraction value setting process will be described later.

In step W32-22-4, the frame control CPU 120a allows an interrupt; in step W32-22-5, it stores the count subtraction value set in the above-mentioned count subtraction value setting process as the number of counted balls in the frame control RAM 120c; in step W32-22-6, it adds the number of counted balls to the cumulative count value stored in the frame control RAM 120c; in step W32-22-7, it stores the number of counted balls in the dedicated unit transmission buffer set in the frame control RAM 120c; and in step W32-22-8, it performs dedicated unit message transmission processing. Specifically, it performs processing to send a count notification including the updated count serial number and number of counted balls to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W32-22-9, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of counted balls is greater than "0." If the number of counted balls is not greater than "0" (is "0"), the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 20 is not performed and the current counting notification sending process is terminated. If the number of counted balls is greater than "0," the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 20 is performed and a count-trigger game ball number subtraction process is performed in step W32-22-10. Specifically, in response to the operation of the counting button 20, the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball number storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is loaded and the counted number is subtracted from the loaded game ball number.

In step W32-22-11, the frame control CPU 120a stores the subtracted number of game balls in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player, and in step W32-22-12, it determines whether the number of game balls stored in the game ball number storage area is "0." If the number of game balls is "0," it determines that the counting process has ended and proceeds to step W32-22-13. If the number of game balls is not "0," it determines that the counting process has not ended and ends the current count notification transmission process.

In step W32-22-13, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts, and in step W32-22-14, it sends a counting end command to the performance control board 130 indicating that the counting process has ended, and in step W32-22-15, it allows interrupts and ends this counting notification sending process. As a result, the performance control board 130, which has received the counting end command, performs processing to execute a counting end effect indicating that the counting process has ended.

In this way, when a counting process (such as a count trigger game ball number subtraction process) is executed to subtract the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in response to operation of the count button 20, a counting notification indicating the number of counted balls is sent to the dedicated unit 170 before subtracting the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to bring closer the timing when the game balls are actually subtracted on the gaming machine 1 and the timing when the dedicated unit 170 determines that counting has been performed, thereby preventing inconveniences such as a discrepancy in the timing of control related to the number of game balls owned by a player between the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, if the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted) set in the count subtraction value setting process is "0" and that count subtraction value is stored as the number of balls to be counted, then even if the count button 20 is operated, the counting process (count trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) to subtract the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player will not be executed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of executing the counting process (count trigger game ball number subtraction process) to subtract the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in a situation where the number of game balls owned by the player cannot be subtracted.

Furthermore, if the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player becomes "0" as a result of the counting process (count trigger game ball number subtraction process) that subtracts the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in response to the operation of the counting button 20, a count end command indicating that the counting process has ended is sent to the presentation control board 130. Therefore, the presentation control board 130 can execute a count end effect that suggests the counting process has ended, allowing the player to recognize that the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player has become "0" and the counting process has ended, thereby improving player convenience.

In addition, after executing the counting process (counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) that subtracts the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in response to the operation of the counting button 20, a counting notification indicating the number of counted balls may be sent to the dedicated unit 170.

Furthermore, after the counting process (counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) is performed to subtract the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player in response to the operation of the counting button 20, if the number of game balls owned by the player reaches "0", a counting end command is sent to the presentation control board 130. However, if the counting button 20 is pressed and held down, so that the player can know that the number of game balls owned is decreasing towards "0" and that the counting is about to end, for example, a counting end approaching command may be sent to the presentation control board 130 when the number of game balls owned by the player has decreased to "1000" or "500", or both, and the presentation control board 130 may then cause the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a specific manner or display a specific image on the image display device to execute a counting end approaching presentation.

(Frame control board count subtraction value setting process)
160, a description will be given of the count subtraction value setting process included in the count notification transmission process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the count subtraction value setting process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W32-22-3-1, the frame control CPU 120a clears the count subtraction value subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player (setting it to "0" so that counting processing will not be performed). Then, in step W32-22-3-2, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the VL signal, which confirms the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, is OFF (not connected). If the VL signal is OFF, the counting processing is not performed and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13. If the VL signal is not OFF (is ON), the counting serial number stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated in step W32-22-3-3.

In step W32-22-3-4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is greater than "0." If the number of game balls is not greater than "0," the counting process is not executed and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13. If the number of game balls is greater than "0," processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-5.

In step W32-22-3-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the effective subtraction time set in the subtraction mechanism control process described below has elapsed. If the effective subtraction time has elapsed, the counting process is not executed and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13. If the effective subtraction time has not elapsed, processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-6.

In step W32-22-3-6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a counting execution flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c in response to pressing of the counting button 20 in the switch detection process described below. If the counting execution flag is not set, counting is not performed and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13. If the counting execution flag is set, processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-7.

In step W32-22-3-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the counting execution flag is a long press value set by a long press of the counting button 20. If the counting execution flag is a long press value, processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-8. If the counting execution flag is not a long press value (it is a short press value set by a short press of the counting button 20), processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-12.

In step W32-22-3-8, the frame control CPU 120a sends a count start command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the counting process (transfer to the dedicated unit 170) of the number of game balls owned by the player has begun. As a result, the presentation control board 130, which has received the count start command, performs processing to execute the count notification presentation.

In step W32-22-3-9, the frame control CPU 120a sets the count subtraction value, which is subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player during the counting process, to the long press value (250 balls) corresponding to the long press of the count button 20. In step W32-22-3-10, it determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball number storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is 250 or more. If the number of game balls is 250 or more, the count subtraction value is not changed and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13. If the number of game balls is not 250 or more, in step W32-22-3-11, the current number of game balls is set as the count subtraction value (the number of balls to be counted) and processing proceeds to step W32-22-3-13.

In step W32-22-3-12, the frame control CPU 120a sets the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted) to the short press value (1) corresponding to the short press of the count button 20, and proceeds to step W32-22-3-13.

In step W32-22-3-13, the frame control CPU 120a clears the count execution flag set in the frame control RAM 120c and ends this count subtraction value setting process.

In this way, when the VL signal for confirming the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is OFF (not connected), the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted) that is scheduled to be subtracted from the number of game balls owned by the player is set to "0." This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as the number of game balls owned by the player being subtracted when communication between the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 is not possible, and the count notification containing the updated count serial number and number of counted balls not being sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In addition, when the counting button 20 is pressed briefly, the short press value (1) is set as the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted), and when the counting button 20 is pressed and held, the long press value (250 balls) or the current number of game balls less than 250 is set as the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted). Therefore, the number of balls to be counted can be changed depending on how the counting button 20 is operated, improving convenience for the player.

In addition, a total count button that can be operated by the player may be provided in addition to the count button 20, and when the total count button is operated, the total number of game balls currently owned by the player may be set as the count subtraction value (number of balls to be counted).

In addition, a counting mode selection button that can be operated by the player may be provided separately from the counting button 20, and the counting mode selection button may be operated to set the manual counting mode or the total counting mode. In the manual counting mode, when the counting button 20 is pressed briefly, the short press value (1) is set as the counting subtraction value (the number of balls to be counted). When the counting button 20 is pressed and held, the long press value (250 balls) or the current number of game balls less than 250 is set as the counting subtraction value. In the total counting mode, when the counting button 20 is pressed, the total number of game balls currently owned by the player is set as the counting subtraction value (the number of balls to be counted).

In addition, if the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than the total valid count value (for example, 10,000), a long press of the count button 20 can set the total number of game balls currently owned by the player as the count subtraction value, and a short press of the count button 20 can set the count subtraction value to the original long press value of 250. In this case, if the number of game balls owned by the player is less than the total valid count value, for example, a first count guide image may be displayed on the image display device while waiting for customers, indicating that a long press of the count button 20 will count the long press value of 250, and that a short press of the count button 20 will count the short press value of 1; if the number of game balls owned by the player is greater than or equal to the total valid count value, for example, a second count guide image may be displayed on the image display device while waiting for customers, indicating that a long press of the count button 20 will count the total number of game balls currently owned by the player, and that a short press of the count button 20 will count the original long press value of 250.

(Frame control board loan receipt result response processing)
161, a description will be given of the lending receipt result response process included in the dedicated unit communication process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the lending receipt result response process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W32-26-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the dedicated unit reception control flag set in the dedicated unit message reception process described above has a reception completion flag. If the reception completion flag is present, it is assumed that a message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, and processing proceeds to step W32-26-2. If the reception completion flag is not present, it is assumed that no message has been received from the dedicated unit 170, and the current loan receipt result response processing is terminated.

In step W32-26-2, the quota control CPU 120a determines whether the received message is a loan notification. If it is not a loan notification, it proceeds to step W32-26-21. If it is a loan notification, it updates the loan serial number stored in the quota control RAM 120c in step W32-26-3.

In step W32-26-4, the quota control CPU 120a determines whether the updated lending serial number matches the lending serial number included in the received lending notification. If the lending serial numbers match, processing proceeds to step W32-26-5. If the lending serial numbers do not match, processing proceeds to step W32-26-16, assuming that the lending notification is invalid.

In step W32-26-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the game is currently in ball removal mode. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, which indicates that the game is currently in ball removal mode, is ON (set). If the game is not currently in ball removal mode, it proceeds to step W32-26-6. If the game is currently in ball removal mode, it proceeds to step W32-26-16, assuming that no game balls (game value) will be lent out.

In step W32-26-6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification is an appropriate value (0 to 250). If the number of loaned balls is an appropriate value, processing proceeds to step W32-26-7. If the number of loaned balls is not an appropriate value, processing proceeds to step W32-26-16, assuming that the loan notification is invalid.

In step W32-26-7, the frame control CPU 120a performs a lending trigger game ball count addition process. Specifically, upon receiving a loan notification of the number of game balls (game value), the frame control CPU 120a loads the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and adds the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification to the loaded number of game balls.

In step W32-26-8, the slot control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls after the addition is equal to or greater than the limit value (65,535). If the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the limit value, the number of game balls (game value) will not be loaned and processing proceeds to step W32-26-16. If the number of game balls is not equal to or greater than the limit value, in step W32-26-9, the number of game balls after the addition is stored in the game ball number storage area as the number of game balls owned by the player.

In step W32-26-10, the slot control CPU 120a stores the loan serial number included in the loan notification as the previous value in the slot control RAM 120c, sets the receipt result to OK in W32-26-11, and determines in step W32-26-12 whether the number of loaned balls included in the loan notification is "0." If the number of loaned balls is not "0," processing proceeds to step W32-26-13; if the number of loaned balls is "0," processing proceeds to step W32-26-18.

In step W32-26-13, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts, and in step W32-26-14, it sends a loan receipt command to the presentation control board 130 indicating that it has received the loan notification. This causes the presentation control board 130, which has received the loan receipt command, to perform processing to execute a loan notification presentation indicating that the number of game balls (game value) has been loaned. Then, in step W32-26-15, it permits interrupts, and proceeds to step W32-26-18.

In step W32-26-16, the slot control CPU 120a loads the previous lending serial number stored in the slot control RAM 120c, and in step W32-26-17, sets a receipt result of NG, indicating that the lending process for the number of game balls (game value) cannot be completed.

In step W32-26-18, the quota control CPU 120a stores the loan serial number and receipt result in the dedicated unit transmission buffer set in the quota control RAM 120c, and in step W32-26-19, performs dedicated unit message transmission processing. Specifically, it performs processing to send a loan receipt result response including the loan serial number and receipt result to the dedicated unit 170.

In step W32-26-20, the frame control CPU 120a assumes that communication with the dedicated unit 170 is established and clears the dedicated unit no-reception counter and the dedicated unit communication no-response flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W32-26-21, the quota control CPU 120a clears the reception completion flag of the dedicated unit reception control flag stored in the quota control RAM 120c and terminates this loan receipt result response process.

In this way, when in ball removal mode, where normal telegram communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and game progress control by the main control board 110 are not performed, even if a loan notification is received from the dedicated unit 170 (the player operates the loan button provided on the dedicated unit 170), a loan receipt result response including a receipt result NG, indicating that the number of game balls (game value) cannot be loaned, is sent to the dedicated unit 170, and the loan process of the number of game balls (game value) is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the loan process of unnecessary game balls (game value) from being performed during ball removal mode, where game progress control is not performed, and to prevent player dissatisfaction.

In addition, if the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player exceeds the limit value (65,535, the maximum value that can be stored in the 2-byte game ball number storage area), a loan receipt result response including a receipt result NG indicating that the number of game balls (game value) cannot be loaned out is sent to the dedicated unit 170, and the loaning of the number of game balls (game value) is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the value after addition from being carried over and becoming a value less than the limit value when stored in the 2-byte game ball number storage area, resulting in inconvenience to the player, such as a loss.

In addition, an automatic lending button may be provided on the gaming machine 1, and operation of the automatic lending button may enable selection between manual lending mode and automatic lending mode. In manual lending mode, the lending process (increase in the number of game balls owned by the player) may be performed by receiving a lending notification in response to operation of the lending button on the dedicated unit 170. In automatic lending mode, when the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player decreases to a predetermined number (e.g., 15), a request notification requesting a lending notification may be sent to the dedicated unit, and the lending process (increase in the number of game balls owned by the player) may be performed by inputting a lending notification from the dedicated unit 170. In this case, when the balance of the player's valuable value deposited in the dedicated unit 170 reaches "0," an automatic lending end notification may be input from the dedicated unit 170, thereby switching from automatic lending mode to manual lending mode. Additionally, the counting process (decreasing the number of game balls owned by the player) can be performed by operating the counting button 20, and when the number of game balls owned by the player reaches "0," the automatic lending mode can be switched to the manual lending mode.

Also, if an automatic lending button is not provided, when the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player decreases to a predetermined number (for example, 15), a lending promotion command can be sent to the presentation control board 130, and the presentation control board 130 can then issue a promotional notification informing the player that the number of game balls owned by the player has decreased and encouraging the player to lend balls. In this case, it is preferable to issue a promotional notification when the number of game balls owned by a player has decreased to the predetermined number by firing game balls, but not to issue a promotional notification when the number of game balls owned by a player has decreased to the predetermined number by executing a counting process.

(Ball count display control process of frame control board)
162, a description will be given of the game ball number display control process included in the loop process of the main process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the game ball number display control process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W33-1, the frame control CPU 120a prohibits interrupts, and in step W33-2, it references the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, and sets the display data for the number of game balls to be displayed on the game ball count display 135 in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W33-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ball removal mode is currently in effect. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, which indicates that the ball removal mode is in effect, is ON (set). If the ball removal mode is in effect, processing proceeds to step W33-4. If the ball removal mode is not in effect, processing proceeds to step W33-5.

In step W33-4, the frame control CPU 120a performs processing to switch the display data for the number of game balls set in the frame control RAM 120c to "-" display data, indicating that the ball removal mode is in effect.

In step W33-5, the frame control CPU 120a permits the interrupt and ends the current game ball count display control process. The display data set in this process will be displayed on the game ball count display 135 by the game ball count display LED control process in the timer interrupt control process described later.

In this way, when the machine is in ball removal mode, which does not involve normal telegram communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 or control of game progress by the main control board 110, the game ball count display 135, which is visible from the front of the gaming machine 1, does not display the number of game balls owned by the player, but instead displays information indicating that the machine is in ball removal mode ("-"). This allows the gaming store clerk standing in front of the gaming machine 1 to know that the machine is in ball removal mode, improving convenience for the gaming store clerk.

(Error removal process within the frame control board area)
163, an explanation will be given of the in-area error clearing process included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the in-area error clearing process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W34-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error reset switch 123 has been operated. If the error reset switch 123 has been operated, the process proceeds to step W34-2. If the error reset switch 123 has not been operated, the current in-area error reset process is terminated.

If a subtraction entry error has occurred in step W34-2, the frame control CPU 120a cancels the subtraction entry error. Specifically, if a subtraction entry error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, the frame control CPU 120a clears this subtraction entry error flag.

In step W34-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port level is OFF (subtraction port switch 91c is OFF: no game ball detected, no open circuit or short circuit). If the subtraction port level is OFF, processing proceeds to step W34-4. If the subtraction port level is not OFF, it is determined that there is no need to clear the subtraction port error, and the current in-area error clearing process is terminated.

If a subtraction entry error has occurred in step W34-4, the frame control CPU 120a cancels the subtraction entry error. Specifically, if a subtraction entry error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, the frame control CPU 120a clears this subtraction entry error flag.

In step W34-5, the frame control CPU 120a performs launch permission processing. Specifically, it prohibits interrupts, outputs (ON) a launch permission signal, and permits interrupts. It then terminates the current in-area error cancellation process. This allows the launch device 92 to launch game balls, provided that a launch permission signal is also output (ON) from the main control board 110.

In this way, when the error release switch 123, which can be operated by a gaming store clerk, is operated, the errors that stop the release of gaming balls (subtraction entry error, subtraction port error) are released, and the release of gaming balls is permitted. Therefore, even without turning off the power to the gaming machine 1, a gaming store clerk can release the errors that stop the release of gaming balls (subtraction entry error, subtraction port error) and permit the release of gaming balls, thereby improving convenience for the gaming store clerk.

(Out-of-area error detection process for frame control board)
164, an explanation will be given of the out-of-area error detection processing included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the out-of-area error detection processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W36-1, the frame control CPU 120a turns OFF the game ball count clear detection in fraud detection state 2, which indicates that the number of game balls owned by the player has been cleared. In step W36-2, it determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a game ball count clear flag, which indicates that the number of game balls owned by the player has been cleared. If the game ball count clear flag is not present, it is assumed that the number of game balls owned by the player has not been cleared, and processing proceeds to step W36-4. If the game ball count clear flag is present, in step W36-3, it turns ON (sets) the game ball count clear detection in fraud detection state 2.

In step W36-4, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is 40,000 or more. If the number of game balls is less than 40,000, it is assumed that the game ball count has not exceeded, and processing proceeds to step W36-6. If the number of game balls is 400,000 or more, in step W36-5, it sets an over-game ball count flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that the game ball count has exceeded, and processing proceeds to step W36-8.

In step W36-6, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player, as stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c, is less than 35,000. If the number of game balls is not less than 35,000, processing proceeds to step W36-8. If the number of game balls is less than 35,000, the game ball count over flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared in step W36-7.

In step W36-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the launch pad switch 92a is ON (detecting a game ball). If the launch pad switch 92a is ON, in step W36-9, a game ball remaining flag indicating that a game ball remains on the launch pad is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and processing proceeds to step W36-11. If the launch pad switch 92a is not ON, in step W36-10, the game ball remaining flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and processing proceeds to step W36-11.

In step W36-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the abrasive confirmation switch 95a is OFF (abrasive not detected). If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a is OFF, in step W36-12, an abrasive not-installed flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an abrasive not-installed error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W36-14. If the abrasive confirmation switch 95a is ON, in step W36-13, the abrasive not-installed flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and processing proceeds to step W36-14.

In step W36-14, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether any of the proximity switches (general prize opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a, and special prize opening detection switch 50a) are currently disconnected. If any of the proximity switches are currently disconnected, in step W36-15, a switch disconnection error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a switch disconnection error has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W36-17. If any of the proximity switches are not currently disconnected, in step W36-16, the switch disconnection error flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and processing proceeds to step W36-17.

In step W36-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the radio wave detection sensor 54a is currently disconnected. If the radio wave detection sensor 54a is currently disconnected, in step W36-18, a radio wave sensor abnormality flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a radio wave sensor abnormality has occurred, and processing proceeds to step W36-20. If the radio wave detection sensor 54a is not currently disconnected, in step W36-19, the radio wave sensor abnormality flag set in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and processing proceeds to step W36-20.

In step W36-20, the frame control CPU 120a sets the error code (display data of the error code to be displayed on the frame control display 125) of the currently occurring error with the highest priority in the frame control RAM 120c. Specifically, it references the various error flags set in the frame control RAM 120c, identifies the highest-priority error according to the preset error priority, and sets the error code corresponding to this identified error.

In step W36-21, the frame control CPU 120a combines the path abnormality detection flags (insufficient ball error flag, excessive ball error flag, insufficient ball sensor disconnection flag) set in the frame control RAM 120c with various error flags, stores the combined result in the frame control RAM 120c, and terminates this out-of-area error detection process.

(Frame control board fraud detection processing)
165 to 166, we will explain the fraud detection processing included in the loop processing of the main processing of the frame control board 120. Figures 165 to 166 are flowcharts showing the fraud detection processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W37-1, the frame control CPU 120a clears the out count ball count (the number of game balls discharged from the game area 5a via the various winning openings and outlet 39) stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W37-2, it determines whether the winning passage count ball count (the number of game balls that have entered the various winning openings and been detected by the winning passage count switch 94a) stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0." If the winning passage count ball count is "0," processing proceeds to step W37-7; if the winning passage count ball count is not "0," processing proceeds to step W37-3.

In step W37-3, the frame control CPU 120a loads the winning passage ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c and clears the winning passage ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W37-4, it increments the out count ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1. In step W37-5, it decrements the winning passage ball count for the fraud detection information 1 stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1. In step W37-6, it increments the winning passage ball count for the fraud detection information 2 stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1.

In step W37-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the non-winning passage ball count (the number of game balls that flowed into the outlet 39 and were detected by the non-winning passage count switch 94b) stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "0." If the non-winning passage ball count is "0," processing proceeds to step W37-12; if the non-winning passage ball count is not "0," processing proceeds to step W37-8.

In step W37-8, the frame control CPU 120a loads the non-winning passage ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c and clears the non-winning passage ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c. In step W37-9, it increments the out count ball count stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1. In step W37-10, it increments the non-winning passage ball count for the fraud detection information 2 stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1. In step W37-11, it decrements the non-winning passage ball count for the fraud detection information 1 stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1.

In step W37-12, the frame control CPU 120a adds the number of winning balls notified by the main control board 110 to the number of detected winning balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W37-13, determines whether a foul ball has been thrown. Specifically, it determines whether a game ball flowing down the foul ball passage has been detected by the foul ball switch 93a. If a foul ball has not been thrown, in step W37-14, it subtracts the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c and proceeds to step W37-16. If a foul ball has been thrown, in step W37-15, it adds the number of foul balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c and proceeds to step W37-16.

In step W37-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the detected number of winning balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c and the number of balls counted in the winning passage is "0." If the difference is "0," it is assumed that an abnormal winning ball count error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W37-21. If the difference is not "0," it is determined in step W37-17 whether the difference between the detected number of winning balls and the number of balls counted in the winning passage is smaller than the judgment value (100). If the difference is smaller than the judgment value, it is assumed that an abnormal winning ball count error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W37-21. If the difference is not smaller than the judgment value, processing proceeds to step W37-18.

In step W37-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a winning ball count abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c, indicating that an abnormal winning ball count error has occurred. If there is a winning ball count abnormality flag, processing proceeds to step W37-21. If there is no winning ball count abnormality flag, in step W37-19, the frame control CPU 120a sets a winning ball count abnormality flag in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W37-20, it sets in the frame control RAM 120c the initial value (e.g., 1 minute) of the fraud detection state release timer, which is the guaranteed time until the fraud detection (here, the winning ball count abnormality error) can be released by operating the error release switch 123.

In step W37-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls counted out, stored in the frame control RAM 120c, is "0." If the difference is "0," it is assumed that an abnormal number of balls fired error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W37-26. If the difference is not "0," it is determined in step W37-22 whether the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls counted out is less than the judgment value (100). If the difference is less than the judgment value, it is assumed that an abnormal number of balls fired error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W37-26. If the difference is greater than the judgment value, processing proceeds to step W37-23.

In step W37-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a ball count abnormality flag indicating that an error has occurred in the number of balls fired. If the ball count abnormality flag is present, processing proceeds to step W37-26. If the ball count abnormality flag is not present, the frame control RAM 120c is set to a ball count abnormality flag in step W37-24. In step W37-25, the frame control RAM 120c is set to the initial value (e.g., 1 minute) of the fraud detection state release timer, which is the guaranteed time until the fraud detection (here, the ball count abnormality error) can be released by operating the error release switch 123.

In step W37-26, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the fraud detection state release timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is not "0." If the fraud detection state release timer is not "0," the frame control CPU 120a decides not to release the fraud detection and terminates the current fraud detection process. If the fraud detection state release timer is "0," the frame control CPU 120a determines in step W37-27 whether the error release switch 123 has been operated. If the error release switch 123 has been operated, the process proceeds to step W37-28. If the error release switch 123 has not been operated, the frame control CPU 120a decides not to release the fraud detection and terminates the current fraud detection process.

In step W37-28, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an abnormal winning ball count flag is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no abnormal winning ball count flag, processing proceeds to step W37-30. If there is an abnormal winning ball count flag, in step W37-29, the abnormal winning ball count flag, number of shot balls, and number of out count balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c are cleared to cancel the abnormal winning ball count error.

In step W37-30, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether an abnormal number of shot balls flag is stored in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is no abnormal number of shot balls flag, the current fraud detection process is terminated. If there is an abnormal number of shot balls flag, in step W37-31, the abnormal number of shot balls flag, number of shot balls, and number of out count balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c are cleared to cancel the abnormal number of shot balls error, and the current fraud detection process is terminated.

In this way, when an abnormal number of winning balls error or an abnormal number of shot balls error occurs, the abnormal number of winning balls error or the abnormal number of shot balls error cannot be cleared for a specified period (1 minute). However, by operating the error clear switch 123 after the specified period (1 minute) has elapsed, it is possible to clear the abnormal number of winning balls error or the abnormal number of shot balls error. This makes it possible to properly notify the user of the occurrence of an abnormal number of winning balls error or the abnormal number of shot balls error, and also improves convenience for game parlor staff.

(Timer interrupt control process of frame control board)
The timer interrupt control processing of the frame control board 120 will be described using Figure 167. Figure 167 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt control processing of the frame control board 120. This timer interrupt control processing is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (1 ms) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the frame control unit 120m.

First, the frame control CPU 120a saves registers in step W100, clears the watchdog timer (WDT) in step W101, increments the timer interrupt 2 ms division counter by 1 in step W102, and increments the timer interrupt 4 ms division counter by 1 in step W103.

In step W104, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a timeout has occurred in the main control board frame reception time (the message notification from the main control board 110 cannot be received within the specified frame time). If a timeout has occurred, processing proceeds to step W108. If a timeout has not occurred, in step W105, the main control board frame reception timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is decremented by 1.

In step W106, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a timeout has occurred in the main control board frame reception time. Specifically, it determines whether the main control board frame reception timer after subtraction has reached "0." If a timeout has not occurred, processing proceeds to step W108. If a timeout has occurred, in step W107, the main board reception buffer storage pointer and main control board reception control flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c are cleared.

In step W108, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a timeout has occurred for the dedicated unit in-frame reception time (the message notification from the dedicated unit 170 cannot be received within the specified frame time). If a timeout has occurred, the process proceeds to step W112; if a timeout has not occurred, the dedicated unit in-frame reception timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is decremented by 1 in step W109.

In step W110, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a timeout has occurred for the dedicated unit intra-frame reception time. Specifically, it determines whether the dedicated unit intra-frame reception timer after subtraction has reached "0." If a timeout has not occurred, it proceeds to step W112. If a timeout has occurred, it clears the dedicated unit reception buffer storage pointer and the dedicated unit reception control flag in step W111.

In step W112, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the timer interrupt 2 ms division counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "2" (whether the 2 ms period has arrived). If the division counter is not "2," it is assumed that the 2 ms period has not arrived, and processing proceeds to step W130. If the division counter is "2," the timer interrupt 2 ms division counter is cleared in step W113.

In step W114, the frame control CPU 120a performs game ball count display LED control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to display on the game ball count display 135 the game ball count display data set in the frame control RAM 120c during game ball count display control processing, etc., and the "-" display data indicating that the game ball removal mode is in effect.

In step W115, the frame control CPU 120a performs a 2 ms period timer update process. Specifically, it performs a process to decrement the various timers stored in the frame control RAM 120c (fraud detection state release timer, subtraction valid time timer, etc.) by 1. Then, in step W116, it performs a port input process. Specifically, it reads the input port of the frame control RAM 120c referenced by the program within the area and sets the input data, etc.

In step W117, the frame control CPU 120a performs switch detection processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as updating the status of each switch and sensor based on input data from the input port. Details of the switch detection processing will be described later.

In step W118, the frame control CPU 120a performs subtraction mechanism control processing. Specifically, it controls the subtraction solenoid 91a and monitors various switches within the subtraction mechanism (subtraction inlet switch 91b, subtraction outlet switch 91c, etc.). Details of the subtraction mechanism control processing will be described later.

In step W119, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a gaming machine installation information notification received flag, which indicates that a gaming machine installation information notification has been received. If the gaming machine installation information notification received flag is not present, the process proceeds to step W121. If the gaming machine installation information notification received flag is present, the process proceeds to step W120, where it performs a gaming ball count command transmission process, and then proceeds to step W122. Specifically, the process proceeds to transmit to the performance control board 130 a gaming ball count command indicating the number of gaming balls owned by the player, which is stored in the gaming ball count memory area of the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W121, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not the frame control RAM 120c contains an internal gaming machine communication error flag, which indicates that an internal gaming machine communication error has occurred. If the internal gaming machine communication error flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W123; if the internal gaming machine communication error flag is present, processing proceeds to step W122.

In step W122, the frame control CPU 120a performs error command transmission processing. Specifically, it performs processing to send an error start command or an error end command to the performance control board 130 depending on the presence or absence of various abnormality flags stored in the frame control RAM 120c. As a result, the performance control board 130 that receives the error start command or error end command will perform processing to start various error notifications or processing to end various error notifications.

In step W123, the frame control CPU 120a performs frame control display control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to display on the frame control display 125 the display data for the number of game balls, various error codes, display performance information (normal base values), etc., which are set in the frame control RAM 120c in the frame control display display setting processing described below.

In step W124, the frame control CPU 120a performs out-of-area port input processing. Specifically, it reads the out-of-area input port of the frame control RAM 120c referenced by the out-of-area program and performs processing such as setting input data.

In step W125, the frame control CPU 120a performs game ball circulation switch management processing. Specifically, it updates the drive timer of the drive motor of the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) (for example, updating the ball removal mode time when the ball removal mechanism control flag is ON, or turning off the ball removal mechanism control flag when the ball removal mode time becomes "0"), and performs processing such as detecting and clearing open circuits and short circuits in various switches in the game ball circulation path.

In step W126, the frame control CPU 120a performs motor drive processing. Specifically, it sets drive data for the drive motor of the lifting and polishing device 95 (ball lift) (for example, setting drive data when the ball removal mechanism control flag is ON, setting drive data for lifting the same number of game balls as those fired, etc.), and outputs drive data from the output port (motor drive).

In step W127, the frame control CPU 120a performs out-of-area error monitoring processing. Specifically, it monitors the occurrence and resolution of insufficient ball errors and excessive ball errors, detects disconnections in the insufficient ball sensor 94f and excessive ball sensor 94e, and clears disconnection errors.

The frame control CPU 120a performs fraud monitoring processing in step W128. Specifically, it performs processing such as monitoring the detection and resolution of glass frame opening errors, inner frame opening errors, and fraudulent radio wave detection errors, and monitoring game balls using the winning passage count switch 94a and non-winning passage count switch 94b. Details of the fraud monitoring processing will be described later.

In step W129, the frame control CPU 120a performs a process to count the number of shot balls. Specifically, it performs processes such as updating the number of shot balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c in response to input from the winning passage count switch 94a and the non-winning passage count switch 94b. Details of the shot ball count process will be described later.

In step W130, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the timer interrupt 4 ms division counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is "4" (whether the 4 ms period has arrived). If the division counter is not "4," it determines that the 4 ms period has not arrived and terminates the current timer interrupt processing. If the division counter is "4," it clears the timer interrupt 4 ms division counter in step W131.

In step W132, the frame control CPU 120a performs test signal generation processing. Specifically, it performs processing to generate various test signals that are output to the gaming machine 1's testing device (not shown) from test signal terminals provided on the frame control board 120 (in the case of a gaming machine 1 for testing, a connector is implemented on the test signal terminal, but in the case of a gaming machine 1 for sale, a connector is not implemented on the test signal terminal).

In step W133, the frame control CPU 120a performs a 4 ms period timer update process. Specifically, it performs a process to subtract 1 from the various timers (such as the test signal output timer) stored in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W134, the frame control CPU 120a performs test signal output processing. Specifically, it performs processing to output the various test signals generated in step W132 to the gaming machine 1's testing device (not shown) via the test signal terminal (in the case of a gaming machine 1 for testing, a connector is implemented at the test signal terminal, but in the case of a gaming machine 1 for sale, a connector is not implemented at the test signal terminal).

In step W135, the frame control CPU 120a performs frame control display setting processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as setting the display data for the number of game balls, various error codes, display performance information (normal base values), etc., output to the frame control display 125 in the frame control display control processing described above, in the frame control RAM 120c.

In step W136, the frame control CPU 120a restores the saved registers, and in step W137, it enables the interrupt and ends this timer interrupt control process.

In this way, processes that may affect the player's play (game ball count display LED control process, switch detection process, port input process, subtraction mechanism control process, game ball count command transmission process, error command transmission process, frame control display control process, out-of-area port input process, game ball circulation switch management process, motor drive process, out-of-area error management process, fraud monitoring process, and fired ball count count process) are executed in 2 ms cycles, while processes that may not affect the player's play (test signal generation process) are executed in 4 ms cycles. This makes it possible to exercise appropriate control depending on whether or not there is a possibility of an impact on the player's play.

(Switch detection process on frame control board)
168 to 169, a description will be given of the switch detection processing included in the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. Figures 168 to 169 are flowcharts showing the switch detection processing of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W117-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c, which detects game balls sent to the launch device 92 by the operation of the subtraction solenoid 91a, is ON (detects game balls). If the subtraction port switch 91c is ON, processing proceeds to step W117-2. If the subtraction port switch 91c is not ON, processing proceeds to step W117-8, assuming that the subtraction ball count counter will not be updated.

In step W117-2, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains an OFF edge flag for the subtraction solenoid 91a (a flag indicating that the subtraction solenoid 91a has changed from ON to OFF). If there is no OFF edge flag, the subtraction ball count counter will not be updated and processing proceeds to step W117-8. If there is an OFF edge flag, the frame control RAM 120c determines in step W117-3 whether there is a subtraction entry OFF edge history (a history of the subtraction entry switch 91b changing from ON to OFF and detecting the release of a game ball). If there is a subtraction entry OFF edge history, processing proceeds to step W117-4. If there is no subtraction entry OFF edge history, the subtraction ball count counter will not be updated and processing proceeds to step W117-8.

In step W117-4, the frame control CPU 120a clears the OFF edge flag of the subtraction solenoid 91a stored in the frame control RAM 120c; in step W117-5, it increments the subtraction ball count counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1; in step W117-6, it sets initial values to the lift upper switch disconnection monitoring timer for monitoring disconnection of the lift upper switch 94c and the lift lower switch disconnection monitoring timer for monitoring disconnection of the lift lower switch 94d; and in step W117-7, it sets the initial value of the subtraction valid time timer, which enables the subtraction of game balls owned by the player based on the subtraction ball count counter.

In step W117-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count button 20 is being recognized as being pressed (continuous pressing). If it is not being recognized as being pressed, it proceeds to step W117-22, assuming that it is detecting whether the count button 20 is being pressed. If it is being recognized as being pressed, it proceeds to step W117-9, determining whether the count switch press time timer (a timer for measuring the duration of the count button 20 press) stored in the frame control RAM 120c is at its maximum value (511 ms). If it is at its maximum value, it proceeds to step W117-11. If it is not at its maximum value, it increments the count switch press time timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1 in step W117-10, and proceeds to step W117-11.

In step W117-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count switch press time timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is less than the specified value (500 ms, which is the time required to determine a long press). If it is less than the specified value, processing proceeds to step W117-8. If it is not less than the specified value, in step W117-12, a count execution flag (here, the long press value) is set in the frame control RAM 120c to execute the counting process (transfer to the dedicated unit 170) of the number of game balls owned by the player.

In step W117-13, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count button 20 is being recognized as being pressed (continued pressing). If it is being recognized as being pressed, the process proceeds to step W117-15. If it is not being recognized as being pressed, the frame control RAM 120c is set to the initial value of the count switch LOW detection time based on the count button switch 20a being recognized as not being pressed, and the process proceeds to step W117-32.

In step W117-15, the frame control CPU 120a decrements the count switch press detection timer (a timer for detecting that the count button switch 20a is ON) stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1, and in step W117-16 determines whether the count switch press detection timer after decrement is greater than "0." If the count switch press detection timer is not greater than "0" (is "0"), the count button switch 20a is assumed to be ON and processing proceeds to step W117-17. If the count switch press detection timer is greater than "0," the count button switch 20a is assumed to be not ON and processing proceeds to step W117-32.

In step W117-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count switch press time timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is equal to or greater than the specified value (500 ms, which is used to determine a long press). If it is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is assumed that the count button 20 is being pressed and the process proceeds to step W117-20. If it is not equal to or greater than the specified value, the frame control CPU 120a determines in step W117-18 whether a count execution flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If a count execution flag is set (here, a short press value), the process proceeds to step W117-20. If a count execution flag is not set, the frame control RAM 120c is set to a count execution flag (here, a short press value) in step W117-19.

In step W117-20, the frame control CPU 120a sets the count button 20 non-press recognition in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W117-21, sets the initial value of the count switch HIGH detection time based on the count button switch 20a being pressed in the frame control RAM 120c, and then proceeds to step W117-32.

In step W117-22, the frame control CPU 120a sets the initial value of the counting switch HIGH detection time based on the counting button 20 being recognized as pressed in the frame control RAM 120c, and in step W117-23, it determines whether the counting button switch 20a is OFF. If the counting button switch 20a is not OFF (is ON), it proceeds to step W117-24; if the counting button switch 20a is OFF, it proceeds to step W117-32.

In step W117-24, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the VL signal, which is used to confirm the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170, is OFF (not connected). If the VL signal is OFF, counting processing cannot be performed and processing proceeds to step W117-32. If the VL signal is not OFF (ON), in step W117-25, the count switch press detection timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is decremented by 1.

In step W117-26, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the count switch press detection timer, which detects that the count button switch 20a is ON, is "0." If the count switch press detection timer is not "0," processing proceeds to step W117-32. If the count switch press detection timer is "0," in step W117-27, the frame control RAM 120c is set to recognize that the count button 20 has been pressed, and in step W117-28, the count switch press time timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared.

In step W117-29, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is "0." If the number of game balls owned by the player is "0," the counting process cannot be performed and processing proceeds to step W117-31. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0," in step W117-30, a counting start command indicating that the counting process will begin is sent to the presentation control board 130. As a result, the presentation control board 130, which has received the counting start command, performs processing to execute the counting effect.

In step W117-31, the frame control CPU 120a sets the initial value of the counting switch LOW detection time in the frame control RAM 120c based on the counting button switch 20a being recognized as not being pressed, and then proceeds to step W117-32.

In step W117-32, the frame control CPU 120a performs switch detection flag setting processing. Specifically, it performs processing such as setting detection flags in the frame control RAM 120c according to the input status of the input port and input from various switches and sensors.

In step W117-33, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the current mode is ball removal mode. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, which indicates that the current mode is ball removal mode, is ON (set). If the current mode is not ball removal mode, it proceeds to step W117-34. If the current mode is ball removal mode, it does not perform counting processing and ends the current switch detection processing.

In step W117-34, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a foul ball. Specifically, it determines whether or not the foul ball switch 93a is ON. If there is no foul ball, the current switch detection process ends. If there is a foul ball, in step W117-35, the foul ball counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is incremented by 1, and the current switch detection process ends.

In this way, when it is determined that the count button 20 (count button switch 20a) has been pressed for a short time (less than 500 ms), a count execution flag is set, which performs the counting process corresponding to the short press (counting one ball). On the other hand, when it is determined that the count button 20 has been pressed for a long time (500 ms or more), a count execution number flag is set, which performs the counting process corresponding to the long press (250 balls or all of the game balls owned by the player that are less than 250). Therefore, the number of balls to be counted can be changed depending on how the count button 20 (count button switch 20a) is operated, improving convenience for the player.

In addition, if the VL signal for confirming the connection between the frame control board 120 and the dedicated unit 170 is OFF (not connected), the counting button 20 is not recognized as having been pressed, even if it has been operated (counting button switch 20a is ON). However, if the VL signal is OFF (not connected), the counting button 20 is recognized as having been pressed if it has been operated. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of counting the number of gaming balls owned by a player when communication between the gaming machine 1 and the dedicated unit 170 is not possible.

Furthermore, if the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0" (1 or more) when the count button 20 is recognized as being pressed, a count start command is sent to the effect control board 130, and a count effect is executed. This allows the player to recognize that the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player has begun, improving player convenience.

In addition, when in ball removal mode, where normal telegram communication between the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120 and game progress control by the main control board 110 are not performed, the presence or absence of a foul ball is not determined. This makes it possible to prevent abnormal situations such as a foul ball being detected during ball removal mode, where game progress control is not performed, and the number of game balls owned by the player being added up.

(Subtraction mechanism control process of frame control board)
170 to 171, a description will be given of the subtraction mechanism control processing included in the timer interrupt processing of the frame control board 120. Figures 170 to 171 are flowcharts showing the subtraction mechanism control processing of the frame control board 120.

In step W118-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a launch reference signal, which is input each time a game ball can be launched, has been input. If a launch reference signal has not been input, the game ball will not be fed and launched, and processing proceeds to step W118-7. If a launch reference signal has been input, the frame control CPU 120a determines in step W118-2 whether the subtraction entry switch 91b is ON (i.e., whether there is a game ball that should be fed by the subtraction solenoid 91a). If the subtraction entry switch 91b is not ON, the game ball will not be fed and launched, and processing proceeds to step W118-7. If the subtraction entry switch 91b is ON, processing proceeds to step W118-3.

In step W118-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether a subtraction entry error is occurring. Specifically, it determines whether a subtraction entry error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c. If a subtraction entry error is occurring, it decides not to feed and launch game balls and proceeds to step W118-7. If a subtraction entry error is not occurring, it determines in step W118-4 whether the number of game balls owned by the player stored in the game ball count storage area of the frame control RAM 120c is "0." If the number of game balls owned by the player is "0," it decides not to feed and launch game balls and proceeds to step W118-7. If the number of game balls owned by the player is not "0," it proceeds to step W118-5.

In step W118-5, the frame control CPU 120a sets the ON time of the subtraction solenoid 91a in the frame control RAM 120c to send balls to the launch pad, and in step W118-6, sets the initial value of the subtraction valid time timer, which is the time during which the subtraction of game balls is valid, in the frame control RAM 120c. Note that the subtraction valid time timer set here is referenced in the count subtraction value setting process described above.

In step W118-7, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the ON time of the subtraction solenoid 91a is "0". If the ON time is not "0", the frame control CPU 120a turns the subtraction solenoid 91a ON and proceeds to step W118-10. If the ON time is "0", the frame control CPU 120a turns the subtraction solenoid 91a OFF in step W118-9 and proceeds to step W118-10.

In step W118-10, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction valid time timer is "0." If the subtraction valid time timer is "0," processing proceeds to step W118-12, assuming that the switch status of the subtraction mechanism switches (subtraction entry switch 91b, subtraction exit switch 91c, etc.) is not referenced. If the subtraction valid time timer is not "0," processing proceeds to step W118-11, where the status of the subtraction mechanism switches (subtraction entry switch 91b, subtraction exit switch 91c, etc.) is read and the switch status (subtraction exit switch ON edge history, subtraction entry switch OFF edge history) is set.

In step W118-12, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction port switch 91c is OFF. If the subtraction port switch 91c is not OFF (is ON), processing proceeds to step W118-14. If the subtraction port switch 91c is OFF, in step W118-13, the frame control CPU 120c sets the initial value of the subtraction port ON level timer for detecting a break in the subtraction port switch 91c, and processing proceeds to step W118-17.

In step W118-14, the frame control CPU 120a decrements the subtraction port ON level timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1, and in step W118-15, it determines whether the subtraction port ON level timer after the decrement is "0." If the subtraction port ON level timer is not "0," it proceeds to step W118-17. If the subtraction port ON level timer is "0," it proceeds to step W118-16, setting a subtraction port open circuit error flag in the frame control RAM 120c as a subtraction port open circuit error has occurred, and proceeds to step W118-17.

In step W118-17, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction entry switch 91b is ON. If the subtraction entry switch 91b is not ON (OFF), processing proceeds to step W118-20. If the subtraction entry switch 91b is ON, in step W118-18, the frame control CPU 120c sets the initial value of the subtraction entry OFF level timer for detecting a break in the subtraction entry switch 91b. In step W118-19, the frame control CPU 120c clears the subtraction entry abnormality error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, and processing proceeds to step W118-23.

In step W118-20, the frame control CPU 120a decrements the subtraction entry OFF level timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1, and in step W118-21, it determines whether the subtraction entry OFF level timer after decrement is "0." If the subtraction entry OFF level timer is not "0," it proceeds to step W118-23. If the subtraction entry OFF level timer is "0," it proceeds to step W118-22, setting a subtraction entry abnormality error flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a subtraction entry abnormality error has occurred, and proceeds to step W118-23.

In step W118-23, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the subtraction valid time timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c has reached the judgment value. If the subtraction valid time timer has reached the judgment value, processing proceeds to step W118-24. If the subtraction valid time timer has not reached the judgment value, processing proceeds to step W118-28.

In step W118-24, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is any subtraction port ON edge history in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is any subtraction port ON edge history, processing proceeds to step W118-26. If there is no subtraction port ON edge history, in step W118-25, a subtraction port abnormality error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a subtraction port abnormality error has occurred.

In step W118-26, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether there is a subtraction entry OFF edge history in the frame control RAM 120c. If there is a subtraction entry OFF edge flag, processing proceeds to step W118-28. If there is no subtraction entry OFF edge flag, in step W118-27, a subtraction entry wire break error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a subtraction entry wire break error has occurred.

In step W118-28, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the foul ball switch 93a is OFF. If the foul ball switch 93a is not OFF (is ON), processing proceeds to step W118-30. If the foul ball switch 93a is OFF, processing proceeds to step W118-32.

In step W118-30, the frame control CPU 120a sets the initial value of the foul ball switch ON level timer in the frame control RAM 120c to detect the occurrence of ball jamming before or after the foul ball switch 93a, and in step W118-31, it clears the foul ball switch ball jam error flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c, ending this subtraction mechanism control process.

In step W118-32, the frame control CPU 120a decrements the foul ball switch ON level timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1, and in step W118-33, it determines whether the foul ball switch ON level timer after decrement has reached "0." If the foul ball switch ON level timer has not reached "0," it is assumed that a foul ball switch ball jam error has not occurred, and the subtraction mechanism control process is terminated. If the foul ball switch ON level timer has reached "0," in step W118-34, a foul ball switch ball jam error flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that a foul ball switch ball jam error has occurred, and the subtraction mechanism control process is terminated.

In this way, when the subtraction entrance switch 91b is ON (there are game balls to be sent to the launch pad) and the player has game balls, setting the ON time of the subtraction solenoid 91a makes it possible to send game balls to the launch pad (send balls). This prevents unnecessary ball sending operations when game balls cannot be sent to the launch pad, and prevents wear on the subtraction solenoid 91a.

(Frame control board fraud monitoring processing)
172, a description will be given of the fraud monitoring process included in the timer interrupt process of the frame control board 120. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the fraud monitoring process of the frame control board 120.

First, in step W128-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a glass frame open flag indicating that the glass frame 4 is open. If the glass frame open flag is present, processing proceeds to step W128-2; if the glass frame open flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W128-5.

In step W128-2, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a is ON (glass frame 4 is closed). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a is not ON, processing proceeds to step W128-8. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a is ON, processing proceeds to step W128-3, where it determines whether the ON time of the glass frame open detection switch 31a is equal to or longer than a specified time (e.g., 1 second). If the ON time is not equal to or longer than the specified time, processing proceeds to step W128-8. If the ON time is equal to or longer than the specified time, processing proceeds to step W128-4, where the glass frame open flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared, and processing proceeds to step W128-8.

In step W128-5, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the glass frame open detection switch 31a is OFF (glass frame 4 is open). If the glass frame open detection switch 31a is not OFF, processing proceeds to step W128-8. If the glass frame open detection switch 31a is OFF, processing proceeds to step W128-6, where it determines whether the OFF time of the glass frame open detection switch 31a is equal to or longer than a specified time (e.g., 1 second). If the OFF time is not equal to or longer than the specified time, processing proceeds to step W128-8. If the OFF time is equal to or longer than the specified time, processing proceeds to step W128-7, where a glass frame open flag is set in the frame control RAM 120c, and processing proceeds to step W128-8.

In step W128-8, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the current mode is ball removal mode. Specifically, it determines whether the ball removal mechanism control flag, which indicates that the current mode is ball removal mode, is ON (set). If the current mode is not ball removal mode, the process proceeds to step W128-9. If the current mode is ball removal mode, it is determined that radio wave and other fraudulent activity monitoring will not be performed, and the current fraud monitoring process is terminated.

In step W128-9, the frame control CPU 120a decrements the fraud detection state release timer (guaranteed time until fraud detection can be released by operating the error release switch 123) stored in the frame control RAM 120c by 1, and in step W128-10, determines whether the frame control RAM 120c contains a radio wave detection flag. If the radio wave detection flag is not present, processing proceeds to step W128-11; if the radio wave detection flag is present, processing proceeds to step W128-15.

In step W128-11, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the radio wave detection sensor 54a is ON. If the radio wave detection sensor 54a is not ON, it is assumed that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W128-18. If the radio wave detection sensor 54a is ON, it is determined in step W128-12 whether the ON time is equal to or longer than a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). If the ON time is equal to or longer than the specified time, processing proceeds to step W128-13. If the ON time is not equal to or longer than the specified time, it is assumed that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has not occurred, and processing proceeds to step W128-18.

In step W128-13, the frame control CPU 120a sets a radio wave detection flag in the frame control RAM 120c to indicate that an unauthorized radio wave detection error has occurred, and in step W128-14, it sets the unauthorized detection state release timer to its initial value and proceeds to step W128-18.

In step W128-15, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the fraud detection state cancellation timer stored in the frame control RAM 120c is greater than "0." If the fraud detection state cancellation timer is not greater than "0," the process proceeds to step W128-16. If the fraud detection state cancellation timer is greater than "0," the fraud detection error is not canceled and the process proceeds to step W128-18.

In step W128-16, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the error reset switch 123 is ON (operated). If the error reset switch 123 is not ON, the unauthorized radio wave detection error is not reset and processing proceeds to step W128-18. If the error reset switch 123 is ON, in step W128-17, the radio wave detection flag stored in the frame control RAM 120c is cleared and processing proceeds to step W128-18.

In step W128-18, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON (a gaming ball has passed through). If the non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON (OFF), processing proceeds to step W128-21. If the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W128-19, the non-winning passage count balls stored in the frame control RAM 120c are incremented by 1, and in step W128-20, the discharged ball counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is updated. The value of the discharged ball counter is referenced when an out-passage command indicating the flow of gaming balls into the outlet 39 is sent to the performance control board 130.

In step W128-21, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a is ON (a gaming ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a is not ON (OFF), the current fraud monitoring process ends. If the winning passage count switch 94a is ON, in step W128-22, the number of winning passage ball counts stored in the frame control RAM 120c is incremented by 1, and the current fraud monitoring process ends.

In this way, whether the glass frame 4 is open or not is determined regardless of whether the ball removal mode is in effect. If the glass frame 4 is open, the glass frame open flag is set, making it possible to issue a glass frame open error notification. If the glass frame 4 is not open, the glass frame open flag is cleared, making it possible to stop the glass frame open error notification. Therefore, even if the game is in ball removal mode, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a glass frame open error, ensuring the security of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, when not in ball removal mode, the radio wave detection sensor 54a determines whether or not unauthorized radio waves have been detected. If unauthorized radio waves are detected, the radio wave detection flag is set, enabling an unauthorized radio wave detection error alert to be issued. If unauthorized radio waves are not detected, the radio wave detection flag is cleared, making it possible to stop the unauthorized radio wave detection error alert. This makes it possible to simplify control during ball removal mode, a situation where there is a low possibility of fraud occurring.

(Counting the number of shots on the frame control board)
173, the process of counting the number of shot balls by the frame control board 120 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the process of counting the number of shot balls by the frame control board 120.

First, in step W129-1, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON (a gaming ball has passed through). If the non-winning passage count switch 94b is not ON (it is OFF), processing proceeds to step W129-3. If the non-winning passage count switch 94b is ON, in step W129-2, the fired ball count counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c (fired ball count information sent to the main control board 110) is incremented by 1.

In step W129-3, the frame control CPU 120a determines whether the winning passage count switch 94a is ON (a gaming ball has passed through). If the winning passage count switch 94a is not ON (OFF), the current firing ball count process is terminated. If the winning passage count switch 94a is ON, in step W129-4, the firing ball count counter stored in the frame control RAM 120c is incremented by 1, and the current firing ball count process is terminated.

(Specific examples of counting situations according to the state recognition of the counting button)
Using Figure 174, we will explain specific examples of counting conditions according to the state recognition of the counting button 20.

First, we will explain the transition of state recognition of the counting button 20 using Figure 174(a). Figure 174(a) is a diagram showing the transition of state recognition of the counting button 20.

First, at timing T0, the count button switch 20a is OFF, and the count button 20 is recognized as not being pressed. Then, at timing T1, the count button switch 20a turns ON, and at this point the count button 20 remains recognized as not being pressed.

Then, at timing T2, when the count button switch 20a remains ON and the ON edge detection time of the count button switch 20a of 50 ms has elapsed, the recognition state of the count button 20 becomes pressed, and the count switch press time timer begins counting up to determine whether the count button 20 has been pressed and held down.

After that, the count switch press time timer continues to increment while the count button switch 20a remains ON. At timing T3, 480 ms after the count button switch 20a starts to be turned ON, the count button switch 20a turns OFF, and the OFF edge detection time for the count button switch 20a begins. However, the count switch press time timer continues to increment until the count button switch 20a is recognized as not being pressed.

Then, when the value of the count switch press time timer reaches 500 ms, it is determined that the count button 20 has been pressed and held down. At timing T4, the count button switch 20a remains OFF, and when the OFF edge detection time of the count button switch 20a, which is 50 ms, has elapsed, the recognition state of the count button 20 becomes unpressed.

In addition, after the count button switch 20a is turned ON and the ON edge detection time has elapsed (the ON edge is detected), if the OFF edge detection time of the count button switch 20a has elapsed (the OFF edge is detected) before the value of the count switch press time timer reaches 500 ms, it is determined that the count button 20 has been short-pressed.

Next, using Figure 174(b), we will explain the counting status according to the state recognition of the counting button 20. Figure 174(b) is a diagram showing the counting status according to the state recognition of the counting button 20. Note that the transmission period for counting notifications from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 is assumed to be every 300 ms.

First, at timing T0, which is the transmission cycle for the first counting notification, the state of the counting button 20 is recognized as not being pressed, so the counting process (transfer to the dedicated unit) of the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed. After that, when the counting button 20 is pressed, the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed, but because it is not yet the transmission cycle for the next counting notification (timing T1), the counting process of the number of game balls is not executed at this point.

Then, when the counting button 20 is released and the counting button 20 is recognized as not being pressed, it is determined that a short press of the counting button 20 has occurred, and when the timing of T1, which is the transmission cycle for the next counting notification, arrives, the counting process for one ball is carried out from the number of game balls owned by the player in response to the counting button 20 being recognized as being pressed (short press). After that, the counting button 20 is pressed again and the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed, but because the transmission cycle for the next counting notification (timing of T2) has not yet arrived, the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not carried out at this point.

Furthermore, when the counting button 20 is released and the counting button 20 is recognized as not being pressed, it is determined that a short press of the counting button 20 has been made, and when the counting button 20 is subsequently pressed, the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed. However, since the transmission period for the next counting notification (timing T2) has not yet arrived, the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed at this point.

Then, at timing T2, which is the transmission cycle for the next count notification, the counting process is performed for one ball from the number of game balls owned by the player in response to the counting button 20 being recognized as having been pressed (short press). If the counting button 20 is then released from its pressed state and is recognized as not having been pressed, it is determined that the counting button 20 has been short pressed.

After that, at the timing of T3, which is the transmission cycle for the next count notification, the count button 20 is recognized as having been pressed (short press), and the counting process for one ball is carried out from the number of game balls owned by the player. Then, when the count button 20 is pressed, the count button 20 is recognized as having been pressed, but because it is not yet the transmission cycle for the next count notification (timing of T4), the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not carried out at this point.

Then, at time T4, which is the transmission cycle for the next count notification, the count button 20 continues to be pressed, and the press recognition continues without determining whether it was a short press or a long press. Therefore, the number of game balls owned by the player is not counted at this time. After that, when the count button 20 is released and the count button 20 is recognized as not being pressed, it is determined that the count button 20 was pressed long.

After that, at the timing of T5, which is the transmission cycle for the next counting notification, the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed (long press), and the counting process for 250 balls is carried out from the number of game balls owned by the player. Then, when the counting button 20 is pressed, the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed, but because it is not yet the transmission cycle for the next counting notification (timing of T6), the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not carried out at this point.

Then, the timing of T6 arrives, which is the transmission cycle for the next count notification, but at this point the count button 20 continues to be pressed and the press recognition continues without determining whether it was a short press or a long press. Therefore, although the count button 20 is recognized as having been pressed, the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed at this point. After that, the count button 20 continues to be pressed for 500 ms, which is considered to be a long press, but because it is not yet the transmission cycle for the next count notification (timing T7), the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed at this point.

After that, at the timing of T7, which is the transmission cycle for the next counting notification, the counting button 20 is recognized as being pressed (long pressed), and the counting process for 250 balls is carried out from the number of game balls owned by the player. After that, the counting button 20 is again pressed for 500 ms, which is recognized as a long press, but because it is not yet the transmission cycle for the next counting notification (timing of T8), the counting process for the number of game balls owned by the player is not carried out at this point. Then, the counting button 20 is released, and the counting button 20 is recognized as not being pressed.

Then, at the timing of T8, which is the transmission cycle for the next counting notification, the counting button 20 is not recognized as having been pressed, but since the counting button 20 is recognized as having been pressed (long press), a counting process of 250 balls is performed from the number of game balls owned by the player.

In this way, when the counting notification transmission period arrives after it has been determined that the counting button 20 has been pressed briefly, the counting process for one ball is performed, corresponding to the short press of the counting button 20. When the counting notification transmission period arrives after it has been determined that the counting button 20 has been pressed long, the counting process for 250 balls is performed, corresponding to the long press of the counting button 20. Therefore, the number of balls counted can be changed depending on the manner in which the counting button 20 is operated, improving convenience for the player.

In addition, if the counting notification transmission cycle arrives at a time when it is not yet clear whether the counting button 20 has been pressed for a short time or a long time, the counting process corresponding to the short press of the counting button 20 and the counting process corresponding to the long press of the counting button 20 will not be performed. This prevents the counting process from being performed when the operation mode of the counting button 20 is uncertain, improving convenience for players.

In addition, if it is determined that the count button 20 has been pressed and held, and then the count notification transmission period begins after the count button 20 is released, the counting process for 250 balls corresponding to the count button 20 being pressed and held is carried out. This allows the counting process to be carried out in accordance with the operation mode of the count button 20 without being significantly affected by the count notification transmission period, improving convenience for players.

(Processing order when updating and displaying the number of game balls owned by a player)
Using Figures 175 to 178, we will explain the processing order (execution order) when updating and displaying the number of game balls owned by a player based on the fulfillment of various update conditions.

First, there are five processes for updating the number of game balls owned by a player: "winning opportunity increase process," "firing opportunity decrease process," "foul opportunity increase process," "counting opportunity decrease process," and "lending opportunity increase process." The process for displaying the number of game balls owned by a player is "value display control process."

The "winning opportunity increase process" is a process for increasing (adding) the number of game balls owned by a player in accordance with the winning of game balls into the various winning openings (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a, and corresponds to the processes such as steps W31-1-8 to W31-1-10 in the game information data processing described above.
The "launch trigger reduction process" is a process for reducing (subtracting) the number of game balls owned by a player in response to the launching device 92 launching a game ball (the ball delivery unit 91 sending the game ball to the launch pad and launching it), and corresponds to the processes such as steps W31-9 to W31-11 in the game machine information management process described above.
The "foul trigger increase process" is a process for increasing (adding) the number of game balls owned by a player in response to the detection of a game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball), and corresponds to the processes such as steps W31-16 to W32-18 in the game machine information management process described above.

The "counting trigger reduction process" is a process for reducing (subtracting) the number of game balls owned by the player by sending a counting notification (counting information) including the number of game balls equal to the counted number to the dedicated unit 170 in response to the establishment of a counting condition in which the player operates the counting button 20 and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous game machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170, and corresponds to the processes such as steps W32-22-10 to W32-22-11 in the counting notification sending process described above.
The "loan trigger increase process" is a process for increasing (adding) the number of game balls owned by a player in response to the fulfillment of the loan condition that the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, and a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170 is input after a counting notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170, and corresponds to the processes such as steps W32-26-7 to W32-26-9 in the loan receipt result response process described above.
The "value display control process" is a process for displaying the value of the number of game balls owned by the player on the game ball number display 135 that is visible to the player, and corresponds to the game ball number display control process of step W33 described above.

Figure 175(a) is a simplified flowchart that illustrates the processing order (execution order) of six processes when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

First, the "winning opportunity increase process" is executed as the first process, the "firing opportunity decrease process" is executed as the second process, and the "foul opportunity increase process" is executed as the third process. After that, if the above-mentioned counting conditions are met, the "counting opportunity decrease process" is executed as the fourth process, if the above-mentioned lending conditions are met, the "lending opportunity increase process" is executed as the fourth process, and if the above-mentioned counting conditions and lending conditions are not met, the "value display control process" is executed as the fourth process. Furthermore, if the counting opportunity decrease process or lending opportunity increase process is executed as the fourth process, the "value display control process" is executed as the fifth process.

Figure 175(b) is a simple flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the first case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, it is assumed that the entry of the game ball into the various winning openings (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a and the launch of the game ball by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it) occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "launch opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process" and "launch opportunity decrease process" on the game ball count display 135.

Figure 175(c) is a simple flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the second case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning openings (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a and the detection of a game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball) occur at the same time.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "winning opportunity increase process" and "foul opportunity increase process".

Figure 175 (d) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the third case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the entry of a gaming ball into one of the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the gaming area 5a, the player's operation of the counting button 20, and the fulfillment of the counting condition of a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) having passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170 occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "counting opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process" and "counting opportunity decrease process" on the game ball number display 135.

Figure 175(e) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the fourth case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the entry of game balls into the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a and the player's operation of the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, which results in the counting notification being sent to the dedicated unit 170 and then the input of a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, are assumed to occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "loaning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "winning opportunity increase process" and "loaning opportunity increase process".

Figure 176(a) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the fifth case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the launch of the game ball by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it) and the detection of the game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the play area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball) occur at the same time.

In this case, the first process is a "launch trigger reduction process" which reduces the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "foul trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "launch trigger reduction process" and "foul trigger increase process".

Figure 176 (b) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the sixth case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the launch of the gaming ball by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the gaming ball to the launching table and launches it) and the player's operation of the counting button 20, which results in the fulfillment of the counting condition of a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) having passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170, occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "launch trigger reduction process" which reduces the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "counting trigger reduction process" which reduces the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after reduction by the "launch trigger reduction process" and "counting trigger reduction process".

Figure 176 (c) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the seventh case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the launch of the game ball by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it) and the fulfillment of the loan conditions, in which the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170, and then inputs a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "launch trigger decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "lending trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "launch trigger decrease process" and "lending trigger increase process".

Figure 176 (d) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the eighth case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the detection of a gaming ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the gaming area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball) and the fulfillment of the counting condition, in which the player operates the counting button 20 and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170, occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "foul trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "counting trigger decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "foul trigger increase process" and "counting trigger decrease process".

Figure 176 (e) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the ninth case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the detection of a game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball) and the fulfillment of the loan condition, in which the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170, and then inputs a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "foul trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "loan trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "foul trigger increase process" and "loan trigger increase process".

Figure 176 (f) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 10th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following two conditions are met within a predetermined period (a period during which counting notifications and loan notifications are not sent): the player operates the counting button 20 and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170; and the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170 and a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170 is input after the counting notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In this case, the first process is a "counting trigger decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "lending trigger increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the third process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "counting trigger decrease process" and "lending trigger increase process".

Figure 177(a) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for case 11 when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the entry of game balls into the various winning openings (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a, the launch of game balls by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game balls to the launch pad and launches them), and the detection of game balls that were launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball) occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "firing opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "firing opportunity decrease process", and "foul opportunity increase process".

Figure 177 (b) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 12th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following events occur simultaneously: a game ball enters one of the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a; the game ball is launched by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it); the player operates the counting button 20; and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous game machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "launch opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "counting opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "launch opportunity decrease process", and "counting opportunity decrease process" on the game ball number display 135.

Figure 177(c) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 13th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the entry of game balls into the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a, the launch of game balls by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game balls to the launch pad and launches them), and the fulfillment of the loan conditions, in which the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170, and then inputs a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, occur simultaneously.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "launch opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "lending opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "launch opportunity decrease process", and "lending opportunity increase process".

Figure 177 (d) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 14th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following events occur simultaneously: a gaming ball enters one of the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the gaming area 5a; a gaming ball is detected that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the gaming area 5a (a foul ball is detected); and the player operates the counting button 20, and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "counting opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "foul opportunity increase process", and "counting opportunity decrease process" on the game ball number display 135.

Figure 177 (e) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 15th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following events occur simultaneously: a game ball enters one of the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a; a game ball is detected that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (a foul ball is generated); and the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, which sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 and then inputs a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, thereby fulfilling the loan conditions.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "loan opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "foul opportunity increase process", and "loan opportunity increase process".

Figure 177(f) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 16th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the counting condition is met at the same time that a game ball enters one of the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the gaming area 5a, the player operates the counting button 20, and a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous gaming machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170; then the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, and the loan condition is met in that a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170 is input after the counting notification is sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "counting opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "lending opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fourth process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "counting opportunity decrease process", and "lending opportunity increase process".

Figure 178 (a) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for the 17th case when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following events occur simultaneously: a game ball enters one of the various winning slots (winning areas) located in the game area 5a; the game ball is launched by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it); a game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a is detected (a foul ball is generated); and the player operates the counting button 20, resulting in the counting condition being met after a predetermined time (e.g., 100 ms) has passed since the previous game machine information notification was sent to the dedicated unit 170.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "firing opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the fourth process is a "counting opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fifth process is a "value display control process" which displays a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "firing opportunity decrease process", "foul opportunity increase process", and "counting opportunity decrease process" on the game ball count display 135.

Figure 178(b) is a simplified flowchart showing the processing order (execution order) for case 18 when updating and displaying the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player.

In this case, the following events occur simultaneously: the entry of a game ball into the various winning slots (winning areas) provided in the game area 5a; the launch of the game ball by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launch pad and launches it); the detection of a game ball that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a (the occurrence of a foul ball); and the player operates the loan button on the dedicated unit 170, which sends a counting notification to the dedicated unit 170 and then inputs a loan notification (loan information) sent from the dedicated unit 170, thereby fulfilling the loan conditions.

In this case, the first process is a "winning opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the second process is a "firing opportunity decrease process" which decreases the number of game balls owned by the player, the third process is a "foul opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, the fourth process is a "lending opportunity increase process" which increases the number of game balls owned by the player, and the fifth process is a "value display control process" which displays on the game ball count display 135 a value indicating the number of game balls owned by the player after the increase or decrease due to the "winning opportunity increase process", "firing opportunity decrease process", "foul opportunity increase process", and "lending opportunity increase process".

In this way, when the maximum number of processes, four, are executed in one sequence, control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player can be performed in the following processing order (execution order): winning trigger increase process → firing trigger decrease process → foul trigger increase process → counting trigger decrease process or loan trigger addition process. This makes it possible to optimally perform control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it becomes possible to efficiently control updates to the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It also becomes possible to control updates to the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a way that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

Furthermore, when four update processes - a winning opportunity increase process, a firing opportunity decrease process, a foul opportunity increase process, and a counting opportunity decrease process or a loaning opportunity addition process - are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, the foul opportunity increase process, and the counting opportunity decrease process or the loaning opportunity addition process on the game ball count display 135. Therefore, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, a value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas) and the launch of a game ball (sent to the launch pad and launched) occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in a processing order (execution order) of win trigger increase processing → launch trigger decrease processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processing in the order of update events related to the control of the main control board 110 → update events related to the control of the frame control board 120, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, a winning opportunity increase process and a firing opportunity decrease process, are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the gaming ball count display 135 the value of the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process and the firing opportunity decrease process. As a result, the value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of gaming balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of gaming balls (gaming value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of gaming balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas) and the detection of a foul ball (the occurrence of a foul ball) occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the processing order (execution order) of win trigger increase processing → foul trigger increase processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processing in the order of update events related to the control of the main control board 110 → update events related to the control of the frame control board 120, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, a winning opportunity increase process and a foul opportunity increase process, are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process and the foul opportunity increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas) and the fulfillment of the counting conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in a processing order (execution order) of win trigger increase processing → count trigger decrease processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processing in the order of update events related to the control of the main control board 110 → update events related to the control of the frame control board 120, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, a winning opportunity increase process and a counting opportunity decrease process, are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process and the counting opportunity decrease process on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, since the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, it is possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. Furthermore, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas) and the fulfillment of the lending conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the processing order (execution order) of winning trigger increase processing → lending trigger increase processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processing in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, the winning opportunity increase process and the lending opportunity increase process, are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process and the lending opportunity increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the launch of a game ball (sending a game ball to the launch pad and launching it) and the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball) occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in a processing order (execution order) of launch trigger decrease processing → foul trigger increase processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processes in the order of update events that occur during the progress of the game, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, the firing trigger reduction process and the foul trigger increase process, are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the firing trigger reduction process and the foul trigger increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the launch of a game ball (sending a game ball to the launch pad and launching it) and the fulfillment of the counting condition occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the processing order (execution order) of launch trigger reduction processing → counting trigger reduction processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, the firing trigger reduction process and the counting trigger reduction process, are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the firing trigger reduction process and the counting trigger reduction process on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, since the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, it is possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. Furthermore, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the launch of a game ball (sending a game ball to the launch pad and launching it) and the fulfillment of the lending conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in a processing order (execution order) of launch trigger decrease processing → lending trigger increase processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, the firing trigger decrease process and the lending trigger increase process, are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the firing trigger decrease process and the lending trigger increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball) and the fulfillment of the counting condition occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in a processing order (execution order) of foul trigger increase processing → counting trigger decrease processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, a foul trigger increase process and a count trigger decrease process, are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the foul trigger increase process and the count trigger decrease process on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, since the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, it is possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. Furthermore, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball) and the fulfillment of the lending conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): foul trigger increase processing → lending trigger increase processing. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processing related to the game value owned by a player. Furthermore, by executing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it becomes possible to efficiently execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. Furthermore, it becomes possible to execute control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when two update processes, the foul trigger increase process and the loan trigger increase process, are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the foul trigger increase process and the loan trigger increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player includes a counting trigger decrease process and a lending trigger increase process, which are executed in response to player operation. If the counting condition and the lending condition are met at the same time, the counting trigger decrease process can be executed before the lending trigger increase process. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update events related to the control of the frame control board 120 → update events related to the control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a way that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, the control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player includes a counting trigger decrease process and a lending trigger increase process that are executed in response to player operation. When the counting condition is met and the counting trigger decrease process is executed, the execution of the lending trigger increase process based on the fulfillment of the lending condition is restricted, and when the lending condition is met and the lending trigger increase process is executed, the execution of the counting trigger decrease process based on the fulfillment of the counting condition is restricted. This makes it possible to optimally perform control processes related to the game value owned by a player. It also makes it possible to efficiently perform control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It also makes it possible to perform control related to updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a way that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

Furthermore, when the counting trigger reduction process is executed in one sequence and the value display control process is executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least set display data) to display the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after it has been updated by the counting trigger reduction process on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, when the loan trigger increase process and the value display control process are executed in one sequence, the value display control process can execute control (at least set display data) to display the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after it has been updated by the loan trigger increase process on the game ball count display 135. This makes it possible to display a value indicating the latest number of game balls, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the launch of a game ball (sending a game ball to the launch pad and launching it), and the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball) occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control related to the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase processing → launch trigger decrease processing → foul trigger increase processing. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update events related to the control of the main control board 110 → update events related to the control of the frame control board 120, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a way that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when three update processes - a winning opportunity increase process, a firing opportunity decrease process, and a foul opportunity increase process - are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) to display on the gaming ball count display 135 the value of the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, and the foul opportunity increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of gaming balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of gaming balls (gaming value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of gaming balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the launch of a game ball (sending the game ball to the launch pad and launching it), and the fulfillment of the counting conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control over updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase process → launch trigger decrease process → counting trigger decrease process. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when three update processes - a winning opportunity increase process, a firing opportunity decrease process, and a counting opportunity decrease process - are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, and the counting opportunity decrease process on the game ball count display 135. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the launch of a game ball (sending the game ball to the launch pad and launching it), and the fulfillment of the lending conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control over updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase process → launch trigger decrease process → lending trigger increase process. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a way that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when three update processes - the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, and the lending opportunity increase process - are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a set of display data) to display on the gaming ball count display 135 the value of the number of gaming balls (gaming value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, and the lending opportunity increase process. As a result, the value displayed on the gaming ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of gaming balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of gaming balls (gaming value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of gaming balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball), and the fulfillment of the counting conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control over updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase processing → foul trigger increase processing → counting trigger decrease processing. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when three update processes - a winning opportunity increase process, a foul opportunity increase process, and a counting opportunity decrease process - are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the foul opportunity increase process, and the counting opportunity decrease process on the game ball count display 135. As a result, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the launch of a game ball (sent to the launch pad and launched), the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball), and the fulfillment of a counting condition occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control over updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase process → launch trigger decrease process → foul trigger increase process → count trigger decrease process. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

In addition, when four update processes - winning opportunity increase process, firing opportunity decrease process, foul opportunity increase process, and counting opportunity decrease process - are executed in one sequence, and the value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a set of display data) to display on the game ball count display 135 the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, firing opportunity decrease process, foul opportunity increase process, and counting opportunity decrease process. Therefore, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, the value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, making the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, if the entry of a game ball into one of the various winning slots (various winning areas), the launch of a game ball (sent to the launch pad and launched), the detection of a foul ball (occurrence of a foul ball), and the fulfillment of the lending conditions occur simultaneously (for example, within 4 ms), control over updating the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in one sequence can be executed in the following processing order (execution order): win trigger increase process → launch trigger decrease process → foul trigger increase process → lending trigger increase process. Therefore, by performing various update processes in the order of update event related to control of the main control board 110 → update event related to control of the frame control board 120 → update event related to control of the dedicated unit 170, it is possible to efficiently control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player. It is also possible to control the update of the number of game balls (game value) owned by a player in a manner that is less likely to disadvantage the player.

Furthermore, when four update processes - a winning opportunity increase process, a firing opportunity decrease process, a foul opportunity increase process, and a loan opportunity decrease process - are executed in one sequence, and a value display control process is also executed, the value display control process can execute control (at least a display data set) for displaying the value of the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player after being updated by the winning opportunity increase process, the firing opportunity decrease process, the foul opportunity increase process, and the loan opportunity increase process on the game ball count display 135. Therefore, the value displayed on the game ball count display 135 does not change each time various update processes are executed, and a value indicating the updated number of game balls is displayed, making it possible to display the number of game balls (game value) in a way that is easy for the player to see. In addition, a value indicating the latest number of game balls can be displayed, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Specific example of update control of the number of game balls during operation of the counting button)
A specific example of the update control of the number of game balls during operation of the counting button 20 will be described using Figure 179. Figure 179 is a timing chart relating to the update control of the number of game balls during operation of the counting button 20. It is assumed that the transmission period of the counting notification from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 arrives every 300 ms.

First, at timing T0, which is the transmission cycle for the first counting notification, the counting operation (pressing the counting button 20) is not performed, and no update process is performed to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player.

Then, at timing T1, which does not coincide with the count notification transmission cycle, the counting operation is executed (started), but at this timing, the counting trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

After that, at timing T2, which corresponds to the counting notification transmission cycle, a counting notification corresponding to the counting operation performed (started) at timing T1 is sent, and a counting trigger reduction process (1 or 250) is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player. After that, the counting trigger reduction process is executed at a cycle corresponding to the counting notification transmission cycle until the counting operation ends or the number of game balls owned by the player reaches "0", and each time this occurs the number of game balls owned by the player is reduced.

In addition, at timing T3, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, the firing operation (operation of the firing handle 15) is executed (started), but at this timing, the firing trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed.

Then, at timing T4, which corresponds to the transmission cycle of the counting notification, the game balls are fired corresponding to the firing operation performed (started) at timing T3, and the firing trigger reduction process is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player. In addition, as the counting operation continues, the counting trigger reduction process is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player. After that, the game balls are fired and the firing trigger reduction process is executed at approximately 600 ms intervals until the firing operation ends or the number of game balls owned by the player reaches "0," and each time the number of game balls owned by the player is reduced.

After that, at timing T5, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, a game ball enters one of the various winning slots provided in the game area 5a, but at this timing, the winning opportunity increase process to increase the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed.

In addition, at timing T6, which does not correspond to the transmission cycle of the count notification, a winning opportunity increase process corresponding to the game ball entering the winning slot at timing T5 is executed, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased.

Then, at timing T7, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, a game ball (foul ball) that was launched by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a is detected, but at this timing, the foul trigger increase process to increase the number of game balls owned by the player is not executed.

Then, at timing T8, which does not coincide with the count notification transmission cycle, a foul opportunity increase process corresponding to the detection of a foul ball at timing T7 is executed, and the number of game balls owned by the player is increased.

Furthermore, at timing T9, which corresponds to the transmission cycle of the count notification, a game ball enters one of the various winning slots provided in the game area 5a, but at this timing, the winning opportunity increase process is not executed. At timing T10, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, the winning opportunity increase process corresponding to the game ball entering the winning slot at timing T9 is executed, and the number of game balls owned by the player increases.

Then, at time T11, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, a game ball enters one of the various winning slots provided in the game area 5a, but at this time, the winning opportunity increase process is not executed. At time T12, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, the winning opportunity increase process corresponding to the game ball entering the winning slot at time T11 is executed, and the number of game balls owned by the player increases.

Then, at timing T13, which corresponds to the transmission cycle of the count notification, a game ball enters one of the various winning slots provided in the game area 5a, but at this timing, the winning opportunity increase process is not executed. At timing T14, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the count notification, the winning opportunity increase process corresponding to the game ball entering the winning slot at timing T13 is executed, and the number of game balls owned by the player increases.

The counting operation (pressing the counting button 20) ends at time T15, which does not coincide with the counting notification transmission cycle, but at this time, the counting button 20 continues to be recognized as being pressed, and at time T16, which corresponds to the counting notification transmission cycle, the final counting trigger reduction process (250 balls) corresponding to the counting operation that had been ongoing up to time T15 is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player. The firing operation (operation of the firing handle 15) also ends, but at this time, the firing operation of the game balls by the firing device 92 continues. After that, the counting trigger reduction process will not be executed even if the counting notification transmission cycle arrives until the counting operation is executed again.

Then, at timing T17, which does not coincide with the count notification transmission cycle, the final game ball corresponding to the firing operation that continued up to T16 is fired and the firing trigger reduction process is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player. After that, the firing of game balls and the firing trigger reduction process will not be executed until the firing operation is executed again.

Even when the counting opportunity reduction process is executed in response to the operation of the counting button 20, it is possible to execute the winning opportunity increase process in response to the entry of a game ball into the winning slot, the launch opportunity decrease process in response to the launch of a game ball into the game area 5a, and the foul opportunity increase process in response to the detection of a foul ball in the same sequence.

In this way, even when the counting button 20 is being operated (pressed) to execute the counting trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, if a game ball enters one of the various winning slots provided in the game area 5a, it is possible to execute the winning trigger increase process to increase the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to optimally carry out control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 no longer prevents the update of the number of game balls owned by the player, and the appropriate update of the number of game balls allows the game to proceed appropriately.

In addition, even if the counting button 20 is being operated (pressed) to execute the counting trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, if a game ball is launched by the launching device 92 (the ball feeding unit 91 sends the game ball to the launching platform and launches it), the launch trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls owned by the player can be executed. This makes it possible to optimally carry out control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 no longer prevents the update of the number of game balls owned by the player, and the game can proceed appropriately as the number of game balls is updated appropriately.

In addition, even when the counting button 20 is being operated (pressed) to execute the counting trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, if a game ball (foul ball) that was fired by the launching device 92 but did not reach the game area 5a is detected, it is possible to execute the foul trigger increase process to increase the number of game balls owned by the player. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 no longer prevents the update of the number of game balls owned by the player, and the game can proceed appropriately as the number of game balls is updated appropriately.

In addition, when the operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 is initiated, the counting trigger decrement process in response to the operation of the counting button 20 is not executed, but after the operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 is completed, the counting trigger decrement process in response to the operation of the counting button 20 can be executed once. Therefore, while the counting trigger decrement process can be started slowly, the counting trigger decrement process can be executed as much as the player intends, improving the convenience of the game.

In addition, when operation of the launch handle 15 is initiated, the launch of game balls and the launch trigger reduction process in response to the operation of the launch handle 15 are not executed, but after operation of the launch handle 15 is completed, the launch of game balls and the launch trigger reduction process in response to the operation of the launch handle can be executed once. Therefore, while the launch of game balls and the launch trigger reduction process are initiated slowly, the counting trigger reduction process can be executed as much as the player intends, improving the convenience of the game.

(Specific example of update control of the number of game balls according to the counting operation and the lending operation)
A specific example of the control of updating the number of game balls in response to the counting operation and the lending operation will be described using Figure 180. Figure 180 is a timing chart showing the control of updating the number of game balls in response to the counting operation and the lending operation. It is assumed that the transmission period of the counting notification from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170 and the transmission period of the lending notification from the dedicated unit 170 to the frame control board 120 (or the lending receipt result response notification from the frame control board 120 to the dedicated unit 170) each arrives every 300 ms.

First, at timing T0, which is the transmission cycle for the first counting notification, and timing T1, which is the transmission cycle for the first lending notification, the counting operation (pressing the counting button 20) and the lending operation (pressing the lending button on the dedicated unit 170) are not executed, and no update process is performed to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player.

Then, at timing T2, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the counting notification or the transmission cycle of the loan notification, the loan operation is executed, but at this timing, the loan trigger increase process to increase the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

After that, at timing T3, which corresponds to the counting notification transmission cycle, a counting notification indicating that a counting operation has not been performed is sent to the dedicated unit 170, but the counting trigger reduction process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

In addition, at timing T4, which corresponds to the transmission cycle of the loan notification, a loan notification corresponding to the loan operation performed (started) at timing T2 is sent, and at timing T5, a loan trigger increase process corresponding to the loan notification received by gaming machine 1 at timing T4 is executed, increasing the number of game balls owned by the player.

Then, at timing T6, the lending operation ends, but at this timing, lending information (lend notification) regarding the number of game balls is not sent, and processing to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

After that, at timings T7 and T9, which correspond to the counting notification transmission cycle, counting notifications indicating that a counting operation has not been performed are sent to the dedicated unit 170, but no processing is performed to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player.

Furthermore, at timing T8 and timing T10, which correspond to the transmission cycle of the loan notification, a loan notification indicating that a loan operation has not been performed is sent to gaming machine 1, but processing to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

Then, at timing T11, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the counting notification or the loan notification, the counting operation and the loaning operation are performed, but at this timing, the counting information (counting notification) on the number of game balls and the loaning information (loan notification) on the number of game balls are not sent, and the process to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed. In other words, this is a processing restriction period in which the execution of the counting trigger decrease process and the loan trigger increase process is restricted.

Then, at timing T12, which corresponds to the counting notification transmission cycle, a counting notification corresponding to the counting operation performed (started) at timing T11 is sent, and the counting trigger reduction process (1 or 250) is executed, reducing the number of game balls owned by the player.

In addition, at timing T13, which corresponds to the transmission cycle of the loan notification, a loan notification corresponding to the loan operation performed (started) at timing T11 is sent, and at timing T14, a loan trigger increase process corresponding to the loan notification received by gaming machine 1 at timing T13 is executed, increasing the number of gaming balls owned by the player.

Then, at timing T15, which does not coincide with the transmission cycle of the counting notification or the loan notification, the loan operation ends, but at this timing, loan information (loan notification) on the number of game balls is not sent, and processing to update the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player is not executed.

Note that although it is assumed that the counting operation and the lending operation are performed simultaneously at timing T11, even if the counting operation is performed between timing T10 and timing T12 and then the lending operation is performed up to timing T12, the timing of the counting operation or the lending operation is a processing restriction period during which the execution of the counting trigger decrease process or the lending trigger increase process is restricted, and after the counting trigger decrease process is performed at timing T12, the lending trigger increase process is executed at timing T14.

Furthermore, even if a lending operation is performed between timings T10 and T12 and then a counting operation is performed up to timing T12, the timings at which the lending operation and counting operation are performed are processing restriction periods during which the execution of the counting trigger decrease process and lending trigger increase process is restricted, and after the counting trigger decrease process is executed at timing T12, the lending trigger increase process will be executed at timing T14.

In other words, the period between the previous counting notification transmission cycle and the next counting notification transmission cycle is a counting restriction period in which the execution of the counting trigger decrement process is restricted even if a counting operation is performed, and the counting trigger decrement process corresponding to this counting operation will be executed at the timing of the next counting notification transmission cycle after the counting operation.

In addition, the period between the previous loan notification transmission cycle and the next loan notification transmission cycle is a loan restriction period in which the execution of the loan trigger increase process is restricted even if a loan operation is performed, and the loan trigger increase process in response to this loan operation will be executed at the timing of the next loan notification transmission cycle after the loan operation.

In this way, even when the counting button 20 is being operated (pressed) to execute the counting trigger decrease process to reduce the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player, if a loan notification is input from the dedicated unit 170 in response to the operation of the loan button, it is possible to execute the loan trigger increase process to increase the number of game balls (game value) owned by the player. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player. Furthermore, the operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 no longer prevents the update of the number of game balls owned by the player, and the appropriate update of the number of game balls allows the game to proceed appropriately.

Furthermore, when the counting notification transmission cycle ends, a counting restriction period begins in which the execution of the counting trigger decrease process is restricted, and when the transmission cycle for the loan notification (or loan receipt result response notification) ends after the counting restriction period begins, a loan restriction period begins in which the execution of the loan trigger increase process is restricted. The timing at which the counting restriction period is lifted (the counting notification transmission cycle) and the timing at which the loan restriction period is lifted (the loan notification or loan receipt result response notification transmission cycle) do not coincide. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as conflicting between the counting trigger decrease process in response to the operation (pressing) of the counting button 20 on the gaming machine 1 and the loan trigger increase process in response to the operation (pressing) of the loan button on the dedicated unit 170. Furthermore, updates to the number of game balls owned by the player are no longer hindered, and proper updates to the number of game balls allow the game to progress appropriately.

Furthermore, if a counting operation and a lending operation occur during a period in which the counting limit period and the lending limit period overlap, regardless of which operation is performed first, the counting trigger decrease process will be executed first, and the lending trigger increase process will be executed later. This allows the counting operation on the gaming machine 1 to be prioritized, and makes it possible to prevent the number of gaming balls owned by a player from increasing beyond the upper limit.

Furthermore, if a lending operation occurs in a first period where the counting limit period and lending limit period that arrive earlier overlap, and a counting operation occurs in a second period where the counting limit period and lending limit period that arrive later overlap, the lending trigger increase process is executed first, and the counting trigger decrease process is executed later. This makes it possible to execute the lending trigger increase process and the counting trigger decrease process in an order that reflects the order of operations performed by the player as closely as possible.

(Example of effects when controlled to normal gaming mode)
Using Figure 181, we will explain an example of the presentation when controlled in the normal game state (normal mode, C time mode).

First, we will explain examples of the effects that occur when the RWM is cleared and control is restored to the normal game state (normal mode) using Figures 181(a-1), 181(a-2), and 181(c).

When power is turned on with RWM clear, the RWM areas of the main RAM 110c and frame control RAM 120c that are the target of RWM clear are initialized. However, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the power-on command sent from the main control board 110 after RWM clear is complete, a loading screen with the words "NOW ROADING" displayed on it will be displayed on the first image display device 70, as shown in Figure 181 (a-1).

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command, it is controlled to normal mode as shown in FIG. 181(a-2), and the first image display device 70 displays the normal mode background image, along with the combination of performance symbols 70a that results in the initial result of "123" and the combination of special symbols TZ, and the RWM clear notification begins. Specifically, the audio output device 9 outputs the RWM clear notification sound "RWM has been cleared + input BGM," and the frame lighting device 10 lights up (white) to indicate the RWM clear.

At this time, the left-hit notification urging the player to aim the game ball at the left area of the game area 5a and the launch instruction notification suggesting that the game ball be aimed at the first starting hole 45 are not executed, but upon receiving the power-on command, the initial operation of the first movable member 77a and the second movable member 77b is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) (not shown).

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 after the RWM clear notification (for example, 1 minute) has ended, the display of the first special symbol will begin to change according to the result of the jackpot determination, and as shown in Figure 181 (c), the change effect will begin and the display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will begin to change. Then, regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a RUSH acquisition chance effect will begin, which will determine whether or not the game will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state. Specifically, a chance effect background image will be displayed, and a chance notification image containing the words "RUSH acquisition chance" will be displayed.

After that, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed, the first image display device 70 will execute a RUSH acquisition failure display (such as a stopped display of the miss display symbol 70a) to notify players that they will not be controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and the game will be controlled to the special time-saving game state of normal mode. On the other hand, if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed, the first image display device 70 will execute a RUSH acquisition success display (such as a movement display of the first movable member 77a + a stopped display of the RUSH entry display symbol 70a) to notify players that they will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and the game will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

Next, we will explain examples of presentations when the normal time-saving game mode ends and control is restored to the normal game mode (C-time mode) using Figures 181(b-1), 181(b-2), and 181(c).

First, in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the final time during normal time-saving play in RUSH mode, a result effect is initiated that shows the results of play from the jackpot play (the so-called first win) in normal play or special time-saving play. Specifically, a shutter image is displayed, and of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, visibility of the effect symbol 70a is restricted, and the shutter image becomes the result background image. Then, the words "Game Results," the number of jackpot plays executed, and the total number of prize balls awarded to the player, displayed as points, are displayed.

Then, when the final variable effect in the normal time-saving game state ends, the special symbol TZ is displayed as still and the game returns to normal game state. At this time, if there is a reserved memory (remaining reserved) of the second special symbol, the game is controlled to result mode and the result effect continues, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed until the reserved memory (remaining reserved) of the second special symbol is consumed, and the variable display using the special symbol TZ is executed as a variable effect.

Furthermore, when controlled to the normal game state, if there are no reserved memories (remaining reservations) of the second special pattern, or if all reserved memories (remaining reservations) of the second special pattern when controlled to the normal game state have been consumed, as shown in FIG. 181 (b-1), the game will be controlled to C-time mode, and the C-time mode background image will be displayed on the first image display device 70, and the combination of effect pattern 70a and special pattern TZ that was stopped and displayed in the final variable effect of the normal time-saving game state will be displayed.

At this time, a left-hit notification is issued to encourage the player to aim the game ball at the left area of the game area 5a and fire the game ball, and a launch instruction notification is issued to suggest that the game ball be fired at the first starting hole 45. Specifically, as a left-hit notification, a left-hit image HG is displayed in the upper left part of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 outputs the message "Please hit left," and as a launch instruction notification, an aim image NG containing the words "Aim at the starting hole" is displayed in the lower center of the first image display device 70 directly above the first starting hole 45.

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol begins to change in response to the result of the jackpot determination, and as shown in Figure 181 (c), the change effect begins, and the change effect of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins to change. Then, regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a RUSH chance effect begins, which determines whether or not the game will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state. Specifically, a chance effect background image is displayed, and a chance notification image containing the words "RUSH chance" is displayed.

After that, if the first time-saving miss special symbol is displayed, the first image display device 70 will execute a RUSH acquisition failure display (such as a stopped display of the miss display symbol 70a) to notify players that they will not be controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and the game will be controlled to the special time-saving game state of normal mode. On the other hand, if the second time-saving miss special symbol is displayed, the first image display device 70 will execute a RUSH acquisition success display (such as a movement display of the first movable member 77a + a stopped display of the RUSH entry display symbol 70a) to notify players that they will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state, and the game will be controlled to the normal time-saving game state of RUSH mode.

When the special time-saving game state ends and control is made to the normal game state (C time mode), a next preview effect is started in the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first or second special symbol, which is the final time in the special time-saving game state in normal mode, to notify players that control will be made to the normal game state (C time mode) from the next variable effect (variable display of the special symbol). Specifically, a shutter image is displayed, and of the variable display of the symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, visibility of the symbol 70a is restricted, and the shutter image becomes the next preview background image. Then, a text image indicating a chance to win the next RUSH is displayed, and when the variable display of the final time in the special time-saving game state ends, the special symbol TZ is displayed stationary and control is made to the normal game state.

In this way, when the RWM is cleared and the game is controlled to the normal game state, the game is controlled to normal mode and the left-hand hit notification and firing instruction notification are not executed, whereas when the normal time-limited game state ends and the game is controlled to the normal game state, the game is controlled to C-time mode and the left-hand hit notification and firing instruction notification are executed. This makes it difficult for players to realize that the RWM has been cleared and the game has been controlled to the normal game state, and discourages players from playing only after the RWM has been cleared, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while maintaining a balance of profits between players and gaming establishments.

In addition, a common RUSH acquisition chance presentation is executed whether the normal game state is controlled by clearing the RWM or the normal time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is controlled. This makes it less likely that a player will mistake the normal game state controlled by clearing the RWM and the normal game state controlled by the end of the time-saving game state as different game states, and makes it possible to more efficiently control presentations.

When controlled to C-time mode, the left-hit notification and launch instruction notification are executed, but it is also possible to execute the launch instruction notification without executing the left-hit notification. Even in this case, the player will be able to understand that the game ball will be launched aiming at the left area of the play area 5a, making it possible to improve the efficiency of presentation control while minimizing disadvantages to the player.

In addition, rather than executing the above-mentioned auxiliary vibration effect (an effect that vibrates the vibration motor provided on the hand rest according to the number of reserved special symbols) in the normal game state, the above-mentioned auxiliary vibration effect may be executed in the third time-saving game state. Even in this case, it may be possible to customize whether or not to execute the auxiliary vibration effect (ON/OFF) and the value of the first reserved special symbol number ("3" or "4") that will cause the auxiliary vibration effect to be executed by operating the game effect customization operation.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a notification means that notifies the player of the occurrence of a predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-16405). However, the gaming machines described in the above patent document have room for improvement in terms of appropriately notifying the player of the occurrence of the predetermined event.

(A) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, which is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the first control means stores a predetermined area (for example, main RAM 11 The second control means is capable of performing control to clear the predetermined information stored in the RAM 120c (RWM clear processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (game ball count clear), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, with the first notification and the second notification having different notification priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(B) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the game value to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after being stopped; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value; and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of clearing the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the alarm means is capable of issuing a first alarm (power restoration alarm) in response to the restoration and a second alarm (game ball count clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the game value, with the first and second alarms having different priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(C) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the first control means is capable of performing control related to settings (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the alarm means is capable of performing a first alarm (setting change alarm, setting confirmation alarm) in response to the control related to the setting and a second alarm (clearing the number of gaming balls alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of specified events.

(D) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a detection means (first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b) that detects magnetism, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the alarm means is capable of making a first alarm (magnet detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (clearing the number of gaming balls alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and wherein the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of specified events.

(E) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a detection means (radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects radio waves, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the alarm means is capable of making a first alarm (unauthorized radio wave detection error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (number of gaming balls clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and wherein the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of specified events.

(F) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a detection means (general winning slot sw43a, first start slot sw45a, second start slot sw47a, large winning slot sw50a, outlet slot sw39) that detects gaming media corresponding to the gaming value. a) and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (winning ball count abnormality error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the game value, and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(G) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, a detection means (subtraction calculation port SW91C) that detects the game medium corresponding to the game value being released into the game area, and an alarm means (sound The system is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (an abnormal error notification of the number of shot balls) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (a clearing notification of the number of game balls) in response to clearing the game value, with the first notification and the second notification having different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(H) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, an openable and closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body, and an alarm means (sound The gaming machine is equipped with a voice output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (game ball count clear notification) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, with the first notification and the second notification having different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(I) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) that can communicate with the first control means, stores the game value owned by the player, and controls updates to the game value; and a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects when communication between the first control means and the second control means is impossible. , and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (internal gaming machine communication abnormality error notification) in response to detection by the detection means, and a second notification (number of gaming balls clear notification) in response to clearing the gaming value, with the first notification and the second notification having different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(J) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value; a detection means (frame control board 120) that detects when communication is not possible between the gaming machine and the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170); and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the control means is capable of controlling the clearing of the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and the alarm means is capable of issuing a first alarm (communication line abnormality error alarm) in response to detection by the detection means and a second alarm (game ball count clear alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, with the first alarm and the second alarm having different priorities. Therefore, an alarm for the occurrence of a predetermined event can be issued in an efficient manner.

(K) An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value out of the gaming machine and control for clearing the gaming value (game ball count clearing), and the alarm means is capable of performing a first alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control and a second alarm (game ball count clearing alarm) in response to the clearing of the gaming value, and the first alarm and the second alarm have different priorities. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of specified events.

(L) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, a detection means (main control board 110) that detects specific information (e.g., the maximum increase number) that is counted when a counting condition is met, and an alarm means (audio output device). The system is equipped with a plurality of control devices (device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), the second control means is capable of performing control to clear the game value (clearing the number of game balls), and the notification means is capable of performing a first notification (announcement that the acquisition limit device has been activated) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (announcement that the number of game balls has been cleared) in response to the clearing of the game value, with the first notification and the second notification having different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(M) A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, an openable/closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), detection means for detecting the state of the door body (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b), and notification means (audio output device 9, image The gaming machine is equipped with display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine. The notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (glass frame opening error notification, inner frame opening error notification) in response to detection by the detection means and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress) in response to the discharge control, and is characterized in that the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(S) A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the machine comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value; and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the machine is capable of clearing predetermined information stored in the first control means and predetermined information stored in the second control means based on the performance of a specific operation (RWM clear operation), and the alarm means is capable of issuing an alarm in response to the specific operation when the specific operation is performed, without issuing an alarm in a manner that distinguishes between the clearing of the predetermined information stored in the first control means and the clearing of the predetermined information stored in the second control means. This allows for efficient notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(a) A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, an openable/closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body, and a notification means (audio output device) that can issue a notification (glass frame open error, inner frame open error) in response to detection by the detection means. The gaming machine is equipped with a control unit 9, image display units 70-73, frame lighting unit 10, and board lighting unit 76, and the control unit is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine. The notification unit is capable of issuing a notification in response to detection by the detection unit in both cases where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is being performed and where the detection unit detects when the discharge control is not being performed. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(b) A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game; a second control means (frame control board 120) that can communicate with the first control means, stores the game value owned by the player, and controls updates to the game value; a detection means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that detects that the first control means and the second control means are unable to communicate; and a The gaming machine is also equipped with notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of issuing notifications (notifying of an internal gaming machine communication abnormality error), and the first control means is capable of performing setting-related control (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing), and the notification means is characterized in that while the setting-related control is being performed, it does not issue a notification in response to detection even if the detection means detects an error, but issues a notification in response to the detection once the setting-related control has ended. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(h) A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., a game ball count clear notification, a RWM clear notification) in response to a second event that makes it possible to control the progress of the game, and wherein the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be efficiently issued.

(i) An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification (e.g., a setting change notification, a setting confirmation notification) in response to a first event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and a second notification (e.g., a win limit device activation notification, a ball removal operation in progress notification) in response to a second event that makes it impossible to control the progress of the game, and wherein the first notification and the second notification have different priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be efficiently issued.

(j) A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls updates to the game value, and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the notification means is capable of issuing a first notification in response to a first event that can control the progress of the game (e.g., a game ball count clear notification) and a second notification in response to a second event that can control the progress of the game (e.g., a RWM clear notification, a power restoration notification), and the first notification and the second notification have different notification priorities. Therefore, notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event can be efficiently issued.

(k) A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the game value owned by the player and controlling the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the alarm means issues a first alarm in response to a first event (for example, an abnormal error in the number of winning balls), It is possible to issue two notifications (for example, notification of a ball count error, notification of an abnormal number of balls fired) in response to a second event different from the first event (for example, notification of the number of game balls cleared, notification of a setting change, notification of a setting confirmation), and the first notification can be made without resuming if the power supply is restored after the power supply is cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made with the power supply being cut off while the second event is occurring and then resumed after the power supply is restored. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(l) A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the alarm means issues a first alarm ( For example, a notification that the number of game balls has been cleared and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (for example, a setting change notification or a setting confirmation notification) can be made. The first notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being cut off while the second event is occurring. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(m) A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using a game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the alarm means issues a first alarm in response to a first event (for example, a winning ball It is possible to issue a first notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., a ball count abnormality error notification, RWM abnormality error notification), and a second notification in response to a second event different from the first event (e.g., a ball count abnormality error notification, RWM abnormality error notification).The first notification can be made without resuming if the power supply is restored after being cut off while the first event is occurring, and the second notification can be made without resuming if the power supply is restored after being cut off while the second event is occurring.This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(n) A 23rd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and a display means (frame control display 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal number of winning balls error, error code "H69" indicating an abnormal number of shot balls error), and second information corresponding to a second event different from the first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame open error, or error code "H65" indicating an inner frame open error). The display of the first information can be prevented from resuming when power is restored after a power cutoff while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be resumed when power is restored after a power cutoff while the second information is being displayed. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a predetermined event.

(o) A 24th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and a display means (frame control display 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H68" indicating that the number of game balls has been cleared) and a second event different from the first event. The device is capable of displaying second information corresponding to the event (for example, error code "H64" indicating a glass frame open error, error code "H65" indicating an inner frame open error), and the display of the first information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being cut off while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be resumed when the power supply is restored after being cut off while the second information is being displayed. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(p) A 25th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, and a display means (frame control indicator 125), wherein the display means displays first information corresponding to a first event (for example, error code "H66" indicating an illegal radio wave detection error) and a second event different from the first event. and second information corresponding to the error (for example, error code "H68" indicating an abnormal error in the number of winning balls, or error code "H69" indicating an abnormal error in the number of shots), and the display of the first information can be prevented from resuming when power is restored after a power cutoff while the first information is being displayed, and the display of the second information can be prevented from resuming when power is restored after a power cutoff while the second information is being displayed. This allows for optimal notification of the occurrence of a specified event.

(Content 2 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming value owned by a player. Some of these gaming machines perform a gaming ball count clearing process that clears the gaming value when power is supplied to the gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-104306). However, if the gaming ball count clearing process is performed when power is supplied, there is a risk that the control process of the control means will become complicated.

(N) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that has a movable presentation means (movable presentation device 77) that can operate in a predetermined manner and that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, and that includes a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after being stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, a third control means (presentation control board 130) that controls the initial operation of the movable presentation means, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display device The gaming machine is equipped with a power supply unit 70-73, a frame lighting device 10, and a board lighting device 76. The second control means is capable of clearing the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of issuing different notifications (different notifications for audio notification, visual notification, and illumination notification) for the notification in response to the restoration (power restoration notification) and the notification in response to the clearing of the game value (clearing the number of game balls). The third control means is capable of initializing the movable presentation means in the same manner when the restoration is performed and when the game value is cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the control processing of the control means in a gaming machine that performs a game ball clearing process.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball removal switch for ejecting gaming balls circulating within the gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-39943). However, there is room for improvement in terms of appropriately notifying the player that gaming balls are being ejected.

(O) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, and a specific display (gaming ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value. The control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and is capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the specific display when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that gaming balls are being discharged.

(P) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, a first display unit (frame control indicator 125) that can display the value of the gaming value, and a second display unit (game ball count indicator 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and is capable of displaying specific information (error code "-") on the first indicator and the second indicator when the discharge control is being performed. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that gaming balls are being discharged.

(Q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, and includes a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the first control means stores data in a predetermined area (e.g., main RAM 110c, frame control RAM 12 0c), the second control means is capable of executing control (RWM clear processing) to clear predetermined information stored in the frame control board (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to eject gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification means is capable of executing a first notification (RWM clear notification) in response to the clearing of the predetermined information and a second notification (ball removal operation in progress notification) in response to the ejection control, and is characterized in that execution of the first notification can be restricted while the second notification is being executed. This makes it possible to preferably notify that gaming balls are being ejected.

(R) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which games can be played using game value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state to the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after being stopped, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and executes update control of the game value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the second control means is capable of executing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge game media corresponding to the game value from the gaming machine, and the alarm means is capable of executing a first alarm (power restoration alarm) in response to the restoration and a second alarm (ball removal operation in progress alarm) in response to the discharge control, and is capable of restricting the execution of the first alarm while the second alarm is being executed. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that game balls are being dispensed.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the gaming machine to an external device (see, for example, Figures 4 to 9 of JP 2021-104306 A). However, the amount of information transmitted from the gaming machine to an external device is large, which causes a control load on the control means.

(T) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, the gaming machine comprising a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) for storing the gaming value owned by the player and controlling the update of the gaming value, the first control means being capable of performing predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on the fact that a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) has been performed, and the second control means being capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) for discharging gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine based on the fact that a second operation (ball removal operation) has been performed, and when the discharge control is performed, no information is sent to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and when the predetermined processing is performed, information (information related to Bit 0 to Bit 2 of fraud detection status 1 in the HC/fraud monitoring information) can be sent to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(U) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and control to clear the gaming value (clearing the number of gaming balls), and is characterized in that when the discharge control is performed, information is not sent to an external device (dedicated unit 170), and when the gaming value is cleared, information can be sent to an external device. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(q) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event (for example, in the case of ``setting change,'' ``setting confirmation,'' ``power on (RWM clear),'' and ``winning limit device activation,'' the corresponding bit of ``fraud detection status 1 (main control)'' in ``HC/fraud monitoring information'' is ``1'') to the outside of the gaming machine when a first event occurs, and is capable of not transmitting information corresponding to the second event (for example, in the case of ``ball removal operation in progress,'' ``ball removal lever operation error,'' ``communication line abnormality error,'' and ``communication no response error,'' the corresponding bit of ``fraud detection status 2 (frame control)'' in ``HC/fraud monitoring information'' is not ``1,'' and no information is transmitted) to the outside of the gaming machine when a second event different from the first event occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(r) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play games using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. When a first event occurs, the control means is capable of not sending information corresponding to the first event to an external device (dedicated unit 170) (for example, in the case of a "ball removal operation in progress" or a "ball removal lever operation error," the corresponding bit for "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not set to "1," and no information is sent). When a second event different from the first event occurs, the control means is capable of not sending information corresponding to the second event to an external device (for example, in the case of a "communication line abnormality error" or a "communication no response error," the corresponding bit for "fraud detection status 2 (frame control)" in the "HC/fraud monitoring information" is not set to "1," and no information is sent). This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(s) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value. When a first event occurs, the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the first event to an external device (dedicated unit 170) (for example, for "setting change" or "setting confirmation," information corresponding to "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1"). When a second event different from the first event occurs, the control means is capable of transmitting information corresponding to the second event to an external device (for example, for "power on (RWM clear)" or "win limit device activated," information corresponding to "fraud detection status 1 (main control)" in "HC/fraud monitoring information" is "1"). This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the control means.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a ball ejection switch for ejecting gaming balls circulating within the gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-39943). However, no consideration is given to the execution of other control processes while the gaming balls are being ejected, which could result in delays in the ejection of the gaming balls.

(V) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, wherein the first control means is capable of performing predetermined processing (setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, RWM clear processing) based on a first operation (setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, RWM clear operation) being performed, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine based on a second operation (ball removal operation), and the first control means is capable of not performing the predetermined processing when the discharge control is being performed, and performing the predetermined processing when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge gaming balls without delay.

(W) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls updates to the gaming value, wherein the first control means is capable of performing a process (RWM clearing process) to clear predetermined information stored in a predetermined area, and the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation process) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the first control means is capable of not performing the process to clear the predetermined information when the discharge control is being performed, and performing the process to clear the predetermined information when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge gaming balls without delay.

(X) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play games using gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that can restore the state before the power supply was stopped when the power supply is restored after it has been stopped; and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of that gaming value; the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine; and the first control means is characterized in that when the discharge control is being performed, the first control means does not restore the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, but when the discharge control is not being performed, the first control means is capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped. This makes it possible to discharge gaming balls without delay.

(Y) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising: a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game when the machine is in a playable state (for example, a state in which all interrupts are allowed in step S33 of the main control board main processing); and a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of that gaming value, wherein the second control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the first control means is capable of not entering the playable state when the discharge control is being performed, and of entering the playable state when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge gaming balls without delay.

(Z) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a player can play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising: a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value; and a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) that can notify the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a magnet detection error, an unauthorized radio wave detection error), wherein the control means is capable of performing discharge control (frame control board ball removal operation processing) to discharge gaming media corresponding to the gaming value from the gaming machine, and the notification means does not notify the occurrence of the predetermined event when the discharge control is being performed, but is capable of notifying the occurrence of the predetermined event when the discharge control is not being performed. This makes it possible to discharge gaming balls without delay.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using gaming value owned by the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which a game is played using gaming balls (enclosed gaming balls) that circulate within the gaming machine (see, for example, JP 2020-39943 A). However, no consideration has been given to retaining the gaming balls circulating within the gaming machine, and there is a risk that a shortage of gaming balls will reduce interest in the game.

(c) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, an openable/closable door body (inner frame 3, glass frame 4), a detection means (glass frame open detection switch 31a, inner frame open detection switch 31b) that detects the state of the door body, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means controls (touch sensor 1) to fire gaming media corresponding to the gaming value into the gaming area (gaming area 5a). 5a, when input is made to the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 92b is driven to operate the firing hammer, and the game value is cleared (processing to clear the number of game balls). The notification means is capable of making a notification in response to the clearing of the game value (game ball count clear notification). The control means is capable of firing the game medium into the game area if the detection means is not detecting anything when the notification is made, and is capable of restricting the firing of the game medium into the game area if the detection means is detecting anything when the notification is made. This prevents a decrease in game interest due to a shortage of game balls.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using the gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game when the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball holding information and the number of balls corresponding to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). While a forced termination of a game can ensure a healthy game, it does not take into consideration the player and may reduce the player's interest in the game.

(d) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the gaming ball count display 135) reaches a first value (40,000), the control means outputs first gaming information (H C. When a gaming machine error state is detected in the fraud monitoring information, a message such as "H23 Number of Gaming Balls Exceeded" can be transmitted. When the value of specific information counted when a counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (95,000), second gaming information (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 in the HC fraud monitoring information is "1") can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. The notification means is characterized in that when the first value is met, it does not issue a specified caution notification (warning for addiction, warning for forgetting to remove cards), but when the second value is met, it issues the specified caution notification. This prevents a decline in gaming interest.

(e) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value owned by the player and controls the update of the gaming value, an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and a counting operation unit (counting button 20) for counting the gaming value owned by the player, and the alarm means When the value of the gaming value owned by the player (for example, the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the gaming ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), no notification is issued urging the player to operate the counting operation unit (press the count button to count), but when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), a notification is issued urging the player to operate the counting operation unit. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(f) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, which is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (random number value for determining a jackpot) when an acquisition condition is met (winning at the first start port 45 or the second start port 47) and executes control to determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes performance control in response to commands sent from the first control means, and the first control means executes control to make a pre-determination (e.g., a first pre-determination process) based on the judgment information as to whether or not to execute the special game prior to the determination. The second control means is capable of executing a pre-effect (e.g., a reserved consecutive win effect) in response to a command based on the pre-determination (e.g., a first look-ahead command). The pre-effect can be executed before the value of the gaming value owned by the player (e.g., the amount of gaming value owned by the player displayed on the gaming ball count display 135) reaches a first value (e.g., 40,000). However, the execution of the pre-effect can be restricted when a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-effect is met (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) before the value of the specific information counted when a counting condition is met reaches a second value (e.g., 95,000) (e.g., the value of the maximum increase reaches 94,000). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(g) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using game value owned by the player, comprising a first control means (main control board 110) that controls whether or not to play a special game that is advantageous to the player, a second control means (frame control board 120) that stores the game value owned by the player and controls the update of the game value, and an effect execution means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 110) that can perform game effects related to the special game. The effect execution means is characterized in that when the value of the game value owned by the player (for example, the amount of game value owned by the player displayed on the game ball count display 135) reaches a first value (for example, 40,000), it does not perform a specific game effect (for example, a completion effect) as a game effect related to the special game, but when the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a second value (for example, 95,000), it is able to perform the specific game effect. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention relating to the earning limit device described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using the gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game when the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball holding information and the number of balls corresponding to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). While a forced termination of a game can ensure a healthy game, it does not take into consideration the player and may reduce interest in the game.

(AA) A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes controls in response to commands sent from the first control means, and the first control means, when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), sends a predetermined value to each winning slot at a predetermined timing (e.g., The execution of the predetermined control can be limited when a predetermined value is reached due to a win or when a special game ends, and the second control means can execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting standby effect, customer waiting demo effect) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no fluctuation has occurred for a predetermined time or when a customer waiting designation command is received). The notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) can notify the number of remaining balls (for example, 5,000 remaining) until the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value, and can notify the remaining number while the customer waiting effect is being executed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AB) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes controls in response to commands sent from the first control means, and the first control means executes a predetermined control when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). In this case, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined value is reached after a prize is won at each winning slot, or when a special game ends), and the second control means can execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting standby effect, customer waiting demo effect) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when no fluctuation has occurred for a predetermined time, or when a customer waiting command is received).When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) can notify information related to the restriction (for example, win limit device is activated, today's game has ended), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted during the execution of the customer waiting effect, the information related to the restriction can be notified.This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AC) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, which is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when the advantageous game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means displays information related to the restriction (e.g., a pre-notification message, for example, a message indicating that the winning limit device is operating, The information relating to the restriction can be notified in a first notification mode (for example, the winning limit device is activated after the symbols stop, and the game ends. Please stop shooting → The winning limit device is activated, the game ends for today) when the advantageous game is not being executed and the value of the specific information meets a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control is restricted (for example, when a prize is won in the second start port 47 or the like during the execution of a time-saving game state and the predetermined value is met, and the winning limit device is activated), and the information relating to the restriction can be notified in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, the winning limit device is activated after the symbols stop, and the game ends. Please stop shooting → The winning limit device is activated, the game ends for today). This prevents a decline in interest in playing games.

(AD) A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of specific information counted due to the fulfillment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means notifies the player of information related to the restriction (e.g., when the winning limit device is operating, The device is capable of announcing the end of play for the day, and if power is restored after the value of the specific information has reached a predetermined value and the execution of the predetermined control has been restricted, the device can notify the information related to the restriction at a first timing (e.g., immediately after power is restored), and if power is restored after the value of the specific information has reached a predetermined value but before the execution of the predetermined control has been restricted, the device can notify the information related to the restriction at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., when the jackpot game ends). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AE) A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means displays information related to the restriction in a first alarm mode (e.g., when the winning limit device is operating). If the power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the first notification mode, the information related to the restriction is notified in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (for example, "Winning limit device is operating, please clear RWM"). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AF) A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and when the value of specific information counted due to the fulfillment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the alarm means displays information related to the restriction in a predetermined alarm manner (e.g., when the winning limit device is operating). The system is characterized in that even if the power is restored while the information related to the restriction is being notified in the predetermined notification manner, the information related to the restriction will still be notified in the predetermined notification manner. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AJ) A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a second control means (performance control board 130) that executes controls in response to commands sent from the first control means, and the first control means executes a control operation when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000). If this occurs, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined value is reached by winning at each winning slot, or when a special game ends), and the second control means can execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting standby effect, customer waiting demo effect) when a predetermined condition is met (for example, no fluctuation occurs for a predetermined time, or a customer waiting command is received). Before the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the customer waiting effect can be executed, but after the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the execution of the customer waiting effect can be restricted. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AK) An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), a notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, display unit 174), and a counting operation unit (counting and a number button 20). When the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and the predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends), and the notification means can issue a notification urging the player to operate the counting operation unit (for example, press the count button to count). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AL) A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows players to play games using their own gaming value, and includes control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special symbol special power control processing, normal symbol normal power control processing, and control related to the release of gaming media), and notification means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76). When the value of specific information counted due to the fulfillment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), the control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined controls at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and the predetermined value is reached, or when the special game ends), and the notification means can issue predetermined caution notifications (warning about addiction, warning about forgetting to remove cards) in accordance with the restriction on the execution of the predetermined controls. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AN) A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine in which a game can be played using gaming value owned by a player, comprising a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), wherein the control means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed) when the value of specific information counted when a counting condition is met (e.g., the value of the maximum increase) meets a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the alarm means is capable of alerting that it has a function to restrict the execution of the predetermined control (e.g., this machine may stop playing when a predetermined number of prizes are won, this machine is equipped with a winning limit device). This prevents a decline in interest in playing games.

(AO) An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display devices 70-73, frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76), and the control means is configured to notify the player that the value of specific information counted when a counting condition is met (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) is a predetermined value. When a certain value (e.g., 95,000) is reached, the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a predetermined value is reached by winning at each winning slot, or when a special game ends), and the notification means can notify the player of predetermined game information related to the game value won (e.g., information such as "XX shots won," or information indicating the value of specific information), and when the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value, the predetermined game information can be notified in a specific manner (e.g., MAX win). This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(AP) A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a game using the game value owned by the player and that is capable of executing a preliminary judgment (e.g., a first preliminary judgment process) prior to determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control process, special chart special power control process, normal chart normal power control process, control related to the launch of gaming media), and a second control means (presentation control board 130) that executes control in response to commands sent from the first control means, The first control means can restrict the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and the predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends) if the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000). The second control means can execute a pre-effect (a look-ahead effect) based on the pre-determination, and can restrict the execution of the pre-effect if a predetermined condition for restricting the execution of the pre-effect is met before the value of the specific information reaches the predetermined value. This prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(Contents of the invention relating to gaming machine information of the winning limit device described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using a gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines transmit information from the gaming machine to an external device (see, for example, Figures 4 to 9 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-104306). However, there is still room for improvement in transmitting information.

(AG) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means transmits the value of specific information (e.g., maximum increase) counted when a counting condition is met. When the value of the number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 95,000), the execution of the predetermined control can be restricted at a predetermined timing (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and the predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 is "1") to an external device of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and if power is restored while the predetermined game information is being transmitted, the predetermined game information can be transmitted again. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of information transmission from the gaming machine.

(AH) A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing advantageous games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, which is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed) when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), and the gaming information transmission means is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined control at a predetermined timing (e.g., when a prize is won in each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game is completed), and When the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of Fraud Detection State 1 is "1") can be transmitted to an external device (dedicated unit 170) of the gaming machine. The period from when the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value to when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted when the advantageous game is not being played and the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value (for example, when a ball wins a prize in the first start slot 45 or the like during normal play and the predetermined value is reached, activating the win limit device) can be different from the period when the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value while the advantageous game is being played and the execution of the predetermined control is subsequently restricted (for example, when a ball wins a prize in the big win slot 50 or the like during a jackpot game and the predetermined value is reached, activating the win limit device after the jackpot ends). This allows for improved accuracy in transmitting information from the gaming machine.

(AI) A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a game using gaming value owned by a player and that is capable of controlling an ejection mode for ejecting gaming media used in the game from the gaming machine, and that is equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), and a gaming information transmission means (frame control board 120) that transmits gaming information (e.g., HC/fraud monitoring information) to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170), and the control means, when the value of specific information counted due to the establishment of a counting condition (e.g., the value of the maximum increase number) reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 95,000), at a predetermined timing. The execution of the predetermined control can be restricted (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and a predetermined value is reached, or when a special game ends), and when the execution of the predetermined control is restricted, the game information transmission means can transmit predetermined game information (information in which Bit 6 of fraud detection status 1 is "1") to the outside of the gaming machine (dedicated unit 170). If power is restored while the predetermined game information is being transmitted and the ejection mode control is not being executed when the power is restored, the predetermined game information can be transmitted again, and if power is restored while the predetermined game information is being transmitted and the ejection mode control is being executed when the power is restored, the retransmission of the predetermined game information can be restricted. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of information transmission from the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention relating to the acquisition limit device (security) described in this embodiment)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which a player plays using the gaming value owned by the player. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a forced termination means that forcibly terminates a game when the difference between the number of balls indicated by the ball information and the number of balls corresponding to the total loan amount reaches a predetermined upper limit (see, for example, Patent No. 6318340). While the forced termination of a game can ensure a healthy game, it does not take into consideration security performance, and improvements were needed.

(AM) The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using gaming value owned by the player, and includes a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) that executes predetermined controls (e.g., input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, control related to the release of gaming media), a detection means (e.g., first magnetic detection sensor 53a, second magnetic detection sensor 53b, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects predetermined abnormalities, and an alarm means (audio output device 9, image display device 70). to 73, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76), and the control means can restrict the execution of the specified control at a specified timing (for example, when a prize is won at each winning slot and the specified value is reached, or when a special game ends) if the value of the specific information counted when the counting condition is met (for example, the value of the maximum increase) reaches a specified value (for example, 95,000), and the detection means can detect the specified abnormality even after the execution of the specified control is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a deterioration in security performance.

(Contents of the invention relating to the relationship between the processing order of various control contents and the implementation area)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which games are played using gaming media. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a first control means for controlling the progress of the game and a second control means for controlling the allocation of gaming value (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-083516). However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there is room for improvement in the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a control means (main control board 110, frame control board 120) having a first control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing a first control (control of the progress of the game), a second control area (out-area ROM) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing a second control (complementary control of the game), a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-area RWM) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control, The system is capable of executing a value granting process (payout control process, gaming ball count update process) that grants gaming value (prize balls) based on the winning of a prize ball (a prize awarded by a prize winning unit 125 or a prize winning unit 170); a first information update process (increase counter update process, maximum increment update process) that updates first gaming information (increase counter, maximum increment) using information on the granted gaming value; a control stop process (win limit device activation determination process) that stops the first control based on the first gaming information; a second information update process (display performance information calculation process, gaming machine performance information calculation process) that updates second gaming information (display performance information, gaming machine performance information) using information on the granted gaming value; and an information output process (display control process, gaming machine information notification process) that outputs the second gaming information to an output target (frame control display 125, dedicated unit 170). The first information update process and the second information update process are executed using the second control program (out-of-area program). This enables more efficient control of the gaming machine's operation.

A second configuration for solving the above problem is a device that allows a player to play using the game value (number of game balls) he or she owns, and includes a first control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition limit device activation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (out-area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. a third control area (intra-area ROM area) storing a third control program (intra-area program) for performing third control related to updating the gaming value owned by a player (game ball number update processing, game ball counting processing, game ball lending processing, etc.), a fourth control area (out-area ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (out-area program) for performing fourth control which is different from the third control (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, etc.), a third RWM area (intra-area RWM area) storing variable data which is updated and referenced in the third control and is not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (out-area RWM area) which is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data which is updated and referenced in the fourth control and is not updated in the third control. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A third configuration for solving the above problem is a device that allows a player to play using his/her own gaming value (number of gaming balls), and includes a launching means (launching device 92) for launching gaming media (gaming balls) using the gaming value owned by the player, a first control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first control related to the launch of the gaming media (starting and stopping output of the launch permission signal), a second control area (out-area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second control different from the first control (increment number counter update processing, maximum increment number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (in-area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. a third control area (in-area ROM area) storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing third control related to updating the game value owned by the player (game ball number update processing, game ball count processing, game ball lending processing, etc.); and a fourth control area (in-area ROM area) for performing fourth control (various error notification control processing, display performance information calculation processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, etc.) different from the third control, which is different from the third control. The gaming machine is equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores a program (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control board 110) capable of playing a game and having a first control area (in-area ROM area) storing a first control program (in-area program) for performing first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device activation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (out-area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (out-area program) for performing second control that is different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (in-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (out-area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control, and a third control area (ROM area) for storing a third control program (a program within the area) for performing a third control (a gaming machine information notification process, a gaming ball counting process, a gaming ball lending process, etc.) for outputting information (a gaming machine information notification process, a gaming machine performance information, a hall control/fraud monitoring information, a counting notification, a loan receipt result response, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine; and a fourth control program (various error notification control processes, a display performance information calculation process, a gaming machine performance information calculation process, etc.) which is an area different from the third control area and is different from the third control. The gaming machine is equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores a program (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a first control area (inside area ROM area) that allows a player to play using the game value (number of game balls) that the player owns and that stores a first control program (inside area program) for performing first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device activation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (outside area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outside area program) for performing second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. A control means (main control board 110), a third control area (in-area ROM area) storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (display control process) for informing a player of the game value owned by the player (displaying it on the frame control display 125 and the game ball number display 135), and a fourth control program (various error notification control processes, display performance information calculation processes, gaming machine performance information calculation processes, etc.) which is an area different from the third control area and different from the third control. The gaming machine is equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth control area (outside area ROM area) that stores RAM (outside area program), a third RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is one in which a player can play using the game value (number of game balls) he owns, and which stores a first control area (ROM area) that stores a first control program (in-area program) for performing first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition limit device activation determination processing, etc.), and a second control area (ROM area) that is different from the first control area and stores a second control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.) that is different from the first control. a first control means (main control board 110) having a second control area (outside area ROM area) for storing a second control program (outside area program) for performing the first control, a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) for storing variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control and is not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control and is not updated in the first control; a third control area (in-area ROM area) that stores a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control related to the update of the game value (game ball number update processing, game ball count processing, game ball lending processing, etc.); a fourth control area (out-area ROM area) that is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (out-area program) for performing a fourth control different from the third control; and a third RWM that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control and is not updated in the fourth control. In a gaming machine equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a fourth RWM area (intra-area RWM area) that is different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control (outer-area RWM area), communication between the first control means and the second control means is executed using a program stored in the first control area (intra-area program) or a program stored in the third control area (intra-area program). This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a first control means (main control board 11) that allows a player to play using the game value (number of game balls) he owns, and has a first control area (inside area ROM area) that stores a first control program (inside area program) for performing first control related to the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition upper limit device activation determination processing, etc.), a second control area (outside area ROM area) that is an area different from the first control area and stores a second control program (outside area program) for performing second control different from the first control (increase number counter update processing, maximum increase number update processing, error control processing, etc.), a first RWM area (inside area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the first control but not updated in the second control, and a second RWM area (outside area RWM area) that is an area different from the first RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the second control but not updated in the first control. 0), a third control area (in-area ROM area) storing a third control program (in-area program) for performing a third control (gaming machine information notification process) for outputting specific information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine, and a fourth control area (out-area ROM area) which is an area different from the third control area and stores a fourth control program (out-area program) for performing a fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception process, gaming machine performance information calculation process, etc.) for generating the specific information. In a gaming machine equipped with a second control means (frame control board 120) having a third RWM area (intra-area RWM area) that stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the third control but not updated in the fourth control, and a fourth RWM area (extra-area RWM area) that is an area different from the third RWM area and stores variable data that is updated and referenced in the fourth control but not updated in the third control, the specific information is a predetermined calculation result related to the gaming value. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing games, which is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition limit device activation determination processing, etc.), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that controls the allocation of game value (game ball count update processing, etc.), and the first control means performs first control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and a second control means (frame control board 120) that performs first control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information to the second control means. The second control means executes third control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, gaming ball counting processing, gaming ball lending processing, etc.) for generating second information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine information reception processing, etc.) for receiving the first information, and fifth control (gaming machine information notification processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information and the second information to an external device (such as the dedicated unit 170) of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing games, which is equipped with a first control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game (input control processing, special chart special power control processing, normal chart normal power control processing, acquisition limit device activation determination processing, etc.), and a second control means (frame control board 120) that controls the awarding of game value (game ball count update processing, etc.), wherein the first control means executes first control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for generating first information (gaming machine installation information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, etc.) and second control (hall control/fraud monitoring information management processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information to the second control means, and the second control means executes second information. The control unit executes third control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine performance information calculation processing, gaming ball counting processing, gaming ball lending processing, etc.) for generating the first information (gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall control/fraud monitoring information, counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.), fourth control (gaming machine installation information reception processing, gaming machine information reception processing, etc.) for receiving the first information, fifth control (gaming machine information notification processing, etc.) for transmitting the first information and the second information to an external device of the gaming machine (such as the dedicated unit 170), and sixth control (gaming ball counting processing, gaming ball lending processing, etc.) for transmitting third information (counting notification, loan receipt result response, etc.) generated by the second control means that is different from the second information to an external device of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

A tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing games by firing gaming media (gaming balls) into a gaming area, comprising: a firing means (firing device 92) for firing the gaming media into the gaming area; a first control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game (input control processing, special-chart special-electricity control processing, normal-chart normal-electricity control processing, acquisition limit device activation determination processing, etc.); and a second control means (frame control board 120) for controlling the awarding of gaming value (prize balls) (game ball count update processing, etc.), wherein the first control means and the second control means are capable of permitting the firing of the gaming media (outputting a firing permission signal), and the firing means is capable of firing the gaming media when firing is permitted by the first control means and the second control means. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of control for operating the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention relating to an example of a presentation in which the number of game balls owned by a player is counted)
Here, among conventional gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which games are played using gaming media. Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a first control means capable of updating and storing the gaming value owned by the player and executing a counting process to transfer the gaming value outside the gaming machine, and a second control means for controlling the presentation related to the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-083516). However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the presentation when counting the gaming value.

A first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that allows a player to play using their own gaming value (number of gaming balls), and includes a first control means (frame control board 120) that updates and stores the gaming value owned by the player and executes a counting process (gaming ball counting process) that transfers the gaming value outside the gaming machine, a second control means (effect control board 130) that controls the presentation related to the game, and an operation unit (counting button 20) that causes the first control means to execute the counting process, and the presentation control means is capable of executing predetermined presentations (counting notification presentation, achievement presentation) while the counting process is being executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction through presentations when the gaming value is counted.

(Contents of the invention relating to control processing related to gaming value owned by players)
In conventional gaming machines, game values are awarded to players based on the results of their play, and the players can use the game values to play by firing game media. Some such gaming machines are equipped with a control unit that stores the game value owned by the player in a storage unit and updates the game value as the game progresses (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-104306). However, in gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there is room for improvement in the control process related to the game value owned by the player.

The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that is equipped with an operable first operating means (number of gaming balls clear switch 121), an operable second operating means (RWM clear switch 111a), and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, The storage means has a first storage area (game ball count storage area) in which the game value is stored, and a second storage area (game information storage area) in which predetermined information related to the game is stored. The control means initializes the game value stored in the first storage area if the first operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and initializes the predetermined information stored in the second storage area if the second operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. This makes it possible to optimally perform control processing related to the game value owned by the player.

A second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player. The gaming machine includes: a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area; a circulation means (ball circulation mechanism 90) that circulates the gaming media fired by the firing means within the gaming machine; and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value. The control means is capable of executing media discharge control (ball removal mode transition setting process, gaming ball circulation switch management process, motor drive process, etc.) to discharge the gaming media circulated by the circulation means from the gaming machine, and is capable of starting the media discharge control when the gaming value owned by the player is zero. This enables optimal control processing related to the gaming value owned by the player.

A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming media data) owned by the player, and that includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, a circulation means (ball circulation mechanism 90) that circulates the gaming media fired by the firing means within the gaming machine, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls the gaming media circulated by the circulation means to be released from the gaming machine. The gaming device is capable of executing a medium ejection process (ball removal mode transition setting process, game ball circulation switch management process, motor drive process, etc.) to eject game media to the player; a counting trigger reduction process (counting trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) that sends counting information of the game value to the gaming device and decreases the game value; and a launch stop control process that permits the launching of the game media by the launching means and prohibits the launching of the game media by the launching means. The launch stop control process prohibits the launch of the game media when the medium ejection process is executed, and permits the launch of the game media when the counting trigger reduction process is executed. This makes it possible to optimally perform control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that can use gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by a player to launch gaming media to play games, and that is equipped with a launching means (launching device 92) that launches the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means performs a winning opportunity increase process (winning opportunity gaming ball number addition process, etc.) that can increase the gaming value in response to the gaming medium winning in a winning area (various winning openings) provided in the gaming area, a launching opportunity decrease process (launching opportunity gaming ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can decrease the gaming value in response to the launching means launching the gaming medium, and a process for decreasing the number of launching opportunity gaming balls that have been launched by the launching means. The gaming device can execute a foul trigger increase process (such as a foul ball trigger game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the occurrence of the game medium not reaching the game area, a counting trigger decrease process (such as a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can decrease the game value by sending counting information (counting notice) of the game value to the gaming device in response to the establishment of a counting condition, and a lending trigger increase process (such as a lending trigger game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to input of lending information (lend notice) of the game value from the gaming device, and the control related to the update of the game value can be executed in the following processing order: the winning trigger increase process followed by the firing trigger decrease process, the firing trigger decrease process followed by the foul trigger increase process, and the foul trigger increase process followed by the counting trigger decrease process or the lending trigger increase process. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and is equipped with a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means In response to the game medium winning in the winning areas (various winning slots) provided in the game area, a win opportunity increase process (such as a win opportunity game ball number addition process) can be executed to increase the game value, and a launch opportunity decrease process (such as a launch opportunity game ball number subtraction process) can be executed to decrease the game value in response to the launch of the game medium by the launch means. Control related to the update of the game value can be executed in a processing order in which the win opportunity increase process is followed by the launch opportunity decrease process. This makes it possible to optimally control the game value owned by the player.

A sixth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and is equipped with a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls a winning combination provided in the gaming area. It is possible to execute a win opportunity increase process (such as a win opportunity game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the game medium entering a winning area (various winning slots), and a foul opportunity increase process (such as a foul ball game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the occurrence of a game medium that has been fired by the firing means but has not reached the game area. Control related to the update of the game value can be executed in a processing order in which the win opportunity increase process is followed by the foul opportunity increase process. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A seventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and is equipped with a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means is provided in the gaming area. The gaming device can execute a win trigger increase process (such as a win trigger game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the game medium winning in the selected win area (various win slots), and a count trigger decrease process (such as a count trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can decrease the game value by sending count information (count notification) of the game value to the gaming device in response to the establishment of counting conditions. Control related to updating the game value can be executed in a processing order in which the win trigger increase process is followed by the count trigger decrease process. This makes it possible to optimally control the game value owned by the player.

An eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates of the gaming value, and the control means It is possible to execute a winning opportunity increase process (winning opportunity ball count addition process, etc.) that can increase the game value in response to the winning of the gaming medium in the winning areas (various winning slots) provided in the game device, and a lending opportunity increase process (lending opportunity ball count addition process, etc.) that can increase the game value in response to the input of game value lending information (lending notification) from the gaming device, and the control related to the update of the game value can be executed in a processing order in which the winning opportunity increase process is followed by the lending opportunity increase process. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A ninth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls the firing means The game device can execute a launch trigger reduction process (such as a launch trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can reduce the game value in response to the launch of the game medium, and a foul trigger increase process (such as a foul ball game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the occurrence of a game medium that is launched by the launch means but does not reach the game area, and the control related to the update of the game value can be executed in a processing order in which the launch trigger reduction process is followed by the foul trigger increase process. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

The tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and is equipped with a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls the firing means. When the shooting means shoots the gaming medium, it is possible to execute a firing trigger reduction process (such as a firing trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can reduce the gaming value, and when a counting condition is met, it is possible to execute a counting trigger reduction process (such as a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can reduce the gaming value by sending counting information (counting notification) of the gaming value to the gaming device, and the control related to updating the gaming value can be executed in a processing order where the firing trigger reduction process is followed by the counting trigger reduction process. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the gaming value owned by the player.

An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means In response to the launch means launching the gaming medium, the device can execute a launch trigger reduction process (launch trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can reduce the gaming value, and a lending trigger increase process (lending trigger game ball number addition process, etc.) that can increase the gaming value in response to input of gaming value lending information (lending notification) from the gaming device. Control related to updating the gaming value can be executed in a processing order in which the launch trigger reduction process is followed by the lending trigger increase process. This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the gaming value owned by the player.

A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means determines whether the firing means has fired the gaming media or not. In response to the occurrence of a gaming medium that has not reached the gaming area, a foul trigger increase process (such as a foul ball trigger gaming ball number addition process) can be executed to increase the gaming value, and in response to the establishment of a counting condition, a counting trigger decrease process (such as a counting trigger gaming ball number subtraction process) can be executed to decrease the gaming value by sending counting information (counting notification) of the gaming value to the gaming device. Control related to updating the gaming value can be executed in a processing order in which the foul trigger increase process is followed by the counting trigger decrease process. This makes it possible to optimally control the gaming value owned by the player.

A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and is equipped with a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls the updating of the gaming value. However, in response to the occurrence of a gaming medium that has not reached the gaming area, a foul trigger increase process (such as a foul ball trigger gaming ball number addition process) can be executed to increase the gaming value, and a loan trigger increase process (such as a loan trigger gaming ball number addition process) can be executed to increase the gaming value in response to the input of gaming value loan information (loan notification) from the gaming device.The control related to updating the gaming value can be executed in a processing order in which the foul trigger increase process is followed by the loan trigger increase process.This makes it possible to optimally control the gaming value owned by the player.

A fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and includes a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into a gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates of the gaming value, and the control means updates the counting information of the gaming value in response to the establishment of a counting condition. The gaming device can execute a counting trigger decrease process (such as a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can decrease the game value by sending information (counting notification) to the gaming device, and a lending trigger increase process (such as a lending trigger game ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to input of game value lending information (lend notification) from the gaming device. When the counting trigger decrease process is executed, execution of the lending trigger increase process is restricted, and when the lending trigger increase process is executed, execution of the counting trigger decrease process is restricted. This makes it possible to optimally control the game value owned by the player.

A fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming media data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates of the gaming value, and the control means The device can execute a win opportunity increase process (such as a win opportunity ball number addition process) that can increase the game value in response to the game medium winning in the win area (various win slots) set up in the area, and a count opportunity decrease process (such as a count opportunity ball number subtraction process) that can decrease the game value by sending count information (count notification) of the game value to the gaming device in response to operation of the operating means.The win opportunity increase process can be executed even while operating the operating means (count button 20) that executes the count opportunity decrease process.This makes it possible to optimally control the game value owned by the player.

A sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming media data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (firing control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (firing control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and The control means is capable of executing a launch trigger reduction process (launch trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can reduce the game value in response to the launch means firing the game medium, and a counting trigger reduction process (counting trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can reduce the game value by sending counting information (counting notification) of the game value to the gaming device in response to operation of the operating means.The launch trigger reduction process can be executed even during operation of the operating means that would execute the counting trigger reduction process.This makes it possible to optimally perform control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming media data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means controls the firing means In response to the occurrence of a gaming medium that is fired but does not reach the gaming area, a foul trigger increase process (such as a foul ball trigger gaming ball number addition process) can be executed to increase the gaming value, and a counting trigger decrease process (such as a counting trigger gaming ball number subtraction process) can be executed to decrease the gaming value by sending counting information (counting notification) of the gaming value to the gaming device in response to operation of the operating means.The foul trigger increase process can be executed even during operation of the operating means that would execute the counting trigger decrease process.This makes it possible to optimally control the gaming value owned by the player.

The eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming media data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means: In response to operation of the operating means, a counting trigger decrease process (such as a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) can be executed, which sends counting information (counting notification) of the game value to the gaming device to decrease the game value, and a lending trigger increase process (such as a lending trigger game ball number addition process) can be executed, which increases the game value in response to input of game value lending information (lend notification) from the gaming device.The lending trigger increase process can be executed even during operation of the operating means, which would execute the counting trigger decrease process.This makes it possible to optimally perform control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A 19th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls updates of the gaming value, and a display means (game ball count display 135) that can display the value of the gaming value, and the control means controls a winning area (various winning slots) that can increase the gaming value in accordance with the winning of the gaming medium into the winning area (various winning slots) provided in the gaming area. The system is capable of executing a trigger increase process (such as a win trigger game ball number addition process), a count trigger decrease process (such as a count trigger game ball number subtraction process) that can decrease the game value by sending count information (count notification) of the game value to the gaming device in response to operation of the operating means, and a display control process (game ball number display control process) that can execute control (setting display data) to display the value of the game value on the display means.The win trigger increase process can be executed even during operation of the operating means that executes the count trigger decrease process, and the display control process can execute control to display the value of the game value after it has been updated by the win trigger increase process and the count trigger decrease process.This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A 20th configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (frame control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (frame control RAM 120c) and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means performs a firing trigger reduction process (firing trigger gaming ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can reduce the gaming value in response to the firing means firing the gaming medium, and a control means (frame control board 120) that controls the update of the gaming value. Depending on the operation of the means, the system can execute a counting trigger reduction process (such as a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process) that sends counting information (counting notification) of the game value to the gaming device to reduce the game value, and a display control process (game ball number display control process) that executes control (setting display data) to display the value of the game value on the display means (game ball number display 135).The launch trigger reduction process can be executed even during operation of the operating means that executes the counting trigger reduction process, and the display control process can execute control to display the value of the game value after it has been updated by the launch trigger reduction process and the counting trigger reduction process.This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (firing control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (firing control RAM 120c) and controls the update of the gaming value, and the control means performs a foul trigger increase process (foul ball trigger gaming ball number addition process) that can increase the gaming value in response to the occurrence of a gaming medium that has been fired by the firing means but has not reached the gaming area. The control unit 130 is capable of executing a count trigger reduction process (count trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.) that can reduce the game value by sending count information (count notification) of the game value to the gaming device in response to operation of the operating means, and a display control process (game ball number display control process) that can execute control (setting display data) to display the value of the game value on the display means (game ball number display 135).The foul trigger increase process can be executed even during operation of the operating means that executes the count trigger reduction process, and the display control process can execute control to display the value of the game value after it has been updated by the foul trigger increase process and the count trigger reduction process.This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

A 22nd configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can communicate with a gaming device (dedicated unit 170) and that allows a player to play by firing gaming media using gaming value (gaming medium data) owned by the player, and that includes an operation means (counting button 20) that can be operated by the player, a firing means (firing device 92) that fires the gaming media into the gaming area, and a control means (firing control board 120) that stores the gaming value in a storage means (firing control RAM 120c) and controls updates to the gaming value, and the control means performs a counting trigger reduction process ( The gaming device is capable of executing a counting trigger game ball number subtraction process, etc.), a loan trigger increase process (loan trigger game ball number addition process, etc.) that can increase the game value in response to input of game value loan information (loan notification) from the gaming device, and a display control process (game ball number display control process) that can execute control (display data setting) for displaying the game value value on the display means (game ball number display 135).The loan trigger increase control can be executed even during operation of the operating means that executes the counting trigger decrease process, and the display control process can execute control for displaying the game value value after it has been updated in the counting trigger decrease process.This makes it possible to optimally execute control processes related to the game value owned by the player.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may also be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order in which the gaming balls enter the first start hole 45 and the second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to remain in the time-saving gaming state or the probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games), but it may also be controlled to remain in the time-saving gaming state or the probability variable gaming state until the variable display of the normal symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times after the end of the first jackpot game, and 10,000 times after the end of the second and third jackpot games).

In addition, although the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a separate main control board 110 and frame control board 120, an integrated control board may be provided on which both the main control unit 110m and the frame control unit 120m are provided, and the integrated control board may execute the control performed by the main control board 110 and the frame control board 120, or the frame control board 120 may not be provided, and the main control unit 110 implemented on the main control board may execute the control performed by the frame control unit 120m. In this case, control processing using the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m may be performed using the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) of the main control unit 110, and control processing using the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) of the frame control unit 120m may be performed using the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) of the main control unit 110.

The gaming machine 1 of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines (controlled gaming machines) that use circulating gaming balls, but can also be used in pachinko gaming machines (general pachinko machines) that do not use circulating gaming balls. It can also be used in slot machines (general slot machines) that award a predetermined amount of medals to a player when a winning symbol stops and displays on an active line during a game using medals. It can also be used in slot machines (controlled gaming machines) that award a predetermined amount of gaming value (virtual medals) to a player when a winning symbol stops and displays on an active line during a game using gaming value (virtual medals) (satisfying the awarding conditions). It can also be used in jan-ball gaming machines and arrange-ball gaming machines.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications that are equivalent in meaning to and within the scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 17 Performance button 20 Counting button 43 General prize opening 44 General gate 45 First start opening 47 Second start opening 50 Large prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 72 Third image display device 73 Fourth image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Frame control board 120a Frame control CPU
121 Game ball count clear switch 122 Ball removal switch 123 Error release switch 125 Frame control display 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU
135 Game ball number display 170 Dedicated unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of communicating with a gaming device and allowing a player to play a game by firing a gaming medium using a gaming value owned by the player,
a launching means for launching the game medium into a game area;
a circulation means for circulating the gaming medium shot by the shot means within the gaming machine;
a first control means for storing the gaming value in a storage means and for controlling updating of the gaming value ;
A second control means for controlling effects related to a game ,
The specific information is updated according to the value of the game value granted to the player, and the progress control of the game is stopped when the specific information reaches a specific value;
The first control means
a medium discharge process for shifting to a medium discharge mode for discharging the gaming media circulated by the circulation means to the outside of the gaming machine;
a counting trigger reduction process for transmitting counting information for transferring at least a portion of the quantity of the gaming value to the gaming device and reducing the gaming value;
a launch stop control process that allows the launching means to launch the game medium and prohibits the launching means from launching the game medium;
The launch stop control process includes:
When the medium ejection process is executed, the release of the game medium is prohibited, and when the counting trigger reduction process is executed, the release of the game medium is permitted;
The second control means
The volume of the game effect sound can be adjusted in response to the adjustment operation being performed,
The game presentation can be customized in response to the customization operation being performed,
A specific notification corresponding to the stop of the game progress control can be executed,
A count notification can be executed in association with the execution of the count trigger reduction process,
A gaming machine characterized in that the customization of the counting notification is limited .